Home

User Guide - The Online Instrumentation Company

1. i i O Horizontal Bargraph Numeric Page gien P Sei User Screen 1 User Screen 2 d Mogg Y User Screen 3 More Batch Vertical trend Faceplates On Off ide sroupmame inact RE Channel Cycling Of ED Alarm Summary All Messages v All History y Trend Hi SEH bs Eg MaRS mE Gr z A mode istory Preparing History please wait SE A KSE fries 16 273 Al g Y DD gt E lt b w Gia p Numeric page 700 87 Instead of using the Root menu 1 the Up and Down arrow keys can be 487 39 used to scroll through display modes Sen 2 the left and right arrows can be used 235 68 to scroll through groups 378 99 Typical displays 0 49 see section 3 4 for full details See also section 7 if a Screen Builder option is fitted Vertical bargraph New Delete SSS me A Channel 3__ Hui channela_ 1 Pow 235 50 0 EL CH Cut Copy Paste Refresh
2. Job Search Fi d T anguage ER igure Use Summertime DST e SE B9m Start at 12 00 00 PM About Last Master comms diagnostics ES Y section 4 3 16 bech in March WI Summertime Slave 1 Furn recorder 1 Y End at 12 00 00 PM period to be Actual High Priority 2 Seconds onthe Last v Actual Medium Priority 1 Seconds Sunday v Actual Low Priority 0 125 Seconds in October v Modbus Address 1 Long Date format Slave Status Online Apply Discard Ethernet diagnostics section 4 6 5 Last Transaction Status OK y Total Requests 1308 200 EFERPINETET Bad requests 10 Upgrade section 4 6 3 Ping Status Good requests 1298 Instrument Number 8203 Ping Now Illegal function codes 01 0 Key Code WC8N 9F5E 1D41 Illegal addresses 02 O Key Code File M UN Pe SS Illegal Values 03 0 oca oabus Gilen me S Fail 4 i Remote FTP Site Y Remote Modbus Client 1 149 121 130 242 Appear only if Master Slave allure Oe ao EE Remote Modbus Client 2 Offline comms option enabled No Gateway parn 10 0 Upee Remote Modbus Client 3 Offline Gateway Target Fail 11 0 Remote Modbus Client 4 192 168 189 89 IP address remains for five Timed out requests 10 Apply Discard seconds after message d EtherNet IP Clients activity ceases after which Master Rejects 0 S Offline appears instead Retried requests 4 Unconnected Message Manager UCM
3. Figure 4 3 3b2 Trace examples for different scale types large frame Note Grid type is selected in Group configuration Grid and chart text colour is defined in Trend Foreground in System configuration section 4 6 8 Page 68 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 3 CHANNEL ALARM CONFIGURATION Cont DESCRIPTOR Allows a text string of up to 30 characters including spaces to be entered for the channel descriptor e g Turbine 2 tempA A B SWITCHING If enabled this function allows alternative Span Zone and Trace Colour values to be entered A values are used during normal operation B values are switched to by job action as described in SPANNED This box when selected allows span low and high values to be entered For example in an input range of 0 to 600 deg C it may be that the temperature range between 500 and 600 degrees is of most inter est In such a case setting span low to 500 and span high to 600 will cause the recorder to display only that part of the input range and this will fill the zone width which is selected next effectively magnifying the area of interest If A B switching is enabled a second set of span low and span high values can be entered A values are used during normal operation B values are switched to by job action as described in ZONE This allows the port
4. Figure B9a Root key menu structure HA029324 User Guide Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 335 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B9 MENU STRUCTURE Cont Archive Save Restore Config Security Network System Figure Figures Figure Figure Figure B9c B9dto BY B9k B9l m B9i le Last Archive 23 08 05 11 32 18 section 4 1 Local Local Media mediacard Y Selec Moda card or aM os Bring Archive Up To Date Archive Last Hour Archive Last Day Remote Archive Last 7 Days Last Archive 23 08 2005 10 10 46 Archive Last 31 Days Bring Archive Up To Date Archive All Archive Last Hour Suspend Archiving Archive Last Day Cancel Archive Archive Last 7 Days Archive Transfer Inactive Media Full 08 09 2006 00 34 57 Media Size 31954944 Bytes Free Space 28786688 Archive Last 31 days Archive All Bytes Cancel Archive Archive Transfer Inactive Figure B9b Archive key menu structure HA029324 User Guide Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 336 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUID
5. Archive Save Restore Security Network System High Priority interval 0 125 Seconds Figure Figure Fig B9j Figure Figure Medium priority interval 1 Seconds B B9k B9l m EC B9b 9c EE Low priority interval 2 Seconds Store diagnostics Figure B9d SE Slave 1 Remote Device 1y Channels Enable Je Views Online W i Remote Device 1 NETRE Descriptor Network Ethernet Y Bun Master Comms IP Address 149 121 30 0 Figure B9e lt Event Buttons Section 4 3 16 Modbus address H Messages Detect This Slave User Linearisations Profile Third Party rofile Baten Timeout P50 ms Maths Retry 8 Figure B9f lt Totalisers Max Block Size 124 Register Share Socket y Counters i se I Login Required W Timers Username Username Figure B9g Connections Password F Master Comms Apply L Discard Detect All Slaves Output Channels D d Writ Demand Writes Output channels iS Section 4 3 18 Section 4 3 17 Emails GE Write number 1 Write1 Y Figure B9i P Enable y EtherNet IP Server Options Figure B9h Config menu structure sheet 5 Demand Type Master Comms v Status OK Demand Write Slave 1 Furn 1 Recorder v Parameter Alarm setpoint 2 Y Point Type Channel Y Point Number y Descriptor Write 1 Source Channel 1 Y Defaulto Allow Constant Edits On Error Write Default Disable Retries Send On Power Up Y
6. 1 21314 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 143 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 Message 0141 04 02 16 31 05 Batch stopped belclause of belt failure BT 01 30 34 2F 30 34 2F 30 32 20 31 36 3A 33 31 3A 30 35 20 42 61 74 63 68 20 73 74 6F 70 70 65 64 20 62 65 63 61 75 73 65 20 6F 66 20 62 65 6C 74 20 66 61 69 6C 75 72 65 20 42 54 30 31 Space hex 20 Null 00 Extension 1 21314 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 message Space 59 null characters 20 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 HA029324 User Guide Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 271 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 2 5 TEXT MESSAGES Cont Example 3 Message of more than 60 but less than 120 characters 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
7. Start now Descriptor Timer 1 Self start v Date AnyY Month Anyy These fields appear Hour Midnight Y only if Self start is o enabled Minute AnyY Second Any Duration 60 Seconds Repeat after 0 Seconds Job Number 1 Select Job number Select Job Category No Action Y category Apply Discard Figure 4 3 14 Typical timer configuration page Page 137 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 14 TIMERS Cont Configurable parameters Timer number Enable Remaining Repeatin Reset now Start now Descriptor Self Start Duration Repeat after Allows a specific timer to be selected for configuration Allows the user to enable disable the selected timer This is a dynamic display showing the time remaining in hours minutes seconds for mat For repeat timers shows the time remaining before the repeat is initiated Display is 00 00 00 whilst timer is counting down Allows a running timer to be reset to 00 00 00 Allows the operator to initiate the timer Allows a descriptor to be entered for the timer If enabled this causes date and time selection fields to appear as shown in figure 4 3 14 above Date allows a day number to be selected from a picklist of 1 to N and Any where N is the maximum number of days in the selected month Month allows a mont
8. Edit level Basic Y Component info on screen Quick entry to edit Use Last Properties Positioning Grid Positioning Tip Figure 7 2 3a Component properties and User screen options pages KEY DESCRIPTIONS UPPER KEYS Add Calls the Component selection list Del Deletes after confirmation the component in the Identifier field except the Main pane which cannot be deleted Copy Used to copy the current component to the pasteboard Greyed for Main as this cannot be Copied Paste Used to paste the copied component to the screen The copied item is placed 1 to the right of and 1 below the source component Greyed until a component Copy action has taken place User Guide HA029324 Page 242 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 2 3 THE PROPERTIES PAGE Cont KEY DESCRIPTIONS LOWER KEYS Which keys appear at the bottom of the properties page depends on whether the user screen is being viewed at the recorder s user interface or via Bridge software Figure 7 2 3b show the recorder key arrangement figure 7 2 3c the Bridge keys The key descriptions below are in alphabetical order rather than in left right appearance order oto Canvas Save Close Discard New More zc Copy Screen Move Screen More More pene Figure 7 2 3b Recorder key arrangement oto Canvas S
9. 254 GSAT s A NIMM 168 EISE 66 SNTP SE Ke cita aia 66 A AS 202 Scaling zi X QUUD tie DICAT a 150 154 166 Instrumental Mii ias 11 Scientific display mets 69 Serger enable Dus sr AOS 202 Scope sasencnest2azae s 92 c E EE 145 148 Display modes aa 74 Software version 215 User Guide HA029324 Page 362 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE S Cont S Cont Source SYNTAX E 175 Demand o CN 164 System Desciipton valle tasaciones 86 A ha aa 205 EE 82 A 346 Source SONS Crucis nie rere eer id aos 83 Se ene 324 See 84 A TT 150 152 T sqa Eer 221 EE 222 ET Bee 69 land 222 MG calco Mii iia 124 Configuration cnn 69 T C cal temp Fio S 124 Span High Low Termination and biassing sss 139 EtherNet IP a I nn anna 176 RR EE 168 171 249 SpecialimMd Eege 322 Messages Modbus sassa 271 Specification Save ana Restore ua as uet e qipa ta 50 Battery noria med eme doi titan 319 NN 214 347 Recorder general cnn 318 aTe EN a a 27 EE 319 EE 237 S rialcomims DOAN DE 319 There appears to be no free disk space 229 237 Ze 320 THERMO COU EE 124 Specific gas constant 104 106 CalcorFection u ga aasan bre eiie ed 124 Specified descriptor value A Bo E aaa 87 Threshold EE 71 Speed Time I f el Oreiro boro 63 and date configuration Werer een 346 Speed interval B job o oo 222 C
10. Apply Cancel Figure 4 4 5 Change password TROUBLE SHOOTING Ifthe change password procedure fails 1 Check that the Active Directory server instrument alarm is inactive bection3 1 3 2 Check that the connection with the Active Directory server has TLS security enabled ection 4 5 1 3 Check that the new password s length complexity history and minimum password age match the criteria laid down in the Active Directory password policy configuration password length must also comply with the minimum password length configured in the security menu bection 4 4 2 Page 197 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 4 6 Clear Password Cache This menu item appears only for units fitted with the Security Manager option and only for users with Full Security access section 4 4 1 USER PASSWORD AUTHENTICATION lf the user has a domain configured then when an attempt is made to log in the password entered by the user is authenticated by the Active Directory server see Network Address menu description In other words the recorder attempts to do an LDAP bind with the configured Active Directory server and if the bind is successful the user is logged in Lightweight Directory Access Protocol PASSWORD CACHE Once a password has been authenticated it is added to a list of up to 100 valid passwords the Password cache held in the recorder This means that
11. 87 KE 70 States 175 Illustrations au es uusha is 72 DER eat 175 Allow losa kanan tte ette vet b aka betas 352 Constant dits iaa 164 uha liar E pakasqa ayay ei 216 WED SERV EM eec epar ot Eo REO 190 Aihtfil s uu uu unan igalis edid nni ie 176 JW C E M 254 Amount RofG alarms cce te or datos 71 A e EE 84 About 215 347 EE m tte Key Ethernet IP COMO ies eses 174 Absolute Tote ben tret eee eite 70 Arc A B Switching ene 61 69 A E PE EU 248 Access Definitiva asis 263 Configuration menu n 344 Fetal ccs ite IO 248 A m 186 Wick 248 TO configuration trt arenes 26 Archive Wen 187 CSS 47 Le atipa nani 13 A r hivefailedinstrumentalarim tadas 10 ACK Message etie RU E rhe a 63 Archivcmecdia altas 83 Acknowledge Configuration iaa n eti qiiae 77 Alain UTR 224 A U 339 Alarms A RS 15 Control permission PRAE PU 188 Group job 224 SE EE 80 81 e a 188 db 224 Point eben 224 s E e mre 46 All Alarms job emmmer 224 A s 336 Action Demand Writes permission 190 Manual IBitiati OD cada 46 Active Directory Toti aii 48 era ET 203 Period selection local 78 Deet a 187 203 SUS RE 47 f Setup EIE 198 Tomecdiaenable ss 63 Active Directory Server error 10 To Remotez uineeenqaemenim anime a 79 Adaptive recording iei eene permets 60 o hel 63 Add EE 139 Key DO SS d 242 CO IN 332 Maths function saa TR ALVGISIONS geesde dee 215 Address Audible warnings aaa nayes
12. HA029324 Page 136 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 14 Timers INTRODUCTION This feature supplies 12 count down timers which can be used for general timing purposes The timers can be either one shot or repeating and can be initiated in the following ways 1 directly by the operator from the configuration page if access permission is granted by job action see section 4 7 2 3 ata predefined time date 4 every time period where the time period can be configured to be anything from 1 second to 1 year For example setting seconds to 30 and leaving all other fields Any the timer will start every minute on the half minute Setting seconds to 30 and minutes to 0 will cause the timer to start at 30 seconds past each hour Note Times are not adjusted for Daylight Saving changes Thus ifthe timer is set to trigger on a daily weekly etc basis then during Summer Time the trigger will occur an hour late i e at 01 00 hrs instead of at midnight The full range of jobs is available as described in fection 4 Timer Active is defined as an internal event Gection 43 4 trigger CONFIGURATION Figure 4 3 14 shows a typical timer configuration display The page is accessed from the Root menu Op erator Config menu Timer number 1 Timer 1 Y Select timer Enable v Remaining 00 00 00 Repeat in 100 00 00 Reset now
13. Apply Discard Output Channel Number 1 Output 1 Y Enable Output Type Slave Parameter Scaling Scale Low Scale High Point Type Point Number Process Value Descriptor Source Default On Error Write Default V Master Commsy 1 Furn Recorder 2 y Comms Channelv High Low 0 Scaling items appear only HO for some slave types Channel 1 Medium Priorityy Output 1 1 Channel 4v B M Apply Discard Detect All Slaves User Guide Page 342 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B9 MENU STRUCTURE Cont Section 4 3 19 Archive Save Restore Security Network System Figure Figure Fig B9j Figure Figure B9b B9c B9k B9 m Instrument i Groups Figure B9d Channels Views Archive Events Figure B9e Event Buttons Report 1 Report 1_ y M Descriptor Report 1 ES Number of Fields 6 v User Linearisations Field 1 Type Date amp Time v Batch Style Normal Y Field 2 Type Text Y Maths Text i Totali Figure B9f BES Reports Style Bold v Counters Section 4 3 20 i Trial Mode DisabledY Field 3 Type Process Value y Timers Point Channel 1 vj Trial Time Remaining 30 day s a e Figure B9g Connections SVE a Fitted channels 0 Y Field 4 Type Batch Field 1 e Virtual channels 36 V Al Style Banner y Figure B9h Output Channels Field
14. 3 1 4 Summary menu This pop up display appears if the Alarm Indication area at the top of the display is touched Figure 3 1 4 shows the display ye Touch Alarm area Es e g channel alarm symbol Instrument Alarm Summary Ack all Alarms Alarm Summary Batch Summary Go to Batch Summary description Message Log Goto Message Log description Remove Media Goto description Figure 3 1 4a Summary pop up menu INSTRUMENT ALARM SUMMARY Maths Channel Failure Printer Error Ok Figure 3 1 4b Typical Instrument alarm summary display This contains a list ofthe currently active instrument alarms For a list of possible alarms and their defini tions see above ACK ALL ALARMS Confirm acknowledge of alarms Yes No Figure 3 1 4c Ack all Alarms display Yes confirms all active unconfirmed alarms This page can also be displayed by touching an alarm in the alarm summary page described below HA029324 Page 13 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 1 4 SUMMARY MENU Cont ALARM SUMMARY PAGE Asshownin figure 3 1 4d below the alarm summary page contains the following information for the current group 1 Alarm identifier This appears as a point ID followed by the relevant alarm number in parentheses For example Alarm 1 on maths channel would appear as D 1 Maths derived c
15. Register Length P PHH Notes 1 For maths totalisers and counters see the relevant option description 2 If an alarm s Setpoint Source section 4 3 3 is set to anything other than Constant the value re turned will be the previously configured constant value HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 User Guide Page 279 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 2 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA Cont CHANNEL 5 Parameter name Ch5 Span high Ch5 Span low Ch5 Zone high Ch5 Zone low Ch5 PV type Ch5 Decimal places Ch5 Colour Ch5 Units Spare Ch5 Open string Spare Ch5 Close string Spare Ch5 Descriptor Spare Ch5 No of alarms Ch5 PV format Spare Ch5 Alarm 1 enable Ch5 Alarm 1 type Ch5 Alarm 1 setpoint Spare Ch5 Alarm 2 enable Ch5 Alarm 2 type Ch5 Alarm 2 setpoint Spare Ch5 Alarm 3 enable Ch5 Alarm 3 type Ch5 Alarm 3 setpoint Spare Ch5 Alarm 4 enable Ch5 Alarm 4 type Ch5 Alarm 4 setpoint Spare Description Upper span value display full scale Lower span value display zero Zone high value two decimal places Zone low value two decimal places Input type 1 Analogue input 3 Totaliser 2 Maths 4 Counter Number of decimal places 0 to 9 used by all scaled parameters except where stated Channel colour 0 to 55 See Annex B for definitions Units string up to five characters Open Digital Input string up to eight chara
16. PIOMSSEA adAjoy piowssed JEpuosas 001 UI jueAe IIn3 LIPON skeq 81 ee noedeo eipey ejqeaoway r609rZr oe 9ZIS Spaut m NH PIPIN UO IA feulg yeu ai eipew A eUN Bpan o AIU91V LAnmszepeu gem A sBulyas 201 MOUS skeg s6 9z uoneung L dno16 os pues 1s luouS an S3 66 9ZIS yse 4 snowAuouelaweu uiBo repuodas o o o o 3s0y jowa repuodas pieosiq Aiddv A uonov on 108618 A 1 sequinn qof j so eiqeu3 A 1 46quinN uue v 9znojo5 subig jeuioeq xeW oueunwN eUulJ04j Ad p4oMssed d 19H paomssed JBUIId snowAuoue auweu uiBo Je ud 0 0 0 0 JsOU loui81 Je Id dno19 19p10991 lyyed ajouay A Aug jeuu0J l 3 d A SUON BJOWSY 0 AIU91V suyas ajoway MOUS I d 00L SE A rwy uoisseJduio2 m SE K 0 MO7 9uoz pauuedg L dno19 JO SIH pues 1s uousS aw Sz 66 zIS use 3 BuiuollwWs g v vduj l uiqin1 Jo1duoseg A suon edit ajeos 0 19SHO pejeos a HO ed 1ndu Sv 91 80 90 70 70 2000 s SNILA A vduejeumgni L jequinN jeuueyD A reuuoN uoiss iduoo ect uono s ES AMY Y pieosiq iddy pueosiq A ddy A uonov oN A106929 A 1 1equinN gor Llu a3 io1diu9s q A z esos ON esuas z eoJnos A puy Joyesado A penos su s eoJnos o su i5s asp e
17. in v e n SH s Eurotherm 6100 6180 XIO User Guide 6100 6180XIO Distributed graphic recorder Versions 5 1 and later HA029324 5 October 2010 Invensyse EUROTHERMe Declaration of Conformity Manufacturer s name Eurotherm Limited Manufacturer s address Faraday Close Worthing West Sussex BN13 3PL United Kingdom Product type Distributed graphic recorder Models 6100XIO Status level A1 and above 6180XIO Status level A1 and above Safety specification EN61010 1 2001 EMC emissions specification EN61326 1 1997 Class A including amendments A1 A2 and A3 EMC immunity specification EN61326 1 1997 Industrial locations including amendments A1 A2 and A3 Eurotherm Limited hereby declares that the above products conform to the safety and EMC specifications listed Eurotherm Limited further declares that the above products comply with the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC amended by 93 68 EEC and also with the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC Signed LUE d avis Dated 7 st 2006 Signed for and on behalf of Eurotherm Limited William Davis General Manager 1A249986U720 Issue 1 Aug 06 CN22650 2009 Eurotherm Limited All rights are strictly reserved No part of this document may be reproduced modified or transmitted in any form by any means nor may it be stored in a retrieval system other than for the purpose to act as an aid in operating the equipment t
18. Alarm 4 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 4 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Scaled Scaled Scaled Scaled Enum Uint16 Enum String_5 String_8 String_8 String_20 Uint16 Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Start Addr Hex Dec 011D 285 011E 286 011F 287 0120 288 0121 289 0122 290 0123 291 0124 292 0127 295 0129 297 012D 301 0131 305 0135 309 0139 313 0143 323 014D 333 014E 334 014F 335 018B 395 018C 396 018D 397 018E 398 0198 408 0199 409 019A 410 019B 411 01A5 421 0146 422 01A7 423 DIAS 424 01B2 434 01B3 435 01B4 436 01B5 437 Register Length P PHH ech s e Notes 1 For maths totalisers and counters see the relevant option description 2 If an alarm s Setpoint Source section 4 3 3 is set to anything other than Constant the value re turned will be the previously configured constant value HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 User Guide Page 277 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4
19. Page 215 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 6 9 ABOUT Cont SECURITY REVISION Whenever a change is made to an item within the Security menus the Security revision is incremented Security Revision is printed on the chart at power up and if either ofthe Auditor options or if the Batch option is fitted Security Revision is included in the messages associated with these options See notes 1 and 2 below Notes 1 Security Revision can be used as an input to one or more maths channels If such a maths chan nel is included in one or more groups the revision number can be determined for any time date when mode is invoked for the group s in question See bection 4 3 11 for maths option details 2 If Centralised Security is enabled the Security Revision is in a different format e g 15 001 see section 4 4 2 SUPPORT FILE If the unitis not performing as it should e g it resets itself unexpectedly the Support File key allows the user to save critical system files into a single file Supportlnfo uhq for despatch to the manufacturer for analysis This file may be saved to the instrument s Compact Flash card or using Bridge Full software to a remote PC For security reasons this file cannot be viewed by anyone other than the manufacturer or his agents Once the save operation is complete a Support message appears on the screen giving details of where
20. RECORDER DATA ACQUISITION UNIT CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS Channel Number 1 Read 1 Y 4 Copies descriptor entry Value 0 4670 Unadjusted Input Type Master Comms Slave 1 Furn 1 Recorder y Select required slave Digital Parameter Process Value ve Select required slave parameter type Scaling None Y Appears only for some slave types Point Type Channel y Select Required Slave parameter point Point Number 11 ANM ge Select iteration rate for Process Value Medium Priority Y parameter update PV Format Numeric Y Span Low 0 Units Span High 1 Units Zone Low 0 Zone High 100 Max Decimal Digits EN Colour MM Units Units Descriptor Alarm Number E Discard Figure 4 3 16e Channel configuration page Typical Recorder Page 149 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 16 MASTER COMMS Cont RECORDER DAQ CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS Cont TYPICAL RECORDER PARAMETERS The following parameters may be accessible from a recorder or data acquisition unit depending on model number Figure 4 3 16e above refers Notes 1 Items such as Scale Zone and descriptor may be editable white background or not grey back ground depending on model 2 This description includes only those items which are unique to input channels with Input Type Master Comms For other items please
21. tered A values are used during normal operation B values are switched to by job action as described in The remaining configuration items are identical with the relevant items in Input Channel configuration section 4 3 3 except that Log Linear scale type is not available For job information see hasten dd Note Selecting High compression in may cause very high totaliser values to be displayed incorrectly by the recorder and held incorrectly in the history file This problem may be solved by moving the relevant point to a group using Normal compression or by re scal ing the totaliser to read for example TeraWatt hours instead of Megawatt hours Page 129 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 12 Cont TOTALISER MODBUS ADDRESSING The following table gives addresses for totaliser 1 configuration data Generally Totaliser N parameter address totaliser 1 parameter address 162 N 1 decimal For full details of the Modbus TCP implementation see fection 8 TOTALISER CONFIGURATION DATA TOTALISER 1 Parameter name Span high Span low Zone high Zone low PV type Decimal places Colour Units Spare Open string Spare Close string Spare Descriptor Spare No of alarms PV format Spare Alarm 1 enable Alarm 1 type Description Upper span value display full scale Lower span value display zero Zone high value two decimal
22. 0 000 ccs cece han 165 4319 ERA Sic a ti de dE AG a e Cer on PAR 167 E MAIL CONFIGURATION eee A SN E a e e aor 167 CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS 000 c cece han 168 E MAILDETAILS ccoo ea neh cial ecos 169 OPERATION EE 170 4 3 20 Reports configuration veria e e 171 REPORT coincido pais 171 DESCRIPTOR eege EE 171 NUMBER OF FIELDS u sirasqa as THER e e ue der Od sqa a 171 EIER D YPE eor hee qe ded OP S 171 SIE ia Part ete RUE dc Gande A ORNA 172 POINT usaha apta ya nguy uama ayu OT TERES 172 BINE EEED EE 172 4 3 21 Ethernet IP M OptlOFi uy p ERE Nube EE RHENO AER EAE 173 Oe TEE 173 CONFIGURATION L Pl deca Sad 174 TABLE ENTRY ensenada daa dare ta ira ada 175 CONFIGURING APCE 177 43 22 TEEN 183 RGTR Te TEEN 183 VIRTUAL CHANNEL 184 SIMULATION OPTION sassa ra 184 HA029324 User Guide Issue 5 Oct 10 Page v 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE LIST OF CONTENTS CONT Section NEW PASSWORD RETYPE PASSWORD CONNECT FROM REMQNE 5 3 onset epit ape de ses AER REMOTE USER NAME REMOTE PASSWORD LOGIN DISABLED siepe opite tare v ER Se ERE EY P CUN YR EDIT OWN PASSWORD IRR pee reb UHR need ds CHANGE ALARM SETPOINTS ANNE RR ACKNOWLEDGE AARM EDIT MATHS CONSTANT zer u uu uu ARR XA oe BEER PRESET TOTAEISERS costeras ateo RR dnt et PRESET COUNTERS cursa o eee re c a decns STARTARESET TIMERS t uu wipe Ae bep a oU eet ie SETCEOC EES ARCHIVING CONTROL eg
23. 4 Group faceplates are not displayed in trend history mode 5 Operation of the Root Goto View Message Log key fection 3 2 1 when in history mode dis plays a message log page containing messages which occurred at or near the selected cursor time 6 With A B switching selected traces are displayed with the A or B span zone colour settings etc obtaining at the cursor time See sections 1 3 2 h 3 and BJ for more details of A B switching To enter trend history mode the option key can be used as shown for vertical trend mode in B 4 1b or the trace area of the screen can be continuously touched until the screen blanks prior to re drawing A Preparing History please wait message appears whilst the re drawing calculation is taking place Although tracing stops whilst trace history mode is active no data is lost Process Variable values are saved in the recorder memory Alarms are still scanned for and any associated action taken The trend history display is similar to the real time trend display but with a dark background and with the addition of a slider control and arrow keys for selecting that part of trend history which is to be displayed The controls are used as follows 1 Touching an arrow key causes the trace history to move an incremental amount 2 Holding an arrow key continuously causes continuous movement 3 Touching and dragging the slider whilst observing the time date display allows the user to
24. Distil temp Serial Numt 9921 Software V4 0 Timezone GMT al 2 Mac Addr 00 AB 8D 80 26 C0 Language en Country GB 3 Group Nar Tank Tem 4 Tank1 Ten Low 0 High 40 C 5 Tank1 Ten Low 0 High 40 C 6 Tanki Ten Low 0 High 40 Deg C details 7 Tank2 Ten Low 0 High 40 Deg C 8 Tank2 Ten Low 0 High 40 Deg C 9 Tank2 Ten Low 0 High 40 Deg C 10 Difference Low 20 High 20 Deg C 14 09 44 0 23 53 23 70 23 88 30 6458 29 0673 29 9083 6 13 15 09 49 0 23 57 23 68 23 91 30 0945 28 8936 29 9083 5 91 16 09 54 0 23 50 23 69 23 99 31 1437 29 4387 30 0235 6 47 17 09 5 4 0 11 07 06 14 09 54 Alarm off 18 End slve 19 I 5 20 Right click then Include messages 21 Format cells 22 Select Time as number category 23 Select time date Type as required 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 al 34 l lt p M Tank Temps 8026C026000002A9 ID ol Ready I 1 Jesi jn rn in 11 Date TimeTank1 TenTank1 TenTank1 TenTank2 TenTank2 TenTank2 Ten Difference Includ I 12 Es C DegC DegC DegC DegC DegC headin S m 13 09 39 0 23 49 23 74 24 01 31 2334 29 7693 30 0983 6 61 g include values values Figure 4 3 5d CSV data example FTP FILE FORMAT The above description for Media file format also applies to Remote setting HA029324 Page 81 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 1 80MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 6 Event configuration A number of internal and triggers are available for use i
25. Page 88 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 9 User Linearisation Tables Note The User Linearisation configuration menu appears for all versions of the recorder but not every version has a Lin Type field in Channel configuration allowing such tables to be selected for use The Channel configuration item Lin Type includes 12 linearisation tables called initially UserLin1 to UserLin12 This User Linearisation part of the instrument configuration allows the user to enter a linearisa tion look up table of between two and 66 pairs of points The pairs of points are entered as X1Y1 X2Y2 XnYn where n is the specified number of points X1 to Xn represent the inputs to the function Y1 to Yn represent the corresponding outputs from the function Notes 1 Each Y value must be unique i e there cannot be more than one X value with the same Y value assigned to it 2 Each X value other than the first must be greater than the previous one Each Y value other than the first must be greater than the previous one 4 To specify units other than temperature units the channel facility must be used The scale low high values should be set to be the same as the range low high values and the re quired units entered 99 The import export Linearisation tables feature described in Save Restore section 4 2 offers an alterna tive way of entering li
26. Read only Read only Read Write Access See note Read only Start Addr Hex Dec F8DB 63707 F8DD 63709 F8DE 63710 Start Addr Hex Dec F8DF 63711 F8E1 63713 Register Length Register Length 3 Under range 8 No data 4 Hardware error Alarm information Bit 0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Read only Bit 1 O No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Read Write Bit 3 Spare Bit4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Bit5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7 Spare Bit8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Bit9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11 Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15 Spare Channel 8 alarms F8E2 63714 Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Note PV access is Read Write for any point configured with Slave Comms as its Type or Function Otherwise PV access is Read only User Guide Page 310 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 8 IEEE AREA CHANNEL RUN TIME DATA Cont CHANNEL 9 Parameter name Channel 9 value Channel 9 status Chan
27. This allows a number of pairs of points to be entered which if valid will then be joined by straight lines The first and last points are automatically joined by the recorder The shape drawn in the specified foreground colour with the specified line width can be filled with the specified background colour Note When working in percentage units it should be remembered that vertical percentage units are only 2 3 the size of horizontal percentage units this affecting the appearance of the drawn item Example To draw a left pointing solid arrow positioned with its point at the centre of the screen Access the component page as described in select polygon closed area and press Ok In the properties page carry out the following configuration units X position 50 Y position 50 Background colour 22 Foreground colour 30 Draw edge Yes Fill area Yes X points 0 10 10 30 30 10 10 Y points 0 15 5 5 5 5 15 Press Apply then Close to produce a dark green arrow with pale green outline as depicted in figure 7 4 17 below F 14 22 15 Point 2 X 10 y 15 Point 3 X 10 y 5 Point 4 X 30 y 5 Point 1 N OF W 0 Point 5 Point 6 X 30 y 5 X 10 y 5 Point 7 X 10 y 15 Figure 7 4 17 Polygon example HA029324 User Guide Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 261 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 4 18 Oval Similar to an arc Section 7 4 20 with an arc ang
28. Uint16 Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled 007B 123 007C 124 007D 125 007E 126 007F 127 Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only 0080 128 0081 129 0082 130 0085 133 0087 135 008B 139 008F 143 0093 147 0097 151 00A1 161 00AB 171 00AC 172 Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only 00AD 173 Read only 00E9 233 Read only OOEA 234 Read Write OOEB 235 OOEC 236 OOF6 246 00F7 247 OOF8 248 OOF9 249 0103 259 0104 260 0105 261 0106 262 0110 272 0111 273 0112 274 0113 275 Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Start Addr Hex Dec Register Length P P P P _ oo gt Notes 1 For maths totalisers and counters see the relevant option description 2 If an alarm s Setpoint Source section 4 3 3 is set to anything other than Constant the value re turned will be the previously configured constant value User Guide Page 276 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 2 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA Cont CHANNEL 2 Parameter name Ch2 Span high Ch2 Span low Ch2 Zone high Ch2 Zone low Ch2 PV type Ch2 Decimal places Ch2 Colour Ch2 Units Spare Ch2 Open string
29. 00 00 00 00 00 17 01 03 14 43 68 61 Transaction Transaction Protocol Protocol Always 00 Number of Recorder Modbus Byte count ASCII ASCII ASCII identifier identifier identifier identifier bytes fol Modbus function Noofreg C Hex h Hex a Hex lowing hex address code hex Ze 2 Byte 12 Byte 13 Byte 14 Byte 15 Byte 16 Byte 17 Byte 18 Byte 19 Byte 20 Byte 21 Byte 22 Byte 23 6E 6E 65 6C 20 35 20 44 65 73 63 72 ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII n Hex n Hex e Hex Hex Space Hex 5 Hex Ispace Hex D Hex e Hex s Hex c Hex r Hex Byte 24 Byte 25 Byte 26 Byte 27 Byte 28 69 70 74 6F 72 ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII i Hex p Hex t Hex o Hex r Hex Figure 8 5 1b Function code 03 response example EXCEPTION RESPONSES Byte 0 Function code 83 hex i e Hex 80 function code Byte 1 Exception code 01 Illegal function or 02 Invalid data address User Guide HA029324 Page 314 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 5 2 Function code 04 This is identical with function code 03 except that 04 must be used as the function code and the exception response Function code is 84 hex not 83 8 5 3 Function code 06 REQUEST This is used to write a value to a single register The bytes after the 7 byte prefix described in fection 8 5 above are Function code 06
30. 1 703 724 7301 E mail info eurotherm us invensys com ED60 Invensys Eurotherm the Invensys Eurotherm logo Chessell EurothermSuite Mini8 EPower Eycon Eyris and Wonderware are trademarks of Invensys plc its subsidiaries and affiliates All other brands may be trademarks of their respective owners All rights are strictly reserved No part of this document may be reproduced modified or transmitted in any form by any means neither may it be stored in a retrieval system other than for the purpose to act as an aid in operating the equipment to which the document relates without the prior written permission of Invensys Eurotherm Linited Invensys Eurotherm Limited pursues a policy of continuous development and product improvement The specifications in this document may therefore be changed without notice The information in this document is given in good faith but is intended for guidance only Invensys Eurotherm Limited will accept no responsibility for any losses arising from errors in this document Represented by invens s Eurotherm HA029324 5 CN26793
31. 2 If an alarm s Setpoint Source section 4 3 3 is set to anything other than Constant the value re turned will be the previously configured constant value HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 User Guide Page 285 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 2 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA Cont CHANNEL 11 Parameter name Ch11 Span high Ch11 Span low Ch11 Zone high Ch11 Zone low Ch11 PV type Ch11 Decimal places Ch11 Colour Ch11 Units Spare Ch11 Open string Spare Ch11 Close string Spare Ch11 Descriptor Spare Ch11 No of alarms Ch11 PV format Spare Ch11 Alarm 1 enable Ch11 Alarm 1 type Ch11 Alarm 1 setpoint Spare Ch11 Alarm 2 enable Ch11 Alarm 2 type Ch11 Alarm 2 setpoint Spare Ch11 Alarm 3 enable Ch11 Alarm 3 type Ch11 Alarm 3 setpoint Spare Ch11 Alarm 4 enable Ch11 Alarm 4 type Ch11 Alarm 4 setpoint Spare Description Upper span value display full scale Lower span value display zero Zone high value two decimal places Zone low value two decimal places Input type 1 Analogue input 3 Totaliser 2 Maths 4 Counter Number of decimal places 0 to 9 used by all scaled parameters except where stated Channel colour 0 to 55 See Annex 5 for definitions Units string up to five characters Open Digital Input string up to eight characters Closed Digital Input string up to eight characters Channel descriptor up to 20 characters Number
32. 7 4 COMPONENT DEFINITIONS This section defines all the available components listed in table 7 2 2lin terms of their parameters The com ponents occur in the order in which they appear in the list 7 4 1 Group Vertical Horizontal Trend This produces a display which mimics a recorder chart for a selected group All the functions e g trend his tory described in sections BA and are included The following unique parameters fully described in table 7 3 2 are available for configuration Background colour Message Colour Time Marker Colour Grid Line Colour Faceplates location Time Marker Interval Vertical Grid Total Horizontal Grid Total Trend Padding Channel cycle time Display Messages Display Bargraph Display Pens Horizontal Faceplate Allows the chart to be drawn in the selected colour The colour of messages printed on the Chart The colour of time date printed on the Chart The colour of the Chart grid lines Allows group faceplates to be enabled disabled and when enabled allows the position of the faceplates to be defined These group faceplates are additional to the current channel faceplate which always appears above the chart unless it has been disabled under Horizontal faceplate below Selects the number of horizontal chart lines between successive time markers Total number of vertical chart divisions Total number of horizontal chart divisions Sets thickness of traces Allows
33. Bit0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Read only Bit 1 0 No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Read Write Bit 3 Spare Bit 4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Bit5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7 Spare Bit8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Bit9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11 Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15 Spare Ch10 Alarms ATF6 41462 Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Note PV access is Read Write for any point configured with Slave Comms as its Type or Function Otherwise PV access is Read only User Guide Page 292 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 3 CHANNEL RUN TIME DATA Cont CHANNEL 11 Parameter name Ch11 value Ch11 status Ch11 Alarms CHANNEL 12 Parameter name Ch12 value Ch12 status Description Current process value PV Channel status 0 Good PV 1 Channel off 2 Over range 3 Under range 4 Hardware error Alarm information Bit 0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Bit 1 O No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required
34. Channel status 0 Good PV 1 Channel off 2 Over range 5 Ranging error 6 Overflow 7 Bad PV Uint16 Scaled Enum See note Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Access See note Read only Start Addr Hex Dec A1E5 41445 A1E6 41446 A1E7 41447 Start Addr Hex Dec A1E8 41448 ATE9 41449 Register Length Register Length 3 Under range 8 No data 4 Hardware error Alarm information Bit 0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Read only Bit 1 0 No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Read Write Bit 3 Spare Bit4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Bit5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7 Spare Bit8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Bit9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11 Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15 Spare Ch6 Alarms ATEA 41450 Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Note PV access is Read Write for any point configured with Slave Comms as its Type or Function Ot
35. Figure 4 3 18a shows a typical configuration page for writing to a recorder Figure 4 3 18b shows the Edit Constant page Figure 4 3 18c shows a configuration page for the case where the destination is defined as a register location WRITING TO A KNOWN DEVICE Figure 4 3 18a shows the configuration page for writing a value from the master unit to a known slave unit Write number 1 Write_1 Wet PP 5 be configured Enable y Demand Type Master Comms v 4 Conms or Of Status OK Demand Write Slave 1 Fum 1 Recorder v t as destination Parameter Alarm setpoint 2 Y amp i5 bs witonio Point Type MUTA Select destination Point Number 1 Descriptor Write 1 Source Constant Y Default o lt q Enter default value Allows user to edit the constant prior Allow Constant Edits Y lt to write if Source constant 1 4 If enabled the default value is written should On Error Write Default the selected source be in an Error state Disable Retries 4 If enabled the write is attempted only once Send On Power Up lt write is triggered when the unit powers up Apply Discard Figure 4 3 18a Typical Demand write configuration page Page 163 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 18 DEMAND WRITES Cont CONFIGURABLE ITEMS Write number Allows the user to select the D
36. For alllevels except Logged Out This allows any one or more ofthe access levels to be removed from the Access when picklist Note This feature should be used with discretion or the situation might arise in which the record er cannot be logged onto either at a particular access level or at all It is recommended that at least one user with Engineer level access is retained with login enabled or it may become neces sary to return the recorder to the manufacturer orto arrange for a service visit Auditor option notes 1 Ifthe Auditor 21CFR11 option is fitted and the number of Password Retries is exceeded then the relevant login is disabled A user with Engineer level access can re enable the login 2 Ifthe Auditor 21CFR11 option is fitted and the Password Expire time has been exceeded all logins are disabled In order to reconfigure the recorder it is necessary to use the Service password please contact the recorder supplier or the nearest service centre for advice EDIT OWN PASSWORD Allows each user with this permission enabled to edit his her password CHANGE ALARM SETPOINTS Allows each user with this permission enabled to edit alarm parameters under Configuration Channel ACKNOWLEDGE ALARMS Allows each user with this permssion enabled to acknowledge alarms section 3 1 4 EDIT MATHS CONSTANT For recorders fitted with the Maths option only If one or more maths channels are configured with func tion C
37. Include job data Copy To 2 Channel 2 O 5 Channel 5 Section All Sections Y section 4 6 7 Job Category Totaliser M Job Action Preset M Customise section 4 6 8 Desktop 54 Data Entry Background 55 Selection P7 Fixed Text MN Active Text MN Disabled Text BEES Title Bar Background W Trend Foreground NNI Trend Background 65 History Foreground 62 History Background MN Font set Auto Y Default Apply H Discard Search Now Figure B2m System key menu structure sheet 2 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 User Guide Page 347 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE This page is deliberately left blank User Guide HA029324 Page 348 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE ANNEX C WEB SERVER DETAILS C1 INTRODUCTION This feature allows a user limited Read Only access to the recorder from a remote PC by 1 Opening a standard internet browser 2 Typing in the IP address of the recorder in the form http XxXX XXX XXX xxx or the Local host name http Local host IP address and Local host are described in of this manual 3 Entering the correct Remote user name and Remote password as set up in the Security Access menu described in fection 4 4 1 If all the entries are correct the Web Server home page appears the top part of which is shown in figure C1 b
38. L Q Ay ISUUEUO L L 1ndinoj A JUOLIH uunip lN H ajeuueuo 001 Y Amo 40H Wauuguc swwog jnejeg aUM 4043 UO ynejeq oinos Joiduoseq en eA sseooJg JequinN JUIO 4 edf 1lulOd uBiH aeos NOT e5S Buijeos JejoureJed lA ow erg Sd L L pied MSPIe Jo JequinN uodeu J01dujoseg la uodeg 1 lHHod H y uonoss suodey suondo 1 M dl 19N 9413 suoday sews sayum pueuieq 27 y UONDAS suondo einBuuoooiny H pieosig y Addy A pelqeu3 A p lqeua idi e e In AP9 qesig gt v 2 s a I Ei mls O N Nn E T 2 im QUA Ea P gt gt e a e s Aep 08 J M dI 19N419U13 Ovqoisv uonelnus Sauer SWIWOD J9ISEN 19497 eBpug 1J p ing u ios JOHpny JoBeuey junoas yojeg sdnoip si junoo SJeSI e1O L Su sjauueyo enulA sjeuueyo Don Bulureway au eu pol euL S101u3 MOUS 91qe1 ynejeq pJezIM preosig Sch Ad OO L N Ad pjeuueu5 y Indu Uz ep uon es adeyauuey gandul dl 2N434Y adzyauueyd z ynduy d jjeuueu5 ynduy ane S lt a euueuo 1ndino quan 48AjS A sdu GPL O I z Japuooay uy L A A 1ndinO L adh 1ndino lqeu3g J quinN auueyo 1ndinO Ley uono s sjouueya indino 10 swa 31440 snoad
39. Main Menu Option boards Input boards Figure B1 6 Diag Summary small frame recorder large frame similar B1 6 1 MAC Address Each instrument is allocated a unique hex address as a part ofthe manufacturing process The display at the top left of the display screen shows the final 6 characters of this address The full address can be found in the System Summary display described above or in the Network Name display described in section 4 5 1 B1 6 2 Software version number This shows the version number of the software fitted to the recorder User Guide HA029324 Page 324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B1 6 3 Serial 1 Serial 2 Touching one ofthese keys performs a loopback test on the relevant Serial port In order for the test to be successful the port under test must be set to 5 wire working section 2 2 2 and an RJ45 connector with pins 1 and 7 shorted together and pins 2 and 8 shorted together must be inserted into the relevant serial port The test will result in the legend S1 2 Passed or S1 2 Failed replacing Serial 1 or Serial 2 on the ap propriate key B1 6 4 Battery This area normally green flashes red white when the battery needs to be replaced ection BJ Battery status is checked once every 15 minutes B1 6 5 Lockable Not applicable to this recorder model B1 6 6 Option boards Always shows None
40. The highest temperature reached during the first measurement period in Kelvins Tin The lowest temperature reached during the first measurement period in Kelvins Tumax The highest temperature reached during the Nth measurement period in Kelvins Tus The lowest temperature reached during the Nth measurement period in Kelvins The total number of measurement periods As described in Configurable items below this is simplified for the recorder user to four entries viz The number of the channel measuring temperature the number of samples to be used the time between the samples and the relevant Heat of Activation Note The input temperature must be in Kelvins This can be achieved either by setting the relevant channel s units to Kelvins or by using a further maths channel to convert the measuring units to Kelvins K C 273 15 or K 0 555 F 32 273 15 Page 108 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont MEAN KINETIC TEMPERATURE Cont CONFIGURABLE ITEMS Figure 4 3 11g shows the configurable items for the MKT function Maths Number 1 Math1 Y Value 0 0000 Units Function MKT Y Mean Kinetic Temperature of Math 2 Y Number of samples 52 Sample interval 604800 s Heat of Activation 83 144 kJ mole Units lini Apply Discard Figure 4 3 11g MKT function parameters Mean Kinetic Temperature of Sele
41. aaa wa naspas ren 75 USER SCREENS TEON uuu sa a sit 76 4 35 Archive config ration dass rra aia 77 COMPRES SION EE 78 EEASELSIZES inu Eeer GE E ass 78 SHORTEST TREND HISTORY DURATION 78 CSV CHECK BOXES DATE TIME FORMAT 78 SHOW neta edu apama qana EE ca 78 MEDIA eichter e ges etae eege 78 ARCHIVE TO MEDIA i 3e is ba a 78 MEDIA FILE FORMAT FTP FILE FORMAT 79 ON MEDIA FULL da yuy ia 79 MEDIA SIZE hoax an yka dd a8 al oia 79 REMOVABLE MEDIA CAPACITY 79 MEDIAFULEEVENT LIMIT s m sorna dll n 79 ARCHIVE TO REMOTE gert et tente tddi besos e e EP A 79 REMOTE PATH nez ae Ren ROI vue Ya eX aa ERO 79 PRIMARY REMOTE HOST e gess ecu eek yes YR AEG eee 80 PRIMARY LOGIN NAME PASSWORD 80 SECONDARY REMOTE HOST LOGIN PASSWORD 80 CSV PILES Loos reta eU IU b T NOS e OU iia 80 4 3 6 Event configuration y ua siin ee e e metre bed RR eda EES 82 EVENTINUMIBER dr ais e Se PE Ee acres 82 SOURCE TYPES iege voted e ELO ee ee qtu duo g Ou 82 EVENTSQURCES CORE sre rera I mam nU PE ER SAN MEE 83 SOURCE T SENSE 12 1 bea USO IEEE Wa LG RA URS BR Eb 83 OPERATOR usd a secos eee onis RII ERI d QE SPUR Ed ES 84 SOURCE 2 SENSE EE 84 DESCRIPTOR cT 84 JOB NUMBER 43e ace eb eee pasca E RE RON a he ea cora 84 CATEGORY EEN 84 WHILE ON 2 eria der eR RR aloa quna alosa Rak UR VA Paese e e 84 EVENT EXAMPEE
42. circular corners this value must be 2 3 the Arc Height The Arc width value must be less than half the Rectangle width Percent units are relative to the rectangle width not the screen width The fill colour of solid objects the background colour for the main page trend charts text mes sages etc For Bargraphs the colour behind the bar For operator buttons Dialogue Action and Navigation Action Allows button text to be entered Event button text is defined in Event Button Configuration described in Allows a channel to be selected for bargraph numeric value etc display If set to Yes this causes the outline shape of a solid object to be drawn in the foreground colour If set to No the object s outline is not drawn Allows a layer scheme to be introduced Items with higher draw order values are overlaid on components with lower draw order values The Draw Order feature is included specifically to al low a dynamic element such as a bargraph to be placed on top of a background static image A dynamic element is always drawn on top all other elements at update time When one or more dynamic elements are placed on top of one another the results are unpredictable For operator buttons allows the user to select the parameter type e g Channel N Alarm 1 to be edited when the button is operated The parameter number N is entered in the N value field For Event buttons this allows the user to assign an E
43. play the up and down arrow keys can be used to scroll through the enabled display modes or a particu lar mode can be selected using the Goto View menu Page 74 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 4 VIEWS CONFIGURATION Cont GROUP This field appears only if Scope is set to Group and allows each group to be selected for display con figuration For other items of Group configuration see DISPLAY ENABLE This field appears only if Scope is set to Group and allows the selected group to be enabled or disa bled for display When enabled the group can be displayed either by using the Root menu Goto screens Group N selection figure 4 3 4b or can be scrolled to using the right left arrow keys When disabled the group is greyed in the Root menu Goto screens Group N selection and is skipped when using the right left arrow keys It is not possible to disable the Home group HOME PAGE Allows a particular display mode to be selected as the default display either for all groups Scope in strument or on a group by group basis Scope group DISPLAY MODE ENABLING A series oftick boxes allow the various display modes to be added to or removed from the up down arrow scroll list and to be activated deactivated in the Root menu Goto View menu either for all groups Scope instrument or on a group by group basis Scope group It is not possi
44. zzhemxcpeUR AREE ESO ROC ENDS re E UB FG ET 84 4 3 7 EventB ttOnS i oenic s E Ed e c ad asa 85 GER NP CE 8 MESSAGE ENTRY na desiste wisakuna kaka yata de a 86 CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS 002 cece ence taci sana saa saa 86 EXAMPLE tege dE ek p REN RU SI Te ERE E DAE 88 4 3 9 User Linearisation Tables 89 CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS 89 4 310 Batch recording Optima a IQ PD PERRA 91 AUDITOR MESSAGES 0 ccc s aqa a wasu E E EE susan en 91 BATCH SUMMA iaa s usa yaaa ada lia dus 91 CONFIGURATION sarisini aia tae 92 OPERATOR INITIATION cete rex paa ELE 94 NON OPERATOR INITIATION ce sasawaqa asqa teen nn 97 EVENT SOURCES ica tar dc 97 User Guide HA029324 Page iv Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE LIST OF CONTENTS CONT Section Page A S o Vat ITA A qa aaah 98 CONEIGURATIQN cds em sasan he rado ali Re Rem eom d was asi eges n 98 MODBUS ADDRESSING errs 1 prep er a este adi qoo ar ea yk 125 4312 TotallSers u uy s en Neie wi bera E s anyaq Ie de e or d e conn 128 INTRODUCTION sos cett mos EO ed Ro edad OR es n nct 128 CONFIGURATION 42 er es a Ree REO ey EE Roe C bond 128 4 53 13 COUME S ood other e UU INSANE SUE BEER ERE 133 INTRODUCTION ce tton eo dt 133 CONFIGURATION la ss saq e a lan 133 COUNTER MODBUS ADDRESSING 00 0 ccc cece cnn yqa apa 134 49 E TMI
45. 1 byte Register address 2 bytes Value to be written 2 bytes Thus to write a value of 80 degrees as Alarm 1 setpoint for channel 3 register address 022F the following request as detailed in figure 8 5 3 would be transmitted to the recorder 0000000000060106022F0050 Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8 Byte 9 Byte 10 Byte 11 Transaction Transaction Protocol Protocol Always 00 Number of Recorder Modbus Register Register Value Value identifier identifier identifier identifier bytes fol Modbus function start start high byte low byte lowing address code hex Hobe anes hex hex Figure 8 5 3 Function code 06 request response example RESPONSE As a response to a request the recorder returns a message identical with the request message EXCEPTION RESPONSES Byte 0 Function code 86 hex i e Hex 80 function code Byte 1 Exception code 01 Illegal function or 02 Invalid data address 8 5 4 Function code 08 This is used to initiate a loop back test The bytes after the 7 byte prefix described in fection 8 5 above are Function code 08 1 byte Subfunction code 00 00 2 bytes Query data loopback value HH HH 2 bytes Thus to initiate a loopback test using as an example P Q as the query data the following request as de tailed in figure 8 5 4 is transmitted to the recorder 000000000006010800005051 The response to the receipt of such a messa
46. 104 Kee E 217 Saturated En EE 110 E m sa e EE 222 Square TOOT ciet eniti ds 100 106 Master Comms siii 143 K Configuration menu 342 A P E 160 Keycode ince etie dete a tetur etos 208 Example eonfguretten 157 Slave Failure Event source 83 L Master Slave Labello symbols ni ean ihe ea 1 Connection uM LIN MM EE Language selection cinc 207 Eis 6 last Maths channel zi 249 Configuration craneo 78 TLE eR 215 EE SE MEE IS EE 70 Modbus data aa 125 Eater messages aee tete e HERO ROMERO TEERe eU 20 32 bit IEEE sassa 126 LED indicators RJ45 RE 6 Copy SSES EE EE AER EE EE EE EE EE EES SE 211 ESftk Yanina ada e 22 Failure En 10 MS as 262 Function selection sas 99 Across the chart ccccccccccccececcccecececeetecccstsseecectecccetteceeetecess 30 Jobs ista EE E 218 Feed ct u wer TS SS Sua us 171 172 Partial Failures casi iaa 83 Thicknessonidaicanicosiiia napa EESE EATE EA 252 Run time data linear Mee BUS veces sanan Ge e P np epa 126 Chart andis tetto ds aasan 62 32 bit IEEE 126 Scal s icu io od pop deeg 66 Maximum Linearisation Function User SEEE EET nok haan So Ae ae 89 Block size iaa Sa sa 145 Like rpereo ntiua u nunasqa aa 141 Number of Bridge En 237 l ocale contiguratl ons seen tercer to oe ra Ci deese 207 Mean kinetic temperature En 108 Pu s n tta ibn edd 346 Measuring unito recono nai nga 254 EE ET e 209 Mechanical i installation ss
47. 14 21 30 Current pen icon lt Bargraph Non current pen icon a Time at adjacent gridli Alarm mark Abs High Alarm s off 2 1 12 07 06 12 02 Message bar Latest message If this arrow head is displayed then touching the message bar displays previous messages Figure 3 4 2a Horizontal Trend Display One of the channels is defined as being the current or scale channel and this is identified on the chart by its pen icon being diamond shaped rather than triangular as for non current channels If a channel is included in the display group but its status is not good for some reason then its pen icon is hollow Each channel in the display group becomes the current channel in turn for approximately 10 seconds i e the channels are cycled through starting with the lowest numbered channel Once the final chan nel in the group has been displayed for 10 seconds the lowest numbered channel is returned to and the sequence repeats This scrolling process can be stopped using the Channel Cycling key in the Option menu There are two faceplates associated with this display mode one above the chart showing the current channel s descriptor and its digital value the other to the right of the chart showing a bargraph rep resentation of the current channel s value together with a scale showing the low and high rang
48. 1ueio snqpoNW ajowey We snqpoN eoo We snqpoN 2907 DOP uono ss ale uonpas s sonsouSeiq 19uJ9u13 pieosiq H Addy 93J8eM31OS apelbdn peisdn 1 S d1d 910u9y YO 1 3546 N89M 028 9 y uono ss epeJ3d WOJ4 Se e2nos 9 14 9poo Aey poo Aey Jequinw lu uni sul pueosig Addy reuu04 ayeg Bue A 1990190 Ul A epuns A ee eu uo 00 00 10 je puy A yoe ul A epuns 1se7 94 uo 00 00 10 apelbdn 9 e 20 A9019 797 uon ss 3 e907 ye Wels A usq unu uuuns asf IN9 eucz au wop6bury paun Ayjunog usi6u3 eBenDue suondo mau ppy pieosiq Add ss ww Hgg eum jueuno women Aunoes Bijuoy 810 S8Y 8AeCS bunn L 9y uon as 19019 AAXA NN aa 1eD juez HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 205 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 6 SYSTEM Cont Z 13eeus 1no e nueui uoneinBiuuoo wa s s Oort alnbiy 3114 woddns Oto INVyd 4953 NWVyuS qW00 96 10 SIH OUISIN Don UO0ISI9A picog AL UOISI A WOY OOg O Z UO0ISI9A 9 14 JOISIH LC UOISJ9A SIEMIJOS IONPOIH Buisuduioo L uolsiA rj Ajunoes OIX08L9 UOC Pajeelg Lo UOISI A IV ez z1 ZL OLOZ 4890190 90 pajepdn teg 6018 uolsin
49. 249 Function codes supported sss 265 Master Slave O Configuration menus sss 341 I Re Ee 191 116 Security OPTED RE 266 Offset O ico mencio EE 66 Disable tuisse dena mre dS 57 Correction touch screen 322 Slave OK danas 27 Enable On KE Online Becoming active inactive etc 217 Selection Error Write Default eile odisti rebns 164 St t s Media aliaron cara da 79 Wiring KEE 93 Modulus maths function 101 Start Stop Sore sasan 23 Mo se lock fi ies siii 320 Visibility change annassa 253 Move Screen Online Modbus slave n cn ue 145 Multiply maths function tete nonem ees 99 Open Closed strings sn 155 Operator N Access au uie tt ei tiem teen 25 186 le E 258 Name Files by Batch nee eerte 94 Event E 84 MA ntes ceret aun ce vee pU 84 Km 22 NENE EA ka 257 Notes Messages rerit en tees 44 Network Options AOS ii 201 Available ainia 318 Configuration menu 345 EI e 183 343 Boot EI 10 E 22 Configuration iia 201 OR 84 Connection has timed out 237 Outof Range uku isa 175 Ethernet Serial selection 145 Output Key MENU iim nero UHR DIU Fre 345 Channel MEL I E 204 Configuration menu seen 342 Scanning tool icit ps 203 Defa ltediting u ptt tenes 189 SIS MS EE 319 EE E E 162 New VE 211 Ip T 34 61 JOBS etta cec etc eaa es
50. 3 Touch the note area ofthe resulting pop up display see note below 4 Enter the required text of up to 120 characters spaces are also counted as characters Press Ok when finished 5 View the note and a press the Ok button to enter the note OR b re touch the text area to edit the note OR c press the Cancel key to quit note entry Option Key Faceplates On Off Operator Notes list Appears if note area is touched contin uously for 2 seconds approx List entries are made in Instrument Configuration section 4 3 1 AM Shift started AM Shift finished PM Shift started PM Shift finished Figure 3 5 Access to Note entry page Note Touching the note area continuously for two seconds or more causes a list of pre defined messages to appear Touching one of these messages selects it as the operator note which can then be edited in the normal way if required before the OK key is operated There are a maxi mum of 13 pre defined messages 12 of which are user editable in the Configuration instrument menu ection 4 3 1 the 13th being the non editable MAC address of the recorder Page 44 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 SETTING UP THE RECORDER As described in the section 3 3 1 above the setting up of the recorder is di vided into the following areas pecur etwor U P lt O Di
51. 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 Message 04 04 02 16 31 05 Batch stopped because of belt l failure on 1 30 34 2F 30 34 2F 30 32 20 31 36 3A 33 31 3A 30 35 20 42 61 74 63 68 20 73 74 6F 70 70 65 64 20 62 65 63 61 75 73 65 20 6F 66 20 62 65 6C 74 20 66 61 69 6C 75 72 65 20 6F 6E 20 6C Space hex 20 Null 00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 Extension inel 3 message 69 6E 65 20 33 20 73 65 63 74 69 6F GE 20 31 37 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 User Guide HA029324 Page 272 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 3 ADDRESS MAP Figure 8 3 shows the range of addresses allocated to various recorder functions Each of these functions is described in detail in later sections Addresses FCBF to FD07 Addresses FFF
52. 4 5 6 7 Table 4 3 16b Instrument status Register 22 Page 155 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 16 MASTER COMMS Cont READING DIGITAL VALUES EXAMPLE Cont Channel Number Value Input Type Slave Digital Parameter Function Code Register Data Type Bit Position Process Value Zone Low Zone High Colour Open String Closed String Descriptor Alarm Number Enable Type Active when Dwell Job Number Category Send Message s to First Message Last Message On Figure 4 3 16i Example configuration page 1 Card in Y Card in Master Commsv 1 Recorder M v User Defined v Read input reg 4 v 22 Bit from register M 3 Medium Priority v 75 100 EE Card in Card out Card in ay Trigger v Digital v Card out v o s iv Message M All Groups M 1 Card missing Y 1 Card missing Y Active M Apply Discard HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 156 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 16 MASTER COMMS Cont MASTER COMMS CHANNEL CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE This example describes a recorder Furn1 Master acting as a master to two other recorders Furn1 Record and Furn2 Record and a controller Furn1 Control This example shows only the configuration page
53. 44404 AD92 44434 ADBO 44464 ADCE 44494 ADEC 44524 AEOA 44554 AE28 44584 AE46 44614 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 User Guide Page 297 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 4 GROUP DATA Cont GROUP 5 Parameter name Grp5 Trend type Grp5 Trend rate Grp5 Archive rate Grp5 Descriptor Spare Grp5 Channels in group See table 8 3 for point types Grp5 Text length Grp5 Text time stamp Grp5 Read text Reserved Grp5 Write text Reserved Grp5 Batch start Grp5 Batch stop Grp5 Batch running Grp5 Text field 1 Reserved Grp5 Text field 2 Reserved Grp5 Text field 3 Reserved Grp5 Text field 4 Reserved Grp5 Text field 5 Reserved Grp5 Text field 6 Reserved Spare Description Trend enhancements 0 Interpolation enabled 1 Adaptive recording enabled Trend update rate in milliseconds Archive to flash rate in milliseconds Group descriptor 20 characters max 16 Registers holding the group contents as follows Register 1 Bit 0 0 Point 1 not in group 1 Point 1 is in group Bit 1 0 Point 2 not in group 1 Point 2 is in group Bit 2 0 Point 3 not in group 1 Point 3 is in group Etc Bit 15 0 Point 16 not in group 1 Point 16 is in group Register 2 as register 1 but for points 17 to 32 Register 3 as register 1 but for points 33 to 48 Register 4 as register 1 but for points 49 to 64 Register 5 as register 1 but for points 65 to 80
54. 54727 D5C9 54729 D5CB 54731 D5CD 54733 D5CF 54735 Start Addr Hex Dec D5E3 54755 D5E5 54757 D5E7 54759 D5E9 54761 D5EB 54763 D5ED 54765 D5EF 54767 D5F1 54769 D5F3 54771 Start Addr Hex Dec D607 54791 D609 54793 D60B 54795 D60D 54797 D60F 54799 D611 54801 D613 54803 D615 54805 D617 54807 Register Length NJ NJ N N NJ N N WN N Register Length NJ NJ N N N N N N N o Register Length N N N N N N N WN N Notes 1 For fmaths and see the relevant option description 2 If an alarm s Setpoint Source section 4 3 3 is set to anything other than Constant the value re turned will be the previously configured constant value HA029324 User Guide Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 305 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 7 IEEE 32 BIT CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA Cont CHANNEL 10 Parameter name Ch10 span high Ch10 span low Ch10 Zone high Ch10 Zone low Ch10 Alarm 1 setpoint Ch10 Alarm 2 setpoint Ch10 Alarm 3 setpoint Ch10 Alarm 4 setpoint Spare CHANNEL 11 Parameter name Ch11 span high Ch11 span low Ch11 Zone high Ch11 Zone low Ch11 Alarm 1 setpoint Ch11 Alarm 2 setpoint Ch11 Alarm 3 setpoint Ch11 Alarm 4 setpoint Spare CHANNEL 12 Parameter name Ch12 span high Ch12 span low Ch12 Zone high Ch12 Zone low Ch12 Alarm 1 setpoint Ch12 Alarm 2 setpoint Ch12 Alarm
55. B1 6 7 Input boards Always shows None B1 6 8 Main menu To return to the main diagnostics display touch the Main Menu key B1 7 QUIT Allows the user to quit diagnostics after confirmation The recorder restarts in normal operating mode HA029324 User Guide Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 325 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE B2 1 TOUCH SCREEN CLEANING CAUTION The touch sensitive screen used in this product is designed for use by hand or by the stylus sup plied only The use of sharp or pointed implements such as pens keys and fingernails to oper ate the instrument must be avoided or irreparable damage will be done to the surface mate rial When cleaning the touch screen a moist cloth should be used if necessary with a minimal amount of mild soap solution ALCOHOLS SUCH AS ISOPROPYL ALCOHOL MUST NEVER BE USED ON THE SCREEN B2 2 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Battery replacement Every three years User Guide HA029324 Page 326 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B2 2 1 BATTERY REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE A CAUTION Miss The user must be at the same electrical potential as the instrument housing when accessing the battery Note All battery backed RAM data is lost during battery change unless power to the unit is main tained during the change see Annex A for details of stored data The battery is of poly carbonmonofl
56. Bit 0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Bit 1 O No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3 Spare Bit 4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Bit5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7 Spare Bit 8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Bit9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11 Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15 Spare 5 Ranging error 6 Overflow 7 Bad PV 8 No data Description Current process value PV Channel status 0 Good PV 1 Channel off 2 Over range 5 Ranging error 6 Overflow 7 Bad PV Uint16 See note Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Access See note Read only Start Addr Hex Dec F8EB 63723 F8ED 63725 F8EE 63726 Start Addr Hex Dec F8EF 63727 F8F1 63729 Register Length Register Length 3 Under range 8 No data 4 Hardware error Alarm information Bit 0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Read only Bit 1 O No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Read Write Bit 3 Spare Bit4 0 Alarm 2
57. Bit2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3 Spare Bit 4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Bit 5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7 Spare Bit 8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Bit 9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11 Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15 Spare 5 Ranging error 6 Overflow 7 Bad PV 8 No data Ch1 Alarms Uint16 A1DB 41435 Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write CHANNEL 2 Start Addr Hex Dec ATDC 41436 ATDD 41437 Register Access Length Parameter name Description Ch2 value Ch2 status Scaled Enum See note Read only Current process value PV Channel status 0 Good PV 1 Channel off 2 Over range 5 Ranging error 6 Overflow 7 Bad PV 3 Under range 8 No data 4 Hardware error Alarm information Bit0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Bit 1 0 No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3 Spare Bit4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Bit5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7 Spare Bit8 0 Alarm 3 inac
58. CONNECT FROM REMOTE Enabling this field causes two further entry boxes Remote user name and Remote password to ap pear These items are used in establishing connection between a host computer and the recorder The Remote user name is by default the Access Level e g Engineer or the User ID To make use of the Web server facility Annex 9 below must also be enabled REMOTE USER NAME REMOTE PASSWORD These two entry boxes allow user name and password to be entered for use by the remote host operator The remote user will be able to access the recorder configuration according to the other access permis sions enabled in this page The password must be entered twice to ensure integrity To allow unrestricted view only to the host Logged out permission level should be selected and then a user name of anonymous entered and the password field left blank Notes 1 Remote login will be refused if the user account is disabled for any reason 2 For maximum security it is recommended that the remote password and the local password are non identical 3 Attempts to establish a Bridge connection will fail if the relevant Remote User Name contains characters with ASCII codes greater than 127 suchas a etc Section B6 Annex B shows codes 0 to 127 Page 187 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 4 1 ACCESS LEVELS Cont LOGIN DISABLED
59. Duct Deviation Deviation D Hysteresis a Input signal Input signal Hysteresis no Hysteresis no Dwell 0 secs Dwell 0 secs Hysteresis no Hysteresis no Dwell D secs Dwell D secs Hysteresis yes Hysteresis yes Dwell 0 Secs Dwell 0 Secs Hysteresis yes Hysteresis yes Dwell D Secs Dwell D Secs JE alarm active MA alarm active D is in seconds up to 999999 D is in seconds up to 999999 Hysteresis is in engineering units Hysteresis is in engineering units Figure 4 3 3e Deviation alarm definitions Rate of change alarm definitions Rise symbol 4 Fall symbol l Rate of change rise active Rate of change fall active BI Change Time units Present seconds minutes or hours time A rate of change alarm is active if the channel value changes by more than 1 amount unit in less than 1 time unit Dwell delays the alarm on time Averaging removes the effects of spurious spikes Figure 4 3 3f Rate of change alarm definitions Page 72 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 3 CHANNEL ALARM CONFIGURATION Cont JOB NUMBER Select the required job number CATEGORY Select the required job to be carried out when the channel is in alarm e g send email See fection 4 7 for a description of job categories WHILE ON Allows the action of the alarm job to be chosen as a while active wh
60. Eection 4 4 Most items are self evident The Total requests and Bad requests totals both exclude retries The numbers in parentheses are excep tion code numbers as described in able 8 2 1bl The Initiate Comms Test is a loop back test that sends a message to the selected slave and waits for it to be returned If the test is successful the Successful Comms Test is incremented If not successful one or more of the error box values is incremented Figure 4 3 16p shows a typical page Archive Save Restore Config Security Network Slave 1 Furn recorder 1 Y Actual Medium Priority Actual Low Priority Modbus Address Slave Status Last Transaction Status Total Requests Bad requests Good requests Illegal function codes 01 Illegal addresses 02 Illegal Values 03 Slave Failures 04 No Gateway path 10 Gateway Target Fail 11 Timed out requests Master Rejects Retried requests Serial Link Error Count SS A A MA Em Actual High Priority 2 Seconds 1 Seconds 1298 0 112 Seconds 1 Online OK v 1308 10 0 Successful Comms Tests O O O O O O O Initiate Comms Test Rese t Diagnostics Clock Locale Upgrade Master Comms Diagnostics Ethernet diagnosticcs Figure 4 3 16p Master Comms diagnostic page Page 161 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 10
61. Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Start Addr Hex Dec 04E9 1257 O4EA 1258 04EB 1259 04EC 1260 04ED 1261 04EE 1262 04EF 1263 04F0 1264 04F3 1267 04F5 1269 04F9 1273 04FD 1277 0501 1281 0505 1285 050F 1295 0519 1305 051A 1306 051B 1307 0557 1367 0558 1368 0559 1369 055A 1370 0564 1380 0565 1381 0566 1382 0567 1383 0571 1393 0572 1394 0573 1395 0574 1396 057E 1406 057F 1407 0580 1408 0581 1409 Register Length P PHH oo Notes 1 For maths totalisers and counters see the relevant option description 2 If an alarm s Setpoint Source section 4 3 3 is set to anything other than Constant the value re turned will be the previously configured constant value HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 User Guide Page 283 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 2 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA Cont CHANNEL 9 Parameter name Ch9 Span high Ch9 Span low Ch9 Zone high Ch9 Zone low Ch9 PV type Ch9 Decimal places Ch9 Colour Ch9 Units Spare Ch9 Open string Spa
62. Etc Bit 15 0 code 16 not supported 1 code 16 supported Reserved CC2D 52269 Reserved CC2E 52270 Feature 3 Security ID MODBUS login security feature Read only CC2F 52271 User name Write only 52272 Password Write only 52312 Reserved 52352 Feature N 100 Spare addresses for further features CC81 52353 Parameter name Description 8 4 6 Indirection tables The standard MODBUS protocol allows block register reads and writes This is efficient only if data is grouped contiguously or nearly so Indirection tables are a means by which widely spaced register addresses can in effect be grouped offering the host the ability to access a block of user defined data in one single read write request Two configurable tables are available one for read only parameters the other for read write Each table is in two halves the lower address half contains the addresses of the registers to be accessed the higher address half contains the values which have been read or which are to be written Notes 1 For Ethernet connections indirection table entries are lost at power off as the result of a brown out or if the connection with the host is broken 2 Parameters in IEEE format can be accessed by configuring two successive entries in the table Pa rameters which occupy more than one register can be loaded into the indirection area by using function code 16 pre set multiple registers and the parameter s ba
63. HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 176 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 21 ETHERNET IP OPTION Cont DEFAULT TABLE KEY Clicking on this key causes the relevant table to be populated with a default set of parameters For input tables these parameters are Channel 1 pv to Channel 100 pv followed by Math 1 pv to Math 100 pv The output table parameters are Channel 1 pv to Channel 100 pv followed by Math 1 pv to Math 100 pv SHOW ERRORS KEY Clicking on this key causes the parameter addresses to appear after the parameter names in the input and output tables If a syntax or other error has been made in loading the input table a description of the error type appears in this view see ERROR MESSAGEY above OUTPUT TABLE PARAMETER MODBUS ADDRESSES In all cases the addresses for the output parameters can be viewed by operating the Show errors key The addresses for channels 1 to 75 and maths 1 to 100 can be found as described in Chan nel Runtime data and section 4 3 11 Maths channel Run time data Addresses for channels 76 to 100 are given below Parameter Description Access Start Adar Name Hex Dec Channel 76 pv Channel 76 process value Read only FCBF 64703 Channel 77 pv Channel 77 process value Read only FCC2 64706 Channel 78 pv Channel 78 process va Read only FCCS5 64709 Channel 79 pv Channel 79 process va Read only FCC8 64712 Channel 80 pv Channel 80 process va Read only FCCB 64715 C
64. HA029324 Page 39 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 4 5 Horizontal bargraph display mode Entered from by means ofthe down arrow key or selected using the Root Menu key this display mode shows the Process Variable PV values as horizontal bars with digital values and alarm data displayed as shown in figures 3 4 5a and 3 4 5b Notes 1 For large frame recorders single column format is used when there are up to 12 channels in the display group double column for more than 12 channels For small frame recorders only the single column mode is employed with a scroll bar when necessary 2 For large frame recorders up to 26 points can be displayed simultaneously for small frame recorders the maximum is 5 points In either case if more points are enabled than can be displayed within the height of the screen a vertical scroll bar appears allowing currently hidden channels to be accessed Trend history mode is not available from this display mode To call mode use the down arrow key Alternatively any one ofthe enabled display modes bection 4 3 4 can be selected using the Root Menu Goto View key Page 40 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 4 5 HORIZONTAL BARGRAPH Cont a 11 58 08 Li t 5 Channel 1 700 87C 1400 00 800 00 Channel 2 487 390 AV 4 800 00 Channel 3 235 68 C I 10 00 NEM 400 00 Cha
65. If selected a vertical bargraph is drawn at the right hand edge of Hori zontal Trend displays Display Descriptor Enable Disable For Channel Numeric displays only if Faceplate Style is set to Custom this selection determines whether or not the channel descriptor ap pears at the top of the display Display messages Enable Disable If selected displays a message bar for Horizontal Trend displays Display Pens Enable Disable If selected pen representations appear at the top or right edge of a trend chart Display Units Enable Disable For Channel Numeric displays only if Faceplate Style is set to Custom this selection determines whether or not the channel s units appear at the right edge of the display Faceplate Style Default Just value No alarms Value and Units Single line Faceplate Custom Produces a channel display with the descriptor and alarm indicators on the top line and with the digital value and units on the bottom line Shows only the channel value As default but without alarm display Produces a larger digital display of the channel value with units As default but all on a single line The Display Descriptor Display units and Display Alarms checkbox settings and the font selections for Value Units and Descriptor be come active only if Custom is selected as Faceplate style Faceplates Location Dynamic N S E W Not
66. Import screen HA029324 User Guide Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 239 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 1 2 IMPORTING EXPORTING SCREENS Cont IMPORTING SCREENS Touching the filename area allows a previously created user screen to be selected either from the Flash memory or from disk to be imported The User Screen picklist allows the user to define which User screen is to be replaced by the imported file EXPORTING SCREENS Allows user screens to be exported to Flash memory or disk The operator can assign a suitable filename before exporting 7 2 DISPLAY CREATION The following description is an attempt to show how to create a simple screen layout The technique used is to define an object then to specify its size and where its top left corner is to be located on the screen The option offers two levels of sophistication basic and advanced The basic system defines size position fill colour etc for components section 7 3 1 allow a more sophisticated fine tuning of the appearance of the components Note X is horizontal increasing rightwards Y is vertical increasing downwards Top left corner is 0 0 As implied in figure 7 2 3a screen component position and dimensions can be specified as percentage ab solute pixels or relative pixels Percentage is percentage of screen size Absolute pixels allow position and or dimensions to be defined as an absolute number of pixels Relative
67. Ley uonoes Buryoums g v Be a jueunasu T onndepy ERE adh pues Samu OC jeyv e es dno19 io1diuo9s q ls Ee IONES A uw shun puas OOL ABJaSIg JEUJON ju uiniisul uimeN 1ueuindjsu ueis g yIOMJON Aunoeg uco 910 S8YH 8AeS AIU91V AL dnou 1 JOQUINN dnoiS Page 53 Issue 5 Oct 10 HA029324 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 CONFIG KEY Cont J 199uS M98IAJ9AO NUSW uoneinBijuoo dev e1nBiJ pieosiq Aiddy uonoy on JOBa eg Ai 16quinN gor X no elqeuz a 1 16quinN uuelv 92 1nojo5 syBIg jewloeq xe A oueunw JEWIOY Ad la pueosiq Aiddy A euoN ed ajeos 96 00L uBiu euoz _ juoreq Aq say owen o moj euoz pieosiq Addy ar Jeaj9 mau UO SuIW 09 uBiu leos uonov oN A1oB 1eO Ay 60 doys uo SUIIN 0 a HERE Ar 16quinN gor E Ay Dot yes uo BUR SES Sin A HO eiqeu3 uosiwednsg p DR LOS a 1 16quinN wey SUI EN Jj noo OWEN Joje1edO DR 109 WEN C60 v su amp ig rewia xen eureN 1 tuolsnO Z DS OL emau aunyesadwia UNN I I jut H Ht A 2ueunw 18U110 Ad 1 unoS Jejunog L izi duie Buizilu 1s k Su N edK ejeos A 1ajuno9 asf L play yg A jeuueu JO enje 4 001 yBIH euoz J9qUuINN uoieg L DS A nleA uonoun J 4 M03 uoz Ap Spe uoreg MOU jee 9siye101 SHUN L UBIH ereos A domme epow u
68. Modbus Address n 123 1 2 Modbus addresses 1 to n Notes 1 The IP address 123 123 1 2 is for demonstration purposes only 2 Modbus address can be any number between 1 and 247 but must be unique per IP address 3 Modbus addresses need not be consecutive Figure 4 3 16d Share socket examples HA029324 Page 148 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 16 MASTER COMMS Cont MASTER COMMS CHANNEL CONFIGURATION This display page shown below is called from the Operator Config Channels as described in p33 A similar page appears in the Operator Config Maths configuration described in The actual picklists which appear depend entirely on the type or model of instrument being read from It is assumed that the user knows which parameters are to be accessed The following sections describe a atypical input channel configuration page with Master Comms selected as Input Type and a re corder or data acquisition unit as slave typical input channel configuration page with Master Comms selected as Input Type for a slave controller E he situation where User Defined has been selected as Parameter In such a case the user must determine the required register number from the documentation supplied with the slave Note For completeness figures 4 3 16e 4 3 16f and 4 3 16g show all possible configuration fields The fields that actually appear are slave model and parameter dependent
69. Register 6 as register 1 but for points 81 to 96 Register 7 as register 1 but for points 97 to 112 Register 8 as register 1 but for points 113 to 128 Register 9 as register 1 but for points 129 to 144 Register 10 as register 1 but for points 145 to 160 Register 11 as register 1 but for points 161 to 176 Register 12 as register 1 but for points 177 to 192 Register 13 as register 1 but for points 193 to 208 Register 14 as register 1 but for points 209 to 224 Register 15 as register 1 but for points 225 to 240 Register 16 as register 1 but for points 241 to 256 Identifies the length of a text message to be read Time stamp of the text message to be read UTC format Read text string from instrument display Write a text string to instrument display Boolean Flag Value 0001 starts new batch Boolean Flag Value 0001 stops current batch Batch status flag 1 Running 0 Not running Batch field 1 text string max 60 characters Batch field 2 text string max 60 characters Batch field 3 text string max 60 characters Batch field 4 text string max 60 characters Batch field 5 text string max 60 characters Batch field 6 text string max 60 characters Uint32 Uint 32 String 20 Uint16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 Double String 60 CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC String 60 Boolean Boolean Boolean String 60 String 60 String 60 String
70. Save Restore Contig Security Network System Figure Figure Ol B9b B9c Security section 4 4 Figs B9d Figure Figure to B9i Dok Bom Login Access Management Add user Remove User Change Password Access section 4 4 1 Remove user section 4 4 4 User User Full Name Y Clear Password Cache Section 4 4 6 Clear Password Cache Section 4 4 5 Change Password Figure B9j Security key menu structure Remove Apply Discard Add user section 4 4 3 New User ID New Full User Name New Domain Name New Password Retype Password Based On Operator v Add Apply Discard Management Record Logins Login Timeout with unapplied changes Password Attempts Passwords Expire Minimum Password Length Require Signing Require Authorization Enable Audit Trail Password Change on Expiry Centralised Security Login By User List section 4 4 2 PA 1 Minutes Ignore timeout y 3times Y 30 Days D G C Y H Apply Discard Access when Domain New Password Retype Password Connect from remote Remote user name Remote password Retype remote password Login Disabled Edit own Password Change Alarm Setpoints Acknowledge Alarms Edit Maths Constant Reset Maths Preset Totalisers Preset Counters Start Reset Timers Set Clock Archiving Control Save Res
71. Show Batch Entry List Groups Enable Y Channels Batch mode Start Stop Y Views Batch fields 4 Y Archive Field 1 Batch Number Events Batch field 1 Use Counter Y Event Buttons Counter Counter 1 Y Messages Field 2 Customer Name User Linearisations Batch i 3 oa Name Baton Section 4 3 10 Field 4 Supervisor On start log 4 Y Kau On stop log 1 Totalisers On new clear 1 v Counters Name files by batch Timers Apply H Discard Connections Master Comms Output Channels Demand Writes E Timers Section 4 3 14 Reports Timer number 1 Timer 1 EtherNet IP Server Enable Z Options Remaining 00 00 00 Repeat in 00 00 00 Reset now Start now Descriptor Timer 1 Self start W Date AnyY Month Any Y These fields appear Hour Any y gt only if Self start is bled Minute AnyY SS Second Anyy Duration 60 Seconds Repeat after 0 Seconds Job Number 1 y Category No Action vj Apply Discard Counters Section 4 3 13 Counter number 1 Counter 1 y Enable ky Value OFF Units Units Units Preset o Units Preset now Descriptor Counter A B Switching Scale Low o Units Scale High h units Scale Type None Y Select None orLinear Zone Low 2 Zone High ho o Colour EI Alarm Number iy gt Select Alarm number Select Off Unlatched Enable Off Y Latched Job Number 1Y Select Job number Trigger Cate
72. Spare Ch2 Close string Spare Ch2 Descriptor Spare Ch2 No of alarms Ch2 PV format Spare Ch2 Alarm 1 enable Ch2 Alarm 1 type Ch2 Alarm 1 setpoint Spare Ch2 Alarm 2 enable Ch2 Alarm 2 type Ch2 Alarm 2 setpoint Spare Ch2 Alarm 3 enable Ch2 Alarm 3 type Ch2 Alarm 3 setpoint Spare Ch2 Alarm 4 enable Ch2 Alarm 4type Ch2 Alarm 4 setpoint Spare Description Upper span value display full scale Lower span value display zero Zone high value two decimal places Zone low value two decimal places Input type 1 Analogue input 3 Totaliser 2 Maths 4 Counter Number of decimal places 0 to 9 used by all scaled parameters except where stated Channel colour 0 to 55 See Annex B for definitions Units string up to five characters Open Digital Input string up to eight characters Closed Digital Input string up to eight characters Channel descriptor up to 20 characters Number of alarms on this channel 0 to 2 0 Numeric 1 Digital strings Alarm 1 enable 0 Off 1 Unlatched Alarm 1 type 0 Absolute low 2 Deviation in 4 Rate of change rise Trigger setpoint Note 2 2 Latched 3 Trigger 1 Absolute high 3 Deviation out 5 Rate of change fall Alarm 2 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 2 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 3 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 3 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2
73. Zone low value two decimal places nputtype 1 Analogue input 3 Totaliser 2 Maths 4 Counter Number of decimal places 0 to 9 used by all scaled parameters except where stated Channel colour 0 to 55 See kanas for definitions Units string up to five characters Open Digital Input string up to eight characters Closed Digital Input string up to eight characters Channel descriptor up to 20 characters Number of alarms on this channel 0 Numeric 1 Digital strings Alarm 1 enable 0 Off 1 Unlatched Alarm 1 type 0 Absolute low 2 Deviation in 4 Rate of change rise Trigger setpoint see note 2 Latched 3 Trigger 1 Absolute high 3 Deviation out 5 Rate of change fall Alarm 2 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 2 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint see note A A A A Trigger setpoin arm 3 enable arm 3 type A arm 4 enable arm 4 type A Trigger setpoin sa sa As alarm 1 enab arm 1 type ab see note As alarm 1 enab arm 1 type ab see note e above ove e above ove Scaled Scaled Scaled Scaled Enum Uint16 Enum String 5 String 8 String 8 String 20 Uint16 Enum Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read
74. b Hex e Hex r Hex Null Null Figure 8 5 5a Function code 16 request example RESPONSE The response message detailed in figure 8 5 5b after the 7 byte prefix described in above is Function code 10 1 byte Start address 2 bytes Word count 2 bytes Thus the response to the above batch field request would be 0000000000060110A57F0007 Transaction Transaction Protocol Protocol Always 00 Number of Recorder Modbus Base Base Word count Word count identifier identifier identifier identifier bytes fol Modbus function address address High byte Low byte lowing hex address code hex 9M byte Low byte Figure 8 5 5b Function code 16 response example EXCEPTION RESPONSES Byte 0 Function code 90 hex i e Hex 80 function code Byte 1 Exception code 01 Illegal function or 02 Invalid data address Note Function code 16 can be used to write multiple registers into the indirection table area for example by writing the base register address of a 32 bit channel value e g channel 3 start address F994 into location D18B User Guide HA029324 Page 316 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE ANNEX A SPECIFICATION INSTALLATION CATEGORY AND POLLUTION DEGREE This product has been designed to conform to BS EN61010 installation category Il and pollution degree 2 These are defined as follows Installation category Il The rated impulse voltag
75. be used to ensure that it is safe to remove the memory device Save Restore Config Security Network System Last Archive 13 09 2005 11 02 42 Media mediacard W Select Media card or USB port Bring Archive Up To Date Section 4 1 2 Archive Last Hour Archive Last Day Archive Last 7 Days Archive Last 31 Days Archive All Suspend Archiving Cancel Archive Archive Transfer Inactive Media Full 08 09 2006 00 34 57 Media Size 31954944 Bytes Free Space 28786688 Bytes Figure 4 1 1 Local archive configuration Local archive allows the user to initiate data transfer to the device defined in the Media picklist for all groups with Archive to Media enabled Group configuration section 4 3 2 Archiving is initiated by touching the relevant archive period key e g Last Day The memory device can be selected as mediac ard the integral Compact Flash card or the USB port can be selected if for example a memory stick is to be the destination device The USB portis located on the underside ofthe instrument Archiving starts as soon as the selection is made and cannot be stopped until completed unless the Cancel Archive key is operated in which case the archive will be stopped after a confirmatory message has been respond
76. colour 1 for values between 10 and 20 colour 2 for values between 20 and 30 and so on up to colour 9 Foreground colour is default 1 As background decimal but for the foreground colour Background colour is default 1 Colour Thresholds None Used only when Colour style Channel thresholds A semicolon separated list of Colour channel values used to change the colour of the component being configured according to the process value of the point selected in Colour Channel described above The number of threshold values entered must match the number of colours defined in Colour Backgrounds and Colour Foregrounds described above Decimal places Default Number of decimal places in Channel data display Descriptor Font Default For Channel Numeric displays only if Faceplate Style is set to Custom then Descriptor Font allows the Channel Descriptor font to be selected from a picklist Display Alarms Enable Disable For Channel Numeric displays only if Faceplate Style is set to Custom this selection determines whether or not alarm symbols are displayed in the top right hand corner of the display Table 7 3 2 Advanced edit level parameters sheet 2 of 6 HA029324 User Guide Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 251 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 3 2 ADVANCED PARAMETERS Cont Parameter Pick list content Description Display Bargraph None
77. from IAPWEF 1F97 Page 110 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont SATURATED STEAM MASS FLOW Cont PRESSURE UNITS CONVERSION There is a wide range of pressure measuring units in use throughoutthe world The following table gives a multiplication factor for converting some common units to MPa MegaPascals to four significant figures Further conversion factors can be found atthe websites given on the previous page Where the conversion is to Pascals not to MegaPascals the factors given have to be divided by 1 000 000 Multiplier for Multiplier for Pr re unit Pressure units Atmospheres Newtons cm 0 01 Newtons m 0 000 001 Pascals 0 000 001 Tonnes m 0 009 807 Tons UK ft2 0 1 073 Tons US ft 0 09 576 Water feet of 0 002 989 Mercury inches of 0 003 386 Water inches of 0 0 002 491 Mercury mm of 0 0 001 333 Water mm of 0 000 009 807 0 00 004 788 0 006 895 Table 4 3 11b Pressure unit conversion The table above shows multiplying factors to convert common pressure units to MPa This conversion is carried out as follows Example A pressure transducer connected to input channel 3 gives an output in the range 10 to 100 PSI The input to a steam equation in maths channel 1 requires the pressure units to be MPa To convert set up a further maths channel e g No 2 as shown below then use maths channel 2 as the source channel forth
78. port 389 is similar but uses TLS on port 389 PASSWORD CACHE EXPIRY This applies only if the Active Directory is not available Starting from when the server becomes unavailable once the configured number of days has expired since the last successful log in by any user the Password cache is cleared the next time any user at tempts to login The user s password is Invalid and a pop up message Active Directory Password Cache has expired appears This means that no Domain users can log in until the Active Directory server becomes available again Values of 0 default to 30 days can be entered where a value of 0 disables Cache expiry i e it never expires Page 203 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 5 2 Name Figure 4 5 2 shows the Name fields Archive Save Restore Config Local Host Andy136 4 Domain FishesRus co uk Domain Name Service Y Primary DNS Server 149 121 164 11 Secondary DNS Server 149 121 165 14 Apply Discard Figure 4 5 2 Network name fields LOCAL HOST English language name for the recorder Non editable assigned to the IP Address DOMAIN The name of the Group or area of networked units which contains the recorder Non editable DOMAIN NAME SERVICE DNS Enables the mapping of host names to IP addresses and vice versa PRIMARY SECONDARY DNS SERVER
79. shows a typical menu page Figure 4 3 5d below shows the effects of enabling the CSV check boxes with the exception of CSV use Tab delimiter the use of which is as follows CSV USE TAB DELIMITER Despite its name CSV does not always use commas as separators For example in some countries the decimal point is represented by a full stop period whilst in other ar eas a comma is used In order to avoid confusion between the comma as a decimal point and the comma as a separator a different separator is used usually the semicolon The instrument automatically chooses a separator suitable for use with the Locale selected in System Configuration bection 4 6 2 CSV Use Tab delimiter allows the user to override this choice and force the instrument to use tabs as separators This can be particularly useful when moving the data from one locale to another CSV DATE TIME FORMAT Allows Text or Spreadsheet numeric to be selected Text causes a time date to appear in the spread sheet Spreadsheet numeric displays the number of days since December 30th 1899 The decimal part of the value represents the latest 6 hours so DDD DDD 25 represents 0600 hrs DDD DDD 5 repre sents noon etc Numeric format is more easily interpretable by some spreadsheets than Text format is Click drag separator to edit field width A1 y Instrument A B bp C D E F G H J K E M N O a 1 Instrument Name
80. unuo snas sjqeidie lqe1 uodx3 lqe1di lqe1 podwy 01 sl us aas wajs s yJOMION Aunoes 1o sS H ABS AIU91V HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 56 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 1 Instrument configuration Instrument Name Instrument Normal Display 100 Saver Display 50 Save After 30 Minutes Modbus Address Modbus Security Disabled Comms Channel Timeout s Preset Hour Preset Minute Disable Warning Dialogs Show Operator Notes List MAC Address 00 0A 8D 00 20 A0 E ES These fields appear only if Show Operator Notes List is enabled AM Shift started Operator Note 1 Operator Note 12 Apply H Discard Figure 4 3 1 Instrument Configuration menu INSTRUMENT NAME Allows the entry of an alphanumeric name for the recorder up to 20 characters long See fection 3 3 1 for text entry techniques NORMAL SAVER DISPLAY Allows normal and saver display brightnesses to be defined Defaults are Normal 100 Saver 50 SAVE AFTER The number of minutes between 1 and 99 inclusive which are to elapse after a screen operation before the screen brightness changes from normal to saver Default is 30 minutes MODBUS ADDRESS Allows a Modbus address between 1 and 247 to be set up for use when the instrument is acting as a Modbus slave
81. varies from function to function Maths number Allows the user to select the required maths channel for configuration The maximum number of maths channels is selected in the Virtual channels section of the Configura tion Options display described infection 4 3 22 Value This field shows the current value of the selected maths channel If the channel has not yet been configured the value reads Off Reset Now This button appears only after a resettable function has been selected Operation of the button sets the maths value to zero Page 98 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 MATHS CONFIGURATION Cont Function This picklist allows the relevant maths function to be selected In the following description the word channel is used as an umbrella term for input channels maths channels totalisers etc Otf Allows the function to be disabled Once Apply has been actioned all configuration for this Maths number is lost Constant Allows a maths channel to be setto a constant value Add Allows any channel or a constant value to be added to any other Subtract Allows any channel or a constant value to be subtracted from any other Multiply Allows any channel or a constant value to be multiplied by any other Divide Allows any channel or a constant value to be divided by any other Should the value ofthe divi sor pass through zero Maths Channel N error and Maths Chann
82. you have Macintosh clients or POSIX compliant applications DK Cancel Apply Figure 4 4 7e Member of screen HA029324 Page 200 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 5 NETWORK KEY Note This manual does not describe network setup in detail as each network is different In most cases the help of the network administrator or supervisor will be required for example in the al location of valid addresses and passwords Touching the Network key calls a selection box to the display allowing Address or Name to be selected for configuration 4 5 1 Address Figure 4 5 1 shows the address menu fields Archive Save Restore Config Security System 240 Instrument number MAC address 08 00 48 80 00 FO Select specify an IP address Get from BootP Server or IP address lookup Get from BootP Server M Gei from DHCP Server BootP timeout 28 s lt Appears only for Get from BootP Server IP address 192 168 111 222 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default gateway 0 0 0 0 Fig 4 5 2 SNTP server enable SNTP client enable Je SNTP server 149 121 128 179 EuroPRP server enable Active Directory server 123 456 234 1 Appear only if Security Manager option enabled Active Directory security TLS port 636 Y Password Cache expiry 0 Days Apply f Discard Figure 4
83. 0000 C Water temp 1b 10 0000 C Touch alarm to MINI Alarm setpoint Lay call Acknowledge Transfer Absolute alarms only dialogue box Confirm acknowledge of alarm Channelno Channel alarm no descriptor Yes No Current process Alarm type value symbol Figure 3 1 4d Alarm Summary display Page 14 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 1 4 SUMMARY MENU Cont ALARM ACKNOWLEDGEMENT Alarms can be acknowledged individually on a group basis or globally all alarms INDIVIDUAL ALARMS Individual alarms are acknowledged from the alarm summary page by touching the relevant item high lights yellow then touching Yes in the resulting pop up confirmation box Figure 3 1 3a above at tempts to show this process GROUP ALARMS Alarms can be acknowledged on a group basis by calling the alarm summary page for the relevant group then pressing the Options key section 3 2 the Ack Group Alarms key and finally Yes in the resulting pop up confirmation box Figure 3 1 4e below attempts to show this process Alarm Summary Group 1 1 1 Water temp 1a 60 0000 C 68 5277 2 1 Water temp 1b 30 0000 C 23 4531 2 2 Water temp 1b 10 0000 C 23 4531 3 1 Oil pressure 250 000 PSI 260 3425 4 1 1 15 3678 Confirm acknowledge of alarms Yes No Figure 3 1 4e Group Alarm acknowledgement AL
84. 02 20 Batch Number 050406 3 11 04 06 11 11 41 Config Revision 218 Security Revision 3 11 07 06 11 11 34 Batch start Engineer 11 07 06 11 09 34 Alarm s on 1 1 11 07 06 11 09 26 Alarm s off 1 2 11 07 06 11 07 41 Alarm s on 1 2 11 07 06 11 07 34 Alarm s off 1 1 11 07 06 11 05 34 Alarm s on 1 1 11 07 06 11 05 26 Alarm s off 1 2 11 07 06 11 03 41 Alarm s on 1 2 11 07 06 11 03 34 Alarm s off 1 1 11 07 06 11 01 34 Alarm s on 1 1 11 07 06 11 01 26 Alarm s off 1 2 11 07 06 10 59 41 Alarm s on 1 2 11 07 06 10 59 34 Alarm s off 1 1 11 07 06 10 57 34 Batch Number 050406 2 11 07 06 10 55 41 Config Revision 218 Security Revision 3 11 07 06 10 55 34 Batch start Engineer v ox 14 11 00 14 13 40 4 16 20 06 04 05 16 04 05 16 04 05 11 07 06 12 02 20 Alarm s off 2 1 Figure 3 4 2b Horizontal Trend mode message dialogue box The mode can be called by using the down arrow key Alternatively any one of the enabled display modes bection 4 3 4 can be selected using the Roat Meng Goto View key HA029324 Page 33 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 4 3 Circular Trend This allows up to 12 points to be traced as though on a circular chart More than 12 points can be in cluded in the group but only the first 12 traces and their associated face
85. 06 05 01 2006 05 01 Spain 1 05 06 01 may 06 Switzerland Fra 01 05 06 1 mai 06 Switzerland Ger 01 05 06 01 05 2006 Switzerland Ita 01 05 06 1 mag 06 United Kingdom 01 05 06 01 May 06 United States 5 1 06 01 May 06 Uruguay 01 05 06 01 05 2006 Table 4 6 2 Date format examples Page 207 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 6 3 Upgrade This allows 1 New options to be enabled by the entering of a Key Code and or 2 The recorder operating software to be upgraded by reading a file from Compact Flash card or other local or remote source Add new options Instrument Number 8203 Key Code WC8N 9F5E 1D41 Key Code File Source Files From Remote FTP Site Y Upgrade iL Discard Upgrade software Figure 4 6 3a Upgrade menu Instrument Number This number must be quoted when ordering upgrades It is unique to the instrument Key Code Key Code File Source Files From Upgrade and is not user editable If the relevant key code is known it can be entered manually using this field If Key Code File is selected the first line of the file must be the Key Code To selectthe file for reading the Key Code File field is touched to display the file list if necessary refer to below for more details Allows the user to select Remote FTP site or Local Media Initiates upgrade once the upgrade s
86. 1 active required 1 Ack required arm 1 arm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Bit 5 o Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required arm 2 arm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active required 1 Ack required arm 3 arm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required arm 4 IEEE 32 BIT CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA Scaled Enum Access Read Write Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Start Addr Hex Dec A2BA 41658 A2BB 41659 A2BC 41660 Register Length The following table shows addresses for the specified 32 bit floating point values for Maths channel 1 Generally Parameter address for channel N Parameter address for channel 1 36 N 1 decimal Please see the hoteg at the end of this section 4 3 11 CHANNEL 1 Parameter name Ch1 span high Ch1 span low Ch1 Zone high Ch1 Zone low Ch1 Alarm 1 setpoint Ch1 Alarm 2 setpoint Ch 1 Alarm 3 setpoint Ch 1 Alarm 4 setpoint Spare Description Upper span value Display full scale Lower span value display zero Zone upper value of chart width Zone lower value of chart width Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 see note Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 see note Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 see note Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 see note Access Read only Read on
87. 16 bit EtherNet IP SoftLogix5800 EtherNet IP Allen Bradley n 3 112 200 ne PH PSSCENAJA Ethernet Adapter Twisted Pair Media Parker Hanrif Uus zj IME Digital Comm Format Data INT si Drives lt Address Host Name E El IPAddress 192 168 10 2 Add Favorite Host Name Connection Parameters Assembly 0 gu Configuration 1 By Category ByVendor Favorites DK Cancel jw Open Module Properties Cancel Help Figure 4 3 21n Select Generic EtherNet Module Figure 4 3 21p Enter parameters Page 181 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 21 ETHERNET IP OPTION Cont CREATING A NETWORK SCANNER Cont 7 Inthe Module properties page Figure 4 3 21q set RPI to 1000 and click Ok Wil Module Properties LocalENB ETHERNET MODULE 1 1 General Connection Module Info Requested Packet Interval RPI 1000 ms 1 0 3200 0 ms Inhibit Module Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Module Fault Status Offline Figure 4 3 21q Module properties page RECORDER CONFIGURATION 1 Atthe recorder log in section 3 3 1 2 Inthe Operator Config menu touch the Options item at the bottom of the list Check that Ether Net IP is enabled If not the software needs to be upgraded as described infection 4 6 3Jand an Autoconfigure carried out 3 Inthe Operator C
88. 2 Options menu User Guide HA029324 Page 232 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 6 4 3 Access Each of the access levels and user IDs can have Connect from Remote access enabled When this box is checked password entry fields appear as shown in figure 6 4 3 Initially the Remote User Name is the same as the login name or access level Enter the required User name and password then re type the password to ensure it was entered correctly This name and password are required when establishing connection with the host computer Notes 1 If the Auditor 21CFR11 option is fitted the minimum password length is that set in the Security Management menu described in For all recorders the maximum password length is 20 characters 2 For maximum security it is recommended that the remote password and the local password be non identical Access when Fred v New Password Retype Password Connect from remote W Remote user name Fred Remote password Retype remote password Login Disabled Edit own Password Change Alarm Setpoints UN Figure 6 4 3 Remote user access fields HA029324 User Guide Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 233 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 6 5 RUNNING THE PROGRAM Initiate the program using the START button in the normal way Once the program starts a Host name and User name will be requested as de
89. 263 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 5 MEASURING UNIT COMPARISONS Note All the following figures are approximate 7 5 1 XGA screen The physical display screen area available for user screens is approximately 245 mm across and 164 mm high This area can be divided into a 100 x 100 array for percentage measurement or into a pixel array 1024 across by 700 vertically Thus horizontally 10 mm 4 42 pixels or 1 2 45 mm 10 24 pixels or 10 pixels 2 45 mm and Vertically 10 mm 6 43 pixels or 1 1 64 mm 7 pixels or 10 pixels 2 3 mm Centre of screen is given by X 50 Y 50 or by X 512 pixels Y 350 pixels 7 5 2 QVGA screen The physical display screen area available for user screens is approximately 100 mm across and 72 mm high This area can be divided into a 100 x 100 array for percentage measurement or into a pixel array 320 across by 210 vertically Thus horizontally 10 mm 10 32 pixels or 1 1 mm 3 2 pixels or 10 pixels 3 2 mm and Vertically 10 mm 13 29 pixels or 1 72 mm 2 4 pixels or 10 pixels 3 4 mm Centre of screen is given by X 50 Y 50 or by X 160 pixels Y 105 pixels 7 6 ERROR CODES Error codes 1 to F may appear at the top left corner of the screen The following codes are currently imple mented and if more than one occurs at the same time the code numbers are added For example Error code 6 would mean that code
90. 3 setpoint Ch12 Alarm 4 setpoint Spare Description Upper span value display full scale Lower span value display zero Zone upper value of chart width Zone lower value of chart width Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 Note 2 Description Upper span value display full scale Lower span value display zero Zone upper value of chart width Zone lower value of chart width Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 Note 2 Description Upper span value display full scale Lower span value display zero Zone upper value of chart width Zone lower value of chart width Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 Note 2 Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Access Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Start Addr Hex Dec D62B 54827 D62D 54829 D62F 54831 D631 54833 D633 54835 D635 54837 D637 5
91. 4 as register 1 but for points 49 to 64 Register 5 as register 1 but for points 65 to 80 Register 6 as register 1 but for points 81 to 96 Register 7 as register 1 but for points 97 to 112 Register 8 as register 1 but for points 113 to 128 Register 9 as register 1 but for points 129 to 144 Register 10 as register 1 but for points 145 to 160 Register 11 as register 1 but for points 161 to 176 Register 12 as register 1 but for points 177 to 192 Register 13 as register 1 but for points 193 to 208 Register 14 as register 1 but for points 209 to 224 Register 15 as register 1 but for points 225 to 240 Register 16 as register 1 but for points 241 to 256 Identifies the length of a text message to be read Time stamp of the text message to be read UTC format Read text string from instrument display Write a text string to instrument display Boolean Flag Value 0001 starts new batch Boolean Flag Value 0001 stops current batch Batch status flag 1 Running 0 Not running Batch field 1 text string max 60 characters Batch field 2 text string max 60 characters Batch field 3 text string max 60 characters Batch field 4 text string max 60 characters Batch field 5 text string max 60 characters Batch field 6 text string max 60 characters Uint32 Uint 32 String 20 Uint16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 Double String 60 CCCCC
92. 4 Maths category cece qaa enn 4 7 5 Glockcategorysieiistes rea Moai 4 7 6 Counter CATEGORY ur u u u uuu aus teeth kaqa as dl rico sche 4 7 7 Timer cate Verid Qa ya UN A sake ceed 4 7 8 Batch Category espai de 4 79 Recording category 4 7 10 IrendGategory sail nd tada 4 711 Output Category iva u vai ai pio ds EECH obe 4 712 Demand Writes category A713 Alarm category morreria oer cea 4 714 Archive category 4 715 Email category uaia Lees Mie ee eee eee ERES RR ME 4 7 16 Report cateo go Yidis e ebore PERRA ea red SEND REPORT TQ eph teda pete b ele ala acer er tend 6 BRIDGE REMOTE VIEWER 6 1 INTRODUCTION gege pio coeds quya SE ange a VERIA 6 1 1 Minimum PC requirements occcccccccccccccccccc eee SUPPORTED PDA CONFIGURATION 000 000 00000 6 2 CONNECTION DETAILS ra dotes rs ute ala A 6 21 El Neel EES EE 6 2 2 PC To remote recorder vote EEN bee Eyre a 6 2 3 Networked system 6 3 SOFTWARE TINSTALLATION aaa e HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 User Guide Page vii 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE LIST OF CONTENTS CONT Section Page 6 4 RECORDER CONFIGURATION 0occccccccccc nes 232 6 41 E EE EE 232 0 42 OPIO Aere nde vbt ES 232 623 EE 233 6 5 RUNNING THE PROGRAM eege pae a aqa ace Q Was la 234 CHANNEL ALARM SOU
93. 5 1 Network addressing INSTRUMENT NUMBER MAC ADDRESS Unique numbers set up during manufacture to identify the recorder to a remote host or to the recorder manufacturer distributor in case of query IP ADDRESS LOOKUP This field allows an address to be entered for the recorder This can be done either by manually entering an address IP address field below or a network service BootP or DHCP can be used to assign an IP address to the recorder BOOTP TIMEOUT This 28 second period is the maximum time the recorder will wait at power up for a response from the BootP server If no response is received within this time the IP address Subnet mask and Default gate way are all set to or remain at 0 0 0 0 Page 201 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 5 1 NETWORK ADDRESS Cont IP ADDRESS Allows manual entry of the recorder s internet protocol IP address only if Specify an IP address is se lected in the IP address lookup picklist above Notes 1 DHCP attempts to connectto the network continuously until successful Only when successful will the network settings be updated and appear at the address page This can take up to 13 seconds after power up 2 Ittakes 2 to 3 minutes for a DHCP failure to be reported so an instrument alarm would not be generated for 2 to 3 minutes after power up should the connection fail to be established SUBNET MASK This field is
94. 57 PRESET HOUR etis pairs DOE im gon Bua ides PI eee ae ER NR eds 58 PRESET MINUTE zoe nien io EUR hamuu RE ac Dn Sua tua EN d 58 DISABLE WARNING DIALOGS cosmos da toos 58 SHOW OPERATOR NOTES LIS T darte aie ep ORE E RU RR RE teen 58 4 3 2 Group CONQUE OA mania pee ete Copes emg he sya teo 59 GROUP NUMBER codi ata eset dat aces dur uad 60 TREND UNITS etd eb ege Geet eres ud padre Mapa 60 DESCRIP TO Ress exeo testet ar eem ree e re rae wane usa 60 TREND TYPE opinar S RH P reed Shep eee eRe EE p a e eos 60 A B SWITCHING ocios Re eae ee eee PER epee pae des 61 TREND SPEED TREND INTERVAL er poso RIS kan apawaq wa 61 CIRCULAR SETTINGS 1 ries rhet oe e sha oo teca tn dui 61 ET EN EE 61 CIRCULAR CHART FULL ese zm Ga au ana Urt ree b eben Sie 61 STARTAT eios ess st ida uam NE FEES C Mite E Mee 61 GRID TYPES s a s ed skua Soir utem as dia d dea pests 62 RECORDING ENNABLE t5 osea tie hed utente tue Dep wheat heen daa 62 RECORDING SPEED RECORDING INTERVAL 0 00000 eriti 63 TREND HISTORY DURATION 00000000 ette 63 ARCHIVE TO MEDIA ENABLE ARCHIVE VIA FTP ENABLE 63 ALARM MESSAGE u usss a hee de 63 ACK MESSAGE uyu doe phat pee edit ra a ako sunk ER EMEN ae 63 POINT TXPE SELECTION x3 ettet RR aa tomcat gi lk E Ee a 64 4 3 3 Channel Alarm configuration isses 65 CHAN NEL NUMBER 22 lu aaa abate heb e eerte Sepe dig epe RR Ed 66 VALUE 12 cups coder et eei dedere NACE A die presen a e cx ap dte Mela AoA a
95. A AEE SE 222 Component info on screens 244 Paddington trt pe eene 254 Component list cacon miis 241 Speed ititervala 2 ccr rer rie tert renti nsec 61 COAL OM snes Ee 240 Speed interval B job eroe teen 222 Mage Erro Neus ee hito pide bts 258 Del n e etm o Pro made 254 linporting Exportihg aei meinem 239 em 60 Key descriptions sss 242 243 Verticales e PUER EO bas 351 Number Of niece nnb nana 76 le 183 Properties pages n Satu mau 242 A 12 Quicleentry a ase iret e eheu ie es 244 A E aay Huss Oeseveabaeae 70 Truncation of display values sse 8 V lettre 12 Value U Charges unus haapa kusa nutu us 254 jo OS 27 A 173 210 A tee E Eege EE 254 Unable to connect to host sss 237 Version numbers oes cccsseesececscesssevsansrenepevsssensaesevavncnsvsey daneees 215 Unable to resolve hostname aa 237 Vertical Unack d Alignment aee irte mne Hen 254 Alati Ot groups aes avene o dirias ror ita 83 Bargraph display mode sitos iris 38 Point alarm entere t tenete idet 82 Enable gg rette eerte 75 Unconnected Message Manager 173 210 User screens eene tra 254 Unconnected messaging 173 a E 254 O CRY 240 Minor DivisiONS ett emet eta 255 Conversion Pressure EE 111 Trend display mode 30 Etage EE aes 254 Enable inicia 75 ScalBP oos ied omnem dons 129 Us Screens 256 Urilatchiedl seen coh Dr erm teo ta rete eie RE 70 We DEE Eeer
96. Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15 Spare Ch4 Alarms A1E4 41444 Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Note PV access is Read Write for any point configured with Slave Comms as its Type or Function Otherwise PV access is Read only HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 User Guide Page 289 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 3 CHANNEL RUN TIME DATA Cont CHANNEL 5 Parameter name Ch5 value Ch5 status Ch5 Alarms CHANNEL 6 Parameter name Ch6 value Ch6 status Description Current process value PV Channel status 0 Good PV 1 Channel off 2 Over range 3 Under range 4 Hardware error Alarm information Bit 0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Bit 1 0 No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3 Spare Bit 4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Bit5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7 Spare Bit 8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Bit 9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11 Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15 Spare 5 Ranging error 6 Overflow 7 Bad PV 8 No data Description Current process value PV
97. Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Read only Bit 1 0 No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Read Write Bit 3 Spare Bit 4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Read only Bit5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Read Write Bit 7 Spare Bit 8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Read only Bit 9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Read Write Bit 11 Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Read only Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Read Write Bit 15 Spare Parameter name Description Access CHANNEL 2 Start Addr Register Hex Dec Length Channel 2 value Current process value PV See note F8C7 63687 Channel 2 status Channel status Read only F8C9 63689 0 Good PV 5 Ranging error 1 Channel off 6 Overflow 2 Over range 7 Bad PV 3 Under range 8 No data 4 Hardware error Channel 2 alarms Alarm information Uint16 F8CA 63690 Bit 0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Read only Bit 1 0 No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Read Write Bit 3 Spare Bit 4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Read only Bit 5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Read Write Bit 7
98. Alarm 4 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 4 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Scaled Scaled Scaled Scaled Enum Uint16 Enum String_5 String_8 String_8 String_20 Uint16 Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Start Addr Hex Dec 058B 1419 058C 1420 058D 1421 058E 1422 058F 1423 0590 1424 0591 1425 0592 1426 0595 1429 0597 1431 059B 1435 059F 1439 05A3 1443 05A7 1447 05B1 1457 05BB 1467 O5BC 1468 O5BD 1469 O5F9 1529 O5FA 1530 O5FB 1531 O5FC 1532 0606 1542 0607 1543 0608 1544 0609 1545 0613 1555 0614 1556 0615 1557 0616 1558 0620 1568 0621 1569 0622 1570 0623 1571 Register Length P PHH 2 ech oo Notes 1 For maths totalisers and counters see the relevant option description 2 If an alarm s Setpoint Source section 4 3 3 is set to anything other than Constant the value re turned will be the previously configured constant value User Guide Page 284 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC REC
99. Bit2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3 Spare Bit 4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Bit5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7 Spare Bit 8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Bit9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11 Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15 Spare 5 Ranging error 6 Overflow 7 Bad PV 8 No data Description Current process value PV Channel status 0 Good PV 1 Channel off 2 Over range 5 Ranging error 6 Overflow 7 Bad PV Uint16 Scaled Enum See note Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Access See note Read only Start Addr Hex Dec ATF7 41463 A1F8 41464 A1F9 41465 Start Addr Hex Dec ATFA 41466 A1FB 41467 Register Length Register Length 3 Under range 8 No data 4 Hardware error Alarm information Bit 0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Read only Bit 1 0 No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Read Write Bit 3 Spare Bit4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Bit5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit
100. Ch10 status Description Current process value PV Channel status 0 Good PV 1 Channel off 2 Over range 3 Under range 4 Hardware error Alarm information Bit 0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Bit 1 O No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3 Spare Bit 4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Bit5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7 Spare Bit 8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Bit9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11 Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15 Spare 5 Ranging error 6 Overflow 7 Bad PV 8 No data Description Current process value PV Channel status 0 Good PV 1 Channel off 2 Over range 5 Ranging error 6 Overflow 7 Bad PV Uint16 Scaled Enum See note Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Access See note Read only Start Addr Hex Dec A1F1 41457 A1F2 41458 A1F3 41459 Start Addr Hex Dec ATF4 41460 ATF5 41461 Register Length Register Length 3 Under range 8 No data 4 Hardware error Alarm information
101. Channel Horizontal Bargraph ch_hor_bar Goto Canvas Save Close More 18 Touch the component picklist field and select another bargraph 19 In a similar way to that described for Bar 1 Component Property Editor Screent a enter the identifier Bar 2 Ace oe covy ch hor bar 4 2Y b select Channel 2 from the picklist ERG xim C enter a Y value of 12 Channel 2 Channel 2 Y d enter width 100 height 10 EEN SE 20 Similarly configure Bar 3 and Bar 4 using the Warem S appropriate Y values 24 and 36 and Channel See 7 selection 3 and 4 ENEE 21 Finally press Save then Close to reveal the ties s display page Component Type Channel Horizontal Bargraph ch hor bar Goto Canvas Save Close More Tx s Channel 1 0 4187 c EI REIR ppc qeu 0 0000 I 1 0000 Channel 2 0 3316 c 10 0000 T 1 0000 Channel 3 0 1427 a 1 0000 Channel 4 0 6293 c SE Channel 4 0487c 0 0000 0 2000 h 0 4000 n 0 6000 y 0 8000 1 0000 13 59 02 11 07 06 Figure 7 2 3d Complete user screen User Guide HA029324 Page 246 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 2 4 SCREEN CREATION PROCEDURE Cont In order to provide a degree of contrast the background
102. Colour Red Green Blue Decimal Red 255 Blue 0 Green 0 Honey Violet Russet Dark Blue Jade Magenta Dusky Rose Yellow Powder Blue Dark Red Avocado Indigo Dark Brown Aegean Cyan Aubergine Dark Orange Pale Yellow Hyacinth Dark Green Sugar Pink Bluebell 85 Orange 255 Pink 255 Buttermilk 255 Table B4 sheet 1 Colour definitions 0 to 27 0 0 255 95 0 95 0 95 255 63 0 233 0 63 63 255 0 63 255 0 63 31 31 95 159 255 0 SO 0 N O w CO N No NO NM SY NO N Ny NO S S SB os s amp s a M OV oO 0 NBS F O 0 OO N O G A 0 N gt O HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 User Guide Page 329 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B4 COLOUR SELECTION Cont Colour Red Green Blue Decimal Terracotta 170 63 Blue Babe 85 95 Lime 0 Blue Jive 85 Cucumber 0 EuroGreen 67 Wheatgerm Sea Blue Ginger Aqua Pool Pale Red Pale Blue Lilac Sky Blue Wild Moss Turquoise Pale Green Coffee Wicker Black Dark Dark Grey Dark Grey Grey Light Light Dark Grey Light Dark Grey Light Grey Light Light Grey White Table B4 sheet 2 Colour definitions 28 to 55 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 User Guide Page 330 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B5 TCP PORT NUMBERS The following TCP
103. Connection resources are reserved and configured using communications services available via the UCMM The process of opening a connection is called Connection Origination The node that initiates the con nection establishment request is called the Connection Originator or Originator and the node that responds to the establishment request is called a Connection Target or Target Ethernet IP has two types of messaging connections EXPLICIT MESSAGING CONNECTIONS These are point to point relationships that are established to facilitate request response transaction between two nodes These connections are general purpose in nature and can be used to reach any network accessible items within a device Explicit messaging connections use TCP IP services to move messages across Ethernet IMPLICIT I O DATA CONNECTIONS These are established to move application specific I O data at regular intervals These connections are typically set up as one to many relationships in order to take full advantage of the producer consumer multicast model Implicit messaging uses UDP IP resources to establish multicast data Page 173 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 21 ETHERNET IP OPTION Cont CONFIGURATION Figure 4 3 21a shows the configuration page Import Table Export Table Status I O Table Input output 1 Import Table eiptable Export Table eiptable Stat
104. D553 54611 D555 54613 D557 54615 D559 54617 D55B 54619 D55D 54621 D55F 54623 D561 54625 D563 54627 Start Addr Hex Dec D577 54647 D569 54649 D57B 54651 D57D 54653 D57F 54655 D581 54657 D583 54659 D585 54661 D587 54663 Start Addr Hex Dec D59B 54683 D59D 54685 D59F 54687 D5A1 54689 D5A3 54691 D5A5 54693 D5A7 54695 D5A9 54697 D5AB 54699 Register Length NJ NJ N N N N N N N Register Length NJ NJ N N NJ N N N N Register Length NJ NJ N N N N N N N Notes 1 For maths and see the relevant option description 2 If an alarm s Setpoint Source section 4 3 3 is set to anything other than Constant the value re turned will be the previously configured constant value User Guide HA029324 Page 304 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 7 IEEE 32 BIT CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA Cont CHANNEL 7 Parameter name Ch7 span high Ch7 span low Ch7 Zone high Ch7 Zone low Ch7 Alarm 1 setpoint Ch7 Alarm 2 setpoint Ch7 Alarm 3 setpoint Ch7 Alarm 4 setpoint Spare CHANNEL 8 Parameter name Ch8 span high Ch8 span low Ch8 Zone high Ch8 Zone low Ch8 Alarm 1 setpoint Ch8 Alarm 2 setpoint Ch8 Alarm 3 setpoint Ch8 Alarm 4 setpoint Spare CHANNEL 9 Parameter name Ch9 span high Ch9 span low Ch9 Zone high Ch9 Zone low Ch9 Alarm 1 setpoin
105. Dec A9CO 43456 A9C1 43457 A9C3 43459 A9C5 43461 A9CF 43471 A9D9 43481 A9DA 42482 A9DB 42483 A9DC 42484 A9DD 42485 A9DE 42486 A9DF 42487 A9E0 42488 A9E1 42489 A9E2 42490 A9E3 42491 A9E4 42492 A9E5 42493 A9E6 42494 A9E7 42495 A9E8 43496 A9E9 43497 A9EA 43498 A9EE 43502 AAOC 43532 AA2A 43562 AAA8 43592 AA66 43622 AA67 43623 AA68 43624 AA69 43625 AA87 43655 AAAS 43685 AAC3 43715 AAE1 43745 AAFF 43775 AB1D 43805 AB3B 43835 AB59 43865 AB77 43895 AB95 43925 ABB3 43955 ABD1 43985 Register Length User Guide Page 296 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 4 GROUP DATA Cont GROUP 4 Parameter name Grp4 Trend type Grp4 Trend rate Grp4 Archive rate Grp4 Descriptor Spare Grp4 Channels in group See table 8 3 for point types Grp4 Text length Grp4 Text time stamp Grp4 Read text Reserved Grp4 Write text Reserved Grp4 Batch start Grp4 Batch stop Grp4 Batch running Grp4 Text field 1 Reserved Grp4 Text field 2 Reserved Grp4 Text field 3 Reserved Grp4 Text field 4 Reserved Grp4 Text field 5 Reserved Grp4 Text field 6 Reserved Spare Description Trend enhancements 0 Interpolation enabled 1 Adaptive recording enabled Trend update rate in milliseconds Archive to flash rate in milliseconds Group descriptor 20
106. Earlier messages Later messages Refresh places at the top of the screen any messages which have occurred since the Message Log page was last entered or since the last Refresh If earlier or later messages have been selected then Refresh is replaced by Earlier messages or Later messages as appropriate and operating the key calls the next or previously displayed group of 100 messages to the display respectively The option menu can also be called by touching the option key In this case a Enter History calls the current Trend History display as described in and b Because no message is highlighted the Full Details key is not enabled Notes 1 Selecting Enter History whilst either Earlier Messages or Later Messages is highlighted calls the current History page 2 Ifthe Option Menu has timed out leaving a message highlighted and the option key is oper ated then this is equivalent to reselecting the message Page 20 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 1 4 SUMMARY MENU Cont REMOVE MEDIA This key is provided to help ensure that any local memory storage device is removed only when it is safe to do so Touching the key results in either an OK to remove archive media or a DO NOT REMOVE Archive Me dia message as appropriate See figure 3 1 4i Caution Removal of memory devices whilst archi
107. Figure 4 3 12 below shows a typical enabled totaliser configuration page Totaliser Number Allows any of the available totalisers to be selected from the picklist for configura tion Enable Allows the user to enable disable the totaliser Value Shows the dynamic current value of the selected totaliser Total of Allows an input channel or a maths channel to be selected as the source to be total ised Low Cutoff The value of the source channel in engineering units below which it is notto be total ised High Cutoff The value of the source channel in engineering units above which it is notto be total ised Units The totalised units e g m Preset Allows the entry of a 10 character positive or nine character negative value from which the totaliser is to start counting Direction of counting is defined by the sign of the Unit scaler viz increment decrement Preset now Operation of this key initiates the totaliser preset HA029324 Page 128 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 12 TOTALISER CONFIGURATION Cont Totaliser Number 1 Totaliser 1 j t Select totaliser Enable ki Value 123456 Units totaliser Total of Channel 1 Y Select channel etc to be totalised Low cut off o ch units Units of channel High cut off 999999 ch Unite being totalised Units Units Preset o Units totaliser Preset now Period scaler 1 Unit scaler 1 Descriptor Tot
108. GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont ZIRCONIA PROBE Cont OXYGEN POTENTIAL The oxygen potential of an atmosphere is a measurement of its ability to oxidise or reduce For any ele ment a value of oxygen potential free energy of formation is known Above this value the material will oxidise below it no oxidisation will occur Figure 4 3 11t below is a free energy diagram for a number of oxidising processes Oxygen potential is given by the equation Op 0 00457 x T xlogOp Where Op Required oxygen potential in kilocalories T Probe temperature in Kelvins Op Partial pressure of oxygen in the reference atmosphere in atmospheres It can be shown that because the oxygen potential of air is essentially constant over the range 870 to 1450 kelvins the zirconia probe output is proportional to the oxygen potential of an atmosphere accord ing to E 10 84 x T 40 mV in the range 870 to 1450 K Thus itis possible to measure oxygen potential directly from a zirconia probe using a standard input channel of the instrument scaled in units of oxygen potential A typical configuration might be Input Type mV Input low 40 Input high 1124 Scale low 100 Scale high 0 Units kCal Such a configuration would be suitable over the temperature range 873 to 1473 K 600 to 1200 C Page 120 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont ZIRCONIA PROBE Co
109. Gelecton aaa diedi 64 Retry Modbus slave iens 145 EE 168 REtry Time ges dada aii 168 Send on power uptanneate soplan 164 Retype passWOord siiecseticemtin riesen 196 Send Report Oran 225 ReversediGoloUt utet teer E 253 Serial EE EE 325 RCSA a E A 243 Serial communications T a 139 Revision Numbers uni 215 Configuration IYO Su sua nn am EE 341 Right key EE 22 Go Vie EEN 6 Rolling Average asss 100 108 Message information ime 142 Root key MEN aa tee teet retten 22 335 Set Tells idle la RC ED S 319 hoic 61 Serial Modbus slave 145 e rS 34 Solo atadas 141 Round Rectangle mater nre rte eriinetnon 259 Service level ACCESS a 25 Set clock permission eene 188 S Setting the time and date 207 Share socke et u u teris nerit pese gibse dna 145 148 Safety notes sasa EE tement 27 SC erer eg Eegenen Eege eee Shortest trend history reet trees 78 armple and hold das pida 100 Show Sample fate Sasserra dee laica 319 Batch Entry let 92 Saturated Steam Disk settigi usted ettet red 78 Heat Consumed En 113 Operator Notes let 58 Heat Flow sss 112 Title Batu onde p ure c OE RE OO Mass How 110 Show Errors key Sii tai its 50 243 A AN CO As E a 50 Ge STEE 222 C Op exem Save Restore SE EE IS RE 49 Slowing recording interval Key MENU os aissis tss pedem E Ee SE 189 Body Only ER Divisions Weieren 66 253 eer SIM
110. Group b play p p p lt t Select range of messages to be output Select Active Inactive or Acknowledgement Figure 4 7 3 Message job menu layout 4 7 4 Maths category If Maths channels amp ection 4 3 11 are enabled the following jobs become available to applicable func tions Reset Sets the selected maths channel value to zero Disable Stops historical functions such as Fvalue Stopwatch and Rolling Average from accumulating fur ther values When the function is subsequently re enabled the function re starts from its pre disabled value Disable has no effect on other functions Switch toB Causes the relevant maths channel to copy source B instead of its normal source A see 4 3 11 for further details Trigger Used to initiate a Sample and hold function see fection 4 3 11 for further details Job Number D Select Reset Disable Category Math AA to B or Trigger Action Reset Y Math Math 1 Y E Select Required Maths channel On Active V Select Active Inactive or Acknowledgement Figure 4 7 4 Maths job menu layout HA029324 Page 218 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 7 5 Clock category This job causes the System Clock to be Preset to the value entered in Instrument Configuration Preset Hour Preset Minute Section 4 3 1 This job can be used to synchronise a number of recorders as follows a For each recorder set
111. IP addresses supplied by IT department or the Domain manager or Supervisor Notes 1 Any one or more of the above items may be overwritten if IP address lookup is set to Obtain from BootP Server or Obtain from DHCP server as described under Address above 2 If Domain Name Server is enabled but either no DNS server is connected to the network or neither the DNS Primary nor secondary server can be found it can take up to four minutes for the system to timeout During this period the recorder s user interface touchscreen will not respond HA029324 Page 204 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 6 SYSTEM 198ys 1no4Ae nuau uoneinBijuo2 uieis s Sot alnbly pa qeua uodo suo dl 19N 49413 J uo Jeaddy peaysul sieadde UNJO U2IUM Jaye sasead Ape aZessaw Jaye spuoras AIJ 1OJ SUIEAJ SSaJppe dl 68 681 891 26L y SUIHO pejqeue uondo suo eutlo c Jayse Ji juo Jeaddy Ze 081 Le Levi L euiio z LOD Zeit MON uld Sta J YUN JO q9 g eni ess sonsouBeiq 1eu19u13 SsonsouBeiq suuujoS Je1se N snye1s Buld 8Z L E LEE 6v L 10H aUullO vy dL Burbessey woridx3 euiHO Z dOL Bulbessay uordx3 vL 631 L31 671 L dOL Buibesse 1911 dx3 euio BuiBesseyw O 191 du euiuo NWON 1eBeue N aessa p lo uuooun Slu lO dI 19NJeUur3 1ueio snqpo ejowey 1ueio snqpoNW ajowey We snqpoNW away
112. Input 1 t19 2007 y sa cantes reto eee cibus 174 Home 2 74 elef o eee e PEE den diet eed 5 Horizontal Bargraph oo usa naa npa haar 256 Installation LatcheaimaxiMuUM sora sico ias 100 Category mesoterapia 317 Latched minim tm ni oorr e eos 100 Electrical anotadas 5 Maximus daras a 99 MechanicalLu aca dee ee 2 left ten DEE 99 Inist c l COrE niii eee qe reden tres ts 124 En aa s m u e uu ici E ados 9 60 Inst Calibrati n polis us u andador 124 leet TEE 150 249 le UE p A O O 124 Numeric display ett rte 257 Instrument Report destinations Sege 225 Alarm O enone weer arene pe 23 Definition laa 10 Selection for COMMS messages 141 EVentsOUFCe oit tn rete tede eias 83 en Le 256 tele TEE 10 Vertical bargrapbh iue secet 256 Sur 13 COMIGUI AL Beersel 57 H Configuration Mel tanda paid 338 Data MODBUS E 275 Hardware version sss 215 A ana aasienealias 57 Height EE EES 249 Embed in EET 87 High Priority interval 144 N mboef asses iro ep o inet rd 201 High Selina incita 100 Embed in message 87 STO CT 352 rre MR MM DM QNM 215 Amount Ol stes apas O date E EI EE 29 63 Insufficient non volatile memory 10 MAXIMUM ia 29 Internal flash application required repair 10 Home InteunalflashiASCFegns u n pia 10 Group S EE dE EE EES eege 74 Internal flash user is full KEE 10 Key UON TS IAEA SEI ARIAS ARRAIGADA 22 I
113. Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 18 DEMAND WRITES Cont WRITING TO A SPECIFIC REGISTER When User Defined is selected or if the slave device is Unknown then a register can be defined which can be written to directly The register addresses must be found from the documentation supplied with the slave device Write number 1 Write 1 Fa Select the write to Enable y Demand Type Master Comms y Select Master Status de Demand Write Slave 1 Furn 1 Recorder y dl Parameter User Defined Y Function Code Preset Multiple reg 16 Y Register 248 Data Type Float 32 Bit v Descriptor Write 1 Source Constant Y Default Oo lt q Enter default value Allow Constant Edits y e allows user to edit E Disable Retries lt If enabled the write is attempted only once Send On Power Up Write is triggered when the unit powers up Apply Discard Figure 4 3 18c Demand Writes to specific register CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS This contains details of parameters unique to Demand Writes to specific registers Other parameters are as described above Function Code Allows the Modbus function code 6 or 16 to be selected See the documentation supplied with the slave for a list of supported Modbus codes for this instrument see section 8 2 1 Demand writes of a single 8 or 16 bit
114. MKT Similar in operation to described above except that the MKT is derived from a specified group of points rather than a single point For each sample period the maximum and minimum values reached by any point s within the specified group are saved and used as inputs to the Equation Maths Number 1 Math 1 Y Value 0 0000 Units Function Group MKT Y Source 1 Group 1 Y Number of samples 3 Sample interval 0 125 s Heat of Activation 83 144 kJ mole Unit n Apply Discard Figure 4 3 11m Group MKT configuration page Page 114 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont RATE OF CHANGE The equation solved is dPV In In dt P xR Where dPV dt Rate of change of PV with time In Input value this time In Input value last time i e this time P P Sample period i e this time last time in seconds Only periods that are a multiple of 0 125 seconds are accepted R Scaling factor Generally R is the number of seconds in the required per unit time value For example if R 1 the rate is per second if R 60 the rate is per minute if R 3600 the rate is per hour Note For channels being read over Modbus the priority intervals set in the Modbus Master configuration menu section 4 3 14 may cause the readings to be inaccurate or to be contin
115. OTS ie an bus may u Saa una a delete antes Anh dee tansa s 137 INTRODUC TION 5 3 rtt dr tds EE A RC fn 137 CONFIGURATION e a ala 137 SELF START EXAMPLE dace Eee e RUPEE Ya eer ee ias 138 ele eg EE 139 INTRODUCTION u t de eg g et ere neon ecco A EN 139 TERMINATION AND BIASSING 139 CONFIGURATION coso canoa aaa 140 CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS 000 ccc cee e 141 MESSAGING INFORMATION rarei ren rmi to e rh e ger Pa he RP eet 142 MODBUS ADDRESS uyupi sol sa EC EFC CT e 142 4 316 Master comms ssec we Ia e A 143 INTRODUCTIONS oa ao doeet e Seco E eec n deter Debo gr 143 MASTER COMMS CONFIGURATION MENU 144 DETECT THIS SLAVE o y meret dora eae ETE id EHE E 145 DETECTALLSLAVES ia ra ette SES RM LES RI ES AN 146 SHARE SOCKET KEE 148 MASTER COMMS CHANNEL CONFIGURATION 149 SN Ka KI KEE RRE 155 MASTER COMMS CHANNEL CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE 157 MASTER CHANNEL 1 SETUP eege Re EE PE Re PEE REY 158 MASTER CHANNEL 2 SETUP see re Res ai ednek shades PER Rad f dn 159 MASTER OUTPUT SETUP 00 1 u D S u a 160 SLAVE INPUT CHANNEL 1 SETUP 5 24 l uuu a 160 MASTER COMMS DIAGNOSTICS 0c cece cee o 161 4 317 Output channels meras seas chee E ee guano dis 162 4 3 18 Demand Writes 163 DEMAND WRITE CONFIGURATION 163 WRITING TO A SPECIFIC REGISTER
116. Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 CONFIG KEY Cont pueosiq A ddy dN jewog uo pues Soa lqesiq ynejaq M 10113 UO A supa 1uejsuo molly O unej q guueyO sanos 93uM 101duoseg L jequinwN lutod A l uueuO ed ulod AZ 1ulodjes uue v 1ejeurejeg A 19p1098H WINS L enejs ayu mM pueuieq MO SNIS A SWWWOD Jop ad pueweg A lqeua A amm L Jequnu IUM 8l ey uon es s m puewag p1eeus A IAJ AO nuau uoneinBijuoO qey einBi4 pieosiq A ddy A eet le A Luue y ueuo jequinu jueuinujsu eureu jueuinasu jou OO Josues duet eJojs Doc uue e ams po ewa dLWS Leu A Hews 1 II o It S4 uo juerdioeg puz JO sse ppe reuu a 1SII Su UO juerdioeg 151 yo sseuppe rew 9 sn JEquUNN 187 ege A HST L spuooes 09 juas eq oj seDesseui einjrej jreur e yolym oj sseuppe jreur e 4p10981 jo sseJppy dill gd eureu Janes mew SBessaN Bess N epnjou pol joe qns 09010Jd Jojduoseq Jequinw pewg ondoy _ GER gidou zidoy doy Jojduoseq 4ST jueidioeH au Am O Souz Jepueg JequinwN Od 1 A148S Ie 61 t u0n295 ew pieosiq Addy A rewon ej Is peigesip puaxno A Pal pieosiq Addy
117. Range High The required Units string is entered in the Scale units text entry box OFFSET Allows a fixed value to be added to or subtracted from the process variable Recorder accuracy figures no longer apply if an offset is included SCALE TYPE This field allows None Linear or Log to be selected as scale type For linear scales the number of major minor scale divisions can be selected This does not affect the chart grid divisions which is set up as a part of Group configuration section 4 3 2 Figures 4 3 3b1 and 4 3 3b2 show various examples NONE Channels with Scale Type selected to None appear with no scale information in any display mode LINEAR Channels with Scale Type Linear appear with scale information in all display modes except numeric The number of major and minor divisions can be selected from subsequent fields Examples are shown in figure 4 3 3b1 Page 66 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 3 CHANNEL ALARM CONFIGURATION Cont SCALE TYPE Cont SCALE DIVISIONS MAJOR Appears for Linear Scale types only Setting major divisions to 1 means that the scale consists only of zero and full scale Setting Major divisions to 2 means that the scale has divisions at zero 50 and full scale and so on Intermediate scale values appear at major divisions if there is sufficient space Default 10 for large frame recorders o
118. Sense Not Source 2 the event is active whilst the batch is not running DESCRIPTOR Allows a text string to be entered as the event title See for text entry techniques JOB NUMBER Select the required job number for this event CATEGORY Select the required job to be carried out when the channel is in alarm e g Enable recording See fection BJjtor a description of job categories WHILE ON Allows the action of the alarm job to be chosen as a while active while inactive or while unacknowledged for continuous jobs e g Speed interval B or b on going active on going inactive or on acknowledgement for one shot jobs e g increment counter See also figure 4 3 3g and associated text EVENT EXAMPLE An event is to be active whenever Channel 1 Alarm 1 is active whilst Channel 3 alarm 2 is not active Source 1 Point alarm On Channel 1 Alarm 1 Source 2 Point alarm On Channel 3 Alarm 2 Source 1 Sense Source 1 Operator And Source 2 Sense Not Source 2 It is possible to achieve the same result by inverting both Source senses and using the Nor operator Page 84 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 7 Event Buttons This configuration item appears only if the Screen Builder Option is fitted section 7 The Event Button configuration menu allows a number of Push Buttons to be set up for use as event sources Buttons can be defined as Unlatched push
119. Serial port IP Address 149 121 30 0 M Modbus address IP Address field appears only if Ethernet selected as Network type ch Detect This Slave Profile Third Party M Timeout 250 ms Retry 3 Max Block Size 124 Register Share Socket v Login Required Y lt Appears only if Profile slave type supports login security Username Username Password Appear only if Login Required is selected Apply Discard Detect All Slaves Figure 4 3 16a Master Comms configuration menu CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS Priority intervals This allows three levels of update rate to be entered These rates are used in point configuration to define how often a value is read In order to optimise the perform ance of the serial link it is recommended that the slowest rate consistent with require ments be selected The interval is entered in multiples of 1 8th second 0 125 seconds In some cases two update rates can be defined For example when reading a Process Value PV channel from a slave it is possible to set the reading frequency of the PV to the highest rate available but other less frequently changing values scale low high for example can be read at a slower rate Store Diagnostics If enabled is keptin non volatile memory and is thus retained during power cycling Slave A picklist of slaves initially called Remote Device N When t
120. Series6000 startup sounds Once a sound has been im ported create or edit the profile UHV file The new file should appear in the list Select it and start The default sounds are 1 Buzzer 2 Car Alarm 3 None 4 Police Siren 5 Siren Fast 6 Siren Slow 7 Something wrong 8 Train bell HA029324 User Guide Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 235 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 6 6 OPERATION 6 6 1 Display Modes When the program starts the Home page as set up in Configuration Views is displayed on the computer screen By click dragging on the bottom right hand corner of the display the page size can be ed ited as required It is thus possible for the computer to log on to say four different recorders and to display their values simultaneously in different parts of the screen The up down arrow keys allow the enabled display modes to be cycled through and the root menu Goto View menu allows a specific display mode to be chosen for the current group The Home display page can be returned to at any time by operating the Root Menu key followed by the Home key Note Any changes to the recorder s group configuration are reflected immediately at the Host PC s screen 6 6 2 Alarm acknowledgement The alarm acknowledgement read messages function are as described in 6 6 3 Status line The status line at the top of the screen reflects the status of the instrument to which the recorder is connec
121. Spare Bit 8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Read only Bit 9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Read Write Bit 11 Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Read only Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Read Write Bit 15 Spare Parameter name Description Access Note PV access is Read Write for any point configured with Slave Comms as its Type or Function Otherwise PV access is Read only HA029324 User Guide Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 307 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 8 IEEE AREA CHANNEL RUN TIME DATA Cont CHANNEL 3 Parameter name Channel 3 value Channel 3 status Channel 3 Alarms CHANNEL 4 Parameter name Channel 4 value Channel 4 status Description Current process value PV Channel status 0 Good PV 1 Channel off 2 Over range 3 Under range 4 Hardware error Alarm information Bit 0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Bit 1 O No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3 Spare Bit 4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Bit5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7 Spare Bit 8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Bit9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11
122. St 5 lt e D y Zo gt lt z E 0 D o e O D Py stem Section 4 1 Allows manual archiving of data ko a memory device or to a remote host FTP transfer Section 4 2 Allows new configurations to be created and saved and saved configura tions to be restored Save Restore also allows the importing and exporting of User Linearisation Tables and User screens if the Screen Builder option is fitted Section 4 3 This is the major channel alarm option etc area of configuration Section 4 4 Allows passwords to be entered and edited and allows the Engineer level password holder to enable disable areas of configuration to Operator level pass word holders New users can be added with their own user names passwords and access level permissions Section 4 5 This area sets up the IP address host names etc used in FTP transfer Bridge and SNTP applications Section 4 6 Allows a Time and date to be set Clock b Language date time format time zone and daylight saving start and finish dates to be set een c Software upgrades to be carried out Upg SI d A page to be displayed if Master Comms option fitted and enabled e A Network diagnostics page to be displayed Ethernet diagnostics f Configuration items e g input channels to be copied to speed up configuration g Search criteria to be entered to allow the user to locate trigger sources for a specific job Job search h The a
123. The Root menu Goto View Message log key calls the Message Log page for the current group to the screen Alternatively Message Log can be selected from the Alarm Message and Media menu but in this case the user must select a Group for the Message Log display from a pop up Goto Group menu See fection 3 1 4 for full details of the message log Page 24 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 3 FIRST SWITCH ON When power is applied the recorder initialises and once this process is complete the home page is displayed It is unlikely that this will contain any useful information because the input channels will not as have been configured to suit the type of input signals being applied to them as described in Notes 1 There is no on off switch associated with the recorder 2 Date time and the message Power Up are printed on the chart each time power is applied to the recorder followed by a similar message giving Config Revision and Security Revision 3 Ared line is drawn across the width of the chart at power up The recorder has four security levels as follows Logged out Initially no access to recorder configuration is possible Only Archive Login security and the System About functions can be accessed via the root menu Limited or full access can be permitted from Engineer level Operator No access to recorder configuration is possible until acces
124. To determine the software version fitted to the recorder the About screen in the System menu may be accessed as described in section 4 6 4 HA029324 User Guide Issue 5 Oct 10 Page i 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE PAPERLESS GRAPHICS RECORDER USER GUIDE LIST OF CONTENTS Section Page SAFETY NOTES caian adas dera 1 SYMBOLS USED ON THE EQUIPMENT LABELLING__ a sa akui eee 1 T INTRODUCTION L u ocn aa sadam as RR GR CR Aa 2 1 1 UNPACKING THE RECORDER ice n RE E ER daniel daa 2 2 INSTALLATION vio iria ra ukasti lada dae ido 2 2 1 MECHANIGAL INSTALLATION corran RUE and EE nro nnn EOR le 2 2 2 ELECTRICALINSTALLA TIO Nociones 5 2 24 Supply voltage WEIDEREN S 5 POWER REQUIREMENTS vocacion iso ii 5 KE EE EED INDICATORS eue oaa ge et BA EE beds we Pie and 6 2 3 USB CONNECTOR EE 7 ZU CARDO EE 7 3 PROCESS VARIABLE DISPLAY 8 TRUNCATION OF NUMERIC VALUES issssssssssssseee eere 8 CURRENT TRACE ALARM ICONS ENEE AER kets 9 S TL STATUS BAR Sis tasa 9 31 1 Current access levell u ur ua e Reate 9 3 1 2 Page NaMe scies heres a dede ae ci aa RR da Ro 9 341 3 Alarmindicati n EE e RI er ERE ia 10 INSTRUMENTADA Misael A nee Bret aid 10 CHANNELALARM 2 erri RA desd 11 CHANGE BATTERY 00 cece eee mee 11 El CON EE 11 e ee 12 CONFIGURATION LOCKED INDICATOR uuu usaasisa eee 12 TRIAL MODE INDICATOR iuris pa teed se echt En ende Sanam 12 EA SU
125. Type Latched and allows entry of the legend which is to appear on the button when in its active on state Require Signing If this field is enabled then the button can be used only by those whose Can Sign permission is enabled in the menu described in section 4 4 1 When the but ton is operated in the User screen a signature page appears which requires the entry of the correct password for the selected user and of a note which would normally be used to give the reason for the operation Require Authorisation This field appears only if Require Signing is enabled If Require Authorisation is ena bled then the button can be used only by those whose Can Authorize permission is enabled in the menu described in section 4 4 1 When button operation is attempted a signature page figure 4 4 2b appears which requires the entry of the correct password for the selected user and a note which would normally be used to give the reason for the change Notes 1 Require Signing and Require Authorisation appear only if the Auditor 21CFR11 option is fitted 2 Ifthe Auditor 21CFR11 option is fitted a message appears on the chart after authorization and or signing are complete The example below shows the message when both Signing and Au thorisation are enabled DD MM YY HH MM SS Button Descriptor Signed Engineer Authorised Engineer Note HA029324 Page 85 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USE
126. User Screen 1 l User screens appear only if the Screen Build User Screen 2 er option Section 7 is fitted S Bridge user screens are accessible only from User Screen 3 I aremote PC which has Bridge software sar Screen 4 installed and running User Screen 23 User Screen 24 Bridge User Screens 0 Apply H Discard Figure 4 3 4a Views Configuration menu HOME TIMEOUT The recorder returns to the specified home page after the timeout value of minutes has elapsed since the last touch on the display Timeout action is inhibited if a configuration is incomplete there are changes which have not been Applied or if a system generated message e g Clock Failure is on display User displays e g Root menu are timed out after approximately 50 seconds A value of zero disables the time out function Valid entries are between 1 and 99 minutes HOME GROUP This picklist allows a particular group to be selected for display when the root menu Home key is pressed SCOPE The remaining items of Views configuration can be selected to act globally Instrument or to act on indi vidual groups Group When Instrument is selected enabled display modes appear in all groups up down arrow scroll lists and are active in the Root Menu Goto View menu figure 4 3 4b When Group is selected each group can be set up with individual display mode lists For the particular group on dis
127. Y User User Full Name v Full Security 7 Remove Batch Control 7 Can Sign Y Apply Discard Can Authorize 7 Perform Upgrades 7 Event Permission 1 7 Add User Section 4 4 3 Event Permission 2 New User ID 22 Event Permission 3 ra New Full User Name Event Permission 4 e E RFIIL U G IXI IIO II IUI G G I Event Permission 5 Y Edit Output Channel Default y New Password Action Demand Writes y Retype Password Force Change Of Password Based On Operator Y Enter Batch Data NH Add Allow web server W Apply H Di Apply Discard P pcs Figure 4 4 Security configuration menus Page 185 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 4 1 Access levels There are essentially three levels of security associated with the recorder viz Engineer Operator and Logged out The fourth level Service is available only to service engineers When logged in at engi neer level the user can set access permissions for other levels and can enter or edit passwords for Op erator and Engineer levels The default password for Engineer level access is 100 The default password for Operator level access is blank i e no password is required unless the Auditor 21CFR11 option is fitted in which case the default is also 100 Note To allow free access to the recorder configuration the password can be set to blank This allows subsequent access without a password having to be ente
128. _ k x10 Where Fval F value at time t minutes Fval F value last iteration T Internal recorder iteration interval minutes ma Value of temperature measuring channel Targettemp 121 1 C for Fo 170 C for FH Z Temperature interval representing a factor of 10 reduction in killing efficiency 10 C for Fo 20 C for FH User configuration consists of entering the channel which is measuring temperature the relevant steriliz ing temperature and temperature interval Z value and a low cut off value if required Figure 4 3 11c shows the configuration fields for measuring Fo using channel 1 as the temperature input channel Fo values for target temperature 121 1 C and z value 10 C and 75 C as the low cut off value below which killing credits are not to be counted Maths Number 2 Math 2 Y Value OFF Reset now Function fValue Y F value of Channel 1Y Sterilizing Temp 121 1 Temperature interval 10 Low cut off 75 Figure 4 3 11c Fo setup example APPLICATION NOTE To ensure that sterilizer loads which contain materials with differing thermal inertias are thoroughly steri lized atypical sterilizer has up to 12 different measuring points within the load To ensure accuracy the temperature sensors should be calibrated and the channel adjustment facility used to compensate for any inaccuracies found If each of the inputs is used to compute an F value each of these values c
129. and are used only for archive security purposes or for transfer to another similar recorder SAVE AS This selection box allows a configuration to be saved if required in a format suitable for importing into previous recorder models The default is always the current instrument 4 2 2 Restore Touching this item allows the user to select or type in a previously saved configuration file name which will then be used as the current configuration Touching the Restore key completes the operation Check boxes allow one or more of Configuration Data Security data note 3 Network data and Screen data to be chosen for the restore function Notes 1 Screen data restores faceplate status for vertical trend and vertical bargraph modes and user screen information ifthe option is fitted 2 If archiving is in progress when a Restore is requested the Restore operation will be delayed until the archive is complete maybe several minutes If required the Cancel Archive key bec tion 4 1 above can be used to speed up the Restore process at the cost of losing the archive data 3 If Centralised Security is active part of Security Management configuration Security Data is not selectable either for Restore or for New below 4 Ifthe file to be restored has been created using C Edit software each of the characters used in the file name must lie within the unicode range 0 to 255 or the file name
130. as slaves in the Configuration nfiguration described above Allows data to be read into a Allows the user to select a specific parameter table 4 3 16a shows a typical set or User defined to be selected User defined allows a decimal register address to be entered see User definedl below Allows the user to enter a Loop Number for the parameter read Allows one of three rates to be set for reading the Process Value The three rates Low Medium and High have the values set in the Master Comms configuration Span This Span setting allows the Zero and Full Scale values for the parameter to be en tered Zone etc The remaining items are as described in Channel Configuration in Alarm status Auto Manual Process value Read alarm active status Read alarm unacknowledged status Working output power Working setpoint Table 4 3 16a Typical Controller read parameters HA029324 Page 152 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 16 MASTER COMMS Cont USER DEFINED REGISTERS As previously mentioned User Defined can be selected for all slaves and for some slave types it is the only way of accessing some or all parameters The number of the register holding the required parameter is to be found in the user documentation sup plied with the slave For instance if the unit to which this manual refers were to be a slave then the list of registers is to be found in For examp
131. available for group horizontal bargraph displays Allows the posi tion of the faceplates to be dynamic appears at best position for the number of channels or to be located above North below South to the right East or to the left West of the bargraphs Also allows faceplates to be turned off altogether For group trend displays these faceplates are in addition to the current channel faceplate which al ways appears above the chart across the full width of the display un less turned off using Horizontal Faceplate disable Font style List of fonts Picklist holds a number of sizes plain bold and underlined bold Grid Line colour Default Allows a colour to be selected for trend chart gridlines Horizontal Alignment Left centred right Allows text to be justified relative to its width setting Horizontal Faceplate Enable Disable For vertical trend displays allows the current channel faceplate to be selected on or off Horizontal Grid total Default Number of vertical divisions of a trend chart If left at default uses the value entered in Group Configuration section 4 3 2 Any other set ting overrides Group Configuration entry Horizontal Minor Divs Default Allows the user to enter a number of minor grid divisions If left at default uses the value entered in Group Configuration section 4 3 2 Any other setting overrides Group Configuration entry Line thickness Allows
132. be re edited in order to clear the problem See Edit parameter above Allows a name for the current user screen to be entered in Main This name appears at the top of the screen and in the Screen number picklist for navigation action buttons For navigation action buttons allows a screen to be selected When the button is operated the instrument will switch to the selected display screen When set to Yes group displays e g Group Vertical Trend display a title bar across the top of the component giving the selected group s descriptor Selecting Show Title Bar to No re moves the title bar from the display Start Angle For Arcs only defines a start point for Arc Angle above See for definitions Text Allows a text string to be entered for display at the screen The hash character may not be used in text strings Width The width of a component measured rightwards from the component s X position Negative values measure leftwards X points Defines the X co ordinates for polylines and polygons Must match the number of Y points for correct interpretation X position Distance between the left edge of the screen and the left edge of the component Y points Defines the Y co ordinates for polylines and polygons Must match the number of X points for correct interpretation Y position Distance between the top edge of the screen and the top edge of the component Table 7 3 1 Basic level par
133. be used to enter parameters into the Input table The following syntax must be used or an error message will be generated when Apply is operated and the configura tion will remain unchanged Notes 1 The syntax is not case sensitive for example it may be Channel or channel or CHANNEL 2 Channels 1 to 18 small frame and 1 to 48 large frame may be configured as measuring chan nels or as Ethernet IP comms input channels The remaining channels up to 100 must be con figured as Ethernet IP Comms input channels For channels 76 to 100 only pv is supported Channel n pv Channel n status Channel n spanhi Channel n spanlo Channel n dp Math n pv Math n status Math n spanhi Math n spanlo Math n dp ERROR MESSAGES Channel n process value where n 1 to 100 see note 2 above Channel n status where n 1 to 75 see note 2 above The Span High value for channel n where n 1 to 75 see note 2 above The Span Low value for channel n where n 1 to 75 see note 2 above Number of decimal places for channel n where n 1 to 75 see note 2 above Maths channel n process value where n 1 to 100 Maths channel n status where n 1 to 100 The Span High value for maths channel n where n 1 to 100 The Span Low value for maths channel n where n 1 to 100 Number of decimal places for maths channel n where n 1 to 100 If an error is made during e
134. but for points 225 to 240 Register 16 as register 1 but for points 241 to 256 Identifies the length of a text message to be read Time stamp of the text message to be read UTC format Read text string from instrument display Write a text string to instrument display Boolean Flag Value 0001 starts new batch Boolean Flag Value 0001 stops current batch Batch status flag 1 Running 0 Not running Batch field 1 text string max 60 characters Batch field 2 text string max 60 characters Batch field 3 text string max 60 characters Batch field 4 text string max 60 characters Batch field 5 text string max 60 characters Batch field 6 text string max 60 characters Uint32 Uint 32 String 20 Uint16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 Double String 60 CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC String 60 Boolean Boolean Boolean String 60 String 60 String 60 String 60 String 60 String 60 Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Write only Write only Write only Read only Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Start Addr Hex Dec B11F 45343 B120 45344 B122 45346 B124 45348 B12E 45358 B138 453
135. change H H i R Deviation out pue 4 gt Date of isi Vertical o Rate of change Rising GE y y p ia Rate of change Falling For Deviation alarms R Reference d deviation Faceplate symbols Scale symbols Table 3 Alarm icons 3 1 STATUS BAR This appears across the top ofthe display and contains the items described below 3 1 1 Current access level There are four access levels available Logged out Operator Engineer and Service and the current level is displayed in this key at the top left hand corner of the display Touching this key calls the login page as described in section 3 3 1 a below If a user has been added using the part of the Security setup section 4 4 3 below then the Full User Name is displayed instead of the ac cess level 3 1 2 Page name Initially this shows the current group s descriptor The name changes according to context for example Operator or Config Archive If the Batch option is fitted this area contains batch information as well as the page name Touching the area calls the Batch Status page See for further Batch details HA029324 Page 9 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 1 3 Alarm indication This area of the display can contain a number of status icons Instrument alarm Disk statu onfiguration locked and so on Pressing this area of the screen section 3 1 4 calls the Summary menu allowing the user to view
136. colour of the Main page can be changed to a darker colour as shown for colour 22 in figure 7 2 3e below Figure 7 2 3f on the next page shows the relevant component property pages Channel 1 i un E 0 0000 gt T s Channel2 x 0 3316 0 0000 1 0000 Channel 3 0 1427 cov 1 0000 Channel A 0 6293 apuk e 0 0000 14 01 25 Channel 1 200904 041870 0 2000 1 0000 EEUU ENER 1 0 8000 13 59 02 11 07 06 Figure 7 2 3e User screen example with coloured background EES Identifier main 1 2 Last Error Page Title X Position 0 9 Y Y Position 0 Y Width 100 Y Height 100 Y Background Colour T Touch backgrou nd Draw Order 1 colour field Component Type Main Goto Canvas Save Close More gt EME EN 52 Colour list Figure 7 2 3f background colour selection pages User Guide Page 247 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 3 PARAMETER DEFINITIONS The following parameters are associated with the components listed in table 7 2 2 above The list is divide
137. constants Page 104 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont LINEAR MASS FLOW Cont COMPRESSIBILITY FACTOR FACTOR Compressibility factor is a density related measure of how far a particular gas deviates from a perfect gas under any set of temperature and pressure conditions and is give by the equation P 1 X T p where Z Compressibility factor Z P Absolute pressure of the gas in kPa A T Absolute temperature of the gas Kelvins p gas density at pressure P and temperature T from published tables CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS Figure 4 3 11d shows the relevant part of the configuration menu for a maths channel with Linear Mass Flow function selected Maths Number 1 Math1 Y Value 123 4567 Units Function Linear Mass Flow y Flow Channel 1 Y Temperature Channel 2 Y Absolute Pressure Channel 3 Y Scale o p 0 Ma 0 Gas Constant 0 J kg K Figure 4 3 11d Linear mass flow menu Flow Allows the input channel measuring the flowmeter output to be entered Temperature Allows the input channel measuring the fluid temperature Kelvins to be entered Absolute Pressure Allows the input channel measuring the absolute gas pressure kPa A to be entered Scale o p Full scale output from the flowmeter in flowmeter units S Ma Full scale input range set for Flow channel in flowmeter units ma Gas Cons
138. count ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII Null Password Password E Hex n Hex g Hex i Hex n Hex e Hex e Hex r Hex High Low Byte Byte User name as configured in instrument Must be followed by null character Hex 00 Byte 24 Null character inserted only if Null lt otherwise the Byte count in Byte 12 would be Odd Figure 8 2 4a Login request via Ethernet Modbus TCP Slave MODBUS Start No of regis No of reg Byte count identifier function address address low ters high isters low excluding E Hex n Hex g Hex code hex 9 CRC Byte 12 Byte 13 Byte 14 Byte 15 Byte 16 Byte 17 Byte 18 Byte 19 Byte 20 65 65 72 00 HH HH 00 HH HH ASCII ASCII ASCII Null Password Password Null CRC low CRC high e Hex e Hex r Hex High Low Byte Byte Byte Byte t Null character inserted only if without it the Byte count in Byte 6 would be Odd Figure 8 2 4b Login Request using a serial transmission line Notes 1 The high and low password bytes are entered using the result of the encryption program above If the password is blank both High and Low Bytes must be 00 null 2 For successful login the Connect from remote item must be enabled ref Access levels in Section 4 4 1 HA029324 User Guide Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 269 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 2 4 SECURITY Cont TO SEND A
139. display and keep touching it until the next target appears 3 Continue the process according to the directions appearing on the screen Once all the targets have been accepted the recorder returns to the diagnostic display Touch top left target Figure B1 4 1 Initial calibration display B1 4 2 Touch screen verify This allows the user to check the accuracy of the touch screen without having to carry out the calibration procedure described above Touching the screen with the stylus produces a crosshair at the position the recorder believes the screen to have been touched Itis up to the user to decide if the response is good enough for recorder opera tion After a few seconds of non operation the recorder returns to the top level touch screen display figure 1 4 B1 4 3 Main menu Touching this returns the user to the top level diagnostics screen Figure B1 1 HA029324 User Guide Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 323 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B1 5 SYSTEM SUMMARY This key calls a system summary display as shown for a typical small frame recorder in figure B1 5 SYSTEM SUMMARY Variant 6180XIO Software 4 1 DRAM 67108864 SRAM 262114 FLASH 267386880 MAC address 000A8D002026 Date 02 08 05 Time 16 41 58 Main Menu Figure B1 5 System summary display B1 6 DIAG SUMMARY MAC address Software version 00 00 00 N N Serial 1 Serial 2 BATTERY LOCKAB
140. does not appear If the Batch option is not fit ted Batch Stop does not appear in the picklist SOURCE 1 SENSE Allows source 1 to be used in its normal sense Select Source 1 or inverted Select Not Source 1 Example Source 1 is alarm 1 on channel 3 With Source 1 Sense Source 1 the event is active whenever channel 3 alarm 1 is active With Source 1 Sense Not Source 1 the event is active whenever the alarm is not active HA029324 Page 83 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 6 EVENT CONFIGURATION Cont OPERATOR This allows a logical combination of input sources to be used to trigger an event The selections and their definitions are shown in table 4 3 6 below Operator Event active when Event not active when Only S1 Active S1 not active AND S1 and S2 both active S1 and or S2 not active OR S1 and or S2 active S1 and S2 both not active S1 and or S2 not active S1 and S2 both active S1 and S2 both not active S1 and or S2 both active S1 and S2 both active or both not active S1 Source 1 S2 Source 2 S1 or S2 active Table 4 3 6 Logical operators for event sources SOURCE 2 SENSE Allows source 2 to be used in its normal sense Select Source 2 or inverted Select Not Source 2 Example Source 2 is Group 1 Batch Running With Source 2 Sense Source 2 the event is active whilst the batch is running With Source 2
141. eee 74 Wii ads EO 163 Horizontal Bars comidas anta 40 BUON catan 164 Horizontal Kes nia 32 Config ratiompTe ns us dcos tor iit tees 342 KI 42 COPY usa sica E diia qua 211 A eere tree ee renes 22 Jobs auisiaas ne anemia nets 223 Vertical bario cinema nd 38 epes leegent Eeer AH E 190 Vertical Toro ME HT 30 With Audit Trail selected 166 Penis 252 RI OU 243 UE 322 Descriptor UNS IE 252 Ghannel ains tocata 69 Update ratero dre 319 Email inn ARENES 168 Values tr ncation of thea 8 a 84 DISHO Eai rearea S EEEE ESE 243 IS EE 251 Didi dnde ia 99 GLOUD a ua aS m cct eie 9 60 A nien orit noni eege 204 Group minimiUulm ON 122 DOMAIN saasa 204 Instrument aaa sa ede tte de ieee EE ee 57 Namie Service enne teer deren es 204 Modbus slave ne enia editam dne 145 Domain name Recipient listra is iere Eiere 168 ACCESSIN E 187 REDOT Essarts inier a i dba der ideni eda 171 Draw Detect this slave all slaves sss 145 I 248 Deviation alarms eco apegereed ioca anite 70 Gol 248 DHCP Server tail ti Gis eiecit tr rete a 10 well unan wasu aaah Ue 71 Diagnostics cl le EE 209 E DiS EE 321 Ethernet sado anna E 209 Earlier Messages En 20 Diag S mimnay in rre deas aenea 324 Edit Dialogue ACTION cs 257 Level aba os Eus a Peso SU E Saabs EE corales 244 Digital ENEE 150 152
142. enabled allows a reduction in the number of links between a master and multi ple slaves See Bhare Socket below for more details Generally it is recommended that this item is left at the default for the particular slave being configured Some slaves require a user name and password to be entered before access can be gained The user name and password set here in the master Comms configuration must match those of the slave For this type of instrument the user name is the Remote user name and the pass word is the Remote password set up in the Security Access configuration p 41 Password is necessary only when Modbus security disabled is not selected in Instrument configuration Gection 4 3 For other types of instrument refer to the documentation supplied with that instrument See Login Required immediately above DETECT THIS SLAVE This button causes the master to search for the slave set up on this configuration page If the search is successful the Remote Device name changes to the instrument name or default tag HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 145 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 16 MASTER COMMS Cont DETECT ALL SLAVES Network Ethernet Y Overwrite existing slaves y Timeout 500 From Node 149 121 130 200 For 50 Node s Modbus Address To 2 Start Discard Figure 4 3 16b Detect all
143. figure the instrument descriptors for the first two detected instru ments have been edited section 4 3 1 the second two have the default descriptor Instrument and the final one is a model 2747 Note The model number 2747 is used for illustrative purposes only If such an instrument type ex ists it should not be assumed from the above that it will be recognised by the auto detect system If Overwrite existing slaves is not enabled AND the number of detected slaves is greater than the number of free slots then this text reads Please select a maximum of N slave devices where N is the differ ence between the number of slaves detected and the number of free slots If the user selects more than N devices only the first N selected devices are used Please select required slave devices Furnace temps 1 at 149 121 130 211 1 y Furnace Temps 2 at 149 121 130 211 2 le Instrument at 149 121 130 232 1 Instrument at 149 121 130 236 1 2747 at 149 121 130 237 1 Discard Apply Re Scan Figure 4 3 16c Auto detect results page As can be seen from the figure above each instrument has a tick box associated with it The user enables those instruments which are to be included in the Slave List by touching the relevant boxes Operation of Apply then causes the selected instruments to be incorporated into the Slave list in the Modbus Mas ter con
144. inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Bit5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7 Spare Bit8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Bit9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11 Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15 Spare Channel 12 alarms F8F2 63730 Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Note PV access is Read Write for any point configured with Slave Comms as its Type or Function Otherwise PV access is Read only User Guide Page 312 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 9 Permanent ID table This table contains information relating to the recorder and also gives the start address of the feature identifi cation table FIT FFF4 Checksum FFF3 FIT start address FFFE2 Version ID FFF1 Product ID FFFO Company ID Table 8 4 9 Permanent ID table 8 5 DATA TRANSMISSION Each message request or response is packaged in the MODBUS frame shown below The messages consist of a 7 byte prefix followed by the function code in hex followed by the relevant data bytes the number and content of which depend on the function code as described in subsequent sections Byte 0 By
145. instrument to one or more recipients The user can enter 10 recipient e mail addresses in each of five mailing lists giving a maximum of 50 addresses 10 of which can be sent to at any one time A Recipient can appear in as many lists as required Up to 24 e mails can be configured but which of these e mails is sent is defined during Dot or Event But m saa Any function capable of triggering a job can cause any of the available e mails to be sent As well as a Subject and the body text each e mail can include one of the messages set up in Message work and can thus include embedded values alarm status batch status etc as described in E MAIL CONFIGURATION The figure below shows the e mail configuration page using fictitious names for email server address information Mail Server Port Number Sender Errors To Retry Time Recipient List Descriptor Rept1 Rept2 Ropt3 Rept4 Rept5 Rept6 Rept7 Rept8 Rept9 Rept10 Email Number Descriptor Protocol Subject Text mail servername 25 IP Address of Recorder e mail address to which e mail failure messages to be sent 60 Seconds 1 Listi W 4 amp Select List Number Le e mail address of 1st Recipient on this list e mail address of 2nd Recipient on this list etc 1 Emaili Y Email1 SMTP Email Cold store alarm Select SMTP SMS Subject Only or SMS Body only Cold store temp sensor 1 too hot Ins
146. is approxi mately 2 3 the width the rectangle height should be 3 2 the rectangle width to produce a square The actual height width ratio is 535 800 0 669 for large frame units or 214 320 0 669 for small frame units Using pixels as the measuring units obviates this problem as pixels are square HA029324 User Guide Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 259 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 4 16 Polyline series of points Similar to closed polygons described in section 7 4 17 below but the first and last points are not automati cally joined and the drawn item cannot be filled and the line width cannot be specified it is always one pixel Note When working in percentage units it should be remembered that vertical percentage units are only 2 3 the size of horizontal percentage units this affecting the appearance of the drawn item Example To draw an old fashioned electronic resistor icon Units Absolute pixels X position 400 Y position 236 Foreground colour 0 X points 0 10 15 25 35 45 55 65 75 85 90 100 Y points 0 0 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 0 0 Press Apply then Close to produce a red sawtooth outline as depicted in figure 7 4 16 below 14 20 50 Point1 Point 12 x 0 y 0 VVV X 100 y 0 Figure 7 4 16 Polyline example User Guide HA029324 Page 260 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 4 17 Polygon closed area
147. is set to mediacard then the disk icon appears only if a suitable card is present in the mediacard slot 2 When a disk is inserted into a USB floppy disk drive which is connected to the recorder the disk icon appears only after the disk has been accessed either by reading from it or writing to it or after the file system has been opened by touching the file key This note does not apply for disks which have been inserted before the disk drive is plugged in 3 The central area goes green whenever local archiving is taking place not only when archiving is taking place to the memory device selected in Archive configuration HA029324 Page 11 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 1 3 ALARM INDICATION Cont que FTP ICON FIP The FTP icon appears to the right of the disc icon position whenever transfer activity is taking place CONFIGURATION LOCKED INDICATOR This symbol appears only when Bridge software is being used in the following situations 1 Whilst units are synchronising configuration changes 2 Whilst configuration is taking place If the reconfiguration is taking place at the host pc Bridge Full only then the symbol appears at the target instrument and vice versa TRIAL MODE INDICATOR This symbol is displayed whilst the recorder Trial Mode bection 4 3 22 is enabled Page 12 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE
148. length Grp3 Text time stamp Grp3 Read text Reserved Grp3 Write text Reserved Grp3 Batch start Grp3 Batch stop Grp3 Batch running Grp3 Text field 1 Reserved Grp3 Text field 2 Reserved Grp3 Text field 3 Reserved Grp3 Text field 4 Reserved Grp3 Text field 5 Reserved Grp3 Text field 6 Reserved Spare Description Trend enhancements 0 Interpolation enabled 1 Adaptive recording enabled Trend update rate in milliseconds Archive to flash rate in milliseconds Group descriptor 20 characters max 16 Registers holding the group contents as follows Register 1 Bit 0 O Point 1 not in group 1 Point 1 is in group Bit 1 O Point 2 not in group 1 Point 2 is in group Bit 2 0 Point 3 not in group 1 Point 3 is in group Etc Bit 15 0 Point 16 not in group 1 Point 16 is in group Register 2 as register 1 but for points 17 to 32 Register 3 as register 1 but for points 33 to 48 Register 4 as register 1 but for points 49 to 64 Register 5 as register 1 but for points 65 to 80 Register 6 as register 1 but for points 81 to 96 Register 7 as register 1 but for points 97 to 112 Register 8 as register 1 but for points 113 to 128 Register 9 as register 1 but for points 129 to 144 Register 10 as register 1 but for points 145 to 160 Register 11 as register 1 but for points 161 to 176 Register 12 as register 1 but for points 177 to 192 Register 13 as register 1 but for points 193 to
149. might not be dis played correctly 4 2 3 New Touching this item causes the factory entered default configuration to be loaded for use or for editing Operation of the New Default key completes the operation Tick boxes allow one or more of Configura tion Data Security data note 3 above and Network data to be chosen for the restore default function only those items which are ticked are replaced by default values For recorders with the Screen Builder User Screens option section 7 a further tick box is displayed Screen Data 4 2 4 Text This is identical to the Save function described above but the configuration is saved in ASCII format and can be transferred to a computer and read printed etc as required It is not possible using this means to modify the configuration and then re load it 4 2 5 Import screen This field appears only if the Screen Builder User Screens option section 7 is fitted and allows a previ ously exported User Screen file to be imported Page 50 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 2 6 Export screen This field appears only ifthe Screen Builder option section 7 is fitted and allows a User Screen to be exported to a removable memory device orto the internal Flash memory The exported screen can sub sequently be imported either into this recorder or into a different recorder 4 2 7 Import User Linearisation Note User
150. mode by operating the Logout key For users with Security Manager option enabled Change Password and Clear Password Cache may also appear in this menu depending on the user s access level Archive Save Restore Config Network System Login Access Management Login Section 3 3 1 Access password if required Select the required access level and enter the User Engineer Y Password expires in 29 Days Logout Enal Add User Section 4 4 1 mosses when Engineer y Remove User Domain name Change Password Section 4 4 5 New Password Clear Password Cache H Section 4 4 6 Management option Retype Password Connect from remote Section 4 4 2 MAE a Login Disabled IS AY O Edit Own Password y Login Timeout 1 Minutes Change Alarm Setpoints Z with unapplied changes Ignore timeout Y Acknowledge Alarms 7 Password Retries 3times Y Edit Maths Constant v Passwords Expire 30 Days Reset maths y Minimum Password Length 3 Preset Totalisers 7 Require Signing 14 Preset Counters jy Require Authorization W Start reset Timers 7 Enable Audit Trail W Sar Clock ie Password Change on Expiry Archiving Control Remove User dea SE 7 Save Restore y Section 4 4 4 SE Paste Delete Files 71 Apply Discard Full Configuration
151. monthly then during Summer Time the archive will occur an hour late i e at 01 00 hrs instead of midnight Page 78 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 5 ARCHIVE CONFIGURATION Cont MEDIA FILE FORMAT FTP FILE FORMAT Allows Binary uhh files CSV csv files or Binary and CSV to be chosen for FTP transfer For further details of CVS archiving see description at the end of this subsection 4 3 5 ON MEDIA FULL For Local setting only Overwrite Oldest data is replaced with latest data when storage medium is full Stop Archiving stops when the storage medium is full Note When in Overwrite mode the recorder will overwrite only those files which it has itself created Thus if a storage medium is inserted which contains history files from another recorder these cannot be overwritten The file names are of the form UUU UUUIIIIIIFFGGSSSSSS where IIIIII represent the lowest three bytes of MAC address of the recorder which created the file see Gection 45 1 It is not possible for the user to delete files created by another instrument i e one with a different MAC address MEDIA SIZE For Local setting only this displays the capacity of the memory device REMOVABLE MEDIA CAPACITY For Local setting only this gives an estimated time to fill the archive medium based on the archive rate the compression ratio th
152. not appear Job Number 17 Category Batch Action Start Y Group 1 Group 1 Y On Active Y Select Start or Stop Select Required Group only if Scope Group in Batch Configuration Select Active Inactive or Acknowledgement Figure 4 7 8 Batch job menu layout HA029324 Page 220 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 7 9 Recording category The following Recording jobs are available Enable This enables recording to the group s history file while active while inactive or while unacknowledged This allows for example recording to be enabled job 2 only whilst a Trend Freeze job job 1 is inactive i e recording is disabled for the duration of a Trend Freeze job Trend freeze is described in section 4 7 10 below Speed Interval BRecording speed interval B is selected for use for the duration ofthe job See Group configuration for A B switching details Erase all History All recorder history is erased only if Simulation option section 4 3 22 is enabled but see also note four Notes 1 The group in question will be recorded only if Recording Enable selected in group Configura tion Gection 43 9 and the job is active 2 If Audit Trail ection 4 4 2 is enabled then in order to preserve the audit trail messages will be saved in the group s history files even when recording is not enabled by job 3 A blue line is drawn acro
153. on the job category For example for Totalisers Preset Disable Pre set Group or Disable Group to be selected gives details of all job types and their associated actions Operation of this button initiates the search after confirmation The search results in one of two displays one No Match was found if no jobs are found which match the search criteria or a list of triggers is produced A typical example is given in figure 4 6 7b Search Results Channels 1 Alarm 1 Job 3 Channels 3 Alarm 3 Job 1 Channels 6 Alarm 4 Job 1 Maths 1 Alarm 2 Job 3 ox Figure 4 6 7b Search results typical HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 212 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 6 8 Customise Customise allows 1 the background and foreground colours for various screen items to be selected 2 the size of the text font to be varied Figure 4 6 8a shows the display page with the settings used for most of the screen drawings in this manual Desktop 54 Data Entry Background 55 Selection 27 Fixed Text MN Active Text MN Disabled Text ES Title Bar Background Ri Trend Foreground MN Trend Background 55 History Foreground 52 History Background MN Font set Auto v Default Apply Discard Figure 4 6 8a Customise menu Desktop This defines the background colou
154. one of these three rates The unit comes complete with a number of Profiles for known instruments This allows it to recognise an instrument as a slave type and simplifies the read write process for known instruments by present ing commonly used Parameters by name Other parameters can be accessed by entering the relevant register s address The unit will also communicate with third party instruments but in such a case the user has to define the required read write register addresses derived from data supplied by the manu facturer of the instrument Once the remote unit has been recognised by the master the master and slave units can be configured to carry out the following 1 Bysetting a master input channel to Type Master Comms selected parameters can be read by the master from a selected slave This master channel can then be included in display groups can have alarm setpoints run jobs etc independently of the original channel In a similar way maths functions can be read by setting a master Maths channel to Function Master Comms 2 The Demand Write feature can write values to a selected parameter in a selected slave as a one shot update Demand Writes can be initiated by operator action or they can be initiated by job ac tion or if the User Screens option is fitted by Operator Key action 3 Forslaves whose input and or maths channels can be set to Modbus Comms Input the maste
155. only say Field 3 If Field 3 is required it must be preceded by Fields 1 and 2 ON STOP LOG As for On start log above but for batch stop This item appears only if Start Stop is selected as batch mode ON NEW CLEAR For Use Text Batches only this allows the user to clear none or more of the batch entries at each batch start In the example above if the user enters a batch number of say 060509 015 with Customer Name FishesRus Operator name Marvin Supervisor Fred then setting On New Clear to 1 causes the batch number to be cleared and to have to be re entered each time a new batch is started In a similar way setting On New Clear to 2 means that the batch number value and the Customer Name value to be cleared A new batch cannot be started without new values first being entered HA029324 Page 93 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 10 BATCH CONFIGURATION Cont NAME FILES BY BATCH As an aid to identification if Name Files by Batch is selected the Batch Name as entered by the opera tor is inserted into the history file name For example if a batch name of 060511 001 is amongst the items archived to disk then this file will ap pear in the form Group Name 060511 001 YYYYMMDD_HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH Where YYYYMMDD is the date e g 20060511 11th May 2006 and HH HH is a 16 digit hex code used by the recorder and by review software to ident
156. pixels are the same as absolute pixels except that if the display is rescaled on say a pc screen the absolute pixel object will remain unchanged whereas the relative pixel object will scale appropriately Similarly for transfer from an XGA screen recorder to a 1 4VGA recorder or vice versa 7 2 1 Before starting Before starting to lay the screen out 1 The user must have full configuration access permission 2 One or more user screens must be enabled in Views Configuration section 7 1 1 3 A layout plan is produced with all the required screen s components listed with their top left corner co ordinates their widths and heights and where appropriate background and foreground colours User Guide HA029324 Page 240 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 2 2 Screen components Table 7 2 2 shows the selectable screen components their default top left corner positions widths heights and draw order All these components are described in below Sai O EN CHE O O EH CHEN off O G off O S OI Oe lt Component Arc Channel data Channel horizontal bargraph Channel numeric Channel vertical bargraph Dialogue action Event Button Group horizontal bargraph Group horizontal trend Group numeric Group vertical bargraph Group vertical trend Image Line Main Navigation action Operator Button Round rectangle Text Table 7 2 2 User screen selectable item default val
157. ports are made use of by the recorder This information would be needed by anyone involved in setting up firewalls which may be used selectively to block incoming or outgoing access to specific ports PORT Usage 20 File Transfer Protocol data 21 File Transfer Protocol control 25 E mail SMTP 80 Web access 123 SNTP server 502 Modbus TCPIP communications 1264 Bridge communications general 2222 EtherNet IP communications 44818 EtherNet IP communications 50010 Bridge communications trend review HA029324 User Guide Page 331 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B ASCII CHARACTERS FOR SERIAL COMMS This section contains details of the ASCII characters that may be used with the Serial Comms option All the ASCII characters listed can be used as Start or End of message characters but only characters with decimal codes 32 to 127 can be used in messages as decimal codes 0 to 31 are replaced by Ouestion marks in messages CharacterDecimal Hex CharacterDecimal Hex CharacterDecimal Hex CharacterDecimal Hex NUL 0 00 Space 32 20 64 40 j 96 60 SOH 1 01 33 21 A 65 41 a 97 61 STX 2 02 34 22 B 66 42 b 98 62 ETX 3 03 35 23 C 67 43 c 99 63 EOT 4 04 36 24 D 68 44 d 100 64 ENQ 5 05 37 25 E 69 45 e 101 65 ACK 6 06 amp 38 26 F 70 46 f 102 66 BEL 7 07 i 39 27 G 71 47 g 103 67 BS 8 08 40 28 H 72 48 h 104 68 HT 9 09 41 29
158. read or written Input tables can be completed by importing a suitable previously configured table by en tering individual parameters into each field by using the Wizard key or by using the Default table and editing it as necessary See Table entry Wizard key and or De fault table below for further details Output tables cannot be edited Input output 2 to 200 Apply key Discard key Wizard key Default Table key Show Errors key As for input output 1 above but for the remaining table entries Touch this to save the table configuration An error message is generated if the chan nel number is out of range or if the syntax is incorrect See Table entry below Touching this key causes all changes made since the previous Apply to be discard ed This provides a mechanism for the rapid entry of input and output table parameters See bz below for a fuller explanation Fills the displayed input or output table with channel and math PV parameters This can then be edited either on an entry by entry basis or by exporting the table so that it may be edited in a pc Described in more detail Shows any errors in the current configuration For each parameter without error the parameter s Modbus address is displayed instead HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 174 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 21 ETHERNET IP OPTION Cont TABLE ENTRY The normal text entry techniques can
159. see Bection 4 3 3 Channel Number Slave Digital Parameter Scaling Point type Point number Group Number Process Value Span Allows the user to select the number of the channel to be configured As soon as Modbus master is selected as input type the display changes from Channel 1 for example to Read 1 This legend stays as Read 1 until a descriptor is entered be low which immediately overwrites it Allows the user to select from a picklist the slave from which data is to be retrieved The picklist contains all the Remote Devices configured as slaves in the LOTT m c sapan Allows data to be read into a Allows the user to select Alarm setpoints Process Value Batch status model de pendent or User defined to be selected User defined allows a decimal register address to be entered For some slaves scale zero scale low is returned as value 0 and full scale scale high as value 65 535 Hex FFFF with intermediate values having proportionate values For example the value 15 would be represented as 32 767 7FFF for a channel scale 0 to 30 as would a value of 50 for a channel scaled 0 to 100 and a value of 45 for a channel scaled 30 to 60 In order to convert this reading to an understandable value a scaling factor must be entered If the low and high scale entries match the slave channel s scale the master reading will be the same as the slave s reading Selecting High Low allows Scale low a
160. select the section of history exactly Touching the slide bar either side of the slider causes a page shift in the relevant direction The Page up and Page down keys also provide this function On first entry to trend history mode the channel value and the time and date shown in the faceplate are those at the top edge of the chart Touching the screen causes a cursor to appear at point of screen contact This cursor can be touched and dragged to provide a reference point on the current trace The displayed value date and time refer to the cursor intersection with the current channel To return to real time trending the Option key is operated followed by Exit History HA029324 Page 29 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE TIME CHANGE RECORDS For vertical and horizontal trend modes a line is drawn across the chart whenever a time discontinuity in the record occurs These lines disappear if a configuration change which causes group history to be lost is made such as adding a new channel to a group Redline A red line is drawn on the trend history chart at power up Blue line A blue line indicates that recording has been disabled enabled in Group Configuration tion 4 3 2 or by a recording job ection 4 7 9 Blue lines are not drawn when the Option is active Green line A green line appears if there has been a time change as a result of a clock job Gection 4 7 3 an SNTP synchronisation or by th
161. span high Ch6 span low Ch6 Zone high Ch6 Zone low Ch6 Alarm 1 setpoint Ch6 Alarm 2 setpoint Ch6 Alarm 3 setpoint Ch6 Alarm 4 setpoint Spare Description Upper span value display full scale Lower span value display zero Zone upper value of chart width Zone lower value of chart width Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 Note 2 Description Upper span value display full scale Lower span value display zero Zone upper value of chart width Zone lower value of chart width Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 Note 2 Description Upper span value display full scale Lower span value display zero Zone upper value of chart width Zone lower value of chart width Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 Note 2 Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Access Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Start Addr Hex Dec
162. string max 60 characters Batch field 2 text string max 60 characters Batch field 3 text string max 60 characters Batch field 4 text string max 60 characters Batch field 5 text string max 60 characters Batch field 6 text string max 60 characters Uint32 Uint 32 String 20 Uint16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 int16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 Double String 60 Salata at aaa String 60 Boolean Boolean Boolean String 60 String 60 String 60 String 60 String 60 String 60 Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Write only Write only Write only Read only Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Start Addr Hex Dec AC35 44085 Register Length AC36 44086 AC38 44088 AC3A 44090 AC44 44100 ACAE 44110 ACAF 44111 AC50 44112 AC51 44113 AC52 44114 AC53 44115 AC54 44116 AC55 44117 AC56 44118 AC57 44119 AC58 44120 ACS59 44121 AG5A 44122 ACSB 44123 AC5C 44124 ACSD 44125 ACSE 44126 ACSF 44127 AC63 44131 AC81 44161 AC9F 44191 ACBD 44221 ACDB 44251 ACDC 44252 ACDD 44253 ACDE 44254 ACFC 44284 ADIA 44314 AD38 44344 AD56 44374 AD74
163. teens 173 210 A eter te e needs 100 Export EQUatiON EE 103 Etherrnettablge i iere ene 174 A stsacvases EIS EEEE EARR G Screen eS E EA EEGEN 51 GIS CONSTANT esiin eai T c 104 106 Users eM REN 239 Global Alarm Event Source cccciccccononnononcnnoncnnonnnnononnancnnoncncncnno 82 F Channel alacena canas 349 Unack d Alarm Event Source 82 Faceplate Goto LOCATON o 252 CANVAS IM assay 243 Style E 252 Group Keys amnem re Oe s Da sassa 23 Failed to authenticate user name 237 View Ke 22 Ee DEE PER 248 Green line across the chat 30 Changed A 229 Grid Identification table 300 Line colour e a aN 229 Major Field te Batch sioe repris 93 VIVO Tinaco ess aaa msi eed darias Field 1 Type Type DIVvisiOns orte rrr ern tet ere eee 62 Filas rata ta PEE EEG REI Group Formats archiving AV tania 99 KW Configuration ead rode etae toten detti sete ens 59 Name character limitation Configuration menu irren tette 338 eg 228 COPY 211 Transfer FTP facility oto ern 48 Data MODBDBUJS soiree rettet hoe oet p epa 294 HA029324 User Guide Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 357 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE Group Cont I Cont Display Input Enablexianin nario poltan canse 75 COMTIGUPATION EE 66 MOdES u u ua Saat cti 75 Iypeselecion aeo mtm eme 66 Enable disable 5 etie e deett ed 62
164. the 1 8th second samples is taken over the specified period and the alarm becomes active only if the average value exceeds the specified rate of change Configuring a dwell time can also reduce jitter because if during the specified dwell time any one sam ple is non active then the elapsed dwell time is reset to zero The alarm becomes active only after the dwell time has elapsed i e only if the rate of change has been exceeded for every software cycle through out the specified dwell time HA029324 Page 71 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 3 CHANNEL ALARM CONFIGURATION Cont Absolute high alarm definitions Absolute low alarm definitions A Threshold Input signal AA AS da gt Hysteresis Z AA m mm NJ Hysteresis l l Input signal lt Threshold Hysteresis no Hysteresis no Dwell 0 secs Dwell 0 secs Hysteresis no Hysteresis no Dwell D secs Dwell D secs Hysteresis yes Hysteresis yes Dwell 0 Secs Dwell 0 Secs Hysteresis yes S D n La Hysteresis yes AAA Dwell D Secs Dwell D Secs HA alarm active HA alarm active D is in seconds up to 999999 D is in seconds up to 999999 Hysteresis is in engineering units Hysteresis is in engineering units Figure 4 3 3d Absolute alarm definitions Deviation out alarm definitions Deviation in alarm definitions Hysteresis Hysteresis Deviation 5 Reference _ gt
165. the previously configured constant value Page 135 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 13 COUNTERS Cont IEEE AREA COUNTER RUN TIME DATA The following table gives addresses for the specified 32 bit floating point values for counter 1 Generally Parameter address for counter N Parameter address for counter 1 4 N 1 decimal COUNTER 1 Start Addr Register Hex Dec Length Counter 1 value Current process value PV Read Write FC47 64583 Counter 1 status Channel status Read only FC49 64585 0 Good PV 5 Ranging error 1 Channel off 6 Overflow 2 Over range 7 Bad PV 3 Under range 8 No data 4 Hardware error Counter 1 Alarms Alarm information Uint16 Bit0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Read only Bit1 O No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit2 1 nowledge alarm 1 Read Write Bit 3 Bit 4 arm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Read only Bit 5 o Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 6 nowledge alarm 2 Read Write Bit 7 Bit 8 arm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Read only Bit 9 o alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 10 nowledge alarm 3 Read Write Bit 11 Bit 12 arm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Read only Bit 13 Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 14 nowledge alarm 4 Read Write Bit 15 Parameter name Description Access FC4A 64586
166. the right and left arrow keys at the bottom ofthe screen can be used to increment and decrement respectively the channel number VALUE Shows the current value of the channel INPUT TYPE Select Off Modbus Comms Input EtherNet IP Comms Input Test or Master Comms as input type Slave Comms must be selected if the channel is to be written to via Modbus Select Modbus Comms Input if the channel is to be written to via Modbus Use EtherNet IP Comms Input if the channel is to be written to by an EtherNet IP client Master Comms must be selected if this channel is to read from another instru ment See bection 4 3 16 for details of Master Comms section fection 4 3 21 for details of the EtherNet section 4 3 15 IP option andkecton 4 3 15 for Modbus Comms Connections SCALED This box allows the user to select low and high values and units for a scale This box must be ticked if logarithmic scales are to be used SCALE LOW Enter the scale value to correspond with input range low e g 0 SCALE HIGH Enter the scale value to correspond with input range high e g 100 SCALE UNITS Enter up to five characters of unit descriptor e g Note User linearisation tables units To set user linearisation table units to temperature units C for example the Range Units selection box can be used To enter custom units Scaled must be selected Scale low must be set to Range Low Scale high must be set to
167. to send the file More information is held in the file Supportlnfo txt which is also saved to the disk This file can be opened and the information within it read by inserting the disk into a PC clicking on the floppy disk icon A drive in My Computer and then double clicking on the file icon when it appears Supportlnfo is the default name This name may be edited by the user before saving to disk or pc The uhq suffix is automatically appended to the new name HA029324 Page 216 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 7 JOBS A number of sources e g channel event totaliser can be set up to trigger one or more jobs The follow ing description includes all possible job categories but which jobs are available on any particular record er depends on the options fitted to that recorder Many job categories require the relevant access level permission to be set as described infection 4 4 1 above The type of action continuous or single shot available for selection depends on the type of trigger source Continuous actions are selected from While active While inactive or While unacknowledged The available single shot actions are On becoming active On becoming inactive On acknowledgement 4 7 1 No Action This means that no job action is configured for the trigger source 4 7 2 Totaliser category If the Totaliser option is fitted bection 4 3 12 the following jobs become av
168. totaliser 1 Before configuring the message In channel configuration Set channel 2 descriptor to Chan two Set Channel 2 alarm job to Category Message Send message s to All Groups First message 2 Message 2 Last Message 2 Message 2 On Active In Totaliser configuration Set Totaliser 1 descriptor to Tot one In Messages configuration Select Message 2 Access the Symbols keyboard and enter without spaces amp Access the Numeric keyboard and insert 1 2 3 4 within the braces to give 1 2 amp 3 4 Access the Alphabet keyboard and insert text and spaces The value of 1 2 amp 3 4 Set Replace 1 to Source Descriptor Set Replace 2 to Source Value Set Replace 3 to Specified Descriptor Set 3 source to Tot one 29 poc OS ubus SS IN ez Set Replace 4Y to Specified Value 10 Set 4 source to Tot one The result of this is that should the channel 2 alarm go active the following message would be sent to all groups appear on the chart and become part of all groups histories 12 07 06 11 19 58 The value of Chan two 6 0 C amp Tot one 3383 8073 Units Note On some models the message may be wider than the screen If necessary the message can be shortened e g use Ch2 instead of Chan two or it can be viewed in full either in Mes sage log section 3 1 4 or by using Review Software if available
169. up one input channel as Input Type Digital Closed String Synch for example Enable Trigger Active when Synch Job 1 category Clock Job 1 action Preset Job 1 On Active b For each recorder set the same preset hour and minute in Instrument Configuration c For each recorder provide a simultaneous pulse or contact closure to the digital input previously set up The recorders will all be automatically set to the preset time on receipt ofthe input An alternative way of synchronising recorders is via an SNTP time server as described in section 4 5 1 Job Number 17 Category Clock V Action Preset V On Active Y Figure 4 7 5 Clock job menu layout Select Active Inactive or Acknowledgement Notes 1 Whenever a time change occurs a green line is drawn across the chart in vertical trend mode 2 The clock presets to the Preset Hour value set in Config Instrument menu If however Use Summertime DST is enabled in Bystem Locale configuration then an hour is added whilst daylight saving time is in operation 4 7 6 Counter category If Counters section 4 3 13 are enabled the following jobs become available Preset counter Loads the selected counter with the preset value set in the configuration for that coun ter Disable counter Stops the selected counter Increment Adds 1 to the selected counter s value Decrement Subtracts 1 from the s
170. 0 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 15 Connections INTRODUCTION This allows the serial communications ports RJ45 connectors of the recorder to be configured Two modes of operation are available ASCII INPUT and Modbus ASCII INPUT This mode allows the recorder to receive simple ASCII messages from for example barcode readers Programmable Logic Controllers PLCs Global Positioning Systems GPSs NMEA 0183 protocol etc Messages are sentto as many groups as are set up to receive them and become a part ofthese groups histories and appear on vertical and horizontal trend displays in the following format 23 08 05 10 25 06 Serial Message of up to 85 characters q ____ _ A Date and time Source Message MODBUS RTU This allows the recorder s serial communications port to be used as Modbus master or Modbus slave When acting as a master the unit can communicate with up to either 16 slaves standard or 32 slaves op tion Use of the Serial port is complementary to the use of Ethernet connections Note When configuring a unit as a Modbus slave itis recommended that the Instrument and Point Configurations give easily identifiable instrument and point names descriptors TERMINATION AND BIASSING If the communications line is left open ended the end ofthe cable acts as a reflector returning what can appear to be true data signals back down the line A receiver cannot distinguish be
171. 0 Not used Figure 8 3 Address map representation Notes 1 All addresses in hexadecimal 2 Areas represent relative sizes but are not to scale User Guide HA029324 Page 273 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 3 ADDRESS MAP Cont The contents of each group can be determined by reading the relevant register number as shown in below The table below is a decoder for the results For example if a group has channels 1 to 6 maths channel 1 and totaliser three fitted the results would be Register 1 63 32 16 8 4 2 1 channels 1 to 6 Register 5 2048 maths channel 1 Register 12 2 Totaliser 1 All other register values 0 Value if bit set Bit number o E z xD o D D tc ECH eo oa em JO bo A o N E LO o A 8 3 4 5 6 y 8 9 10 EM 12 EN 14 EDEN 16 18 19 20 oo E E sm sg E 34 Beem 36 RS 38 R598 40 MIA 42 MUSA 44 MASA 46 Ee 48 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 78 74 75 Mi M2 M3 M4 M5 M7 M8 M9 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20 M21 M23 M24 M25 M26 M27 M28 M29 M30 M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37 M39 M40 M41 M42 M43 M44 M45 M46 M47 M48 M49 M50 M51 M52 M53 M55 M56 M57 M58 M59 M60 M61 M62 M63 M64 M65 M66 M67 M68 M69 M71 M72 M73 M74 M75 M76 M77 M78 M79 M80 M81 M82 M83 M84 M85 M87 M88 M89 M90 M91 M92 M93 M94 M95 M96 M97 M98 M99 M100 T1 To T4 TS T6 17 T8 To TiO TM Tie ma
172. 0 100 800 00 800 00 720 00 680 00 600 00 600 00 760 00 767 00 733 00 700 00 667 00 640 00 633 00 90 90 90 80 80 80 70 70 70 60 60 60 50 50 50 560 00 567 00 533 00 40 40 40 400 00 400 00 Scale on bar Scale on ba Value 10 Value 12 r Left Centre Right Decimal scale Vertical Scale on bar Percent Bargraph Time Marker interval Default Number of horizontal grid lines between successive time markers Trend Padding Default For group trend only Normal trends are 1 pixel wide Setting a pad ding value of N adds N pixels on each side of the central pixel For example a padding value of 2 would produce traces 5 pixels wide Applies to all channels in the group Units Font List of fonts For Channel Numeric displays only if Faceplate Style is set to Custom then Units Font allows the Channel Units font to be selected from a picklist Update when Value changes Always Action is taken when the value associated with the component chang es The component is redrawn continuously at the display update rate Vertical alignment Centred bottom top Allows text to be positioned relative to its height setting Value Font List of fonts For Channel Numeric displays only if Faceplate Style is set to Custom then Value Font allows the Channel Value font to be selected from
173. 0 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 17 Output channels Output Channels appears as a configuration item only if the Master Comms option is fitted and allows a Master Unit to write one or more of its points to one or more slaves channels Figure 4 3 17a shows a typical configuration page Output Channel Number 1 Output 1 v Enable v Jam Select Off or Output Type Master Commsv master Comms Slave 1 Fum Recorder 2 v Parameter Comms Channel Scaling High Low Y Scale Low O Scale High 100 Point Type Channel yp ERR eee destination point Point Number 1 Process Value Medium Priorityw Select iteration rate Descriptor Output 1 Source 1 Channel 4Y Select source point Default 0 Scaling items appear only for some slave types On Error Write Default Apply Discard Figure 4 3 17a Typical output channel configuration page CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS Output Channel Number Allows the user to select the Output to be configured Enable Allows the output channel to be enabled or disabled Output Type Select Master Comms Slave Select the slave to be written to Parameter Select required parameter from picklist varies according to slave type model Scaling If this field appears depends on slave type the Low and High scaling should match that of the slave Channel being written to Point Type Allows a point type to be chosen from a picklist Pick
174. 0 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 5 Archive configuration Notes 1 For the sake of brevity the phrase memory device is used for whatever mass storage medium is fitted to the recorder integral or via a USB port 2 CSV format files are not as secure as Packed Binary format files This allows an archive strategy to be set up for saving data to a local memory device orto a remote PC The local strategy includes archive period memory device full operation compression factor and an esti mate of the maximum time to next archive to avoid data being overwritten in memory Duration The recorder uses a dedicated area of its Flash memory as an archive data buffer which means that data is written to the memory device or remote PC only when required rather than continuously In order to carry out a successful remote archive details of the remote host must be entered both in this Archive section of the Config menu and in Network configuration bection 4 5 Further the current ac cess level must have Connect from remote enabled in the Security Access menu fection 4 4 1 Compression Normal W Select Normal or High Flash Size 99 25 Mb Shortest Trend History Group 1 Duration 108 6 Days Show Local settings Media mediacard Y Archive to Media Automatic Y Select Local or Remote settings gt Select Media card or USB port Y J39 Select archive f
175. 1 Horizontal trend example As shown in the figure the group process values appear as though being traced on a chart which is rolling from right to left i e the oldest sample is at the left edge of the chart and the latest sample is at the right edge of the chart The point Descriptors Span high and Span low values and process values at the time and date at the top left of the screen appear in a table below the chart The amount of time across the width of the chart the horizontal scale can be edited from its default of 20 minutes by typing a new value in the box at bottom left of the page and confirming either by clicking on the Set button at bottom right or by using the pc s Enter key To return to the Trend Mode selection page Click on the Trends link at top left User Guide HA029324 Page 350 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE C3 2 2 Vertical trends This viewing mode is identical in operation to the Horizontal Trend mode described above except that the chart is vertical with the most recent sample at the top and the oldest at the bottom The Vertical scale i e the amount of trend history displayed within the height of the chart is edited as described for Horizontal scale in the Horizontal Trend description above To return to the Trend Mode selection page Click on the Trends link at top left C3 2 3 Numeric display This viewing mode contains only a table of point d
176. 1 acknowledges all alarms Other values no effect Uint16 Write only 0020 32 Spare Not used 0021 33 Product version Product version Returns value HHHH CNOMO Uint 16 Read only 006B 107 HHHH version number in hex E G 0401 version 4 01 Serial number Returns Instrument Number see in hex int32 Read only 006C 108 Not used 006E 110 Company ID Company ID Returns value hex 0500 CNOMO int 16 Read only 0079 121 Product ID Product ID Returns model number in hex CNOMO int 16 Read only 007A 122 Parameter name Description CNOMO Comit de normalisation des moyens de production HA029324 User Guide Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 275 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 2 Channel configuration data The following tables give hex addresses for channels 1 to 12 inclusive Note A B Switching B values are not accessible via modbus for this software version Span Zone Colour etc are therefore all setting A Generally channel N parameter address channel 1 parameter address 162 N 1 decimal CHANNEL 1 Parameter name Ch1 Span high Ch1 Span low Ch1 Zone high Ch1 Zone low Ch1 PV type Ch1 Decimal places Ch1 Colour Ch1 Units Spare Ch1 Open string Spare Ch1 Close string Spare Ch1 Descriptor Spare Ch1 No of alarms Ch1 PV format Spare Ch1 Alarm 1 enable Ch1 Alarm 1 type Ch1 Alarm 1 setpoint Spare Ch1 Alarm 2 enable Ch1 Alar
177. 1 msec 2 SNTP time is based on elapsed seconds since 00 00 hrs on 1st January 1900 The time is not affected by time zones or daylight saving adjustments 3 Ifthe instrument time differs from the SNTP time by less than 2 seconds the instrument time is updated gradually 1 msec 8 times a second to prevent time change events being recorded If the difference is greater than 2 seconds this is defined as a time change event the results of which are that the recorder time is immediately updated and a green line is drawn across the chart vertical horizontal trend modes only to indicate the time change 4 If more than 5 time change events occur within 24 hours a Time Synchronisation failure instru ment alarm is set 24 hours after the first event Once synchronisation is re established the alarm self clears within 24 hours 5 An SNTP server failure instrument alarm is flagged if the configured server cannot be ac cessed or if the year received from the server is less than 2001 or more than 2035 Continued HA029324 Page 202 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 5 1 NETWORK ADDRESS Cont SNTP SERVER NOTES Cont 6 When the instrument is acting as a server and a Clock Failure instrument alarm is active the server time is setto 1 1 1900 which is ignored by clients 7 Servers such as Microsoft TimeServ cannot be used with this series of instruments because they are not SN
178. 1 stops current batch Batch status flag 1 Running 0 Not running Batch field 1 text string max 60 characters Batch field 2 text string max 60 characters Batch field 3 text string max 60 characters Batch field 4 text string max 60 characters Batch field 5 text string max 60 characters Batch field 6 text string max 60 characters Uint32 Uint 32 String 20 Uint16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 Double String 60 CECCCCCCCCCCCCCCC String 60 Boolean Boolean Boolean String 60 String 60 String 60 String 60 String 60 String 60 Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Write only Write only Write only Read only Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Start Addr Hex Dec A4D6 42198 A4D7 42199 A4D9 42201 A4DB 42203 A4E5 42213 AAEF 42223 A4F0 42224 A4F1 42225 A4F2 42226 A4F3 42227 A4F4 42228 A4F5 42229 A4F6 42230 A4F7 42231 A4F8 42232 A4F9 42233 AAFA 42234 A4FB 42235 A4FC 42236 A4FD 42237 AAFE 42238 AAFF 42239 A500 42240 A504 42244 A522 42274 A540 42304 A55E 42334 A57C 42364 A57D 42365 A57E 42366
179. 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE SAFETY NOTES WARNING This unit is intended for use with low voltage dc supplies Connection of mains line supply volt ages will not only damage the unit but may also cause an electrical shock hazard to be present at operator accessible surfaces WARNING The supply voltage connector has two 0V pins commoned together by the circuit board back plane and two 24V nom pins which are also shorted together internally This allows easy daisy chaining of multiple units Two separate power supply units may not be connected as to do so may result in damage to the unit and or a potential fire or explosion hazard CAUTION Local lightning protection must be fitted if the dc power supply unit is located more than 30 me tres from the visual supervisor s it is supplying Note in order to comply with the requirements of safety standard BS EN61010 the recorder shall have one ofthe following as a disconnecting device fitted within easy reach of the operator and labelled as the disconnecting device a A switch or circuit breaker which complies with the requirements of IEC947 1 and IEC947 3 b A separable coupler which can be disconnected without the use of a tool c Aseparable plug without a locking device to mate with a socket outlet in the building 1 Ifa hazard could arise from an operator s reliance on a value displayed by the equipment the dis play must
180. 2 Width 100 Height 10 channel Channel 2 3 Bar3 Horizontal bargraph with X 0 Y 24 Width 100 Height 10 channel Channel 3 4 Bar4 Horizontal bargraph with X 0 Y 36 Width 100 Height 10 channel Channel 4 5 Group 1 Vertical trend group with X 25 Y 48 Width 50 Height 50 Group name to appear above display PROCEDURE Group Vertical Trend gr_vtrend A Group Horizontal Trend gr_htrend 1 Operate the Add key to call the Component Gra Veria E selection list Group Horizontal Bargraph gr_hor_bar Group Numeric gr_num 2 Touch Channel Horizontal Bargraph to high Channel Vertical Bargraph eh_ver_bar light it then press Add Channel Numeric ch_num Channel Data ch_data 3 Repeat step 2 three times then Dialog Action Navigation Action Operator Button Y 4 Touch Group Vertical Trend then Add then Close Add Close Component PropertyEditor Screent 5 The Component property editor page reap pears with the default values for the most ZE E a recently added component displayed ae gr_vtrend_6 1 as rror Group Number 0 Current display group Y Show Title Bar Yes Y X Position 0 Y Y Position 0 Y Width 50 o v 6 Touch the Identifier field then enter the Height 50 V name Group 1 Ok using the pop up key SE Ee x raw Oraer board which appears Component Type Group Vertical Trend gr_vtrend Goto Canvas Save Close More 7 I
181. 2 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA Cont CHANNEL 3 Parameter name Ch3 Span high Ch3 Span low Ch3 Zone high Ch3 Zone low Ch3 PV type Ch3 Decimal places Ch3 Colour Ch3 Units Spare Ch3 Open string Spare Ch3 Close string Spare Ch3 Descriptor Spare Ch3 No of alarms Ch3 PV format Spare Ch3 Alarm 1 enable Ch3 Alarm 1 type Ch3 Alarm 1 setpoint Spare Ch3 Alarm 2 enable Ch3 Alarm 2 type Ch3 Alarm 2 setpoint Spare Ch3 Alarm 3 enable Ch3 Alarm 3 type Ch3 Alarm 3 setpoint Spare Ch3 Alarm 4 enable Ch3 Alarm 4 type Ch3 Alarm 4 setpoint Spare Description Upper span value display full scale Lower span value display zero Zone high value two decimal places Zone low value two decimal places Input type 1 Analogue input 3 Totaliser 2 Maths 4 Counter Number of decimal places 0 to 9 used by all scaled parameters except where stated Channel colour 0 to 55 See Annex B for definitions Units string up to five characters Open Digital Input string up to eight characters Closed Digital Input string up to eight characters Channel descriptor up to 20 characters Number of alarms on this channel 0 to 2 0 Numeric 1 Digital strings Alarm 1 enable 0 Off 1 Unlatched Alarm 1 type 0 Absolute low 2 Deviation in 4 Rate of change rise Trigger setpoint Note 2 2 Latched 3 Trigger 1 Absolute high 3 Deviation out 5 Rate of change fall
182. 208 Register 14 as register 1 but for points 209 to 224 Register 15 as register 1 but for points 225 to 240 Register 16 as register 1 but for points 241 to 256 Identifies the length of a text message to be read Time stamp of the text message to be read UTC format Read text string from instrument display Write a text string to instrument display Boolean Flag Value 0001 starts new batch Boolean Flag Value 0001 stops current batch Batch status flag 1 Running 0 Not running Batch field 1 text string max 60 characters Batch field 2 text string max 60 characters Batch field 3 text string max 60 characters Batch field 4 text string max 60 characters Batch field 5 text string max 60 characters Batch field 6 text string max 60 characters Uint32 Uint 32 String 20 Uint16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 nt16 Double String 60 CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC String 120 Boolean Boolean Boolean String 60 String 60 String 60 String 60 String 60 String 60 Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Write only Write only Write only Read only Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Start Addr Hex
183. 222 Can Sign Foreground u rte recibe ic 212 Caps tocada audio 251 Centralised security TParesholds sac leticia em 251 User Guide HA029324 Page 354 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE C Cont Configuration Cont Colours and Fonts ettet tene 212 Summertiltie aerei rt teet hp DERE Re Ee 207 Configuration menu 347 Time and date asocia ani 207 Communications t 137 Gharibieltimeoltoo ete tenes tpe ies 82 TIMEZONE ceterum hei 207 Diagnostics utet Ht ett t e pU re E edis 208 Total rumania eterne teret eee ee ted 128 Modbus master aiii nados 143 Trace Colour aedi aan aa uu RE 69 Se al Loira areas 139 User linearisation tables sss 89 TitYYG OU u nier mire er rer heir nie 57 I T 74 Compact flash location ictor td eere 7 Zone Component E M 69 BIAIS LETT LET 256 E EN 207 It E cio oe SEHR Bude 244 Connected MESSAGING sse 173 Compressibility factor 105 106 Connect from Remote aite tee cust 187 Config data update rate 150 152 Connecion Sian dicas 139 Config Revision 25 91 215 Contents Of Group utente EDU RR 64 Embed in Eegen ege tdi nabo 87 Continuous batch selection vaa 92 Configuration si accessere rer ELE 52 Controller parameters sss 152 APB SWITCHING a aei eie nin iaa 60 69 Copy ACC M 26 Configuration MENU mitosis 347 ET dut lid asss
184. 29324 User Guide Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 359 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE Messages Cont New Cont No 18 24 351 Full User Name aci tete tette odias 196 Operator entered 44 c 226 POW SEW estarse 25 A aaa aasan ee 187 196 Sena COMME LL 139 Usar EE 196 Minimum User Screen key sette trente 243 Channel Descriptor ueneno toa 122 Noja cionado E A E 253 No chart grid Password length cs arescit nabo Aa 192 Nominal height width un tetro ct 253 PC requirements cec ideal 230 NONE ii nito aaa E 84 Wiqita gua 253 NOR isis hoe dentine kushasqanta k aqchus 84 Min Maxtecor did y aaa rrr eto teer 60 El EK ER Missing PIKEIS EE 322 A i554 cues suscawsenssconsdsassaeteaioneed iT Esai Eiaa i 253 MKT mateneen se See 100 108 No ak EE 254 ET 100 114 Number Modbus Of Batch Messages 93 Polo 145 OF coSed etos teet eege rr 253 SOttin EE E E 57 Of Fields uan rrr ette eris 171 Address 255 ag enne ns 142 Oa C 253 Comms Maths function 99 Numeric Connection rre e aee tn 6 Display mode tdo le 42 Function code 03 crece tte SEENEN 314 Enables eene Rete 75 Function code 04 y nasua sasataraq 315 WebiSetVel iii aen dm ea PATUIT 351 Function co de D secos cria teret 315 Pto matraca os eege 69 F nction code OB 315 Oe e E 253 Function code Oiii 316 IN Wale
185. 3 03A6 934 03A7 935 03A8 936 03A9 937 O3AA 938 03AB 939 03AC 940 03AF 943 03B1 945 03B5 949 03B9 953 03BD 957 03C1 961 03CB 971 03D5 981 03D6 982 03D7 983 0413 1043 0414 1044 0415 1045 0416 1046 0420 1056 0421 1057 0422 1058 0423 1059 042D 1069 042E 1070 042F 1071 0430 1072 043A 1082 043B 1083 043C 1084 043D 1085 Register Length P PHH ech s m Notes 1 For maths totalisers and counters see the relevant option description 2 If an alarm s Setpoint Source section 4 3 3 is set to anything other than Constant the value re turned will be the previously configured constant value HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 User Guide Page 281 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 2 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA Cont CHANNEL 7 Parameter name Ch7 Span high Ch7 Span low Ch7 Zone high Ch7 Zone low Ch7 PV type Ch7 Decimal places Ch7 Colour Ch7 Units Spare Ch7 Open string Spare Ch7 Close string Spare Ch7 Descriptor Spare Ch7 No of alarms Ch7 PV format Spare Ch7 Alarm 1 enable Ch7 Alarm 1 type arm 1 setpoint arm 2 enable arm 2 type arm 2 setpoint arm 3 enable arm 3 type arm 3 setpoint arm 4 enable arm 4type arm 4 setpoint Description Upper span value display full scale Lower span value display zero Zone high value two decim
186. 4 User Guide Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 237 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 SCREEN BUILDER 7 1 INTRODUCTION This option allows the user to create screen layouts using recorder data simple drawing tools text and or imported image files 24 user screens are editable directly from the operator interface A further 100 extra screens 25 to 124 which can be created edited etc only via Bridge software are also available Once created such screens can be copied or moved to one or more of screens 1 to 24 thus becoming accessible at the instrument s operator interface Each enabled user screen appears as a selection key in the Goto View menu It is therefore recommended that the number of Bridge Screens is set to the number actually needed in order to reduce the number of More operations Notes 1 User screens are not supported from a PDA 2 Asaresult of the way in which the screen is refreshed unexpected results may be obtained if any component is superimposed upon an active component such as a bargraph or trend display 3 The hash character may not be used in text strings User Guide HA029324 Page 238 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 1 1 Display Access As shown in figure 7 1 1 the user screens can be included in the display modes described in anda User screen can be selected as the Home page Note Circular Trend option dis
187. 474 6F3B 28475 Register Length ARRBBP HNOO zi h oo Read Write 6FA9 28585 6FAA 28586 6FB4 28596 6FB5 28597 6FB6 28598 6FB7 28599 6FC1 28609 6FC2 28610 6FC3 28611 6FC4 6FCE 6FCF 6FDO 6FD1 28625 Alarm 1 setpoin Spare Alarm 2 enable Alarm 2 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 2 type Alarm 2 type As alarm 1 type above Alarm 2 setpoin Trigger setpoint see note 1 Spare Alarm 3 enable Alarm 3 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 3 type Alarm 3 type As alarm 1 type above Alarm 3 setpoin Trigger setpoint see note 1 Spare Alarm 4 enable Alarm 4 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 4 type Alarm 4 type As alarm 1 type above Alarm 4 setpoin Trigger setpoint see note 1 Spare Trigger setpoint see note Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Notes 1 If an alarm s Setpoint Source Eection 4 3 3 is set to anything other than Constant the value returned will be the previously configured constant value 2 If more than 100 Maths channels are configured in Virtual channels then the extra channels occupy totaliser address space such that maths channel 101 occupies totaliser 1 address and so on Totaliser 1 value is to be found at the first address after the final maths channel Thus if there are for example 105 maths channels then Total
188. 4839 D639 54841 D63B 54843 Start Addr Hex Dec D64F 54863 D651 54865 D653 54867 D655 54869 D657 54871 D659 54873 D65B 54875 D65D 54877 D65F 54879 Start Addr Hex Dec D673 54899 D675 54901 D677 54903 D679 54905 D67B 54907 D67D 54909 D67F 54911 D681 54913 D683 54915 Register Length NNNNNNNN N Register Length NJ NJ N N N N N N N Register Length NJ NJ N N N NJ N NN N Notes 1 For fmaths and see the relevant option description 2 If an alarm s Setpoint Source section 4 3 3 is set to anything other than Constant the value re turned will be the previously configured constant value User Guide HA029324 Page 306 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 8 IEEE Area Channel run time data The following tables show the hexadecimal addresses for the specified 32 bit floating point values for channels 1 to 12 Generally Parameter address for channel N Parameter address for channel 1 4 N 1 decimal CHANNEL 1 Start Addr Register Hex Dec Length Channel 1 value Current process value PV See note F8C3 63683 Channel 1 status Channel status Read only F8C5 63685 0 Good PV 5 Ranging error 1 Channel off 6 Overflow 2 Over range 7 Bad PV 3 Under range 8 No data 4 Hardware error Channel 1 Alarms Alarm information F8C6 63686 Bit 0 0
189. 4D 1869 0757 1879 0758 1880 0759 1881 075A 1882 0764 1892 0765 1893 0766 1894 0767 1895 Register Length P PHH gt oo Notes 1 For maths totalisers and counters see the relevant option description 2 If an alarm s Setpoint Source section 4 3 3 is set to anything other than Constant the value re turned will be the previously configured constant value User Guide Page 286 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 2 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA Cont CHANNEL 12 Parameter name Ch12 Span high Ch12 Span low Ch12 Zone high Ch12 Zone low Ch12 PV type Ch12 Decimal places Ch12 Colour Ch12 Units Spare Ch12 Open string Spare Ch12 Close string Spare Ch12 Descriptor Spare Ch12 No of alarms Ch12 PV format Spare Ch12 Alarm 1 enable Ch12 Alarm 1 type Ch12 Alarm 1 setpoint Spare Ch12 Alarm 2 enable Ch12 Alarm 2 type Ch12 Alarm 2 setpoint Spare Ch12 Alarm 3 enable Ch12 Alarm 3 type Ch12 Alarm 3 setpoint Spare Ch12 Alarm 4 enable Ch12 Alarm 4 type Ch12 Alarm 4 setpoint Spare Description Upper span value display full scale Lower span value display zero Zone high value two decimal places Zone low value two decimal places Input type 1 Analogue input 3 Totaliser 2 Maths 4 Counter Number of decimal places 0 to 9 used by all scaled parameters except where stat
190. 5 01 c Figure 3 4 6c Numeric display mode example 19 channels HA029324 Page 43 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 5 OPERATOR NOTES Note Operator notes should not be confused with similar messages described in bection 4 3 8 which appear as a result of job action It is possible for the user to enter a note of up to 120 characters at any time from any display page not from configuration pages Each note is associated with the current display group and becomes a part of that group s history The notes appear on vertical and horizontal trend displays only although they can be entered in any display mode The note appears on the chart and in the Message Log preceded by the date time and current full user name as shown in the first example below If Audit Trail is enabled the note contains audit trail informa tion as shown in the second example below See pection 4 4 24 for details of the Auditor options 11 07 06 13 51 11 Frederick Bloggs New Spray nozzles fitted to Line A Tube 1 S o ___ __ A Date and time Full user name Message 11 07 06 13 51 11 Note Signed Engineer Authorized Engineer New Spray nozzles fitted to Line A Tube 1 Date and time Audit trail information if enabled Message To enter a message 1 Press the Option key then the Note key 2 l fnecessary enter Signature and Authorization passwords Auditor 21CFR11 option only see ZE
191. 5 Type 1 Message y Maths 12 V Teieti 12 y Demand Writes Style Normal v otalisers Field 6 Type Line Feed M Counters 7 Y Emails Line Feed 1 v Groups 12Y Reports Apply Discard Batch Enabled EtherNetl P Server EtherNet IP Server Security Manager DisabledV Options Section 4 3 21 Options Auditor 21CFR11Y Section 4 3 22 Import Table eipible Screen Builder Full Y Export Table eiptable Status Onli Bridge Level Full Y l I O Table Inputs v Server gt Client Master Comms Devices 32 Y Input 1 Channels e Simulation Enabled Y Input 2 Channel2 pv Input 3 Channel3pv AeroDaq DisabledV Input 4 Channel 4 pv _ ee EtherNet IP Enabled Y Input 5 Apply Discard BE Apply Discard Wizard Default Table Show Errors Mail Server Port Number Sender Email Errors To Retry Time Recipient List Descriptor Rept1 Rept2 Rept3 Rept4 Rept5 Rept6 Rept7 Rept8 Rept9 Rcpt10 Email Number Descriptor Protocol Subject Text Include Message Message Ee Recorder IP address Bo Seconds 1 List WV Lan PV 1 Email1 Y Emaili SMTP Email Y A v 1 Message 1 v Apply L Discard Figure B9i Config menu structure sheet 6 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 User Guide Page 343 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B9 MENU STRUCTURE Cont Archive
192. 5 to FFFF Not used EtherNet IP Input channels 76 to 100 Addresses FFF0 to FFF4 Permanent ID table A run time data Addresses DO t PPEP Spare Addresses FC47 to FCBE Counters Addresses FCBF to FD07 EtherNet IP Addresses FB7F to FC46 Totalisers Addresses F8C3 to FCBE Run time data IEEE Region 32 bit data access area run time Addresses F9EF to FB7E Maths data Addresses F8C3 to F9EE Addresses D4E7 to F8C2 Point configuration data Input channels IEEE Region 32 bit data access area E 32 bit Addresses DOE6 to D4E6 R W Indirection table config Addresses ED83 to F48A Totalisers Addresses CCE5 to DOE5 R O Indirection table data Addresses CC26 to CCE4 Feature ID table Addresses DF73 to ED82 Maths Addresses A4D6 to CC25 Group data Addresses D4E7 to DF72 Input channels Addresses A1D9 to A4D5 Point run time data Addresses A47C to A4D5 Counters Point run time data Addresses A3E6 to A47B Totalisers Addresses A2BA to A3E5 Maths Addresses A1D9 to A2B9 Input channels Addresses 007B to A1D8 Point configuration data 7 Addresses 8EDD to A1D8 Counters Input channels points 1 to 75 Math channels points 76 to 175 Totalisers points 176 to 225 Counters points 226 to 255 Addresses 6F39 to 8EDC Totalisers Addresses 2FF1 to 6F38 Maths Addresses 007B to 2FF0 Input channels Addresses 0001 to 007A Instrument data Address 000
193. 50 History 09 07 06 11 40 50 1555 The down arrow navigation key 1 can be used as an alternative to the Open Folder key Figure 5 File system overview Page 227 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 5 3 FILE STRUCTURE The file structure on the archive medium is as depicted below in figure 5 3 for a six group instrument Each subdirectory contains a maximum of 32 files there being sufficient subdirectories created to con tain allthe group s history files The subfolder names are the numerical part ofthe first history file that they contain For example if the first file name is Furnace1 Temp 20051012 80155F2601000120 uhh then the subdirec tory name will be 20051012 80155F2601000120 Ifthere are more than 32 files the next subdirectory name is 20051012 80155F2601000140 assuming the file names are contiguous SD or Flash card I history SSS KEE E group 6 group 5 group 4 group 3 group 2 group 1 Only group 1 structure shown for clarity Each group contains subdirectories each containing up to 32 files sub directory n Remaining group 1 history files max 32 Figure 5 3 File structure archive _ ab sub directory 2 directory 1 Second 32 First 32 group 1 group 1 history history files files HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 228 100 1
194. 6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7 Spare Bit8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Bit9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11 Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15 Spare Ch12 Alarms ATFC 41468 Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Note PV access is Read Write for any point configured with Slave Comms as its Type or Function Otherwise PV access is Read only HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 User Guide Page 293 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 4 Group data Generally Parameter address for group N Parameter address for group 1 629 N 1 decimal GROUP 1 Parameter name Grp1 Trend type Grp1 Trend rate Grp1 Archive rate Grp1 Descriptor Spare Grp1 Channels in group See table 8 3 for point types Grp1 Text length Grp1 Text time stamp Grp1 Read text Reserved Grp1 Write text Reserved Grp1 Batch start Grp1 Batch stop Grp1 Batch running Grp1 Text field 1 Reserved Grp1 Text field 2 Reserved Grp1 Text field 3 Reserved Grp1 Text field 4 Reserved Grp1 Text field 5 Reserved Grp1 Text field 6 Reserved Spare Description Trend enhancements 0 Interpolation enabled 1 Adaptive recording enabled Trend u
195. 6 1831 E mail info eurotherm in invensys com IRELAND Dublin Eurotherm Ireland Limited Telephone 353 1 469 1800 Fax 353 1 469 1300 E mail info eurotherm ie invensys com ITALY Como Eurotherm S r l Telephone 39 031 975111 Fax 39 031 977512 E mail info eurotherm it invensys com KOREA Seoul Eurotherm Korea Limited Telephone 82 31 273 8507 Fax 82 31 273 8508 E mail info eurotherm kr invensys com NETHERLANDS Alphen a d Rijn Eurotherm B V Telephone 31 172 411752 Fax 31 172 417260 E mail info eurotherm nlGinvensys com NORWAY Oslo Eurotherm A S Telephone 47 67 592170 Fax 47 67 118301 E mail info eurotherm noGinvensys com POLAND Katowice Invensys Eurotherm Sp z o o Telephone 48 32 218 5100 Fax 48 32 218 5108 E mail info eurotherm plQinvensys com SPAIN Madrid Eurotherm Espafia SA Telephone 34 91 661 6001 Fax 34 91 661 9093 E mail info eurotherm es invensys com SWEDEN Malmo Eurotherm AB Telephone 46 40 384500 Fax 46 40 384545 E mail info eurotherm se invensys com SWITZERLAND Wollerau Eurotherm Produkte Schweiz AG Telephone 41 44 787 1040 Fax 41 44 787 1044 E mail info eurotherm ch invensys com UNITED KINGDOM Worthing Invensys Eurotherm Limited Telephone 44 1903 268500 Fax 44 1903 265982 E mail info eurotherm uk invensys com eb www invensys co uk U S A Ashburn VA Eurotherm Inc Telephone 1 703 724 7300 Fax
196. 6 5 Ethernet Diagnostics display Host Allows the IP address or DNS Name of the host to be Pinged Ping Status Indicates the latest status returned see table 4 6 5 below for details Displayed Status Interpretation Waiting The default status displayed on power up In Progress Displayed whilst waiting for a response from the host Host Reachable A device was found at the specified address Ping Error in value Host refused to allow socket connection on the defined Ping Port Request Timed Out Unable to reach a host at the specified network address Host Unreachable Unable to reach a host at the specified network address Unknown error An unknown internal error has occurred Table 4 6 5 EtherNet diagnostics display Ping Now Operating this button causes an Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP com mand to be sent to the host Ifthe host receives the message it returns a message to the sender within a few seconds Local Modbus Client Appears only if the Master Comms option is enabled Indicates that the local Modbus Master is connected Remote Modbus Client Appears only if the Master Comms option is enabled Displays the IP address of connected Modbus TCP IP clients Otherwise Offline is displayed Page 209 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 6 5 ETHERNET DIAGNOSTICS Cont EtherNet IP Clients Appears only if the EtherNet I
197. 60 String 60 String 60 Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Write only Write only Write only Read only Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Start Addr Hex Dec AEAA 44714 AEAB 44715 AEAD 44717 AEAF 44719 AEB9 44729 AEC3 44739 AECA 44740 AECS 44741 AEC6 44742 AEC7 44743 AEC8 44744 AEC9 44745 AECA 44746 AECB 44747 AECC 44748 AECD 44749 AECE 44750 AECF 44751 AEDO 44752 AED1 42253 AED2 44754 AED3 44755 AED4 44756 AED8 44760 AEF6 44790 AF14 44820 AF32 44850 AF50 44880 AF51 44881 AF52 44882 AF53 44883 AF71 44913 AF8F 44943 AFAD 44973 AFCB 45003 AFE9 45033 B007 45063 B025 45093 B043 45123 B061 45153 B08F 45183 BOSD 45213 BOBB 45243 Register Length User Guide Page 298 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 4 GROUP DATA Cont GROUP 6 Parameter name Grp6 Trend type Grp6 Trend rate Grp6 Archive rate Grp6 Descriptor Spare Grp6 Channels in group See table 8 3 for point types Grp6 Text length Grp6 Text time stamp Grp6 Read text Reserved Grp6 Write text Reserved G
198. 68 B139 45369 B13A 45370 B13B 45371 B13C 45372 B13D 45373 B13E 45374 B13F 45375 B140 45376 B141 45377 B142 45378 B143 45379 B144 45380 B145 45381 B146 45382 B147 45383 B148 45384 B149 45385 B14D 45389 B16B 45419 B189 45449 B1A7 45479 B1C5 45509 B1C6 45510 B1C7 45511 B1C8 45512 B1E6 45542 B204 45572 B222 45602 B240 45632 B25E 45662 B27C 45692 B29A 45722 B2B8 45752 B2D6 45782 B2F4 45812 B312 45842 B330 45872 Register Length HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 User Guide Page 299 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 5 Feature identification table FIT This table allows the host to identify which features are available at the recorder Start Addr Register Hex Dec Length Number of features Number of supported features Read only CC26 52262 Feature 1 Indirection Table Read only CC27 52263 Read only indirection table start address R O vector Read only CC28 52264 Read Write indirection table start address R W vector Read only CC29 52265 Spare CC2A 52266 Feature 2 Function codes supported FC I D Read only CC2B 52267 Bit map of supported MODBUS function codes Read only CC2C 52268 Bit 0 O code 1 not supported 1 code 1 supported Bit 1 O code 2 not supported 1 code 2 supported Bit 2 0 code 3 not supported 1 code 3 supported Bit3 O code 4 not supported 1 code 4 supported
199. 69 gren 210 AM a 71 Kc e 226 242 Average E 71 Mathi f rictiOnh 32r tree hides 100 Change times peintre eppure 71 EE ee a 243 Deviation valiente eines 71 ec 133 Dwell period 71 Configuration Hysteresis aicoe enemies ti reise oia 71 Men r niae 340 Reference value sss 71 OT 134 leet DE 32 bIEUEEE eege upa akapa Qaya asta 135 E ET 211 Eelere JO ica 219 PRU CDA C onto O Modbus addressing sss 134 Bate hic eti saan sk qh teret ttd in omite Run time data Modbus 135 CHANNEL A TO SEIT DE 136 TEE Country Selection of iiass sasieoemenounqeineniete 207 COUNTY A M Created Ones ciego cese rne REESE UA 215 BE Creating a USEF SCO SM ssc cscsisscsnasssesseesanssvonsssuiasvetsacenensoes ses 240 Decimal point neret e tete CSV Demand writes Date Time ormat cun ananas egenos 81 Display brightness settings ee eects 57 Use Tab delimitet nee pete trt 81 Email atico soi 167 CURE MIE asas prin 183 a M M 82 Cursor Keys pee ette e nee ia teen 22 BUTTONS ua ER RSA 85 ect 213 Ilo 59 Configuration mien die ecrire ass 347 Instr tment eh TO 57 CUTE 226 Language ener eie irr d dit 207 Cutoff High BOoW s teneret repr fetta Ie Eee 128 Locked indicator 12 Cycle channmels OD Off tei aiii 30 Manage Metepec 191 Master COMN
200. 73 49 i 105 69 LF 10 OA 42 2A J 74 4A j 106 6A VT 11 OB 43 2B K 75 4B k 107 6B FF 12 UC 44 2C L 76 AC 108 6C CR 13 0D 45 2D M 77 4D m 109 6D SO 14 OE 46 2E N 78 4E n 110 6E SI 15 OF 47 2F O 79 4F 111 6F DLE 16 10 0 48 30 P 80 50 p 112 70 DC1 17 11 1 49 31 Q 81 51 q 113 71 DC2 18 12 2 50 32 R 82 52 r 114 72 DC3 19 13 3 51 33 S 83 53 s 115 73 DC4 20 14 4 52 34 T 84 54 t 116 74 NAK 21 15 5 53 35 U 85 55 u 117 75 SYN 22 16 6 54 36 V 86 56 v 118 76 ETB 23 17 7 55 37 W 87 57 w 119 77 CAN 24 18 8 56 38 X 88 58 x 120 78 EM 25 19 9 57 39 Y 89 59 y 121 79 SUB 26 1A I 58 3A Z 90 5A Z 122 7A ESC 27 1B E 59 3B 91 5B 123 7B FS 28 1C lt 60 3C 92 C 124 7C GS 29 1D 61 3D 93 5D 125 7D RS 30 1E gt 62 3E AN 94 5E 126 7E US 31 1F 63 3F _ 95 5F Not printed 127 7F Notes 1 All the above characters can be used as Start or End of message characters entered in decimal 2 If characters 0 to 31 00 to 1F are used as message characters they will be replaced by ques tion marks on the screen User Guide HA029324 Page 332 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B7 TIME ZONE INFORMATION This section gives an explanation of the time zone abbreviations listed in the System Locale Time Zone pick list The list starts at GMT travelling Eastwards round the world Abbre viation Full title Time at noon GMT Hours of difference GMT UTC ECT EET ART EAT MET NET PLT IST BS
201. 76 1910 0777 1911 0778 1912 0778 1915 077D 1917 0781 1921 0785 1925 0789 1929 078D 1933 0797 1943 07A1 1953 07A2 1954 07A3 1955 07DF 2015 07E0 2016 07E1 2017 07E2 2018 07EC 2028 07ED 2029 O7EE 2030 O7EF 2031 07F9 2041 07FA 2042 07FB 2043 07FC 2044 0806 2054 0807 2055 0808 2056 0809 2057 Register Length P PHH oo Notes 1 For maths totalisers and counters see the relevant option description 2 If an alarm s Setpoint Source section 4 3 3 is set to anything other than Constant the value re turned will be the previously configured constant value HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 User Guide Page 287 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 3 Channel Run Time data These tables show addresses for channel input values for channels 1 to 12 inclusive Generally channel N address channel 1 address 3 N 1 decimal For channels 75 to 100 EtherNet IP option only see table 4 3 21 CHANNEL 1 Start Addr Hex Dec ATD9 41433 ATDA 41434 Register Parameter name Length Description Ch1 value Ch1 status See note Read only Current process value PV Channel status 0 Good PV 1 Channel off 2 Over range 3 Under range 4 Hardware error Alarm information Bit 0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Bit 1 0 No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required
202. 8 2 1a below are supported and are fully described in Eection 8 5 below MODBUS definition Description Reads the binary contents of holding registers R holdi ist Sadiioidingregisiers In this implementation code 03 is identical with code 04 Reads the binary contents of input registers In this Read input registers implementation code 04 is identical with code 03 Pre set single register Writes a single value to a single register Diagnostics Obtains communications diagnostics information Pre set multiple Registers Writes values to multiple holding registers Table 8 2 1a MODBUS Function code definition DIAGNOSTIC CODES Function code 08 subfunction 00 Return query data echoes the query Loop back HA029324 User Guide Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 265 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 2 1 FUNCTION CODES Cont EXCEPTION CODES MODBUS TCP provides reserved codes used for exceptions These codes provide error information relating to failed requests Exceptions are signalled by hex 80 being added to the function code of the request followed by one of the codes listed in table 8 2 1b below a MODBUS definition Description see Modbus specification for full details Illegal Function An invalid function code was received Illegal Data Address An invalid data address was received Illegal Data Value An invalid data value was received Slave Device Failure An unrecoverabl
203. 80MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 6 BRIDGE REMOTE VIEWER 6 1 INTRODUCTION This feature comes in two levels called Full option and Lite supplied as standard The Full option allows full operation and configuration of the recorder simultaneously from up to ten PCs which meet or exceed the minimum requirements listed below When a change is being made to the configu ration of the recorder by one Bridge user client the message Feature Locked Another client IP ADDRESS has locked this feature Wait for lock to be released and try again appears on the screen of any other user who attempts to change the configuration When changes are com plete the message Feature changed Synchronising data appears on the screens of all clients except that of the one making the change Bridge Lite allows the user to view recorder standard screens dynamically on line from up to 10 PCs which meet or exceed the minimum requirements listed below The software is supplied on a CD ROM which also includes PC Review PC Configuration and Acrobat reader software and various manuals relevant to the recorder The Bridge software is suitable for any physical hardware configurations some common examples being 1 Asingle PC connected directly to a recorder 2 Multiple PCs connected via a network to one or more recorders Each recorder can be accessed simul taneously by a maximum of 10 PCs bu
204. 821 0371 881 0372 882 0373 883 0374 884 037E 894 037F 895 0380 896 0381 897 02E9 907 02EA 908 02EB 909 02EC 910 02F6 920 02F7 921 02F8 922 02F9 923 Register Length P PHH oo Notes 1 For maths totalisers and counters see the relevant option description 2 If an alarm s Setpoint Source section 4 3 3 is set to anything other than Constant the value re turned will be the previously configured constant value User Guide Page 280 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 2 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA Cont CHANNEL 6 Parameter name Ch6 Span high Ch6 Span low Ch6 Zone high Ch6 Zone low Ch6 PV type Ch6 Decimal places Ch6 Colour Ch6 Units Spare Ch6 Open string Spare Ch6 Close string Spare Ch6 Descriptor Spare Ch6 No of alarms Ch6 PV format Spare Ch6 Alarm 1 enable Ch6 Alarm 1 type Ch6 Alarm 1 setpoint Spare Ch6 Alarm 2 enable Ch6 Alarm 2 type Ch6 Alarm 2 setpoint Spare Ch6 Alarm 3 enable Ch6 Alarm 3 type Ch6 Alarm 3 setpoint Spare Ch6 Alarm 4 enable Ch6 Alarm 4 type Ch6 Alarm 4 setpoint Spare Description Upper span value display full scale Lower span value display zero Zone high value two decimal places Zone low value two decimal places Input type 1 Analogue input 3 Totaliser 2 Maths 4 Counter Number of decimal place
205. A57F 42367 A59D 42397 A5BB 42427 A5D9 42457 ASF7 42487 A615 42517 A633 42547 A651 42577 A66F 42607 A68D 42637 A6AB 42667 A6C9 42697 A6E7 42727 Register Length User Guide Page 294 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 4 GROUP DATA Cont GROUP 2 Parameter name Grp2 Trend type Grp2 Trend rate Grp2 Archive rate Grp2 Descriptor Spare Grp2 Channels in group See table 8 3 for point types Grp2 Text length Grp2 Text time stamp Grp2 Read text Reserved Grp2 Write text Reserved Grp2 Batch start Grp2 Batch stop Grp2 Batch running Grp2 Text field 1 Reserved Grp2 Text field 2 Reserved Grp2 Text field 3 Reserved Grp2 Text field 4 Reserved Grp2 Text field 5 Reserved Grp2 Text field 6 Reserved Spare Description Trend enhancements 0 Interpolation enabled 1 Adaptive recording enabled Trend update rate in milliseconds Archive to flash rate in milliseconds Group descriptor 20 characters max 16 Registers holding the group contents as follows Register 1 Bit 0 O Point 1 not in group 1 Point 1 is in group Bit 1 O Point 2 not in group 1 Point 2 is in group Bit 2 0 Point 3 not in group 1 Point 3 is in group Etc Bit 15 0 Point 16 not in group 1 Point 16 is in group Register 2 as register 1 but for points 17 to 32 Register 3 as register 1 but for points 33 to 48 Register
206. ARAMETERS Figures 4 3 3d e and f illustrate the following terms for the different alarm types Threshold For Absolute alarms this defines the value in engineering units at which an alarm is triggered The alarm also returns to its non active state at this value unless a hyster esis value has been set If a dwell value is set the alarm does not become active until this dwell time has elapsed Hysteresis Defines a deadband in engineering units to eliminate spurious triggering if the sig nal value is hovering around the trigger point The deadband lies Below Absolute High thresholds Above Absolute Low thresholds Outside the deviation band for Deviation in alarms Inside the deviation band for Deviation out alarms Dwell Allows a dwell period to be entered in seconds The alarm does not take effect until this period has expired If an alarm clears before the dwell period has expired the alarm is ignored Reference For Deviation alarms this is the central value of the deviation band Deviation For Deviation alarms this value defines the width of the deviation band each side of the reference value I E the total width of the deviation band is 2 x Deviation value Amount For Rate of change alarms this value defines the minimum amount by which the sig nal value would have to change within the Change Time period below in order for the alarm to become active Change Time For Rate of change alarms this selects the time period
207. ATION TABLES Cont CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS Cont Number of points This is used to enter the total number of point pairs in the table The following XY fields increase in number up to the entered value A scroll bar appears if there are more points than can be displayed in the available screen height X1 to XN The input values to the table where N is the Number of Points entered above Y1to YN The resulting corresponding output values from the look up table 3 metres Y wi Numeric Scientific x Y x Y E K A 0 0 0 0 0E0 0 0E0 en 1 0 5 0 074 0 5E0 7 4E 2 1 0 589 1 0E0 5 89E 1 MES 1 988 1 5E0 1 988E0 2 4 712 2 0E0 4 712E0 E 3 11 771 3 080 1 1771E1 50 E 4 18 840 4 0E0 1 8840E1 a 5 25 908 5 0E0 2 5908E1 6 32 977 6 0E0 3 2977E1 7l 40 045 7 0E0 4 0045E1 8 47 114 8 0E0 4 7114E1 40 8 5 50 648 8 5E0 5 0648E1 7 d I u ER 2 metres E DEE ln 2 30 a 5 g o E 3 20 o gt 10 0 X 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Depth metres rk Figure 4 3 9b Sample User Linearisation table Page 90 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 10 Batch recording option Batch records form a part of recording history and are included in the normal archiving process to a re movable Compact Flash card or to a remote PC amp ections 4 1 and 4 3 5 Batches can be initiated directly by the operator if access permission is granted autom
208. Alarm 2 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 2 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 3 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 3 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 4 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 4 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Scaled Scaled Scaled Scaled Enum Uint16 Enum String_5 String_8 String_8 String_20 Uint16 Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Start Addr Hex Dec 01BF 447 01C0 448 01C1 449 01C2 450 01C3 451 01C4 452 01C5 453 01C6 454 01C9 457 01CB 459 01CF 463 01D3 467 01D7 471 01DB 475 01E5 485 01EF 495 01F0 496 01F1 497 022D 557 022E 558 022F 559 0230 560 023A 570 023B 571 023C 572 023D 573 0247 583 0248 584 0249 585 024A 586 0254 596 0255 597 0256 598 0257 599 Register Length PRR PHH 2 ech oo Notes 1 For maths totalisers and counters see the relevant option description 2 If an alarm s Setpoint Source section 4 3 3 is set to anything other than
209. Batch On start log 3 was 1 Note 05 04 06 08 50 28 Batch Field 3 Operator s name 05 04 06 08 50 28 Batch Field 2 Customer was Bj Enter History 05 04 06 08 50 28 Batch Field 1 Batch number w a 05 04 06 08 50 28 Batch Batch fields 3 was 1 Full Details 05 04 06 08 50 50 Config Signed Engineer Autho Joatch fields 04 04 06 16 42 11 Alarm s off 2 1 04 04 06 16 32 50 Alarm s off 1 1 Refresh 04 04 06 16 31 05 Batch stop Engineer 04 04 06 16 31 05 Stop Batch Signed Engineer Authorized Engineer Belt Failure 04 04 06 16 29 33 Alarm s Ch 04 04 06 16 28 05 Ack all al TO Call Option Menu touch message highlights yellow or Option key 04 04 05 16 27 13 Alarm s 04 04 05 14 06 22 Config Revision 682759 Security Revision 746261 v A y lt P Gi Figure 3 1 4h Message Log options menu Batch See bection 4 3 10 Note See Enter history Operating the Enter History key causes the recorder to display that page of history which includes the highlighted message See fection 3 4 for details of trend history When in Trend history mode operating the Message Log key calls that message log page which contains those messages which are nearest the trend history cursor time Full details Ifthe highlighted message is wider than the display the whole message can be dis played by operating the Full Details key Refresh
210. CCCCCCCCCCC String 60 Boolean Boolean Boolean String 60 String 60 String 60 String 60 String 60 String 60 Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Write only Write only Write only Read only Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write A95C 43356 Start Addr Hex Dec A74B 42827 Register Length A74C 42828 A74E 42830 A750 42832 A75A 42842 A764 42852 A765 42853 A766 42854 A767 42855 A768 42856 A769 42857 A76A 42858 A76B 42859 A76C 42860 A76D 42861 A76E 42862 A76F 42863 A770 42864 A771 42865 A772 42866 A773 42867 A774 42868 A775 42869 A779 42873 A797 42903 A7B5 42933 A7D3 42963 A7F1 42993 A7F2 42994 A7F3 42995 A7F4 42996 A812 43026 A830 43056 A84E 43086 A86C 43116 A88A 43146 A8A8 43176 A8C6 43206 A8E4 43236 A902 43266 A920 43296 A93E 43326 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 User Guide Page 295 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 4 GROUP DATA Cont GROUP 3 Parameter name Grp3 Trend type Grp3 Trend rate Grp3 Archive rate Grp3 Descriptor Spare Grp3 Channels in group See table 8 3 for point types Grp3 Text
211. Constant the value re turned will be the previously configured constant value User Guide Page 278 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 2 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA Cont CHANNEL 4 Parameter name Ch4 Span high Ch4 Span low Ch4 Zone high Ch4 Zone low Ch4 PV type Ch4 Decimal places Ch4 Colour Ch4 Units Spare Ch4 Open string Spare Ch4 Close string Spare Ch4 Descriptor Spare Ch4 No of alarms Ch4 PV format Spare Ch4 Alarm 1 enable Ch4 Alarm 1 type Ch4 Alarm 1 setpoint Spare Ch4 Alarm 2 enable Ch4 Alarm 2 type Ch4 Alarm 2 setpoint Spare Ch4 Alarm 3 enable Ch4 Alarm 3 type Ch4 Alarm 3 setpoint Spare Ch4 Alarm 4 enable Ch4 Alarm 4type Ch4 Alarm 4 setpoint Spare Description Upper span value display full scale Lower span value display zero Zone high value two decimal places Zone low value two decimal places Input type 1 Analogue input 3 Totaliser 2 Maths 4 Counter Number of decimal places 0 to 9 used by all scaled parameters except where stated Channel colour 0 to 55 See Annex B for definitions Units string up to five characters Open Digital Input string up to eight characters Closed Digital Input string up to eight characters Channel descriptor up to 20 characters Number of alarms on this channel 0 to 2 0 Numeric 1 Digital strings Enum 2 Latched 3 Trigger Al
212. Constant The relevant gas constant in J kg K Z The compressibility factor described above HA029324 Page 107 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont ROLLING AVERAGE This calculates the average value of the last R samples of a channel taken at N second intervals where R and N can be defined by the user At initiation up to the time ofthe first sample reading the displayed value is the average of the channel sampled every iteration i e at 8 Hz The number of readings over which the average can be taken is limited by the amount of free RAM instantaneously available and is thus dependent on the overall configuration ofthe recorder An instru ment alarm is generated if there is insufficient free RAM available see Section 3 1 3 for details Maths Number 4 Math4 Y Value OFF Reset now Function Rolling Average Y Average of Channel 1y Number of samples 10 Sample Interval 60 S Figure 4 3 11f Rolling average menu MEAN KINETIC TEMPERATURE MKT MKT is defined as the isothermal temperature that corresponds to the kinetic effects of time tempera ture distribution The recorder calculates MKT using the equation below AH R Tk AH AH AH LAH RTimax RT min RIN max RTNmin In e e e e 2N The required mean kinetic temperature in Kelvins AH The heat of activation The universal gas constant Tin
213. DER USER GUIDE B1 2 SPECIAL MODES For factory use only selecting Special Modes allows the enabling and disabling of the Sales Demo mode of operation S An S symbol is displayed at the top ofthe screen whilstthe recorder is in sales demo mode B1 3 DISPLAY TEST Selecting this option allows the user to check the display by flooding the screen with single colours Repeatedly touching the screen scrolls through the following colour sequence Black White Red Green Blue Cyan Magenta Yellow A further operation ofthe touch screen returns the main diagnostic screen B1 4 TOUCH CALIBRATION Touching this key calls a selection screen as shown below Touch Screen Calibrate Touch Screen Verify Main Menu Figure B1 4 Touch screen selections User Guide HA029324 Page 322 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B1 4 1 Touch screen calibrate This key initiates the display calibration offset correction procedure This procedure ensures that the display screen image is positioned correctly compared with the touch screen so that what you touch is what you get The procedure is necessary only rarely if at all and is included here only for the sake of completeness 1 Operate the Touch Screen Calibrate key to call the first calibration screen as depicted in figure B1 4 1 2 Using the stylus touch the intersection of the upper set of crosshairs as requested by the
214. DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 6 EVENT CONFIGURATION Cont EVENT SOURCES CONT Unack d Alarm on Group Triggered if any alarm in the specified group becomes active The event remains active until the alarm is acknowledged Instrument alarm This source triggers an event if any of the following becomes active Any Input channel failure Removable media failure Removable media full No removable media fitted FTP primary server failure FTP secondary server failure Maths channel failure Clock failure Unrecognised PCCard Recording failure overflow Network not found SNTP server failure Time synchronisation failure Battery backed RAM cleared See Eection 3 1 for Instrument alarm details The event remains active until the instrument alarm clears Power up A transient event is triggered at power up Maths channel partial failure For recorders fitted with Maths channels Eection 4 3 11 this event is set if say one of the inputs to a group averaging function becomes invalid In such a case the average will be calculated on the remaining input values but the result may not be as accurate as expected Loss of one input can also be important in functions such as Fvalue where several sensors may be distributed within the load and their outputs used in a group minimum calculation for input into the Fvalue equation Battery Low This event is set when the battery is reaching the end of its useful life The event remains a
215. DNS name of the slave For this unit this information is to be found in Network Address and Network Name respectively For other instruments refer to the documentation supplied with those instruments For Ethernet links Modbus addresses are associated with the IP address This means that for any IP address the range of Modbus addresses used for slaves can if re quired be the same as the range used by a unit with a different IP address For Serial communications each unit including the master must have a unique Mod bus address For the unit described by this manual the Modbus address is accessed in Instrument configuration bection 43 9 For other instrument the documentation supplied with those instruments should be referred to A pick list of supported instrument types Third party is used as a default and for non listed instrument types This field is updated automatically if the slave is Detected Allows a timeout period to be set for the read write process See Retry below and Disable Retries in Allows entry of the number of times the master attempts to get a response from the slave before aborting If not successful an error message appears Always 124 for supported instruments this field is editable for Third party instru ments The maximum block length supported by a particular instrument is found from that instrument s documentation This item appears only for slaves with Network Ethernet When
216. Depth behind bezel Small frame Large frame Weight Small frame Large frame Mounting angle 144mm x 144mm 288mm x 288mm 138mm x 138mm 0 0 1 0 mm 282mm x 282mm 0 0 1 0 mm 87 7mm 70 4mm 1 5 kg 3 7 kg Vertical Electromagnetic compatibility EMC Emissions and immunity BS EN61326 Electrical safety BS EN61010 Installation category Il Pollution degree J User Guide Page 318 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE A1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Cont Power requirements Voltagerange 19 2 to 28 8V dc 24V dc 20 Ripple 1 V max Max power requirement at 24V Small frame 20 W Large frame 24 W Operating current at 24V Small frame 0 8 A Large frame 1Amp Inrush current 10 A max Usertermination 4 way connector Internal fusing No user replaceable fuses Back up battery Type Poly carbonmonofluoride lithium BR2330 Part Number PA261095 See also fection B2 2 Support time A new battery supports the Real Time Clock for a minimum of 1 year with the recorder unpowered Replacement period 3 years Stored data Time date values for totalisers counters and timers batch data values for those maths functions with history such as Fvalue Rolling average Stopwatch etc Clock RTC data Temperature stability Oto 50 C 20ppm Ageing 5 ppm per year Touch screen Colour TFT LCD with cold cathode backlighting fitted with
217. E B9 MENU STRUCTURE Cont Archive Save Restore Config Security Network System Figure Figures Figure Figure Figure B9b B9dto B j B9k X B9l m B9i Configuration Data Security Data Save Restore Restore section 4 2 Network Data SX Screens Data Save Restore Restore Configuration Data W File Name New Security Data ki ER Network Data ex Screens Data ke Import Screen New Default Export Screen Import User Linearisation Export User Linearsation Save As Text Import Screen ser Screen 1 y File Name screen Appear only if Screen Builder option enabled User Screen 1v File Name screen Export screen Export Import User Linearisation User linearisation 1 UserLin1 Y File Name userlin User linearisation 1 UserLin1 Y File Name userlin Export User Linearisation user i Mans Type Date Dies cal Folder 10 07 06 12 35 08 config Folder 10 07 06 10 27 13 Filterta Config 10 07 06 10 22 23 4445 ID Folder 10 07 06 10 23 14 sdb Folder 10 07 06 14 01 08 User Folder 10 07 06 17 30 29 Figure B9c Save Restore menu structure HA029324 User Guide Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 337 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GU
218. ED Cont Maths Number 2 Math 2 Y Value p87 6543 Units Function Saturated Steam Heat Consumed y Inlet Flow Channel 1 Use Pressure Y Inlet Pressure Channel 2 Y Inlet Dryness 23 8 Return Temperature Channel 3 Y Units Units Figure 4 3 11l Typical Saturated Steam Heat Flow configuration page PARAMETERS Inlet Flow Select Constant or the number of the channel supplying the measured flow rate If Con stant selected a further box allows the value for the constant to be entered Use Allows the user to select Temperature C or Pressure MPa for the calculation Inlet Temperature Appears only if Use Temperature Select Constant or the number ofthe channel supply ing the steam temperature If Constant is selected a further box allows a value for the constant to be entered Inlet Pressure Appears only if Use Pressure Select Constant or the number of the channel supplying the steam pressure If Constant is selected a further box allows a value for the constant to be entered Inlet Dryness Enter a value between 0 and 100 to representthe dryness of the steam 0 no vapour 100 no liquid Return Temperature Select Constant or the number of the channel supplying the condensate temperature If Constant is selected a further box allows a value for the constant to be entered Note See Baturated Steam Mass Flow above for details of pressure unit conversion GROUP
219. EEN Update Views Rateta Sag hana ell ibus 319 Configuration MES Virtual channels configuration 184 343 Virus susceptibility eerte 320 Visible USB Alabama imi neta 255 CORBSCEOE cadet envie tasca nid a RE Channel icc secedere taste ettet nd iade 255 LOCKUP esi AN cade cnet E Yr lagen 255 Over current ME 255 ele e EE 320 SU E EE 5 User Guide HA029324 Page 364 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE W VE 349 When visible cord trt mor ee iege 255 Whilst active inactive unacknowledged 217 Wiat aeaaeae 249 Wiring A E 265 Serial COMMS uc 6 Supply voltage nia ds 5 With unapplied change 192 Wizard Ethernet IP Eth rnetIP iae nari tri tues 174 Write Enable ssec esI DEM i tete ds 164 TO register aa 165 A XOR OS 84 ge 0 e PEE 249 A POSE Wis eian RE Eor aae i sb 249 Y You are already running message 229 237 You are authenticating Full Bridge message s s s 237 A 249 POSI O Merrill 249 Z Laciana tas 105 106 Zirconia TE 101 118 Zone B Selectas aiii 222 A OT 69 Time Vist Of naene arias 333 E WEE 207 HA029324 User Guide Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 365 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE This page is deliberately left blank HA029324 User Guide Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 366 E u roth E
220. EIG 248 Disable ll TEE 6 ydus 224 Elapsed time format 102 Alarms on Group job 224 Electrical E UE palancas 5 Alarms on Point Obando apani asan 224 E mail All Alarms job A 224 ACC lo wan diia 170 CON translate 219 Appearance sassa 169 LOGI EE 188 Configuration menu ansa 343 Mathschannel u a us eerte ees 218 Failure event source asan 83 udi O 164 Generation 170 MAA misis EEN 220 Nos 225 Ier HT a 217 Message En 170 Warning Dialogs M PONE O 58 A ei echec 168 Discard Enable Ethernet IP Table MNT 174 UE 193 Discard Key ua entere eene tnn 243 Batch CMM I O 92 Disk Demand WEG oce erit e ERE errr 164 MEO ea s s pss a mn P en aa ne 11 Display MOROS esee 75 sj o s OM 79 GE lic Modbus slave acing mansa dido 145 User Guide HA029324 Page 356 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE Enable Cont F Cont Slo OO 328 Filer Option menu rite ttt tentes 226 El LEE 142 Hill Artana naaa paralaje 248 End of message character 141 First Start End KEE 141 Engineer Access level sees 25 186 PURSES WITCH OM traida reve estet iei eta 25 Enter Batch Data incite EE ein 190 ruri e dee 78 Environmental Performance 318 FolderkeyS cian ia 22 Erase all history option 334 Font Erase HIStOEy serrer nee ivi decia 184 D 214 A eaae i 221 O 252 Error mes
221. ER GUIDE 4 4 2 MANAGEMENT Cont CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS Cont Require Authorization This field appears only if Require Signing is enabled If Require Authorization is ena bled then changes to the recorder operation configuration or any other item includ ed in the history file can be made only by those users whose Can Authorize permis sion is enabled in the menu described in section 4 4 1 above When Apply is attempted a signature page figure 4 4 2b appears which requires the entry of the correct password for the selected user and a note which would normally be used to give the reason for the change Note If neither Require Signing nor Require Authorization is enabled then any user can make changes to the recorder operation configuration etc and the signature page does not appear Authorised Engineer lt Appears only if Requires Authorising enabled Password Signed Frederick Bloggs Y pones only if Requires Signing enabled Password Operator Note Note cannot be empty Ok Pop up appears only if OK is operated without an operator note having been entered Cancel Figure 4 4 2b Signature page Enable Audittrail For either Auditor option if this field is enabled then all changes to configuration are displayed on the chart and become part of the history file for each enabled group The following is an
222. ERASING HISTORY 1 Enter the key code into the recorder s System Upgrade Key Code area and operate the Apply but ton 2 Operate the Ok button in the dialogue box figure B8 2 This initiates the erasure of the recorder s history files after which the recorder restarts WARNING ALL HISTORY DATA WILL BE PERMANENTLY ERASED The instrument will restart after erasing history Are you ceratin you wish to proceed Ok Cancel Figure B8 2 Confirmation dialogue box Note This operation erases only the recorder s history files the recorder s configuration remains unchanged The Save Restore New selection Gection 4 2 with all tickboxes ticked must be used to reset the configuration to default values if required User Guide HA029324 Page 334 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B9 MENU STRUCTURE DOE Section 4 Operator Selected Goao Home page File Remove Media e CVE H g Trend display roup mode Group 3 AX e Section 5 coups m d PS pum un Group 5 Group 6 Archive Save Restore Config Security Network System Vertical Trend Horizontal Trend Figure Figure Figures Figure Figure Figure B9b B9c B9d to B9i B9j B9k B9 B9m ea seno Circular Trend Vertical Bargraph G
223. FIELD N TYPE N 1 to the number of fields selected in the previous item Date amp Time Causes the time and date of report generation to be included in the report Text Allows the user to enter a text message of up to 60 characters Process value Allows a specified point s process value including descriptor and units to be included in the report Batch Field 1 Batch field 1 can be included in the report See for Batch details Message A message can be selected for inclusion in the report See for details of message configuration Line Feed Not implemented Page 171 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 20 REPORTS CONFIGURATION Cont STYLE Normal always used for this implementation regardless of selection POINT Allows a point to be chosen when Process value has been selected as Field Type The point is selected from a pick list containing all the input channels derived channels totalisers etc in the instrument LINE FEED Not implemented HA029324 Page 172 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 21 Ethernet IP Option Note Full details of Ethernet IP protocol are available from the ODVA web site http www odva org EtherNet IP Ethernet Industrial Protocol is a producer consumer communication system used to allow industrial devices to exchange time critical control data Such devices range from simple I O devices such as sen
224. G THE LINK 1 Inthe File menu select New or click on the New Tool icon The New Controller window opens figure 4 3 219 2 Select the relevant PLC from the drop down menu Enter a name if required and click on OK After some seconds the selected controller s window opens 3 Open the Who active window and select the relevant instrument from the hierarchy Click on Download 4 When the download is complete right click on the relevant Ethernet port in the left pane tree and select Properties figure 4 3 21h New Controller Vendor Allen Bradley Type 1769 L23E 0B1 CompactLogix5323E QB1 Controller Revision 17 Y I O Configuration 5 CompactLogixS323E QB1 System fa 1769 L23E QB1 TEST6000 az Ethernet AM CompactBus Local 3 Embedded 1 0 1 Embedded IQ16F Discrete Ti 8 2 Embedded OB16 Discrete Ou Expansion I O Name TEST6000 Description zi Create In C RSLogix 5000 Projects Browse Cross Reference Ctrl E Properties Alt Enter Figure 4 3 21g New Controller window Figure 4 3 21h Ethernet port location Page 179 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 21 ETHERNET IP OPTION Cont 5 The Module Properties window opens Select the Port Configuration tab For fixed IP Address ap plications uncheck the Enable BootP check box and enter an appropriate I
225. HIGHLIGHT If Highlight is Off default then all groups text appears in white The key legend is Highlight ON If Highlight is On then the text associated with groups which have batches running appears in green Remaining groups text is in white The key legend is Highlight OFF EXIT Closes the pop up menu It closes itself after approximately 50 seconds HA029324 Page 17 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 1 4 SUMMARY MENU Cont MESSAGE LOG Note Message log can also be selected using the Root menu Goto View Message log key This goes immediately to the first Message Log page for the current group to the screen i e the Goto Group menu does not appear If there are more messages than can be displayed in the height of the screen a scroll bar appears to al low hidden messages to be displayed Messages are retrieved from the history files in batches of 100 messages If there are more than 100 messages Earlier messages appears after the hundredth message Touching Earlier messages calls the option menu and touching Earlier messages in this menu calls the next batch of 100 and so on If applicable operating Later messages Later messages calls the previously displayed 100 messages As can be seen from figure 3 1 4g the list of messages can be filtered both by type and by time For example setting the message type to Alarm and t
226. IDE B9 MENU STRUCTURE Cont Archive Save Restore Security Network System Figure Figure Fig B9j B9b B9c Instrument Groups Channels Views Archive Events Figure B9e Event Buttons Messages User Linearisations Batch Maths Figure B9f Totalisers Counters Timers Figure B9g Connections Master Comms Figure B9h Output Channels Demand Writes Emails Reports Figure B9i EtherNet IP Server Options Figure B9d Config menu structure sheet 1 Figure Figure B9k B9l m Views Section 4 3 4 Home Time out o Minutes Home Group 1 Group 1 y Scope Group v Group 1 Group 1 y Display Enable y Home Page Circular Trend M Vertical Trend Horizontal Trend Circular Trend Vertical Bargraph Horizontal Bargraph Numeric Page User Screen 1 User Screen 2 User Screen 3 lser Screen 4 ISISIISISININ User Screen z3 User Screen 24 Bridge User Screens 0 Apply 7 Discard Instrument Section 4 3 1 Channels Section 4 3 3 Channel Number 1 TurbineTempA Y Value 50 002 Input Type Slave Comms Y Scale Low 0 Scale High 100 Units Offsetlo zb Scale Type Linear Y Scale Divisions Major 10 Scale Divisions Minor 1 Waveform Triangle 4 min y Descriptor Channel 1 A B Switching yw Spanned A y SpnlowA j o Span High A 00 gt Zone Low A 0 96 ZoneHighA i00 gt SpannedB Zone
227. IRCULAR SETTINGS When checked this checkbox causes the Circular Speed Chart Full Start At fields described below to appear When checked the Trend Speed and Trend Interval fields described above are disabled i e they are no longer editable Notes If Circular Settings is not enabled here in Group configuration but Circular Trend is enabled for the group in Views configuration ection 43 4 then although the circular chart will appear it is unlikely that the chart will contain any trends CIRCULAR SPEED This field allows the chart speed to be selected from a pick list as detailed in table 4 3 2 below The table also shows the number of major and minor chart divisions CIRCULAR CHART FULL This allows New Chart or Rotate to be selected from a picklist See for details Table 4 3 2 shows the major and minor chart divisions for each chart speed START AT This item which appears only if New Chart has been selected in Circular Chart Full above allows the user to select a start time and or date for the new chart The exception is for a chart speed of 1 hr rev which always starts on the hour Chart spd Chart divs New Chart Start at 1 rev per Major Minor Start at choices Examples comments 1 hour On the hour 2 hours 4 hours 6 hours 8 hours 12 hours 16 hours 1 day 2 days 1 week 2 weeks 4 weeks 30 days NIN 4 hours rev Start at 12 00to23at This chart will sta
228. IS s iota er than de did ene tuae 144 D Maths channel Svs iater tet ete ees 98 MR E uu nene us tede t E 338 to 343 Pata f Messages Ee 86 Bits serial COMMS un 141 Neo o ea 201 Compression ratio usss 78 Offset s aaa t bee E epe Re Uns 66 Encoding Modbus un 266 OPTIONS amina di Aen anes o 183 Transmission Modbus e 313 Outpu t channels neptem teens 162 Type 154 165 266 REPOS ensor aiee ip EEE te E e on dag trees dio 171 Date S Cal r uqasayq 66 Configuration MENU sse 346 Seng 185 Format uM I M 207 Serial Communications eee 140 Setting X M DIDI MI MID EE 207 EE 69 Date and time report generation a 171 Daylight saving Setup 207 HA029324 User Guide Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 355 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE D Cont D Cont A auycsanayaaasqayqaaasqayayasyayapayiakaqasqayayayawsaya 176 Display e ET EEN ln EE EEN Enero uu a akasasnayasanankyasqsqassenuqsqapasna 176 Ee EE heet derer 252 SA e e in aee tern 69 ENEE GE 97 TO 254 Brightness eiecerunt 57 Decrement counter job 219 CalibratlOTis ax niat anie o as 322 Default Colour Demand Wie veian Ee eh ie 164 Configuration men srt 347 Gate Wisin adictas 202 El 252 Default Tables a na anar 174 Messages iniciados ddr ars 252 Delete Key cuarto utaya ETHER asa 226 242 e TEE 27 Demand Enable disable nee e eee 75 D 164 Home selection
229. J kg vapour at temperature T C V and AV h and Ah are available from published tables note 2 but the recorder user needs only to enter val ues for measured flow and either the temperature or the pressure of the steam These values can be constants input channels or maths channels Figure 4 3 11j and accompanying parameter descriptions give full details Maths Number 2 Math 2 Y Value 987 6543 Units Function Saturated Steam Heat Flow y Flow Channel 1 Y Use Pressure v Pressure Channel 2 Y Dryness 1 0 96 Units Units Apply Discard Figure 4 3 11j Typical Saturated Steam Heat Flow configuration page PARAMETERS Flow Select Constant or the number of the channel supplying the measured flow rate If Constant selected a further box allows the value for the constant to be entered Use Allows the user to select Temperature C or Pressure MPa for the calculation Temperature Appears only if Use Temperature Select Constant or the number of the channel supplying the steam temperature If Constant is selected a further box allows a value for the constant to be entered Pressure note 3 Appears only if Use Pressure Select Constant or the number of the channel supplying the steam pressure If Constant is selected a further box allows a value for the constant to be entered Dryness Enter a value between 0 and 100 to represent t
230. L ALARMS To acknowledge all active alarms touch e g the channel alarm icon at the top of the screen From the resulting rompe select Ack all Alarms then finally touch Yes in the resulting pop up confir mation box Note The options menu is context sensitive and may therefore not appear as illustrated above HA029324 Page 15 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 1 4 SUMMARY MENU Cont BATCH SUMMARY lf the Batch option is fitted Eection 4 3 10 a Batch Summary key appears in the Summary menu Note The following description shows the situation where batch Scope is configured as Group The description is similar when Scope Instrument except that there is only one line Instru ment instead of one line per group As shown in figure 3 1 4f below the Batch Summary page contains the following batch information 1 Group names in group number order if Scope Group or Instrument Name if scope Instrument Batch active indicator green spot Initiation time and date Elapsed time for the batch Batch Field 1 and its value E LM EET S Touch Alarm area f e g channel alarm symbol Instrument Alarm Summary Ack all Alarms Alarm Summary Message Log Remove Media Batch Summary Group Mode 00 00 00 00 00 00 Mixed batch eed Click to highlight A 00 00 00 00 00 00 B
231. LISER MODBUS ADDRESSING IEEE AREA TOTALISER RUN TIME DATA The following table gives addresses for the specified 32 bit floating point values for totaliser 1 Generally Parameter address for totaliser N Parameter address for totaliser 1 4 N 1 decimal TOTALISER 1 Start Addr Register Hex Dec Length Totaliser 1 value Current process value PV Read Write FB7F 64383 Totaliser 1 status Channel status Read only FB81 64385 0 Good PV 5 Ranging error 1 Channel off 6 Overflow 2 Over range 7 Bad PV 3 Under range 8 No data 4 Hardware error Totaliser 1 Alarms Alarm information Uint16 Bit0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Read only Bit1 O No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit2 1 nowledge alarm 1 Read Write Bit 3 Bit 4 arm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Read only Bit 5 o Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 6 nowledge alarm 2 Read Write Bit 7 Bit 8 arm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Read only Bit 9 o alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 10 nowledge alarm 3 Read Write Bit 11 Bit 12 arm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Read only Bit 13 Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 14 nowledge alarm 4 Read Write Bit 15 Parameter name Description Access FB82 64386 HA029324 Page 132 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 13 Counters INTROD
232. LOGIN REQUEST Cont Response Figures 8 2 4c and 8 2 4d show response messages for successful and non successful login attempts Protocol Protocol Always 00 Number of Recorder Modbus identifier identifier identifier identifier bytes fol Modbus function e ters Ic lowing hex address code hex g o Figure 8 2 4c Response to a successful login attempt Protocol Protocol Modbus Exception identifier identifier identifier identifier function code ing hex address code MSB set hex Figure 8 2 4d Response after an unsuccessful login attempt Note MSB Most Significant Bit User Guide HA029324 Page 270 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 2 5 Text messages In order to increase efficiency it is possible to set the system to transmit screen messages e g alarm on off only when a new message occurs This is done by continuously polling the Text Length parameter in group data to see if its value is non zero This parameter contains the character count of the latest message to occur since the last poll If text length is non zero the host must access the parameter Read Text also in group data to read the message and it must also reset the Text Length parameter to zero This causes the recorder to look for any further messages in the queue and if there are it will load the latest message i
233. LowB o gt Zone High B joo rr o PV Format Numeric y Max Decimal Digits 4 Colour A E Colour B 26 Alarm Number 1 v Enable Unlatched Y Type Absolute Low y Setpoint Source Constant Y Threshold be gt Hysteresis 10 gt Dwellh s Job Number 1 v Category No Action Y Apply Discard Instrument Name Normal Display Saver Display Save After Modbus Address Modbus Security Disabled Comms Channel Timeout Preset Hour Preset Minute Disable Warning Dialogs Show Operator Notes List Instrument 1100 50 30 Minutes M y Disabled s E E 12 Apply Discard Groups Section 4 3 2 Group Number 1 Group 1 Y Trend Units mm hr Y Descriptor Group 1 Trend Type Adaptive Y A B Switching Trend Speed 240 Trend Interval 5 Circular Settings y Circular Speed 1 week Y Circular Chart Full New Chart V Start At Monday Y Grid Type From Point Y from Channel 3 Recording Enable Recording Speed Recording Interval y 1 200 mm hr N Trend History Duration 5 29 Archive to Media Enable Archive via FTP Enable Alarm Message Ack Message lew 1 s Days Point Type Totaliser Y Selection 1 3 5 7 9 Enable Disable TurbineTempA Je TurbineTempB W Etc List of all available points input channels
234. M Offline A SEHR Error Qena o Implicit UO Messaging Offline Successful Comms Tests 1 Po Appear only if EtherNet IP Explicit Messaging TCP 1 149 121 129 14 comms option enabled Explicit Messaging TCP 2 Offline Explicit Messaging TCP 3 Offline Explicit Messaging TCP 4 Offline Initiate Comms Test Reset Diagnostics Figure B9 System key menu structure sheet 1 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 User Guide Page 346 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B9 MENU STRUCTURE Cont Archive Save Restore Config Security Network System Figure Figure B9c Figures Figure Figure B9b B9dto BY B9k B9i System Section 4 6 Copy section 4 6 6 Source Type Channel Y Copy From 1 Furnace Temp 1 Clock Locale Upgrade Figure i B9I Master Comms Diagnostics Ethernet Diagnostics Copy Job Search Customise About About section 4 6 9 Instrument Variant 6180XIO Config Revision 3109 Last Updated 06 October 2010 17 12 23 At Version 5 1 Created On 6180XIO Appears only when Security Revision 17 viewing via I Comprising Bugs O ws Bridge Version 5 15 14 5 Product Software Version 2 0 History File Version 1 7 BootRom Version 3 Board Version Fitted Memory 96 00Mb History 256kb SRAM 64Mb DRAM Support File Job Search Include alarm data
235. MMA MENA e s ETT 13 INSTRUMENT ALARM SUMMARY usa ssiasasswaa Ie 13 ACK ALL ALARMS vue AUD Re EEN ea 13 ALARM SUMMARY PAGE yaa aria se 14 ALARM ACKNOWLEDGEMENT ed ti dd VEER 15 BATCH SUMMARY osos id PIG cas 16 MESSAGELOG pis rr ia 18 REMOVE MEDIA aia aae E a a Ed PRIM 21 3 2 NAVIGATION KEYS eege EE eg EE E e eee aE Eia 22 32 1 Key fUNCONS dre ia ods EOCEEN EE 22 ROOT MENU KEYS remire paea EA ques EEE EE EAEE a E 22 ALARM SUMMARY l a hber EE 24 MESSAGE LOG 25 reg Et rte Pe ene ated aeo ba de ey 24 33 FIRST SWITER CEET 25 3 3 1 Access to Configuration urrunen 26 TROUBLESHOOTING os Z isa DT POI uS e ee eyed 27 TEXT STRING ENTRY 5o rre RE Wanaku s uapa Wix RET beans 27 EE DISPLAY MODES EE 29 TREND HISTORY MP 29 TIME CHANGE RECORDS dch re gett A pidas 30 3 4 1 Vertical Trend display llle 30 3 4 2 Horizontal Trendi display u corral as T dE 32 3 4 3 Circular Mendaro 34 TREND MODBDES 4 peer venere id 34 NORMAL VIEW 24245400 pause dane lasa bau Sates ee Rd dor Wan tog Rd e der 35 NORMAL VIEW FEATURES uu u xo heb eere ae ere Rabe dE 36 FULEESCREEN DISRLAY u utu car teret e metes I gS Rath watu RUE ed 36 FULE SCREEN FEATURE Serre itunen asocia gucci 36 TIMESTAMPS S iee tossed ER a Taa pai doubt E EE 37 OTHER NOTES 4 dEr ee 37 3 4 4 Vertical bargraph displaymode 38 FACEPLATES ABOVE THE BARS eere treten ari 38 FACEPLATES AT RIGHT HAND EDGE a aswa wag waqasa 38 3 4 5 Hor
236. MODBUS SECURITY DISABLED When using MODBUS it is possible by checking this field to allow a host computer to access the record er without its first having to supply a valid User name and Password This box must be checked if this unit is acting as a Modbus slave in order forthe unit to be detected Once communications have been es tablished Modbus security can be enabled providing thatthe Slave s Remote user name and password have been entered at the Master See also bection 8 2 4 COMMS CHANNEL TIMEOUT Allows a number of seconds between 1 and 999 to be entered If none of the channels set to Comms is communicated with within this period an event source Comms channel timeout is set and remains set until the next communication An entry of 0 disables the time out HA029324 Page 57 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 1 INSTRUMENT CONFIGURATION Cont PRESET HOUR Enter an hours number between 0 and 23 for use with Clock Job Preset clock PRESET MINUTE Enter a minutes number between 0 and 59 for use with Clock Job Preset clock Note See Eection 4 7 for a description of recorder jobs and for further details of time synchronisation DISABLE WARNING DIALOGS Checking this box prevents from appearing on the screen SHOW OPERATOR NOTES LIST Enabling this field produces a list of 13 entries which can be used in Operator Notes The first entry is the MAC addres
237. Maths Number 1 Mathi Y Value 0 0000 Units Function Relative Humidity Y Wet bulb temperature Channel 1 Y Dry bulb temperature Channel2 Y Pressure Channel 3 v Psychrometric Constant 6 66E 4 Units Units Figure 4 3 11q Relative humidity configuration menu HA029324 Page 117 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont ZIRCONIA PROBE A zirconia oxygen probe consists of two platinum electrodes bonded to a pellet or cylinder of zirconia At elevated temperatures such a probe develops an emf across it which is proportional to probe tem perature and to the log ofthe difference in oxygen partial pressure between its two ends OXYGEN CONCENTRATION In orderto measure oxygen concentrations one end ofthe probe is inserted into the atmosphere to be measured whilst the other is subjected to a reference atmosphere For most applications air provides a suitable reference reference input 20 95 for air The temperature of the probe is normally measured using a type K or type R thermocouple The tem perature effect on the thermocouple is such that for successful operation the probe temperature must be greater than 973K 700 C The equation solved by the maths function is P1 1 0 TTE P2 where P2 Partial pressure of oxygen in the sampled gas P1 partial pressure of oxygen in the reference atmosphere 20 95 for air E Electromotiv
238. Minor set ting in the Channel s configuration Table 7 3 2 Advanced edit level parameters sheet 4 of 6 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 User Guide Page 253 100 180MM DISTRI BUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 3 2 ADVANCED PARAMETERS Cont Parameter Pick list content Description Scale style Scale on bar See the figure below for clarification For vertical bargraphs only No Text Produces scale tick marks but without values Decimal scale Default Horizontal Bargraph Horizontal Faceplate Vertical bargraph For bargraphs produces scale with 9 divisions 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 of scale width Zero and full scale values printed For Horizontal bargraphs each scale division has 4 minor divisions 0 20 40 60 80 100 of major division Uses scale information from each point s scale configuration As default for horizontal bargraphs Produces faceplate display with scale end points descriptor digital value and alarm indicator As default for vertical bargraphs Show Alarm Marks Yes No Allows channel scale alarm marks to be displayed yes or not no Alarm Marks Colour described above allows the user to select a col our for the alarm marks Time Marker colour Default Allows a colour to be selected for time date printing on a trend chart The examples below are a Iternatives only one style can be chosen for each group bargraph display 800 00 800 00 100 10
239. ND irecte btt ii 235 6 6 EH GUENIN ia 236 6 6 1 Display Modes comision 236 6 6 2 Alarm acknowlecdoement 0 0 c cece eect eee ees 236 7653 E EE 236 6 6 4 Errormessages ERENNERT iia ba da 237 NETWORK CONNECTION HAS TIMED OUT 237 UNABLE TO CONNECT TO HOST rripi ansi esan diesen bee pt vals pie mga rts 237 UNABLE TO RESOLVE HOSTNAME coo u vorni rnb em remm 237 FAILED TO AUTHENTICATE THE USER NAME 237 MAXIMUM NUMBER OF BRIDGE SESSIONS ALREADY RUNNING ON 237 THERE APPEARS TO BE NO FREE DISK SPACE ON 237 YOU ARE ALREADY RUNNING A FULL BRIDGE SESSION 237 YOU ARE AUTHENTICATING FULL BRIDGE o 0 eee 237 7 SCREEN BUILDER uuu ais 238 ZA INTRODUCTION EE 238 ZA Display Acces t 239 74 2 Importing Exporting screens sie e eet here ER eed 239 IMPORTING SCREENS 5 4 enessec eee mI papa RU EC Sd sasa 240 EXPORTING SCREENS See les omen um pi bor d CE d u alpa 240 7 2 DISPLAY CREATION cotos aria dee geb a erac Eh 240 74 2 Before starting i 0stiamiaei ers eetesouonae ene im ieee ook ad deans 240 42 2 SCKESN COMPONEN ES I T U I eta e siki giana RU rre RP RR REUS 241 72 3 VME properties Dage u u dadas 242 KEY DESCRIPTIONS UPPERKEYS uu la RR Rr os 242 KEY DESCRIPTIONS LOWER KEYS erem isa RE tess 243 OPTIONS PAGE LEES ege Zeches e pM aparusaq dE Sea 244 7 2 4 Screen creation example cc 245 PROCEDURE PECES 245 Z3 PARAMETER DEFINITIONS cts ence ek cag l
240. NEE RE e SAVE RESTORE sirios PASTE DELETE FILES zh nReRERRR SE eege deg ed eg FULL CONFIGURATION Joes tiraera EENS ME e FUEL SECURITY GE BATCH CONTRO les cities Aa ado Tawa n d Sasam a CAN SIG Ninas RODA asss INE Ee EE PERFORM UPGRADE S societe ira EVENT PERMISSION Z y sieneen aea tiga tee DURER EER EVENT PERMISSION 2 TO Dios sugar speed EDIT OUTPUT CHANNEL DEFAULT Nee RENE ds ACTION DEMAND WRITES A hene ie dE Ee FORCE CHANGE OF PASSWORD e ds ENTER BATCH DATA uu u iu u dns ALLOW WEB SERVER orit nr ets eet 4 4 2 Management option CHANGES NOT RECORDED 2h nre RR tA Rr akawa CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS EEN NEW USERID seis deer dee EE ER E E NEW FULL USERNAME lt rase paeet AER deep NEW DOMAIN NAME sssssss III NEW PASSWORD RETYPE PASSWORD BASEDION ML AAA Remove User assi ese ert Ee aula spa ac 4 4 5 Change bassword ees TROUBLE SHOOTING sc rece e RM ER RP xS En 4 4 6 Clear Password Cache USER PASSWORD AUTHENTICATION PASSWORD CACHE ees rds hne E Ret eg d te CLEAR PASSWORD CACHE occ 4 4 7 Active Directory serversetup 4 5 NETWORK KEY erede Errem bro ap EE da Al ILA dues a toa hase ubata ss EE INSTRUMENT NUMBER MAC ADDRESS IP ADDRESS EOONKUP ooi nep UD awaqa som isa EN BOOTP TIMEOUT teo oS de ere E gege q IPADDRESS 7 tasds ee dace dr C PES ee Freee ay
241. ORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 2 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA Cont CHANNEL 10 Parameter name Ch10 Span high Ch10 Span low Ch10 Zone high Ch10 Zone low Ch10 PV type Ch10 Decimal places Ch10 Colour Ch10 Units Spare Ch10 Open string Spare Ch10 Close string Spare Ch10 Descriptor Spare Ch10 No of alarms Ch10 PV format Spare Ch10 Alarm 1 enable Ch10 Alarm 1 type Ch10 Alarm 1 setpoint Spare Ch10 Alarm 2 enable Ch10 Alarm 2 type Ch10 Alarm 2 setpoint Spare Ch10 Alarm 3 enable Ch10 Alarm 3 type Ch10 Alarm 3 setpoint Spare Ch10 Alarm 4 enable Ch10 Alarm 4type Ch10 Alarm 4 setpoint Spare Description Upper span value display full scale Lower span value display zero Zone high value two decimal places Zone low value two decimal places Input type 1 Analogue input 3 Totaliser 2 Maths 4 Counter Number of decimal places 0 to 9 used by all scaled parameters except where stated Channel colour 0 to 55 See Annex B for definitions Units string up to five characters Open Digital Input string up to eight characters Closed Digital Input string up to eight characters Channel descriptor up to 20 characters Number of alarms on this channel 0 to 2 0 Numeric 1 Digital strings Alarm 1 enable 0 Off 1 Unlatched Alarm 1 type 0 Absolute low 2 Deviation in 4 Rate of change rise Trigger setpoint Note 2 2 Latched 3 Trigger 1 Absolute h
242. P address and Subnet mask for the PLC 6 Click on Set and click on OK on the warnings and notes displays 7 Click on OK to close the Properties window 8 Leftclick on the Program icon figure 4 3 21j and select Go OffLine from the menu which appears Wil Module Properties Controller 1 1769 L23E QB1 Ethernet Port 17 2 General Connection RSNetworx Module Info Port Configuration Port Diagnostics IP Address 192 168 10 4 Domain Name Must Match IP Address on General Tab Host Name Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Select Port Speed Gateway Address 0 0 0 0 Current Port Speed 10 Mbps Primary DNS D j 0o a Server Address ae d Select Duplex ab DNS 0 0 Current Duplex Indeterminate i Changes to Port Speed and Enable Bootp Duplex require module reset ale B Enable DHCP DHCP must be configured to return a fixed address d Enable DNS Se Program am Mode Auto Negotiate Port Speed and Duplex eres No Forces dd An tt No Edits an e OE Status Running Cancel B Figure 4 3 21i Module Properties Figure 4 3 21j Click on Program icon 9 Download either from Who Active or from the Program icon 10 Connect the PLC to the Ethernet port RJ45 of the PC 11 Restore the RSLinx window In the communications menu Configure Drivers window select Ether Net IP Driver Click on Add New and enter a name for the driver 12 Select Browse l
243. P comms option is enabled Unconnected Message Manager UCMM Displays the IP address of any client requesting an unconnected message see ion 4 3 21 Implicit I O Messaging Displays the IP address of the client currently carrying out implicit messaging Once activity ceases the address remains on display for five seconds after which Offline appears instead Explicit Messaging TCPn Displays the IP address of each client currently carrying out explicit messaging Once activity ceases the address remains on display for five seconds after which Offline appears instead 4 6 6 Copy This facility allows the user to copy a point or group configuration from one point group etc to one or more others The user may choose whether or not to include alarm and if applicable job data when copying point configurations Descriptors and colour selections are not copied Figure 4 6 6 shows a typical configuration page for copying the configuration of channel 1 Furnace Temp1 to channels 2 to 5 inclusive Source Type Channel v Copy From 1 Furnace Temp 1 Copy To 2 Channel 2 5 Channel 5 Include alarm data Y Include job data y Copy Now Figure 4 6 6 Copy configuration page typical When Copy Now is operated a confirmatory dialogue box opens to allow the user to check the source and destination entries From 1 Furnace Temp 1 To 2 Channe
244. Per second Per minute Per hour within which the change in signal value must exceed the Amount value entered in the preceding field in order for the alarm to become active See Rate of Change example below for more details Average time For rate of change alarms this allows an average period to be entered for signal smoothing HYSTERESIS EXAMPLE Threshold 100 units Hysteresis 5 units With the above settings an absolute high alarm would become active if its input were to rise above 100 and would remain active until its value fell to below 95 units An absolute low alarm would become active if its input fell below 100 units and would remain active until its input rose above 105 units Deviation alarms behave in a similar manner RATE OF CHANGE ALARM EXAMPLE Rate of change alarms allow the user to enter an amount say 3 degrees and a time period say 1 minute and if the process value changes by the specified amount or more within the specified time period more than 3 degrees in a minute in this example then the alarm becomes active The recorder uses its iteration rate of 125 msec 1 8th second as the time base for it calculations For our example 3 degrees per minute equates to 3 60 degrees per second or 3 60 x 8 0 00625 degrees per iteration If a change greater than this is detected then the alarm becomes active In order to reduce sensitivity an averaging period can be configured This means that an average of all
245. R GUIDE 4 3 8 Messages This feature allows messages to be sent by job action section 4 7 to the display to a specified group or to all groups Messages can also be included in e mails section 4 3 19 The messages are of the form Date Time Message The message can be just text up to 80 characters or it can include up to nine em bedded items which are typed into the message as 1 to 9 The embedded values represented by 1 to 9 are selected from picklists If a Group destination message contains more characters than can be displayed on the screen depends on recorder model the right hand part of the message is invisible to the user The message appears in full in the message log section 3 1 4 and when Review Software is used Display destination messages are always fully visible MESSAGE ENTRY The message configuration page is shown below in figure 4 3 8 The page is accessed from the Root menu Operator Config menu Message Number 1 The value of Y mc E to be con Message The value of 1 2 amp 3 4 5 Replace 1 with Source Descriptor y Replace 2 with Source Value V t Select embedding source Replace 3 with Specified Descriptor W E Select point whose 3 source Totaliser 1 Replace 4 with Specified Value descriptor value etc is to be inserted 4 source Totaliser 1 Replace 5 with Config Revision 2enlace 6 wit
246. Rof C alarms occid edes 71 I e 340 Change Password uu reete reete 185 Control access permission ssssssssss 189 Channel Countet Initiation nir rte litiasis 97 AlakimaivdllG dtOE nece trapo Banaya tro etri eer aio 11 Enter batch data permission sissies 190 Alarm SOUNE son ones oie egit 235 A O 171 A Seege AEN 257 Field data Embed in message 87 CO aei tert A ia 69 Job initiation ettet eterne tta stan 97 Configuration edo Um eH me 65 338 Noo 220 Configuration data Modbus sss 276 Message display enmt 96 32 bit IEEE 4 trt reete titre een 303 Modbus initiation euim pete iege e 97 olo M 211 Non operator initiation nre erre entere 97 umet 250 Operation randstad ac 94 Elle 30 Operator initiation vna ias 94 Dina a 257 SAN EE 220 Descriptor arrasada eniti de neri 69 Status Embed in message sss 87 MEA een nns 101 Summary Dade s rre eris 16 NOMEN rd 257 Battery Run time dat Modbus litros etr erre 288 Backed RAM cleared sse 10 32bit EEE iia ida der tene a 307 Backed RAM data ua aaa anar 319 User screen parameter 248 Diagnostics utere eros Rr cues spats 325 WIES Suse ret dria ipu ciet amen dite 184 ICON 11 Character set Low Event SOUTCE iuit ire n nds 83 Keyboards a sasaqa a rata ten Replacement cantata 327 Serial comms M iosi 319 327 Chart Grid
247. Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15 Spare 5 Ranging error 6 Overflow 7 Bad PV 8 No data Description Current process value PV Channel status 0 Good PV 1 Channel off 2 Over range 5 Ranging error 6 Overflow 7 Bad PV Uint16 See note Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Access See note Read only Start Addr Hex Dec F8CB 63691 F8CD 63693 F8CE 63694 Start Addr Hex Dec F8CF 63695 F8D1 63697 Register Length Register Length 3 Under range 8 No data 4 Hardware error Alarm information Bit 0 O Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Read only Bit 1 O No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Read Write Bit 3 Spare Bit4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Bit5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7 Spare Bit8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Bit9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11 Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15 Spare Chan
248. T The bytes after the 7 byte prefix described above are Function code 03 1 byte Register start address 2 bytes Word count Total number of registers 1 to 125 decimal 1 to 7D hex 2 bytes Thus to read Channel 5 descriptor start address 031F 10 registers altogether the following request as de scribed in figure 8 5 1a would be transmitted for a recorder with a Modbus address of 1 0000000000060103031F000A Transaction Transaction Protocol Protocol Always 00 Number of Recorder Modbus Register Register Word count Word count identifier identifier identifier identifier bytes fol Modbus function start start high byte lowing address code hex gh buie eier Figure 8 5 1a Function code 03 request example RESPONSE As a response to a request the recorder returns a similar message but the function code 03 is followed by Byte count 2 x the number of register values requested in hex 1 byte Value of register at start address 2 bytes Value of register at start address 1 2 bytes etc etc Value of final register 2 bytes Thus as a response to the above request for channel 5 descriptor the following message as expanded in figure 8 5 1b would be returned to the host assuming channel descriptor to be Channel 5 Descriptor and Modbus address 1 0000000000170103144368616E6E656C20352044657363726970746F72 Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8 Byte 9 Byte 10 Byte 11
249. T VST CTT JST ACT AET SST NST Greenwich mean time Co ordinated Universal time Central European time Eastern European time Arabic standard time Eastern African time Middle East time Near East time Pakistan Lahore time India standard time Bangladesh standard time Vietnam standard time China Taiwan time Japan standard time Australia Central time Australia Eastern time Solomon standard time New Zealand standard time 0 0 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 MIT HST AST PST PNT MST CST EST IET PRT CNT AGT BET CAT Midway Islands time Hawaii standard time Alaska standard time Pacific standard time Phoenix standard time Mountain standard time Central standard time Eastern standard time Indiana Eastern standard time Puerto Rico and US Virgin Islands time08 00 Canada Newfoundland time Argentina standard time Brazil Eastern time Central African time HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 User Guide Page 333 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B8 HISTORY MAINTENANCE OPTION This option which must be specified at time of order is intended for use by hire companies etc who have a requirement to remove all customer data from recorders which are not fitted with the Simulator option which includes an Erase all history job See section 4 3 22 for a description of the Simulator option The erase history procedure consists of entering a special keycode into the Sys
250. TP servers 8 Ifthe is enabled and SNTP client enable is enabled then the recorder syn chronises only on power up If SNTP server enable is enabled the server output will follow the recorder time EUROPRP SERVER ENABLE Enabling this item causes the instruent to declare itself i e to become visible to a network scanning tool running on a PC thus allowing the pc user to identify all such instruments on a network ACTIVE DIRECTORY SERVER This item appears only ifthe Security Manager option is enabled It allows an Active Directory server IP address to be entered for use with this application The IP address would normally be obtained from the user s IT department or Network administrator Once entered assuming the recorder is connected to the same network as the server users with a domain configured will be able to login using their normal network login password If Domain name Service is enabled Bection 4 5 2 then a domain name may be entered here instead of an IP address ACTIVE DIRECTORY SECURITY This item appears only if the Security Manager option is enabled If set to None default then any at tempt to change a password will be rejected because it has not been encrypted One of the alternative TLS ports must be used if passwords are to be changed at the recorder When TLS port 636 is selected all access to the server is secured using TLS on port 636 using the LDAP_ SERVER_START_TLS_OID method TLS
251. Takes the average value of the selected channel over a specified time period The time period must be a multiple of 125 msecs For example a period of 0 2 seconds would be rejected but a period of 0 25 seconds would be accepted Allows a maths channel to read point values from other instruments on the Mod bus link Produces a value for the speed at which a signal changes over a specified pe riod This function carries out O correction of gas measurements for use in Continu ous Emissions Monitoring applications This uses wet and dry bulb temperatures and atmospheric pressure inputs to produce a percentage Relative Humidity reading Allows oxygen concentration and oxygen potential to be determined by solving the Nernst oxygen equation When triggered by an event or alarm job this causes the current number of mil liseconds since 00 00 hrs on 1st January 1970 to appear as the function value If the selected PV format is date or time the result is displayed as date or time respectively Allows the Configuration Revision number to be used as the input to a maths channel When this maths channel is included in a group the user can determine the Configuration Revi sion number obtaining at any time in the history record Security Revision Number Allows the Security Revision number to be used as the input to a maths channel When this maths channel is included in a group the user can determine the Se curity Revision number obt
252. The recorder effectively switches to Auto matic Gection 4 3 3 to ensure that data is not lost Network boot failure The recorder is unable to establish connection with the BootP or DHCP server This might be caused by for example cable failure network hardware failure etc Recording failure message Message explains recording failure due to file error internal over flow etc Removable media failure This error is set if the archive storage device is corrupt wrongly for matted etc Becomes active only when an Archive is attempted Removable media full Archive storage device full Becomes active only when an Archive is in progress Page 10 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 1 3 ALARM INDICATION Cont INSTRUMENT ALARMS Cont SNTP server failure This error is set if a the year received from the server is lt 2001 or gt 2035 or b the configured SNTP server cannot be accessed Time synchronisation failure Set if 5 or more Time change events are caused by the SNTP server within 24 hrs A Time change event occurs whenever the recorder time is found to be more than 2 seconds different from the server time The alarm does not appear until 24 hours have elapsed since the first of the five or more Time Change events occurred USB over current USB power fault too much current being drawn by a USB device max 500 mA USB unsupported Unsupported USB device
253. UCTION The virtual channels option introduces a user configurable number of counters which can be preset disabled incremented or decremented by Job action If access is permitted the user can preset the counter to a selected value as and when required from the configuration page See for Job details and fection 4 3 22 for a description of virtual channels If the Batch option is fitted then batches can be started whenever counter 1 changes value and if this is done the current value of counter 1 is appended to batch field 1 Other counters can be selected for batch initiation but opera tion is not guaranteed CONFIGURATION Figure 4 3 13 shows a typical enabled counter configuration page The page is accessed from the Root menu Operator Config menu Counter number 1 Counter 1 Y EE Enable v Value OFF Units Units Units Preset o Units Preset now Descriptor Counter 1 A B Switching Scale Low o Units Scale High 1 Units Zone Low 0 96 Zone High 100 96 Scale Type None V P Select None or Linear Colour E Alarm Number 1 y gt gt Select Alarm number opt Off Enable Off y GE Job Number 1 Y 9 Select Job number Trigger Category No Action Y ED Select Job category Apply H Discard Figure 4 3 13 Typical Counter configuration menu CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS Counter number Allows any of the available counters to be selec
254. UTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 6 8 CUSTOMISE Cont FONT SIZE EXAMPLES The following figures give examples drawn to the same scale for all of the different font sizes available except Auto which picks a font size considered appropriate for the size of screen Archive Save Restore Config Security Network System Very small Archive Save Restore Config Security Network System Small Archive Save Restore Config Security Network System Large Archive Save Restore Config Security Network System eri Figure 4 6 8b Font sizes HA029324 Page 214 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 6 9 About Selecting About from the System key menu gives details of the version numbers of different aspects of the recorder and details ofthe amount of memory fitted Figure 4 6 9 shows a typical About display page At Version Created On Security Revision Appears only when viewing via Bridge software Bridge Version Product Software Version History File Version BootRom Version Board Version History SRAM DRAM Instrument Variant Config Revision Last Updated 6180XIO 3109 06 October 2010 17 13 28 51 6180XIO 17 Comprising Sal 5 220 ed 3 Fitted Memory 96 00Mb 256kb 64Mb Support Fi
255. VM International sales and service AUSTRALIA Sydney Eurotherm Pty Ltd Telephone 1 2 9838 0099 Fax 61 2 9838 9288 E mail info eurotherm au invensys com AUSTRIA Vienna Eurotherm GmbH Telephone 43 1 798 7601 Fax 43 1 798 7605 E mail info eurotherm at invensys com BELGIUM amp LUXEMBOURG Moha Eurotherm SG ANM Telephone 32 85 274080 Fax 32 85 274081 E mail info eurotherm be invensys com BRAZIL Campinas SP Eurotherm Ltda Telephone 5519 3707 5333 Fax 5519 3707 5345 E mail info eurotherm br invensys com CHINA Eurotherm China Shanghai Office Telephone 86 21 6145 1188 Fax 86 21 6145 2602 E mail info eurotherm cn invensys com Beijing Office Telephone 86 10 5909 5700 Fax 86 10 5909 5710 E mail info eurotherm cn invensys com DENMARK Copenhagen Eurotherm Danmark AS Telephone 45 70 234670 Fax 45 70 234660 E mail info eurotherm dk invensys com OCopyright Eurotherm Limited 2010 FINLAND Abo Eurotherm Finland Telephone 358 2250 6030 Fax 358 2250 3201 E mail info eurotherm fi invensys com FRANCE Lyon Eurotherm Automation SA Telephone 33 478 66 45 00 Fax 33 478 35 24 90 E mail info eurotherm fr invensys com GERMANY Limburg Eurotherm Deutschland GmbH Telephone 49 6431 2980 Fax 49 6431 298119 E mail info eurotherm de invensys com INDIA Chennai Eurotherm India Limited Telephone 91 44 2496 1129 Fax 91 44 249
256. When editing existing text strings the existing text string appears highlighted and will be replaced in its entirety by the first character entered To avoid this the left arrow key can be touched to unhighlight it The down and up arrow keys can be used to scroll through previously entered text strings Immediately below the keyboard are six keys with the functions listed below When active the back ground colour changes to yellow for as long as the key is active Shift Once the shift key has been pressed the next entered letter appears as a capital subsequent let ters are in lower case Caps When pressed all subsequent letters appear as capital letters until the Caps key is operated again BSpc This backspace key deletes character to the left of the cursor Ovr lfselected the next entered character replaces overwrites the existing character to the right of the cursor position If not selected the next entered character in inserted into the existing text string at the cursor position Ok Used to save the new text string and to return to the page from which the keyboard was called Cancel Causes a return to the page from which the keyboard was called without saving the new string Notes 1 The character on each display key is always a capital letter whether or not the actual character being entered is in capitals or lower case 2 The cursor keys mimic the function of the left and right arrow Navigation keys 3 Asan a
257. a picklist Vertical Grid Total Default Number of vertical divisions for trend chart If left at default uses the value entered in Group Configuration section 4 3 2 Any other setting overrides Group Configuration entry Table 7 3 2 Advanced edit level parameters sheet 5 of 6 User Guide Page 254 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 3 2 ADVANCED PARAMETERS Cont Parameter Pick list content Description Vertical Minor Divs Default Allows the user to enter a number of minor grid divisions If left at de fault the value entered in Group Configuration Section 4 3 2 is used Any other setting overrides Group Configuration entry Visible Alarm Default For When Visible below is selected as In alarm or error or not in alarm or error Visible Alarm allows an alarm number to be entered for use in determining whether a component be visibile or invisible Visible Channel All points For use When Visible below is selected as Channel Value In alarm or error or not in alarm or error Visible Channel allows a point number to be selected from a pick list See also Visible Operator and Visible Value below Visible Operator List of operators For When Visible below is selected as Channel Value Visible Op erator allows a comparison operator to be selected from a picklist The pic
258. a Dial Up Router plugged into a telephone socket The PC must similarly be connected to a telephone socket via a modem shown externally in the figure but often built in with modern computers The dial up router available from computer suppliers etc has an associated telephone number and can also have a security password system Both the telephone number and any password s must be known to the PC user before any attempt at communication is made The PC can be set up to dial the number automatically or the number may be dialled manually Reference should be made to the computer documentation or help pages if necessary Once communication has been established the software can be run Recorder Recorder Host computer IL Modem phone Socket Dial up router phone Socket Figure 6 2 2 Remote connection example 6 2 3 Networked systems For PCs and recorders connected into an internal network it is necessary only to obtain an IP address or name and the required passwords in order to establish connections between the PC s and the recorder s For PCs remote from a networked system which is permanently connected to the internet it is necessary to obtain an IP address or name and the required passwords in order to establish connections between the PC and the recorder s In many cases it is also necessary that the internal network and firewall if such exists be configured to allow acc
259. a number to be entered for the scrolling period between channels 0 Channel hold Allows message printing to be enabled disabled For Horizontal trending only allows the vertical bargraph display to be switched on and off Allows the pen icons at the edge of the chart to be switched on and off Allows the current channel faceplate to be switched on and off 7 4 2 Group vertical bargraph Produces a vertical bargraph for a selected group in a format defined by Bargraph Style and Scale style described in The number of rows of bars can also be defined by the user according to the overall size of the display number of channels etc The default value of zero means that the recorder will display what it believes to be the most ergonomic number of rows The recorder attempts to fit as many channel bars as possible into the width of the display The default mini mum width of a column is 6 mm If there are more channels than can be fitted into the display a scroll bar device appears at the bottom edge to allow hidden bars to be accessed The recorder attempts to fit as many faceplates as possible into the height of the display If there are more faceplates than can be fitted into the display a scroll bar device appears to allow hidden faceplates to be ac cessed 7 4 3 Group horizontal bargraph Produces a group horizontal bargraph for a selected group in a format defined by Bargraph Style and Scale style described in
260. a pixel value to be entered for the line thickness of some com ponents It should be noted that the nature of the screen and of the drawing method means that curved lines of multi pixel thickness can suffer from Moir fringe or interference effects Table 7 3 2 Advanced edit level parameters sheet 3 of 6 User Guide Page 252 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 3 2 ADVANCED PARAMETERS Cont Parameter Pick list content Description Message Colour Default Allows a colour to be selected for messages on a trend chart Minimum Height Default For individual channels within a group horizontal bargraph display Minimum Width Default For individual channels within a group vertical bargraph display Minor grid line colour Default Allows a colour to be selected for trend chart minor gridlines Nominal height None 653 503 height of large frame small frame display area in pixels Nominal width None 1024 934 width of large frame small frame display area in pixels Notes None Allows a note to be entered for the users convenience Number of Columns None Lays out group displays other than trend in the specified number of columns Number of Rows None Lays out group displays in the specified number of rows Numeric width None Number of characters in channel data display including decimal point On visibility change Pain
261. a the USB port atthe rear of the instrument bection 2 1 Batch Number 060509 015 Customer Name FishesRus Operator name Marvin Supervisor Batch Entry list Appears if batch entry area is touched continuously for 2 seconds approx List entries are made in Batch Config uration These keys not shown whilst the Batch FishesRus Marvin Arthur Tricia Fred Manky Clothes Ltd Rat s Nest Hair Co Entry list displayed Store Start Close Figure 4 3 10b Batch values entry page HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 95 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 10 BATCH INITIATION Cont Status Batch in progress Batch Number 060509 001 Customer Name FishesRus Operator Name Marvin Supervisor Fred New Stop Close Figure 4 3 10c Status page Batch running BATCH MESSAGE DISPLAY The messages are displayed on the Graph Trend display as shown in figure 4 3 10d below This figure uses the example given in the previous sections and uses only four messages Further messages would appear above message 4 The figure also shows that time and date are added to the messages and that the currently running batch number is given in the Group name area Touching this area calls the Batch status page In this job triggered batch th
262. active instrument alarms to acknowl edge all channel alarms to display the Alarm Summary or Message Log page Media removal strategy is also controlled from this pop up For channel alarm symbols refer to Current Trace Alarm Icons above INSTRUMENT ALARM A This indicator appears flashing if any of the following errors are active The instrument alarm summary page described in allows the user to view such instrument alarms as are active Active Directory Server error The active directory server bection 4 5 1 cannot be accessed Archive failed message Message explains archive failure Battery backed RAM cleared This message appears if the battery has failed and the unit has been switched off Clock failure Internal clock was corrupt at power up or the time has never been set Can be caused by battery failure in which case the battery icon will also be visible The error is cleared by setting the time and date Server time forced to 00 00 1 1 1900 DHCP Server failure For instruments with IP address lookup set to Get from DHCP Serv er this alarm occurs if the recorder cannot obtain an IP address from the server See for details FTP Archiving file lost Archive failed A file which has not been archived has been detected FTP Archiving too slow Remote archive is too infrequent The recorder effectively switches to Automatic section 4 3 5 to ensure that data is not lost FTP Primary Server Failure This error is
263. ailable Preset Loads the selected totaliser with the value set up in Preset in the totaliser s configura tion menu Preset Group Loads all the totalisers in the specified group with their Preset values Disable Stops the specified totaliser accumulating Disable Group Stops all totalisers in the specified group Note If more than one job is set up to disable a particular totaliser then any of these jobs going active will disable the totaliser Job Number 1 Category Totaliser v Action Preset Group _ Select Required Group Group 1 Group 1 WA A l gece 1 Select Active Inactive On Acknowledgementy 4 or Acknowledgement Select Preset Disable Preset Group or Disable Group Figure 4 7 2 Totaliser job menu layout group action Page 217 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 7 3 Message category One or more messages section 4 3 8 can be directed to the display to All groups or to a Specified Group The messages must be contiguous e g messages 2 3 and 4 may be sent but messages 1 3 and 4 cannot be sent without message 2 as well Job Number iv Category Message Y Send Message s to Specified Group Y oe Group 1 Group 1 lt only it Specified Ge previously selected First Message 1 Message 1 Y Last Message 1 Message 1 Y On Active Select Display All Groups or Specified
264. aining at any time in the history record Note See About in fection 4 4 for a description of the Configuration and Security Revision numbers hermocouple Cal Correction SCALE LOW SCALE HIGH Defines correction points allowing offsets to be added to channel inputs to compensate for example for equipment errors The zero and full scale values for the maths function as displayed If A B switching is enabled a second set of scale low and scale high values can be entered A values are used during normal operation B values are switched to by job action as described in HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 101 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont PV FORMAT Numeric Provides a decimal value for the maths channel Elapsed time Shows the maths channel value in HH MM SS hours minutes seconds format Normally used only for time functions For other functions elapsed time counts in milliseconds e g a PV of 10000 would be displayed as 00 00 10 a PV of 60000 would be displayed as 00 01 00 Scientific Values are displayed and entered as a decimal number between 1 0 and 101 the mantissa followed by a multiplier the exponent E G to enter a value of 1244 5678 the value entered would be 1 2445678E3 where 3 represents the number of places that the decimal point must be shifted to the left in order to convert the value to a number between 1 and 10f To enter a va
265. ait Trend History mode 11 53 08 11 07 06 11 07 06 11 49 54 800 00 Value at cursor time date Group faceplates appear only if Faceplates selected On from option menu If there are too many faceplates to fit across the screen they appear down the right edge instead EH Faceplate for current channel Touch and release face plate to increment channel or touch pen to select channel If Channel Cycle On Current channel incre ments every 10 seconds A Real time date Cursor time date Touch faceplate to increment channel Press bar to move one 4k pageful Press arrow keys to move Move slider minimum H to required amount date time CEST Page Page Option Menu _ forwards in time backwards in time E show newer data Show older data Note Message Log Figure 3 4 1b Trend display mode and trend history mode HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 31 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 4 2 Horizontal Trend display Entered from the Vertical Trend display by means of the down arrow key or selected via the Goto View key this display mode figure 3 4 2a is similar to the Vertical Trend display described in sec tion 3 4 1 above except that the traces are produced horizontally rather than vertically Faceplates for current channel Touch either faceplate to increment channel or touch pen to select channel
266. aka SUBNET MASK ae died veda ere pes DEFAULT GATEWAY eege e ienige iii el SNIP SERVER ENABLE cocos e Prado SNIP CLIENT ENABLE cuina asilo EA SC RR EE EUROPRP SERVER ENABLE ceret Rer eee REPRE ACTIVE DIRECTORY SERVER uuu s aaa er ree wr S ACTIVE DIRECTORY SECURITY Y usuy aqna re Rr E rns PASSWORD CACHE EXPIRY seccion User Guide Page vi HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE LIST OF CONTENTS CONT Section DOMAIN NAME SERVICE DNS u us s esas ias ee eee eee PRIMARY SECONDARY DNS SERVER E Say EE EE A Ve te Ae Ee E EE LONG DATE FORMAT hut EE Hee m RR ERU agak Aen 4 6 3 Upgrade maior Eege ed egen 4 6 4 Master Comms Diagnostics u uuu usa esas lesse ypas 4 6 5 Ethernet Diagnostics 46 6 COPY ber hr ada CONFIGURABLEPARAMETERS eh usu EE ee Ad monas c r 4 6 7 Jobseatchi sa sts ree ke besote eher tbe aid SEARCH RESULTS uu nn oe oh deeg 4 6 9 CUStOMISE ect EE FONT SIZEEXAMPLUES ebe d er ged waaka E LEE INSTRUMENT VARIANT wee cea pee e yes CONFIG REVISI N cuota pao LAST UPDATED cesar trem toe ER heh Ren ERROR tah det AT VERSION aseene eR enee CREATED NL A tee ge ay buy ee Re blu Ras SECURITY REVISION 5 Lu e Re EE eise SUPPORTEIBEE 551 creci eut 4 7 JOBS tide d t DN rae Ae dn ate UE pa Cahua uu ga 474 No AGCHONs cesses aa er RE COPI EE Pase p d aa 4 7 2 Totaliser category 4 7 3 Message category sss suu se kh ah REN ha RR RR EE 4 7
267. al file in which are stored all users login information as set up in Security Access con figuration section 4 4 it must then supply the correct Username and Password Should a host fail to login after three attempts the recorder will terminate the connection This MODBUS security function can be enabled disabled in the Operator Config Instrument menu KO Note Modbus Security must be disabled in order for Modbus communications to be established Once the Master is communicating with the Slave Modbus security can be re enabled providing that the master has the correct remote user name and password data for the relevant slave If this informa tion is missing all read write requests will be ignored by the slave User Guide HA029324 Page 266 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 2 4 SECURITY Cont The following C code is intended for use in creating a suitable 16 bit encrypted register using an IP address and password FUNCTION MB_Driver encrypt DESCRIPTION Create an encrypted value from a password string ARGUMENTS pswd Pointer to password from network file eKey Pointer to eKey usually I P address must be 4 bytes RETURN result A 16 bit value representing the encryption result NOTES None Ushort MB Driver encrypt cchar pswd cchar ipAddr Uchar key1 Uchar key2 Ushort dataLen Uchar ibyte Ushort byteResult 0 Uchar encryptedData NULL Uch
268. al places Zone low value two decimal places Input type 1 Analogue input 3 Totaliser 2 Maths 4 Counter Number of decimal places 0 to 9 used by all scaled parameters except where stated Channel colour 0 to 55 See Annex B for definitions Units string up to five characters Open Digital Input string up to eight characters Closed Digital Input string up to eight characters Channel descriptor up to 20 characters Number of alarms on this channel 0 to 2 0 Numeric 1 Digital strings Alarm 1 enable 0 Off 2 Latched 1 Unlatched Alarm 1 type 0 Absolute low 2 Deviation in 4 Rate of change rise 3 Trigger 1 Absolute high 3 Deviation out 5 Rate of change fall Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 2 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 2 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 3 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 3 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 4 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 4 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Scaled Scaled Scaled Scaled Enum Uint16 Enum String_5 String_8 String_8 String_20 Uint16 Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read W
269. aliser 1 A B Switching Scale Low o Units totaliser Scale High 1 Units totaliser Zone Low ho Zone High 100 Scale Type None V p gt Select None Linear or Log PV format Numeric V Select Numeric or Scientific Max Decimal Digits 4 Colour Mil Alarm Number 1y gt Select Alarm number Select Off p Unlatched Enable Off Y Latched Job Number 1 Y Select Job number ngger Category No Action Y 3 gt Select Job category Apply Discard Figure 4 3 12 Totaliser configuration menu Period Scaler The totaliser equation works in seconds If the totalised channel units are other than oer second a period scaler other than the default 1 must be entered For example if the input channel is in litres per hour then the period scaler would have to be the number of seconds in an hour 3600 Unit Scaler If for example the input channel is in litres per hour the totalised value will be in litres unless the unit scaler is set to a value other than 1 Ifit is more convenient the totalised value can be in thousands of litres by setting the unit scaler to 1000 Setting the unit scaler negative causes the totaliser to decrement rather than increment Scale Low High The zero and full scale values for the totaliser as traced on the screen If A B switching is enabled a second set of scale low and scale high values can be en
270. alue Date Time and Serial are then prefixed to the message which is then sent to the selected groups The date and time relate to when the first buffered character was received If Start of message characters are configured characters will be read into the buffer only after these characters have been received The buffer holds up to 120 characters plus date time etc and start end of message characters Further characters are discarded until End of message is received or timeout occurs Message characters below Hex 20 decimal 32 will be replaced by question marks Message characters above Hex 7F decimal 127 will be treated as Unicode MESSAGING RULES 1 If no start of message characters are configured but a timeout value other than 0 has been entered the new message will start after the timeout period has elapsed 2 Ifno end of message characters are configured but a timeout value other than O has been entered the new message will end after the timeout period has elapsed 3 If start of message characters are configured and a timeout value other than 0 has been entered all characters prior to the Start of message characters are ignored 4 If start of message characters are configured but neither end characters nor timeout have been con figured then this is an invalid configuration Should this configuration be a requirement if the same characters are entered as end of message characters instead then each message will
271. am Mass Flow gl Flow Channel 1 Use Temperaturey Temperature Channel 2 Dryness 0 Units Units Apply Figure 4 3 11h Typical Saturated Steam Mass Flow configuration page PARAMETERS Flow Select Constant or the number of the channel supplying the measured flow rate If Constant selected a further box allows the value for the constant to be entered Use Allows the user to select Temperature C or Pressure MPa for the calculation Temperature Appears only if Use Temperature Select Constant or the number ofthe channel supplying the steam temperature If Constant is selected a further box allows a value for the constant to be entered Pressure Appears only if Use Pressure Select Constant or the number ofthe channel supplying the steam pressure If Constant is selected a further box allows a value for the constant to be entered Table 4 3 11b below gives multipliers for converting some common pressure units to MPa More details may be found at websites http www ex ac uk trol scol ccpress htm and http www on amongst others Dryness Enter a value between 0 and 100 to represent the dryness of the steam 0 no vapour 100 no liquid Notes 1 The units of kg sec and m sec are used above for simplicity In fact any time unit can be used For example if the measured flow is in m hour then the Mass flow will be in kg hour 2 ASME Steam tables 1999
272. ame appears in this page User Steven Eric Andrew Bass Y Remove Apply Discard Figure 4 4 4 Remove User display page For Active Directory users 1 Removing a user clears the recorder s password cache described in below 2 Removing a user from the Active Directory Domain does not automatically remove that user from the recorder a Remove User procedure must also be carried out 4 4 5 Change Password For units fitted with the Security Manager option this allows the entry of a new password for the currently logged in user providing that the user has Edit own password enabled in the Access when list and is Active Directory authenticated Notes 1 This feature should be used with discretion as it affects Network logins which would normally be under the control of the user s IT department or Network Administrator Changing the pass word may cause conflicts within the network thus preventing its efficient operation 2 If Active Directory security is set to None section 4 5 1 Network Address menu any at tempted changes to the password will be rejected That is only passwords on a Transport Layer Security TLS secured connection are accepted 3 The old password remains valid for up to an hour default after the change and during this pe riod both passwords are valid The default period can be edited by the Network administrator Old Password New Password Retype Password
273. ameters sheet 2 of 2 HA029324 User Guide Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 249 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 3 2 Advanced parameters The selection of the Advanced properties set is carried out from the Properties Options page as described in fection 7 2 3 above Advanced properties are in addition to the basic properties described above not a replacement for them Parameter Pick list content Description 3D effect Enable Disable For Channel numeric display only adds an embossed boxed surround to the display Applies only if Custom selected as Faceplate style Alarm marks colour None Allows a colour to be selected for alarm marks on trend scales Default is colour 0 red Bargraph style Single Line For horizontal bargraphs only Plain produces a bargraph with descrip tor to the left of the bar digital value to the right of the bar and alarm indication to the right of the decimal value With units adds units after the digital value 3D adds an embossed boxed surround Scale adds a scale below the bar with end point values and tick points Scale style described below may be used to modify the appearance of the scale Faceplate below bar Produces coloured bar above channel descriptor digital value and alarm indication No scale is printed Just bar Produces a colour bar with no textual information or just the low and high scale values according to component B
274. an be selected from the Root Menu Goto View key Groups can be scrolled through using the left right arrow keys The key returns the user to the Home page defined in Configuration Views section 4 3 4 from anywhere in the Operator or Configura tion pages in the recorder When dispatched the Home page is Group 1 vertical trend display See also the Screen builder User screens description in fection 4 TREND HISTORY Trend history allows the user to view the history of the display group The maximum amount that can be reviewed depends on a number of factors including how many points are configured how rapid the traces are changing and so on Ata recording rate of 20 A nat 4 3 2 with all channels configured a minimum of 30 day s worth of traces is available for viewing pro vided that the group contents are not re configured during this period in which case the history starts at the end of the re configuration The amount of trace visible on the screen depends on the recording rate the higher the rate the less trace is visible at any one time Notes 1 Trend history mode is available only for groups with Recording Enable enabled and only for vertical horizontal and circular trend display modes 2 Trend history mode is vertical for vertical and circular trend modes and horizontal for horizontal trend mode 3 Channel cycling is inhibited in trend history mode To increment the current channel touch the faceplate
275. an then be used as an input to a Group Minimum function with a high absolute alarm set at the correct F value HA029324 Page 103 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont LINEAR MASS FLOW Note The overall accuracy of a flow measurement installation depends on a number of factors outside the control ofthe recorder manufacturer For this reason the recorder manufacturer takes no responsibility for the accuracy ofthe results obtained using the mass flow equations imple mented in the maths pack The equations solved is K n Flow x AbsP RgxZ Temp where OM Mass flow in kg sec at time t QM Scaling factor see below Rg Specific gas constant in J kg K see below Compressibility factor see below Flow Measured value from the flow meter at time t AbsP Absolute pressure of the fluid at time t in kPa A Temp Temperature of the fluid in Kelvins SCALING FACTOR This is determined from an assumed value of Om at a known Flow AbsP and Temp The value is chosen to give an output within the range low scale to high scale SPECIFIC GAS CONSTANT The specific gas constant for any gas is available from published tables For convenience the value for a number of common gases is given in table 4 3 11a below Air Ammonia Carbon dioxide Carbon monoxide Ethylene Hydrogen Methane Nitrogen Oxygen Propane Steam Table 4 3 11a Common gas
276. anage ment configuration See Management section 4 4 2 for further details HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 208 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 6 4 Master Comms Diagnostics This menu item is concerned only with Master comms diagnostics and is fully described in Section 4 3 16 4 6 5 Ethernet Diagnostics This screen figure 4 6 5 allows the user to testthe status of the connection with a host computer and if Modbus comms is enabled the connections with local and remote Modbus slaves The paqe is available to any access level with Full Configuration enabled in Security Access configuration Bection 4 4 1 Host 149 121 131 78 Ping Status Ping Now Local Modbus Client 1 127 0 0 1 Local Modbus Client 2 Offline Remote Modbus Client 1 149 121 130 242 Remote Modbus Client 2 Offline Remote Modbus Client 3 Offline Remote Modbus Client 4 192 168 189 89 IP address remains for five seconds after message activity ceases after which Offline appears instead Appear only if EtherNet IP comms option enabled Appear only if Master comms option enabled EtherNet IP Clients Unconnected Message Manager UCMM Offline Implicit UO Messaging Offline Explicit Messaging TCP 1 149 121 129 14 Explicit Messaging TCP 2 Offline Explicit Messaging TCP 3 Offline Explicit Messaging TCP 4 Offline Figure 4
277. ar and scale Produces a colour bar with a scale but no digital value or alarm indica tion Default Produces a colour bar with scale with descriptor digital value and alarm indication above Default Vertical Bargraph Produces a colour bar with a scale System Vertical Bargraph Produces a colour bar with a scale Horizontal Bargraph Produces a colour bar with scale with descriptor digital value and alarm indication above Best Fit Font Enabled Disabled For Channel numeric only Applies only if Custom selected as Face plate style If enabled the display fonts for descriptor value and units are selected by the instrument to suit the screen scale The fonts will thus vary in size according to the size of the Channel Numeric display Overridden by any settings for Value Font Descriptor Font or Units Font other than Default Channel cycle time 10 For group trend displays allows a time period in seconds to be en tered for channel scroll rate 0 no scroll Colour Alarms None Used only when Colour style Channel alarms A semicolon sepa rated list of Colour channel alarms used to change the colour of the component being configured according to alarm status Colours are defined in Colour Backgrounds and Colour Foregrounds described below Colour Backgrounds None Used only if Colour style Channel Alarms or Channel thresholds A semicolon separated list of background colours for t
278. ar eKeys 4 Ulong ipAddress Convert ip address to an unsigned long value so that we can manipulate each of the 4 bytes to be used as our private keys ipAddress inet addr ipAddr Now split the bytes up by copying the IP address into a byte array memcpy eKeys amp ipAddress sizeof Ulong From the 4 bytes of the IP address create two exclusive keys key1 eKeys 0 eKeys 3 key2 7 eKeys 1 eKeys 2 Calculate the length of the string to be encrypted dataLen strlen pswd Create some memory to store the new encrypted password encryptedData Uchar malloc sizeof Uchar dataLen Copy the unencrypted password into a byte array so we can use the character code as each byte value memcpy encryptedData pswd dataLen Perform EXOR comparison between keys and raw data Perform the operation on each byte using alternate key values starting at byte 1 with key 1 for ibyte 0 ibyte lt dataLen Continued HA029324 User Guide Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 267 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 2 4 SECURITY Cont EXOR with the key1 encryptedDatalibyte key1 Compare the next byte with key2 if ibyte lt dataLen encryptedDatalibyte key2 Now EXOR each byte to the next byte until no more are available if all goes well the last byte in the array should never change for ibyte 0 ibyte lt dataLen 1 ibyte encryptedDa
279. are not carried out with the Simulator option enabled If 5SNTP server enable is enabled then the recorder will supply recorder time CLEAR This Trend category job ection 4 7 10 clears the display Used in conjunction with Erase all History below this is known in some applications as Recall Mode ERASE ALL HISTORY This Recording category job section 4 7 9 erases all the history files in the recorder Used in conjunc tion with Clear above this is known in some applications as Recall Mode Note If the 21CFR11 option is enabled Erase All History jobs can be triggered but are ignored leaving the recording history unaffected SCREEN SAVER This Trend category job ection 4 7 10 switches the display brightness to the value set up in Saver Display Instrument Configuration section 4 3 1 for the duration of the job The job overrides the Save after time value also set up in Instrument Configuration HA029324 Page 184 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 4 SECURITY Touching this key allows the operator to select Login described in Eection 3 3 1 Management Ac cess or Add Remove User for configuration Selecting Access displays the current user level Touching this area allows the user to select Logged out Operator Engineer or any of the added users The user may also go directly to logged out
280. arm 1 enable 0 Off 1 Unlatched Alarm 1 type 0 Absolute low 2 Deviation in 4 Rate of change rise Trigger setpoint Note 2 1 Absolute high 3 Deviation out 5 Rate of change fall Alarm 2 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 2 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 3 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 3 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 4 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 4 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Scaled Scaled Scaled Scaled Enum Uint16 Enum String_5 String_8 String_8 String_20 Uint16 Enum Read only Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only 02CF 719 Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Start Addr Hex Dec 0261 609 0262 610 0263 611 0264 612 0265 613 0266 614 0267 615 0268 616 026B 619 026D 621 0271 625 0275 629 0279 633 027D 637 0287 647 0291 657 0292 658 0293 659 1 02DO 720 02D1 721 02D2 722 02DC 732 02DD 733 02DE 734 02DF 735 02E9 745 O2EA 746 O2EB 747 02EC 748 02F6 758 02F7 759 02F8 760 02F9 761
281. as 202 32 bit IEEE 131 HA029324 User Guide Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 363 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE Totaliser Cont USB Cont VE 211 Unsupported nn ten rette 11 setti suas sdaeas 128 Use Incorrect val es irme 78 129 Counter batch number 93 Jaiba eidem isi tease Padre 217 Last properties teet re eet n 244 Inde 128 Text batch number iter 93 Run time data User Mod BUS escasear 130 Adding and removing essiens nia 196 ER EE 131 elteren kin anys tias potato 153 Touch screen Defined descriptor tete 122 Errore tiro riesig tas 322 Linearisation table A ET 326 CoOnfiguraltloH s comede martire umasa tee tests 89 Pr cal tiOns is eame reiten rr itta 326 Configuration menu 339 Mert ned 323 Importing ExpoOrtidQ a ncn 51 Trend Units selectlo etit teer etis 66 89 Circula ostrea 34 Logged in Event Source 83 CON OU e asqhaasa ayaq 69 bogiti account disabled tert treats 83 dipl 184 Name History Embed in message 87 DIS BAY 29 63 Name ukuy u ee ee 196 Maxi Un a itte rte aieo en 63 SII TA 238 to 316 A acer ee tete 78 Advanced parameters sss 250 Horizontal trem hore ma enn 350 Basic Advanced selection sss 244 Interval Speed Unite te eeteeeeeteneeee 60 Basic param etais resen ra rire 248 JO DSen saree
282. at his her next login At next log in a pop up dialogue box requests that a new password be entered If a new password is not entered login is denied Entering the new password clears the checkbox so this is a one shot operation until the checkbox is enabled again by a user with Engineer level access New Password Retype Password Apply Logout ENTER BATCH DATA If Batch Control is enabled then this field is automatically enabled and is greyed out so that it cannot be edited If Batch Control is not enabled then enabling this item allows the user to enter batch data but not to start stop or create new batches ALLOW WEB SERVER Any user with this permission and Connect from remote permission will be able to view the recorder from a remote PC using the Remote user name and Remote password described above Note See Annex dfor details of the Web server facility HA029324 Page 190 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 4 2 Management option Note Where users are controlled by a domain on the recorder Security Manager will not manage or reconcile disabled accounts password changes or password expiry on these recorders This menu selection appears only ifthe Audit Trail option 21CFR11 option and or Security Management option is fitted Which configuration fields appear depends on the option s fitted Figure 4 4 2a below s
283. at which data is saved to Flash memory This value also affects how much trace history appears per screen in trend his tory mode ection 3 4 If recording is not enabled these fields are greyed and not editable If is enabled a second Recording Speed Interval value can be entered Recording Speed Interval A is used during normal operation Recording Speed Interval B is switched to by job action as described infection 4 4 Note With large numbers of points configured in one or more groups the total amount of data generated per iteration may exceed the amount that can be written to the internal FLASH memory in the time available Such a situation may also arise if many messages are being generated The recorder responds by reducing the recording speed and a message Recording failed in ternal overflow Slowing recording interval of fastest group s appears to draw the user s attention to the situation TREND HISTORY DURATION Gives an estimated time to fill the group s trend history area of the Flash memory The calculation is based on the archive rate the compression ratio the flash size and on the exact nature of the data Rap idly changing values use more space than static slowly changing values If is enabled the calculation is based on Recording Speed Interval A Changing the contents of one group may affect the Trend History Duration of other groups This hap pens because the recorder attempts
284. atch field 1 G w s 00 00 00 00 00 00 Batch field 1 1 00 00 00 00 00 00 Batch field 1 e indicator 00 00 00 00 00 00 Batch field 1 Mix2 00 00 00 00 00 00 Batch field 1 00 Batch field 1 Full Details 4 Batch Control Batch start Elapsed Batch Field 1 Batch Field 1 Group names time and date time text values Sort ON Highlight OFF Exit Figure 3 1 4f Batch Summary page Group mode sort OFF highlighting ON Touching anywhere on a group row calls a pop up menu as shown above The functions of this menu are as follows Page 16 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 1 4 SUMMARY MENU Cont BATCH SUMMARY Cont FULL DETAILS Touching this key calls the Batch Details page showing the group name batch status and batch field details BATCH CONTROL This calls a page similar to the Full Details page but including a NEW key to allow the operator to start a new batch If the batch is configured as Start Stop a Stop key is also included allowing the user to stop the batch SORT If Sort is Off default the groups appear in Group number order with Group 1 at the top and group 12 at the bottom The key legend is Sort ON If Sort is On those groups with batches running appear in group number order at the top of the list fol lowed by any remaining groups also in group number order The key legend is Sort OFF
285. atically whenever a specified counter changes value by job or remotely via MODBUS TCP Batches can be defined as start stop or continuous and can incorporate all channels or just those associ ated with a specified Group For start stop batches the batch record starts when the batch is started and continues until it is stopped For continuous batches the batch record starts when the batch is started and continues until the next batch is started or until batch recording is disabled When using PC review software the Go to Batch feature can be used to select a particular batch record If Name files by Batch is enabled a separate history file is created for each batch For each batch start a start message is printed DD MM YY HH MM SS Batch start User Full Name Where DD MM YY is the date HH MM SS is the time and User Full name is either the current user name the security level e g Engineer or Automatic if the batch has been initiated by job or Modbus if trig gered remotely A similar message is printed at Batch Stop There are no stop messages associated with continuous batch selection In addition to the above start stop messages up to six lines of text can if required be printed on the chart at the start of a batch and if required at the end of a batch The messages are in two parts which for the sake of this document are called Headings and Values The Headings are entered in Field
286. ave Deploy Revert Discard Close More New Dispose Copy Screen Move Screen More Import Export Figure 7 2 3c Key arrangement via Bridge Close Causes the screen to quit edit mode If there are unsaved changes the user is asked for confirmation Copy Screen Copies the contents of the current screen to another specified screen leaving the current screen unchanged If the destination screen is already in use confirmation is required before the screen is overwritten Discard Causes all changes made since the last Save to be undone Dispose This key appears only for users accessing user pages using Bridge software When operated it deletes the local version of the screen so that the display reverts to the deployed version Deploy This key appears only for users accessing user pages using Bridge software It causes the screen to be saved to the PC database and sent to the recorder Export This key appears only for users accessing user pages using Bridge software Calls a browser Goto Canvas screen allowing the user to select a path name to which to Export the current screen The Component Property Editor page disappears and the screen is shown with the current component highlighted Click and Drag techniques on the highlight handles allow the component to be re sized and its aspect ratio to be edited Clicking a
287. ay to write values to the recorder and to receive values from it Once it is proved that the link is working the pc may be disconnected from the PLC if required HA029324 Page 182 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 22 Options Trial Mode DisabledY Trial Time Remaining Fitted channels Virtual channels Maths Totalisers Counters Groups Batch Enabled Y Security Manager DisabledY 1 Auditor 21CFR11V Full Bridge Level Full Y Master Comms Devices EA Screen Builder Y Simulation Enabled Y currently disabled AeroDaq DisabledY EtherNet IP Enabled Y Apply Discard Autoconfigure Figure 4 3 22 Options menu layout Touching this key calls a display showing the current recorder hardware software setup Subsequently should further options be fitted this page shows the difference between the hardware actually fitted and the hardware the recorder software is configured for currently Whenever there is a difference the Autoconfigure key can be pressed to alert the recorder to the fact that extra options have been added or taken away If no changes have occurred since last switch on then the currently fields and the Autoconfigure key do not appear TRIAL MODE Notes 1 Trial mode enables disables all options or features which are not fitted or e
288. be sent to the groups when the next message is received 5 If no start or end of message characters are entered and no timeout value is entered all received characters are discarded 6 Ifa received message is deemed to be corrupt it is discarded and the software will await a further message 7 Start and End of message characters are removed before the messages are sent to the groups MODBUS ADDRESS When acting as a slave the recorder will respond both to the address set in Instrument Configuration section 4 3 1 and to address 255 used by some network scanning software HA029324 Page 142 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 16 Master comms INTRODUCTION This option allows the unit to be used as a Modbus Master unit as well as a Modbus Slave The instru ment can communicate using the Ethernet RJ45 connection or by means of one ofthe serial communi cations ports see for details or both simultaneously The serial comms port must be set to Master both in Connections section 4 3 15 and at the switch accessed from the rear of the recorder as described in Master Configuration consists of entering a Modbus Address and for Ethernet connection an IP ad dress or DNS path name for each of the available remote devices which are to be used as slaves The configuration also allows three different priority intervals to be entered and read write parameters can be configured to be accessed at
289. bedded See Section 4 3 10 for details of the Batch option Batch Field data Allows a selected batch field to be included in the message Ifa batch is not running at the time the message is triggered the Batch field data is re Note Group number must be entered if the batch is configured for Group mode n source Instrument Name Allows the Instrument Name as entered in Configuration Instru ment fection 4 3 1 to be included in the message Instrument Number Causes the instrument number Network Address 4 5 1 to be embedded Config Revision Embeds the Config File Version number System About in the message Local User Embeds the currently logged in user e g Engineer John W etc This field appears only if the previous field Replace n with is selected as Specified Descriptor Specified Value or Specified alarm data The associated picklist s allow a specific point and a specific alarm if appropriate to be selected It is thus possible to configure say alarm 1 on channel 2 to produce a message giving the descriptor and or value of say totaliser 1 Notes um n 21to9 2 The example below is intended to clarify message entry techniques HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 87 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 8 MESSAGES Cont EXAMPLE n To configure Message 2 to read The value of Chan two Value channel 2 amp Tot one Value
290. ble to disable the selected Home page mode Note If Circular Trend view is enabled here in Views configuration but the Circular settings checkbox is not enabled in Group configuration section 4 3 2 then although the circular chart will appear it will not contain any trends HA029324 Page 75 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 4 VIEWS CONFIGURATION Cont USER SCREENS 1 TON This field appears only for recorders with the Screen Builder option fully described infection 7 Up to 24 user screens can be included in the up down arrow scroll list and to be active in the Root menu Goto View menu figure 4 3 4b In addition to the 24 screens accessible from the recorder display up to 100 extra screens which can be accessed only by using Bridge Full software can be specified The number selected should be kept to the minimum necessary in order to reduce the number of Goto View More displays Once created a Bridge screen can be copied to one or more recorder screens 1 to 24 if required making it accessible from the recorder Operator Remove Media Alarm Summary Message Log Vertical Trend Horizontal Trend Circular Trend Vertical Bargraph Horizontal Bargraph Numeric Page User Screen 2 Figure 4 3 4b Goto View and Goto Group submenus User Screen 1 Page 76 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 10
291. bpug sg ueeJog Joen EE v useing 1esn Ale u ios Joen g u l15s Jesf ueeJog Joen oBeg oueunwv ude481eg e1uozioH D gt pieosiq Addy OIF e ojo aseigo sl uueuo dei61eg eoa EE syeu sjeuueyo indu A dwe L9UIQUN L A PB Eee E EE a sod SIEIPAP we 5 A vduje euin Al O n We y luloq z eounos A pues reyuozuoH aiqesiq A puaa oman dnoig L dno1 uo A puai 1e n9J1 abed euoH A dnoen uo ug somos 9 qeu3 A L1uen3 L 1equinN 1u A3 AJelqeuz Aejdsiq A 1 dnou 1 dnog A dnom adoos A dnoi9 1 dnoJc auoH 02 11 6 7 1 uonoejes Ajeuueuo ed 1utog 9 v uonoeg S 1U9 3 A eBessei yoy H ebessen uuelv A 25 pes sua Joujny 10 aiqeu BIA AIU91 et eg y uonoe Aj 91qeuz did en enyoly z g p uonoes ver Ep y 0 Z Sjeeus ses A iqeua Lipan oi enyory sdno1o IA skeq 96 sz uoneing 10 SIH puait eens s L emau Buipioo ti Je os Add A0 00z 1 p ds Buipioo u P ta J pe AIU91V A eigeu3 Buipioo ti 1S1 S910N 10 219dO MoUs SMIN n S NUES wos mi sBojeiq BuruueM Iqesiq i V usa mas s cele oJe SU SUM sjauueyo 1n s u sBunies Jelmo tg s lt e GE SWWOD ae s ena1a u Pues paiqesiq wes 3 jueuunujsu e ayw 007 L peedg puai SR A oe A
292. by means of the down arrow key or selected from the Root Menu Goto View key this display mode shows the Process Variable PV values as vertical bars with faceplates containing digital values and alarm data There are two versions one with faceplates above the bars 1 to 6 channels figure 3 4 4a the other with faceplates at the right hand edge ofthe display figure 3 4 4b is used where there are more than six channels Note The description above refers to the 180 mm version of the recorder For the 100 mm ver sion the faceplates appear above the bars for one or two points but to the right of the bars for three or more points Operation ofthe option key calls the Option menu display for this display page allowing faceplates to be se lected on or off This feature is available for vertical trend circular trend and vertical bargraph displays only To call the horizontal bargraph display mode use the down arrow key Alternatively any one of the ena Goto View bled display modes ection 4 3 4 can be selected using the Root Menu Goto View key Trend history mode is not available from this display mode FACEPLATES ABOVE THE BARS See figure 3 4 4a As the number of channels in the display group increases the bars and their faceplates get narrower FACEPLATES AT RIGHT HAND EDGE See figure 3 4 4b As the number of PVs increases the bars get narrower As the bars get narrower so the scale values become truncated as sh
293. ceplates selected off FULL SCREEN FEATURES Faceplates As described above for Normal View features Page 36 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 4 3 CIRCULAR TREND Cont TIMESTAMPS Time and or date are displayed at every major chart division The following rules apply 1 For chart durations of a week or more only the date is displayed 2 For chart durations of less than a week both time and date appear with the following exception In New Chart mode unless the chart bridges midnight the date appears only at top centre of the chart All other chart divisions are identified by time only OTHER NOTES Adaptive recording results in two traces per trend as in other trend display modes 2 For successful circular trend display Circular Settings must be enabled for the relevant group sec tion 4 3 2 and Circular Trend must be enabled for the group in Views configuration Eection 4 3 4 If Circular Trend is enabled but Circular Settings is disabled then although the circular chart will appear it is unlikely that it will contain any trends 3 The circular chart speed is unaffected by A B switching of Trend Speed Interval ection 4 3 2 4 Circular trends backfill only to the previous power up HA029324 Page 37 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 4 4 Vertical bargraph display mode Entered from
294. ces If Scope Group in Configuration described above then the user can select which group s batch is to be used as the event source HA029324 Page 97 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 Maths CONFIGURATION This feature allows a range of mathematical functions to be performed Figure 4 3 11a shows a typical configuration page the selected maths function determines which configuration fields actually appear Select maths Maths Number 1 Fo1 Y channel number Value 32 65 Mins Current value Reset now a for resetatie nens Function fValue Y Select Required maths function Fvalue of Channel 1 Y gt Select Source input Sterilizing Temp 1211 Temperature interval 10 Low cut off 75 Units Mins Descriptor Fo 1 A B Switching Scale Low 0 Mins Scale high so Mins Zone low 0 Zone high 100 Scale Type None Y Select None Linear or Log PV Format Numeric V h Select Numeric Elapsed Time Max Decimal Digits 2 Scientific Time or Date Colour 26 Alarm Number 1 Y Select Alarm number tar gt Select Off Unlatched Enable Off M Latched orTrigger Job Number 1 Y W Select Job number Category No Action Y Select job category gory Apply Discard Figure 4 3 11a Maths configuration menu typical
295. cess variables and trend displays and stops the recorder clock see note When the job deactivates the process values are updated to their current values and the clock restarts from its frozen value No is drawn across the chart Clear Clears the trend displays from the screen Saver Display Sets the recorder display brightness to the value set up in Saver display in Instrument configuration section 4 3 1 Overrides the Save after value Job Number 1 Category Trend V Action Speed Interval BW amp Select required action Group 1 Group 1 Y Select Required Group or Point according to action While Active W 4 amp Select Active Inactive or Unacknowledged Figure 4 7 10 Trend job menu layout Note in order to ensure that no further data is written to the recorder s history files it is recom mended that recording be disabled by setting a second Recording job to be initiated by the same trigger as initiates the Freeze job This Recording job should be set to Enable while Inac tive Recording jobs are described in section 4 7 9 above HA029324 Page 222 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 7 11 Output category Applies only to recorders with Modbus master option fitted As described in when Mod bus Master is enabled a number of Output channels become available for configuration This feature allows any specifie
296. ch Number is selected as Use Counter then a new batch will automatically be started whenever the selected counter changes value increment decrement or preset The new value of the counter is used as the value associated with Field 1 For the other fields to have values printed on the chart these must have been entered as described above for Operator initiation then the Store button touched The On new clear setting is ignored the stored values being used each new batch Batch start messages are of the form DD MM YY HH MM SS Batch start Automatic Batch recording cannot be stopped by Counter action MODBUS INITIATION In order to initiate batch recording via MODBUS TCP a Batch Start flag has to be set value 0001 For Scope Group the flag for the specified group must be set For Scope Instrument any group s Batch Start flag may be used The address of the flag for group 1 is decimal 42364 the address for group N is 42364 629 N 1 For further details of the Modbus TCP option see fection 8 If Batch mode Start Stop batches can also be stopped via MODBUS The address for group 1 is 42365 the address for group N is 42364 629 N 1 Again the value must be set to 0001 Modbus start messages are of the form DD MM YY HH MM SS Batch start Modbus Stop messages are similar EVENT SOURCES As described in fection 4 3 4 Batch Start Batch Running and Batch Stop can be selected as event sour
297. characters max 16 Registers holding the group contents as follows Register 1 Bit 0 O Point 1 not in group 1 Point 1 is in group Bit 1 O Point 2 not in group 1 Point 2 is in group Bit 2 0 Point 3 not in group 1 Point 3 is in group Etc Bit 15 0 Point 16 not in group 1 Point 16 is in group Register 2 as register 1 but for points 17 to 32 Register 3 as register 1 but for points 33 to 48 Register 4 as register 1 but for points 49 to 64 Register 5 as register 1 but for points 65 to 80 Register 6 as register 1 but for points 81 to 96 Register 7 as register 1 but for points 97 to 112 Register 8 as register 1 but for points 113 to 128 Register 9 as register 1 but for points 129 to 144 Register 10 as register 1 but for points 145 to 160 Register 11 as register 1 but for points 161 to 176 Register 12 as register 1 but for points 177 to 192 Register 13 as register 1 but for points 193 to 208 Register 14 as register 1 but for points 209 to 224 Register 15 as register 1 but for points 225 to 240 Register 16 as register 1 but for points 241 to 256 Identifies the length of a text message to be read Time stamp of the text message to be read UTC format Read text string from instrument display Write a text string to instrument display Boolean Flag Value 0001 starts new batch Boolean Flag Value 0001 stops current batch Batch status flag 1 Running 0 Not running Batch field 1 text
298. chart division anti clockwise from the top of the chart and trace clockwise until they reach the top of the chart 12 o clock At this point the chart complete with time stamps and traces rotates one major chart division anticlockwise and the tracing process con tinues When the chart is full the oldest segment full of tracing is removed leaving an empty segment to be traced on when the chart rotates Figures 3 4 3b and 3 4 3c below show Circular trending in Rotate mode NEW CHART With New Chart selected tracing starts at top of the chart 12 o clock and continue to trace clockwise round the chart back up to the vertical When the chart is full it is cleared new timestamps are dis played and tracing restarts from the top of the chart The start time of the tracing can be set as a part Start at of group configuration the choices available depending on the time per revolution setting The start time is placed at top centre of the chart and backfilled clockwise round to the current time Figure 3 4 3a below shows New Chart mode Note The use of 12 o clock above is intended to be illustrative and only to explain angles in terms of a normal analogue clock face It does not mean that this position must actually be noon or midnight in real time Page 34 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 4 3 CIRCULAR TREND Cont 06 04 05 10 00 F
299. cope Group Section 1 2 No batch in progress New Close Notes 1 The option menu is context sensitive so its appearance may differ from the example shown 2 Batches can also be started and stopped from the Batch Summary page as described in Page 94 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 10 BATCH CONFIGURATION Cont OPERATOR INITIATION Cont Values can now be entered for these headings by entering strings of up to 60 characters including spaces This may be done done by touching the empty field and using the resulting pop up keyboard to type in the entry or by touching the field continuously for two seconds or more and then selecting one of the predefined Batch Entry messages previously entered in the konfiguration pagel In the latter case the predefined message may be edited in the normal way before being Applied Such editing has no effect on the original message Once the entries are complete operation of the Start button initiates batch recording Operation of the Store button saves the configuration for later initiation by job by counter or via MODBUS TCP The Values entry page is replaced by the batch status page figure 4 3 10c this time showing details of the batch in progress This page allows the batch to be stopped or a new one triggered Note Text may also be entered using a suitable keyboard connected vi
300. ct the source from which MKT is to be derived This may be an input channel scaled in Kelvins or it can be a maths channel used to convert a different temperature scale into Kelvins see Note on previous page Number of Samples Enter the number of samples over which the MKT is to be measured Sample interval Enter the time period in seconds between samples At each sample interval the maximum and minimum temperatures reached by the input source since the last sam ple are entered into the equation Heat of Activation The default value is an average value based on many common organic reactions Al lows the user to enter an alternative value if known EXAMPLE 1 To Produce a 4 weekly value of MKT taking samples every day Number of samples 28 Sample interval No of seconds in a day 24 x 60 x 60 86 400 EXAMPLE 2 To produce an annual value of MKT taking samples every week Number of sample 52 Sample interval No of seconds in a week 7 x 24 x 60 x 60 604 800 Notes 1 This function produces a rolling result I E when the final Nth sample has been taken the next sample N 1 th replaces Sample 1 the N 2th sample replaces Sample 2 and so on 2 During the first sample the current minimum and maximum values of temperature are entered into the equation at the recorder iteration rate i e 8Hz 3 The number of readings over which the value can be taken is limited by the amount of free RAM instantane
301. cters Closed Digital Input string up to eight characters Channel descriptor up to 20 characters Number of alarms on this channel 0 to 2 0 Numeric 1 Digital strings Alarm 1 enable 0 Off 1 Unlatched Alarm 1 type 0 Absolute low 2 Deviation in 4 Rate of change rise Trigger setpoint Note 2 2 Latched 3 Trigger 1 Absolute high 3 Deviation out 5 Rate of change fall Alarm 2 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 2 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 3 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 3 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 4 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 4 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Scaled Scaled Scaled Scaled Enum Uint16 Enum String_5 String_8 String_8 String_20 Uint16 Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Start Addr Hex Dec 0303 771 0304 772 0305 773 0306 774 0307 775 0308 776 0309 777 030A 778 030D 781 030F 783 0313 787 0317 791 031B 795 031F 799 0329 809 0333 819 0334 820 0335
302. ctive until the battery is replaced see Annex BJ for details Archive media full Triggered when the archive medium has reached the fullness defined in Ar chive configuration bection 4 3 5 Invalid Password Entry Transient event at the point of an invalid password entry attempt User Login Account Disabled Transient event at the point when an account is disabled because the number of password re tries has been exceeded ection 4 4 2 Available only if the Audi tor 21CFR11 option is fitted User Logged In This event becomes active whenever a user with the specified Event Permission logs in The event remains active until all local and remote users with the speci fied permission have logged out See also Access levels Event Button Allows the operation of an event button if Screen Builder option fitted to be used as an event source See kection 4 3 7 for Event Button details Master Comms Slave Failure If the Master Comms option is fitted this event source allows either a commu nications failure with a specifiable remote device or communications failure with Any connected remote device to be used as an event source See 4 3 14 for more details Email Failure Triggered if an attempt to send an e mail is unsuccessful Batch Stop The event is triggered fleetingly when a batch is stopped If Scope Group in Batch configuration ection 4 3 10 then a group can be specified If Scope Instrument the group select field
303. d This category is used only when Require Signing and Require Authorization is are enabled in the Security Management menu see section 4 4 for more details This list contains Configuration change messages only This category is used only when Audit Trail is enabled Mur Ps more details For each report this contains all the Report s fields set up in Reports configuration on separate lines Line Feed fields are ignored i e they do not appear PERIOD FILTER This picklist allows the user to select one of the following to define the period of time that the message list is to encompass All History Last Month 28 days Last Week Last 3 Days Last Day or Last Hour HA029324 Page 19 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 1 4 SUMMARY MENU Cont MESSAGE LOG Cont OPTION MENU Touching a message highlights yellow calls the Option Menu as shown in figure 3 1 4h below i 09 06 22 All Messages y All History v 05 04 06 09 06 18 Alarm s on 1 1 05 04 06 09 06 18 Operator s name Andrew 05 04 06 09 06 18 Customer FishesRus 05 04 06 09 06 18 Batch number 020205A12 05 04 06 09 06 18 Config Revision 682759 ee Option Menu 05 04 06 09 06 18 Batch start Engineer 05 04 06 08 50 30 Configuration revision 682 759 Batch 05 04 06 08 50 28 Batch Name files by batch true 05 04 06 08 50 28
304. d into basic and advanced 7 3 1 Basic parameters Notes 1 Not all components have all the following parameters associated with them The component defini tions in define each component s parameters 2 The generic term solid objects as used in this description includes rectangles lines arcs rounded rectangles ovals polygons and polylines Lines and arcs do not have a background colour as they cannot be filled 3 Default parameter units are in percentage of screen width height The picklist next to each dimen sion field allows pixels to be used instead Parameter Description Arc Angle For Arcs only the number of degrees of arc drawn anti clockwise counter clockwise from the Start Angle Negative angles draw clockwise See for definitions Arc Height For Rounded Rectangles only this is double the vertical distance from the corner of the un rounded rectangle at which the curve is to start To draw circular corners this value must be 3 2 times the Arc Width The Arc height value must be less than half the Rectangle height Percent units are relative to the rectangle height not the screen height Arc Width For Rounded Rectangles only this is double the horizontal distance from the corner of the un Background colour Button Text Channel Draw edge Draw Order Edit Parameter Event Button Feature Fill Area Foreground Colour rounded rectangle at which the curve is to start To draw
305. d recorder pointto be copied to a destination instrument s input channel if this is set to Input Type Slave comms An output job allows a specific output channel write to be disabled when the recorder is acting as a mod bus master Job Number 1 Y Category Output v Action Disable WriteW Output 1 Output 1 V Select required output _ On Active V amp Select Active Inactive or Acknowledgement Figure 4 7 11 Output Job menu layout 4 7 12 Demand Writes category Applies only to recorders with Modbus master option fitted Demand Writes jobs allow the user to set up the recorder so that when the job is triggered it initiates the selected Demand Write The write action is performed to the remote device as defined in Demand Write Configuration described in section 4 3 18 Job Number 1 Y Category Demand writes Y Action Write y Acyclic 1 Write 1 Y lt Select Required Write number On Active V 44 Select Active Inactive or Acknowledgement Figure 4 7 12 Demand write jobs menu layout Page 223 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 7 13 Alarm category This allows the user to set up a job to acknowledge or disable point alarms as follows Acknowledge All Alarms Acknowledges all alarms Acknowledge Alarms on Group Acknowledges all alarms in the specified group Acknowledge Alarms on Point Acknowledges all alarms as
306. deploy must be carried out within this period or password expiry will recur New Password Retype Password Apply Logout Centralised SecurityThis checkbox occurs only if the Security Management option is fitted If this checkbox is enabled none of the other parameters in the Management menu can be edited at the recorder i e they become Read Only Changes can be made only by means of Security Management software At the recorder the following menu items also become read only or do not appear as menu items or are not selectable even ifthe checkbox appears Access level permissions amp ection 4 1 1 Read Only Add User Remove User section 4 4 3 Do not appear as menu items Restore configuration Security data bection 4 2 2 Not selectable New configuration Security data section 4 2 3 Not selectable The Security Revision previously Security Version is initially set to 1 when Centralised Se curity is enabled It will remain at this value until a successful download has been performed via Security Manager Software The Security Revision will then take the downloaded value e g 139 Any local security revision changes e g max number of logins exceeded cause the value to have a local change count starting at001 appended to it e g 139 001 139 002 and so on The local change count is reset to 000 and no longer displayed when the next download occurs e g 140 D
307. described in Signing and Authorizing are as described in Management Figure 7 4 11 Typical Event Button 7 4 12 Image This allows a GIF Gif87a format only or JPG image file to be loaded from e g a Compact Flash card Once this has been done bargraphs text messages etc can be superimposed on the image Notes 1 Only user screens 1 to 6 may have images embedded in them and the size of each image may not exceed 250kB see also note 3 Does not apply to Bridge only screens 25 to 124 2 It is recommended that abs pxl be selected as width and height units before an image is loaded The use of any other units significantly increases the time taken for the loading process to complete 3 For user screens 1 to 6 the physical size of the image may not exceed 1024 pixels wide or 768 high Any attempt to load am image larger than this results in a User Screen Image Error message asking that the image size be reduced The size constraint does not apply to Bridge only screens 25 to 124 User Guide HA029324 Page 258 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 4 13 Text If width and height are left with the default values of zero the text will start at the specified start point and fit in the space between there and the right edge of the screen in a single line left justified ranged as a default If the text string is too long it is truncated The text appears in the specified foreg
308. described in section 3 1 4 Summary mend be used to ensure that it is safe to remove the memory device NR Eject button Compact Press twice Flash card Figure 2 4 Compact flash card details CAUTION Both the user and the peripheral e g USB device must be at the same electrical potential as the IS instrument housing before the peripheral is connected HA029324 Page 7 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 PROCESS VARIABLE DISPLAY The operator interface consists of a touch sensitive screen showing either process variable values in one of a number of formats or showing configuration or operational details for use in setting up the recorder This section 3 describes the process variable displays Bection 4describes the Configuration displays Figure 3 below depicts a typical trend display for a large frame unit and gives details of the various areas ofthe display page The small frame unit display is similar Notes 1 Dialogue boxes message boxes etc cause Process Variable displays to freeze for as long as the box is on display Root and Option menus amongst others time out i e are removed from the display after approximately one minute Messages however are displayed until the opera tor takes action to remove them It should be noted especially that several message boxes may be active at one time but only the oldest one is visible until it is removed to r
309. diting a brief description of the error can be viewed by operating the Show Errors key Out of Range Syntax Error this means that the channel or maths number is greater than the maximum given in the description above e g channel 101 There is an error in capitalisation or commas have been used instead of full stops periods or some other text error has been made Unsupported Data A suffix implying a data type which is not supported by this implementation of Ether Net IP has been appended Example Channel 4 alm If the Apply key is operated whilst there are uncorrected errors a message appears showing the number of first input in which a fault has been found The user must correct the fault and operate Apply again in order to save the configuration If there are further errors the message reappears showing in which input the next error lies Input two in the figure below EtherNet IP Invalid Item 2 Ok Figure 4 3 21b Error message Note The Show Errors key allows the user to view all current configuration errors at the same time In this display each valid parameter displays its associated Modbus address but any error channels display an error message instead Page 175 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 21 EtherNET IP OPTION Cont UHT FILE RULES 1 Table configuration files must have the extension uh
310. duration spikes for example are represented on the chart even at low trend speeds This allows the user to extend the total amount of history stored in the recorder by using slow trend speeds without losing transient data The adaptive recording method works by measuring the input signal at the normal 125 msec period and saving the maximum and minimum values continuously over the period of trend update When the trend is updated both maximum and minimum values are traced on the chart i e two traces are pro duced for each channel in the group The faceplates and pen positions are still updated every second as normal Notes 1 During the period between updates the maximum and minimum values are shown on the trend as a horizontal line just beneath the pen where the ends of the line represent the mini mum and maximum values so far This line is removed at trend update time 2 Adaptive recording takes twice as much memory as normal recording so to maintain the total amount of history stored the trend speed must be reduced to 50 of that which would be used for non adaptive recording 3 In Trend History mode both minimum and maximum values for the cursor position are shown on the faceplate See fection 3 4 for a description of trend history Figure 4 3 2b shows the difference between normal and adaptive recording at slow trend rates Note that rapid changes in signal such as those shown in the circled area of the ac
311. e PV Channel status 0 Good PV 1 Channel off 2 Over range 5 Ranging error 6 Overflow 7 Bad PV Uint16 See note Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Access See note Read only Start Addr Hex Dec F8D3 63699 F8D5 63701 F8D6 63702 Start Addr Hex Dec F8D7 63703 F8D9 63705 Register Length Register Length 3 Under range 8 No data 4 Hardware error Alarm information Bit 0 O Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Read only Bit 1 O No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Read Write Bit 3 Spare Bit4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Bit5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7 Spare Bit8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Bit9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11 Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15 Spare Channel 6 alarms F8DA 63706 Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Note PV access is Read Write for any point configured with Slave Comms as its Type or Function Ot
312. e Read Write Read Write Read Write Start Addr Hex Dec D4E7 54503 D4E9 54505 D4EB 54507 D4ED 54509 D4EF 54511 D4F1 54513 D4F3 54515 D4F5 54517 D4F7 54519 Start Addr Hex Dec D50B 54539 D50D 54541 D50F 54543 D511 54545 D513 54547 D515 54549 D517 54551 D519 54553 D51B 54555 Start Addr Hex Dec D52F 54575 D531 54577 D533 54579 D535 54581 D537 54583 D539 54585 D53B 54587 D53D 54589 D53F 54591 Register Length N NJ N N N N N N N Register Length NJ NJ N N N N N N N Register Length NJ NJ N N N N N N N Notes 1 For naths and see the relevant option description 2 If an alarm s Setpoint Source section 4 3 3 is set to anything other than Constant the value re turned will be the previously configured constant value User Guide Page 303 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 7 IEEE 32 BIT CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA Cont CHANNEL 4 Parameter name Ch4 span high Ch4 span low Ch4 Zone high Ch4 Zone low Ch4 Alarm 1 setpoint Ch4 Alarm 2 setpoint Ch4 Alarm 3 setpoint Ch4 Alarm 4 setpoint Spare CHANNEL 5 Parameter name Ch5 span high Ch5 span low Ch5 Zone high Ch5 Zone low Ch5 Alarm 1 setpoint Ch5 Alarm 2 setpoint Ch5 Alarm 3 setpoint Ch5 Alarm 4 setpoint Spare CHANNEL 6 Parameter name Ch6
313. e Value Value 234 67 Function Group Minimum v Function Group Minimum M Source 1 Furnace 1 Y Source 1 Furnace 1 v Units Units Descriptor type User defined descriptor v Descriptor type Minimum Channel Descriptor Y Descriptor Temp 1 lt Descriptor of channel with lowest current value Descriptor Furnace 1 min temp 7 User entered descriptor Figure 4 3 11u Group minimum configuration page User Defined Descriptor This allows a descriptor to be entered in the normal way For example Furnace 1 min temp This de scriptor is copied to the Maths Number field at the top of the display page Minimum Channel Descriptor This selection causes the descriptor of the point with the instantaneous current lowest value in the group to become the non editable maths channel descriptor For example if the four channels in the group Temp 1 to Temp 4 have the instantaneous values 800 950 790 and 873 respectively then the Descrip tor will be Temp 3 Should Temp 3 rise above 800 whilst all the others remain static then the Descrip tor would become Temp 1 The Maths Number field which normally copies the maths channel descriptor contains instead the text N Group N minimum where Group N is the default name of the source group Atypical application of the Minimum channel descriptor would be to include the descriptor in a mes sage sent to the chart on a pa basis by a Tim
314. e 243 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 2 3 THE PROPERTIES PAGE Cont OPTIONS PAGE ITEMS Edit level Allows Basic or Advanced edit level to be selected for further use Component info on screen Quick entry to edit Use Last properties Positioning Grid Positioning tip Enabling this box causes a component description to appear at the top left corner of each component This description is in the form Identifier X Y 9X 09Y where X and Y define the top left corner position in pixels and X and Y are the width and height of the com ponent in pixels The identifier is the component name as appears in the Identifier field of the Component Property Editor page If selected this function allows direct entry from the user screen being edited to the Com ponent Property editor page without the options menu first appearing offering the choice of Batch or Edit Screen If Quick entry is selected the option menu does not appear when the option key is touched The Batch status page can be called by touching the Page Name area at the top of the screen as an alternative to the option menu Quick entry has no effect on screens other than user screens If selected then all the common attributes e g position size colours etc of the most recently edited object are applied to the next component to be added Causes a grid to appear on the Goto canvas screen to help in component layout If
315. e Instrument correc tion values are obtained from a recorder calibration carried out by the user or by an agency the thermo couple correction values are obtained from the thermocouple test certificate Figure 4 3 11v shows a configuration page with an Inst Calibration table of three points and a T C cali bration table of four points Maths Number 1 Math 1 Y Value 100 00 Units Function Thermocouple Cal Correction y Thermocouple 1 Channel 1 Y Serial number AX 10023 Inst calibration points 3 Inst cal temp 1 20 Inst cal corr 1 0 2 Inst cal temp 2 200 Inst cal corr 2 0 2 Inst cal temp 3 400 Inst cal corr 3 0 18 T C calibration points a T C cal temp 1 0 T C cal corr 1 1 2 T C cal temp 2 100 T C cal corr 2 1 1 T C cal temp 3 200 T C cal corr 3 0 98 T C cal temp 4 300 T C cal corr 4 0 8 Units Units Descriptor Math 1 Apply 1 Discard Figure 4 3 11v Thermocouple Cal correction configuration page Thermocouple Select any real or virtual channel or Constant as the source channel Serial number Enter an identifier for the thermocouple Inst calibration points Enter the number of Instrument calibration points that are to be used 25 max Inst caltemp n The nth calibration point where n 1 to the Inst calibration points value Inst cal corr n The correction value for the nth calibration point T C calibration po
316. e alarm triggering the job also appears as shown Touching this area calls the batch status page Batch trigger source 11 07 06 12 14 31 Alarm s on 3 1 11 07 06 12 14 31 Supervisor Fred 11 07 06 12 14 31 Operator Name Marvin i 11 07 06 12 14 31 Customer name E Operator entries 11 07 06 12 14 31 Batch number 050822 001 11 07 06 12 14 31 Config Revision 48 Security Revision 1 11 07 06 12 14 31 Batch start Automatic w Batch start message Date and time automatically printed 12 11 06 11 07 06 A V lt gt Figure 4 3 10d Typical Batch start messages Page 96 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 10 BATCH INITIATION Cont NON OPERATOR INITIATION Batch start stop can be initiated by job by counter or via MODBUS TCP JOB INITIATION As described in a job can be set up to initiate a batch whenever the job source becomes active If Scope is set to Group a specific group can be selected default Group 1 and the job will act only on the batch associated with this group Batch Start jobs automatically start the batch using the entries made during the Btord function described above Display Batch Dialog jobs allow the user to enter the field values manually before the job starts COUNTER INITIATION If Bat
317. e error occurred in the recorder Illegal Sub Function An invalid sub function was received Gateway path unavailable Gateway misconfigured or overloaded Gateway target device failed to respond Device not present on the network Table 8 2 1b Exception codes 8 2 2 Data types The following data types are supported 1 2 s complement signed 16 bit analogue values with implied decimal point The decimal point position must be configured in both the recorder and the host computer 2 s complement 16 32 and 64 bit signed integers 16 bit unsigned integer values 32 bit IEEE Floating point values wm BW N Strings of limited size can be transferred across Modbus TCP in ASCII format using a single non multi plexed set of consecutive registers DATA ENCODING MODBUS uses what is called a Big endian representation for addresses and data items This means that when a numerical quantity larger than a single byte is transmitted the most significant byte is sent first For example a 32 bit hex value of 12345678 would be transmitted as 12 followed by 34 followed by 56 and finally 78 8 2 3 Invalid multiple register writes When a recorder receives a multi register write request it is possible that one or more requests will be reject ed Under such a circumstance the recorder will accept all valid write requests and ignore any invalid writes No error response is produced 8 2 4 Security The recorder has a loc
318. e for equipment on nominal 230V ac mains is 2500V Pollution degree 2 Normally only non conductive pollution occurs Occasionally however a temporary conductivity caused by condensation shall be expected HA029324 User Guide Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 317 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE A1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Recorder Standard features Bridge Lite Configuration Copy CSVArchive file format E mail File transfer protocol FTP 6 Groups Job search Log scales MODBUS TCP Master communications 16 slaves Messages Timers USB port Web server Options Software Audit trail 21CFR11Audit Batch Recording Bridge Full version EtherNet IP Server adapter Event Buttons supplied as a part ofthe Screen Builder option Master communications 32 slaves Maths Totalisers Counters Multiple groups six additional groups Screen Builder User screens Security Manager Simulation History Maintenance Environmental Performance Temperature limits Operation Oto 50 C Storage 20 to 60 C Humidity limits Operation 5 to 80 RH non condensing Storage 5 to 90 RH non condensing Altitude maximum lt 2000 metres Protection Bbezel display IP65 for a recorder mounted in a panel Sleeve IP20 Shock BS EN61010 Vibration 10 Hz to 150Hz 1g peak Physical Panel mounting DIN 43700 Bezel size Small frame Large frame Panel cutout Small frame Large frame
319. e force emf across the probe in mV T Probe temperature in Kelvins Figure 4 3 11r shows the configuration menu Figure 4 3 11s shows oxygen concentration versus probe emf for various temperatures Maths Number 1 Math1 Y Value 0 0000 Units Function Zirconia Probe v Probe temperature Channel 1 v Probe emf Channel 2 Y Reference Partial Pressure 20 95 Units Units Figure 4 3 11r Zirconia probe function configuration menu To obtain a useful result it is necessary to scale correctly The channel which is measuring the probe output would normally need to be set to Input Type mV Input low 0 input high 100 A typical temperature measuring channel might be set up as Input Type Thermocouple Lin type Type K Range low 273 Range high 1800 Range units K The maths channel scaling would typically be configured as Units Scale Low 0 Scale High 5 for boiler flues or 10 for kilns Page 118 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont ZIRCONIA PROBE Cont 100 NN SS A Percent Oxygen 0 01 B 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Probe EMF mV Figure 4 3 11s Probe emf versus temperature HA029324 Page 119 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER
320. e is entered here or if one already appears the New Password and Retype Password fields are not displayed and the user must use his or her network login password as allocated by the user s IT department or Network administrator Details ofthe Active Directory Server are entered in Network Address configuration section 4 5 1 Pass words can be edited as described in Change Password section 4 4 5 lf Centralised security is enabled in the Security Management menu ection 4 4 2 then the Domain name can be configured only using Security Manager software Note An IP address must not be used as the domain name because to do so will disable the user s ability to log in using Active Directory even if there is a valid account on the server NEW PASSWORD RETYPE PASSWORD These fields do not appear if Access when Logged Out or if the Domain Name is anything other than left blank These fields allow a new password to be entered for the selected access level or User The password must also be entered in the Re type Password field If the two differ a warning message Passwords did not match appears when the APPLY key is operated and password entry must be repeated If the pass word does not comply with the minimum length requirements in Security Management if fitted 4 4 2 a warning message Invalid Password appears when the Apply key is operated and password entry must be repeated
321. e operator physically changing the recorder time Note Changes from standard time to daylight saving time and back again are not green lined in this way 3 4 1 Vertical Trend display This display figure 3 419 shows each pointin the display group as though it were being traced on a white chart It is possible to change the appearance of the chart in the System key Customise area of configuration Gection 4 4 8 It is recommended that some thought be given to ensuring good contrast between trace colours and background colour One of the channels is said to be the current or scale channel This channel is identified by its diamond shaped pen icon and by its descriptor digital value and scale being displayed on a faceplate across the full width of the screen above the chart If a channel is included in the display group but its status is not good for some reason then its pen icon is hollow Faceplates for all the group channels can be displayed by using the Faceplates On Off key in the option menu If selected On faceplates showing colour descriptor digital value and units for all the group s channels appear either above the current channel s faceplate or if there are too many to fit across the screen at the right hand edge of the screen When necessary a slider bar appears to allow further hid den faceplates to be viewed Each channel in the display group becomes the current chann
322. e pressure inputto the steam equation The suggested scale low high values are based on the resulting pressure range in MPa i e 0 06895 to 0 6895 Maths Number 2 Steam Pressure Y Value D 0348 Units Function Multiply Y Multiply Channel 3 v by Constant Y Constant Value 0 006895 Units MPa Descriptor Steam Pressure Scale low 0 MPa Scale high 1 MPa Apply 7 Discard Figure 4 3 11i PSI to MPa conversion example HA029324 Page 111 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont SATURATED STEAM HEAT FLOW Note The overall accuracy of a flow measurement installation depends on a number of fac tors outside the control of the recorder manufacturer For this reason the recorder manu facturer takes no responsibility for the accuracy of the results obtained using the mass flow equations implemented in the maths pack The equations solved is Flow Vir AV 35 100 QE h Ah 5 where OE Heat energy flow in kJ sec at time t Note 1 Flow Measured flow in m sec Note 1 V Volume of liquid per kg of steam m kg at temperature T C AV VV o Where V is the volume of vapour per kg of steam at temperature T C d Dryness factor between 0 no vapour and 100 no liquid h Enthalpy of the liquid in kJ kg at temperature T C Ah h h where h is the enthalpy of vapour in k
323. e storage medium size and on the exact nature of the data Rapidly changing values use more space than static slowly changing values When archiving to Floppy disks via USB port this field remains empty until after the first archive has taken place MEDIA FULL EVENT LIMIT For Local setting only this allows the user to specify a percentage full value for the storage medium at which the event source Archive media full is triggered The event remains active until the storage medium is replaced or has data removed from it to make more room available ARCHIVE TO REMOTE For Remote setting only None Archive to host is initiated by the operator fection 4 1 2 Hourly Archive to host occurs on the hour every hour Daily Archive to host occurs at 00 00 hrs each day Weekly Archive to host occurs at 00 00 hrs every Monday Monthly Archive to host occurs at 00 00 hrs on the 1st of each month Automatic The recorder selects the slowest out of Hourly Daily Weekly or Monthly which is guaranteed not to lose data depends on the size of the Trend History Buffer Note Archive times are not adjusted for Daylight Saving hour changes Thus if the archive is set to daily weekly or monthly then during Summer Time the archive will occur an hour late i e at 01 00 hrs instead of midnight REMOTE PATH For Remote setting only this specifies the route to a folder or directory on the remote h
324. e v Loop Number 11 Process Value Medium Priorityy PV Format Numeric Y Span Low 0 Units Span High 100 Units Zone Low 0 Zone High 1100 Max Decimal Digits 4 Colour MM Units Units Descriptor Fum PV1 Configuration Data Low Priority v Alarm Number 1 Enable Triaaer el Apply Discard Figure 4 3 16k Master Channel 1 setup example HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 158 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 16 MASTER COMMS Cont MASTER CHANNEL 2 SETUP Master channel 2 setup to read the Channel 1 PV from Furn1 record into channel 2 is shown in figure 4 3 16l below Channel Number Value Input Type Slave Digital Parameter Point Type Point Number Process Value PV Format Span Low Span High Zone Low Zone High Max Decimal Digits Colour Units Descriptor Configuration Data Alarm Number Ena Figure 4 3 16l Master Channel 2 setup example 2 Fum Temp1 v 658 3654 Unadjusted Master Commsv 2 Furn1 Record Y Process Value Y Channel Medium Priority Y Numeric v 0 Units 1000 Units 0 96 100 96 4 ES Units Fum Temp 1 Low Priority v b Page 159 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 16 MASTER COMMS Cont MASTER OUTPUT 1 SETUP This show
325. e values forthe channel Touching either of these faceplates causes the current channel number to increment To select a particular channel to be the current channel the relevant pen icon can be touched In either case the bargraph and the background colour of the channel descriptor take the colour of the new cur rent channel Time and date are printed on the chart immediately to the right of grid lines and it is to these grid lines that the printed time and date relate Touching the trace for a few seconds or using the Option key then Enter History calls the trend history page See above for more details Page 32 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 4 2 HORIZONTAL TREND MODE Cont Below the chart is a message bar containing the latest message If there is more than one message an arrow head icon appears near the right hand end of the message bar If this arrow head appears then touching the message bar calls a pop up box figure 3 4 2b which displays the latest messages If there are more messages than can be displayed in the box a slider control appears which can be used to ac cess previous messages up to a total of 60 messages Further messages cause the oldest messages to be discarded to keep the total to 60 Note At power up only those messages which occurred within the time width of the page are displayed Channel 1 11 07 06 12
326. e whilst any one or more alarms is active The event is active as long as there is an unacknowledged alarm present The event is set if no communication has been made with Comms channels within the Comms channel timeout period set in Instrument configuration bec tion 4 3 1 The source is reset when the next communication occurs The event is triggered when a specified timer section 4 3 14 becomes active The event is triggered when a batch is started and remains active until the batch stops If Scope Group in Batch configuration section 4 3 10 then a group can be specified If Scope Instrument the group select field does not appear If the Batch option is not fitted Batch running does not appear in the picklist The event is triggered fleetingly when a batch is started If Scope Group in Batch configuration Gection 43 10 then a group can be specified If Scope Instrument the group select field does not appear Ifthe Batch option is not fitted Batch running does not appear in the picklist Allows another event to be specified as a source Triggered by the specified alarm on the specified point Triggered by the specified alarm on the specified point Remains active until the alarm is acknowledged ection 3 1 4 Triggered if any alarm in the specified group becomes active Continued Batch stop also available see below Page 82 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM
327. e written to the destination point Appears if Source Constant or for any other source if the On Error Write Default checkbox see below is enabled Allow Constant edits If this is enabled the user may change the default value before it is sent Applies only to user triggered writes See Demand Write Button below On Error Write Default Appears for all sources other than Constant If this function is enabled then the default value is written instead of the source value should the source be in an Error state When enabled the Default entry box appears if it was previously hidden Disable Retries If enabled this function causes the recorder to attempt the Write only once instead of retrying according to the number of retries set in the Master Comms Configuration Page Send On Power Up If enabled this causes the default value to be Written at Power Up DEMAND WRITE BUTTON When operated this pushbutton causes the Write to be initiated If the source is Constant and the Al low Constant Edits item is enabled an Edit page appears figure 4 3 18b allowing the user to change the constant value from its default value before the Write is carried out Otherwise the Write is carried out without any further action being required Status OK Constant 0 Write now SAS Close Figure 4 3 18b Constant Edit page HA029324 Page 164
328. ead Write Bit 15 Parameter name Description Access A3E8 41960 IEEE 32 BIT CONFIGURATION DATA The following table gives addresses for the specified 32 bit floating point values for Totaliser 1 Gener ally Parameter address for totaliser N Parameter address for totaliser 1 36 N 1 decimal TOTALISER 1 Start Addr Register Hex Dec Length D83 60803 D85 60805 D87 60807 Parameter name Description Access m N Span high Upper span value Display full scale Span low Lower span value display zero Zone high Zone upper value of chart width Zone low Zone lower value of chart width Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 see note Alarm 2 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 see note Alarm 3 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 see note Alarm 4 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 see note Spare Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write D89 60809 D8B 60811 D8D 60813 D8F 60815 D91 60817 D93 60819 TU H TT TU TU TU Th NNNNNNN TT TI TI TI TI TI TI TI N o Note If an alarm s Setpoint Source fection 4 3 3 is set to anything other than Constant the value returned will be the previously configured constant value Page 131 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 12 Cont TOTA
329. ecorder security functions BATCH CONTROL This field appears only ifthe Batch Option section 4 3 10 is fitted Allows the user to enter batch data and to start stop and create new batches If this access permission is set Enter Batch Data below is automatically enabled and cannot be disabled CAN SIGN This appears only if the Auditor 21CFR11 option is fitted If the field is enabled it allows the user to change the configuration of the recorder according to the other permissions set for the login providing the security management system Require Authorization is not enabled If itis changes can be made only if the correct password for a user with Can Authorize permission is entered See fection 4 4 2 for details CAN AUTHORIZE This appears only if the Auditor 21CFR11 option is fitted If the field is enabled it allows the user to change the configuration of the recorder according to the permissions set for the login See for details of the Auditor options PERFORM UPGRADES Upgrade appears in the system menu only for access levels in which this box is ticked contains further details Trial mode can be enabled disabled only by users with Perform Upgrades permission EVENT PERMISSION 1 Ifthis is enabled then this login will trigger an event source which remains active for as long as the login is active See Event Sources User Logged In for further details EVENT PERMISSION 2 TO 5 As for Event permissio
330. ectory folder to be created Paste Places a cut or copy file into the new destination Refresh Refreshes the display A key s legend is hidden if at any time its function is not applicable i e displayed in the colour selected for Disabled Text in the System key menu section 4 6 8 5 2 THE HIDE KEY The Hide key at the top right corner of the display screen is used to hide show Type Date and Bytes information allowing the full filename text string to appear HA029324 Page 226 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE Open Folder oop Root 5 FILE Cont SE er 13 35 29 11 07 06 im Remov 125804966 124715008 mediacard D Select volume 13 35 49 4 11 07 06 CIES mediacard Select folder 13 35 59 11 07 06 Enginee mediacard history EH 7 Select folder 13 36 09 8 11 07 06 mediacard history group1 mu ne 002088260000 Folder 08 07 9671 40 54 002088260000 Folder 01 94 06 09 26 32 Enginee Select folder 4 13 36 49 Enginee 11 07 06 mediacardihistoryigroup 101 EM E Hide Select file Group 1 20050 History 10 07 06 17 17 30 351401 Group 1 200
331. ed Channel colour 0 to 55 See Annex 5 for definitions Units string up to five characters Open Digital Input string up to eight characters Closed Digital Input string up to eight characters Channel descriptor up to 20 characters Number of alarms on this channel 0 to 2 0 Numeric 1 Digital strings Alarm 1 enable 0 Off 1 Unlatched Alarm 1 type 0 Absolute low 2 Deviation in 4 Rate of change rise Trigger setpoint Note 2 2 Latched 3 Trigger 1 Absolute high 3 Deviation out 5 Rate of change fall Alarm 2 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 2 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 3 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 3 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 4 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 4 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Scaled Scaled Scaled Scaled Enum Uint16 Enum String_5 String_8 String_8 String_20 Uint16 Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Start Addr Hex Dec 0771 1905 0772 1906 0773 1907 0774 1908 0775 1909 07
332. ed to The Cancel key is active only if Archiving Control is enabled in Security Access ection 4 4 for the current login Page 46 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 1 1 LOCAL ARCHIVE Cont BRING ARCHIVE UP TO DATE This causes the recorder to archive all history files created since the last manual or automatic section 14 3 5 archive ARCHIVE ALL This causes the recorder to archive all its history files If the memory device becomes full before archiving is complete archiving pauses and a pop up request appears asking for a replacement If this request is not responded to within 10 minutes of its appear ance archiving is aborted Unattended archiving can be paused by the user e g to change media without losing data by operating the Suspend Archiving Resume Archiving button Any archiving in progress is allowed to complete before the Suspend Archiving request takes effect Transfer activity is indicated in the Archive transfer window Below the selection buttons are a number of status windows relating to the selected memory device Media Full is an estimate based on the current configuration of when the memory device will become full The meanings of the Media Size and Free Space values are self evident If automatic archiving is active section 4 3 5 then automatic and manual archives will operate on a first come first
333. edge alarm 3 Read Write Bit 11 Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Read only Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Read Write Bit 15 Spare Parameter name Description Access A47E 42110 OS UT IO IEEE 32 BIT CONFIGURATION DATA The following table gives addresses for the specified 32 bit floating point values for Counter 1 Gener ally Parameter address for counter N Parameter address for counter 1 36 N 1 decimal COUNTER 1 Start Addr Register Hex Dec Length Read only F48B 62603 Read only F48D 62605 Read only F48F 62607 Read only F491 62609 Read Write F493 62611 Read Write F495 62613 Parameter name Description Access N Span high Upper span value Display full scale Span low Lower span value display zero Zone high Zone upper value of chart width Zone low Zone lower value of chart width Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 see note Alarm 2 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 see note Alarm 3 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 see note Alarm 4 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 see note Read Write F497 62615 NNNNNNDNy Read Write F499 62617 Spare F49B 62619 N e Note If an alarm s Setpoint Source section 4 3 3 is set to anything other than Constant the value returned will be
334. editable only if Specify an IP address is selected in the IP address lookup picklist above The subnet mask is the network address plus the bits in the host address reserved for sub network iden tification By convention all the network address bits are set to 1 The subnet mask is used to identify the subnet to which an IP address belongs by performing a bitwise AND on the mask and the IP address DEFAULT GATEWAY To deliver traffic from one subnet to another devices called routers or gateways are placed between segments The default gateway address informs each network device where to send data if the target station does not reside on the same subnet as the source SNTP SERVER ENABLE This tick box allows the recorder to act as an SNTP time server SNTP CLIENT ENABLE This tickbox allows time synchronisation from a Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP server to be ena bled and disabled When enabled the instrument time is updated every 15 minutes SNTP SERVER If Obtain from BootP server or Obtain from DHCP server is selected as the IP address look up see above then this address appears automatically Otherwise this area allows an IP address to be entered for the SNTP server Notes 1 SNTP is a protocol that allows clients on a TCP IP network to set their times to that of a server port number 123 The recorder can act both as a client and as a server when acting as a server the resolution is
335. egrees Celsius Figure 2 1b Mechanical installation details large frame unit HA029324 Page 4 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 2 2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION Note Before carrying out any wiring please read the Safety Notes and warnings preceding this chapter 2 2 1 Supply voltage wiring The 24V dc supply voltage wiring is terminated at a four way connector located on the underside of the unit as shown in figure or The supply wiring should be terminated as shown in figures 2 2 1a and 2 2 1b below WARNING Pins 1 and 2 are internally connected together as are pins 3 and 4 POWER REQUIREMENTS Voltage range 19 2 to 28 8 V dc 24V de 20 Permissible ripple 1 V max Maximum power requirements at 24 V Small frame 20 Watts Large frame 24 Watts Inrush current 10A Internal fusing Not user replaceable Rear of instrument Figure 2 2 1 a Supply voltage wiring view on underside of instrument Unit 1 Unit 2 Rear view Rear view Internal links not user accessible Disconnect device 24V OV 19 2 to 28 8V dc m power supply unit supply Daisy chain unit wiring Figure 2 2 1b Supply voltage connection example HA029324 Page 5 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 2 2 2 ElA485 connections This pair of adjacent RJ45 connectors are located on the underside ofthe in
336. el in turn for approximately 10 seconds i e the channels are cycled through starting with the lowest numbered channel Once the final chan nel in the group has been displayed for 10 seconds the lowest numbered channel is returned to and the sequence repeats This scrolling process can be enabled or disabled using the Channel Cycling On Off key in the Option menu To select a particular channel to be the current channel the relevant pen icon can be touched To cycle through the channels manually the faceplate area is touched repeatedly until the required channel is reached The Horizontal Trend display can be called using the down arrow key Alternatively any one ofthe ena bled display modes fection 43 4 can be selected using ihe Raai usni Goto View key me Kg B t h See Bection 4 3 10 for Batch Option atc details Key Not See Bection 3 5 for Operator Notes ote details Faceplates On Off Channel Cycling Off Enter History Figure 3 4 1a Option Menu Typical Page 30 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 4 1 VERTICAL TREND DISPLAY Cont Engineer 11 52 59 11 07 06 700 87 C 487 39 C 235 68 C 378 99 C 0 49V 0 85V 700 87 11 07 06 11 51 33 Alarms s 11 07 06 11 47 51 Alarms s 11 07 06 Faceplates On Off Channel Cycling Off Preparing History please w
337. el Failure messages appear Group average The instantaneous value of all the channels in the source group added together and divided by the number of channels in the group For example in a group of four chan nels whose instantaneous values are 4 8 2 and 6 the group average is 4 8 2 6 4 5 The relevant source group is selected by picklist Should a channel return a non valid value itis excluded from the calculation and the result of the function is the average of the remaining channels The lowest value of any of the channels in the source group For example in a group of four channels whose instantaneous values are 4 8 2 and 6 the group minimum is 2 The required source group is selected by picklist Should a channel return a non valid value it is excluded from the calculation and the result of the function is the minimum of the remaining channels Group maximum The highest value of any of the channels in the source group For example in a group of four channels whose instantaneous values are 4 8 2 and 6 the group maximum is 8 The required source group is selected by picklist Should a channel return a non valid value itis excluded from the calculation and the result of the function is the maximum of the remaining channels Note If a maths channel with a Group function is contained within its own source group then it will act on itself as well as on the other group contents thus changing the calculation For
338. elect required Archive function On Acknowledgement Y Select Active Inactive or Acknowledgement Figure 4 7 14 Archive jobs menu layout HA029324 Page 224 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 7 15 Email category Allows the user to send a specified e mailto the recipients set up in e mail configuration see bection 4 3 19 A system message is generated and displayed in all recording groups whenever an e mail is sent 4 7 16 Report category Category Report v Send Report to Group Y Select Group or printer if fitted If destination Group Group 3 Furnace 3 y lt select destination group Report 2 Current temps V Esoloct the report to be sent Select Active Inactive or On Active Vit Acknowledgement Figure 4 7 16 Report category job menu SEND REPORT TO Group is the only report destination GROUP Allows the destination group to be defined If a has been entered Furnace 3 in the figure above then this descriptor appears in the field REPORT This defines which ofthe reports is to be sent when the job is triggered If a Report descriptor has been entered then this appears in the field Current temps in the figure above Page 225 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 5 FILE 5 1 Figure 5 below gives an overview ofthe File Menus The area is entered by t
339. elected counter s value Preset group Loads all the counters in the specified group with their Preset values Disable group Stops all counters in the specified group Select Preset Disable Increment Decrement Preset group Disable Group Job Number 1 Category Counter v Action Preset Group YW Group 1 G 1 f P pened Select Active Inactive On AcknowledgementW 4 amp or Acknowledgement Select Required Group Figure 4 7 6 Counter job menu layout group action Page 219 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 7 7 Timer category The following jobs are available 1 Resettimer sets the timer to zero 2 Starttimer causes the timer to start 3 Disable timer stops the timer Job Number 17 Category Timer Y Action Reset y RSelect Reset Start or Disable Timer Timer 1y lt Select Required Timer On Active A solect Active Inactive or Acknowledgement Figure 4 7 7 Timer job menu layout 4 7 8 Batch category lf the Batch option section 4 3 10 is fitted a previously Stored batch can be started by job action or by a Batch Start command sent via MODBUS TCP If a batch is already running it will be restart ed In Batch configuration if Scope Group then a specific group can be selected for the batch job to act on if Scope Instrument the Group selection field does
340. elow Note The Remote user must have Allow web server permission enabled section 4 4 1 and must have sufficient network access to the product 12 04 06 14 53 09 E A Web Server Instrument Trends Message Logs History Eurotherm Home Page Recorder Downloads Document Library Search Figure C1 Home page As can be seen there are two sets of controls viz the internet links and the instrument access tabs C2 INTERNET LINKS These links Eurotherm Home Page Recorder Downloads Document Library Search take the user to various areas of the manufacturer s web site C3 ACCESS TABS Most of the information displayed in the pages described below is updated every 20 seconds The exception is the Trend page refresh rate which can be edited as shown in figure C3 2 by typing in the new value and then either clicking on Set or using the computer lt Enter gt key Because of the processing time required it is not recommended that a value of less than 5 seconds be entered C3 1 INSTRUMENT This opens the instrument page a typical example of which is shown in figure C3 1 below Home Trends Message Logs History About Instrument Status at 12 04 06 14 53 24 Instrument Alarms Global Channel Alarm Figure C3 1 Instrument display C3 1 1 Instrument alarms Either Healthy green background or a list of any active instrument alarm s red background C3 1 2 Global channel alarm Either Healthy gree
341. emand Write number to be configured Enable Allows the user to enable disable the write Demand Type Select Master Comms or Off Status Shows the status of the transaction The meaning of most status strings are self evi dent the remaining ones have the following definitions OK Transaction was carried out and a satisfactory response has been received Idle Appears only before the first Write following a power cycle or if the Write has not previously been configured Pending Appears if the Write is waiting to happen or a response is being waited for Can appear for example if the Write is queued Timeout Appears if the slave fails to respond within the timeout set in the Master Comms configuration page Transaction Disabled Appears for example if the Write has been disabled but a job is still try ing to trigger it Slave Allows the user to select the Slave to be written to from a picklist containing all the configured devices in the Master Comms configuration page Parameter Select parameter to be written to picklist varies according to slave type model Point type Loop Number Group Number Allows a point loop or group number to be entered for the selected parameter Descriptor Allows a descriptor to be entered for the Write Source Allows the source of the Write to be chosen from a picklist containing Constant plus all points in the recorder Default Allows a value to be entered for use as a default to b
342. enabled then hovering over the highlighted item in a goto Canvas screen caus es the coordinates of the top left corner of the component to appear in what ever units pixels etc are selected for the component The first number gives the X left right co ordinate the second gives the Y up down position Clicking the left mouse key within a component causes the coordinates of the top left corner of the component to appear in whatever units pixels etc are selected for the component Clicking the left mouse key outside a component shows the co ordinates of the mouse cursor tip To see these co ordinates within a component the mouse must be click dragged from outside the component User Guide Page 244 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 2 4 Screen creation example To produce a new display screen with channels one to four inclusive each displayed as an independent bar graph across the width of the screen with Group 1 vertical trend display below To achieve the above the fol lowing items will be required 1 Bart Horizontal bargraph with X 0 Y 0 Width 100 Height 10 channel Channel 1 2 Barm2 Horizontal bargraph with X 0 Y 1
343. er function Section 4 3 8 describes the entry of the messages and kection 4 3 14 describes the setting up of timers Continued Page 122 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont GROUP MINIMUM Cont A typical message entry would be Message Lowest temperature is 1 at chan 2 Replace 1 with Specified Value 1 source Group 1 minimum Replace 2 with Specified Descriptor 2 source Group 1 Minimum resulting in a message such as 12 07 06 14 22 06 Lowest temperature is 790 00 Units at chan Temp 3 where Units is the text entered in the Group Minimum maths channel configuration not that for the input channel although typically they would be the same Note The Group configuration checkboxes for maths channels with Minimum Channel Descrip tor selected are greyed thus preventing such channels from being used as inputs to their own source group See pection 4 3 2 for Group configuration details HA029324 Page 123 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont THERMOCOUPLE CAL CORRECTION This function allows two correction value tables each of up to 25 points to be entered For each point a correction value can be entered and the recorder will interpolate between points The output ofthis maths function is the sum ofthe source channel and the two correction values Th
344. ere eec dE tee eee ed B1 6 7 Input DOards v e sua re ovre ores URS te deg x ars eacus B1 6 8 Mainmenu B2 2 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE B2 2 1 Battery replacement procedure B3 OPTION ENABLING osa E RUE ERO d DEA ds B4 COLOUR SELECTION 2 ittm ER RECMPXd MUS aa use B5 TCP PORT NUMBERS r cata M DEA P EE B6 ASCII CHARACTERS FOR SERIAL COMMS B7 TIME ZONE INFORMATION oa RR n B8 HISTORY MAINTENANCEOPTION 22 RR Boal KEYCODE EXTRACTION no dira bora II CORR eR B8 2 ERASING HISTORY crr c e e B9 MENUSTRUCTURE usa ads ee ee Ee de Annex C WEB SERVER DETAILS CT INTRODUCTION 5 ima a EU E PEITQEee E I aei C2 INTERNET LINKS iioc decet una wasa acusa eb t ees C3 ACCESS TABS u reote tt eee o an der os p RR REA eg aaa C34 INSTRUMENT Z va asa ys ya oe una EO E Eae vended act E3 1 1 Instrument alarms vs s a e ee e Re eae wks C3 1 2 Global channelalarm C S EI poter 3 2 4 Horizontal trend iras ba 23 2 2 Verticaltrends uyu uu uuu smut oa C3 2 3 Numeric display err rer ttn me etant eodcm C3 3 MESSAGE LOGS said edt a US SERA RASA CR RUE HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 User Guide Page xi 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE This page is deliberately left blank User Guide HA029324 Page xii Issue 5 Oct 10 100
345. escriptors spans high and low and process values The table is identical in layout to that shown below the chart in figure C3 2 1 above To return to the Trend Mode selection page Click on the Trends link at top left C3 3 MESSAGE LOGS Figure C3 3 shows an imaginary message log with a number of alarm messages for a group called Furnace Temps 1 Select required group by clicking on required number Home Instrument Trends Message Logs Furnace Temps 1 All Messages 19 04 06 11 21 26 CO2 OK 19 04 06 11 21 26 SO2 OK 19 04 06 11 21 26 CO OK 19 04 06 11 21 26 Alarm s off1 1 19 04 06 11 21 26 Alarm s off2 1 19 04 06 11 11 13 CO2 over limit 19 04 06 11 11 13 SO2 over limit 19 04 06 11 11 13 CO over limit 19 04 06 11 11 13 Alarm s on1 1 19 04 06 11 11 13 Alarm s on2 1 Enter history time here Confirm time here Show me the last minutes of data Figure C3 3 Message log The required group is selected by clicking on the relevant number at the top of the page The length of time that the list covers can be edited from its default of 20 minutes by typing a new value in the box at bottom left of the page and confirming by clicking on the Set button at bottom right or using the lt Enter gt key on the pc If there are more messages than can be accommodated in the window height a scroll bar appear at the left edge of the window to allow hidden messages to be revealed HA029324 User G
346. eset Error Count key is used to reset the count to zero PROTOCOL ASCII input Modbus Slave Modbus Master can be selected Master or Slave selections must match the switch settings for the relevant port as shown in able 2 2 2b CONNECTION Only ElA485 available as transmission standard Three wire or Five wire working is selected by means of a switch accessed from the rear of the instrument as described in BAUD RATE Allows a Baud rate to be chosen from a picklist of 300 600 1200 4800 9600 19200 38400 This value must be the same for all devices in the serial link STOP BITS Selectable as 1 or 2 This value must be the same for all devices in the serial link PARITY Allows Parity to be chosen from a pick list of None Odd Even This value must be the same for all de vices in the serial link DATA BITS For ASCII input protocol only selectable as 7 or 8 This value must be the same for all devices in the se rial link TIMEOUT For ASCII input protocol this allows a timeout value to be entered of between 50 and 3000 msec inclu sive A value of 0 no timeout See also Messaging information below For Modbus Master protocol this allows a timeoutto be entered of between 100 and 9 999 msec inclu sive An error code B is generated if so configured see Enable Error Code B below If the master has not received a reply to a request within the timeout period For slaves configured with their own timeou
347. ess For PCs remote from a networked system which is not connected to the internet a system similar to that shown in figure 6 2 2 is needed HA029324 User Guide Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 231 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 6 3 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION Please refer to the CD box insert for details of software installation 6 4 RECORDER CONFIGURATION The recorder configuration is in three areas Network Options and Access 6 4 1 Network The Network key fields are fully described in fection 4 5 6 4 2 Options In order to make the Full option accessible it must first be correctly entered in the Options Menu If the Bridge level displayed does not match the currently value if displayed operation of the Autoconfig ure key will add the option to the database If all options are correctly entered the Currently fields and the Autoconfigure key do not appear Trial Mode Disabled Trial Time Remaining Fitted channels Virtual channels Maths Totalisers 12 Y Counters 7 V Groups 12V Batch Enabled Y Check that the Bridge Security Manager Disabled level is correct Auditor 21CFR11Y If not press Autoconfigure Full Y Screen Builder Bridge Level Full Yi 4arrently Lite Master Comms Devices 32 V Simulation Enabled Y currently cisabled Apply Discard Autoconfigure Figure 6 4
348. eter name Ch3 span high Ch3 span low Ch3 Zone high Ch3 Zone low Ch3 Alarm 1 setpoint Ch3 Alarm 2 setpoint Ch3 Alarm 3 setpoint Ch3 Alarm 4 setpoint Spare Description Upper span value Display full scale Lower span value display zero Zone upper value of chart width Zone lower value of chart width Trigger setpoint Note 2 for alarm 1 Note 2 Trigger setpoint Note 2 for alarm 2 Note 2 Trigger setpoint Note 2 for alarm 3 Note 2 Trigger setpoint Note 2 for alarm 4 Note 2 Description Upper span value display full scale Lower span value display zero Zone upper value of chart width Zone lower value of chart width Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 Note 2 Description Upper span value display full scale Lower span value display zero Zone upper value of chart width Zone lower value of chart width Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 Note 2 Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Access Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Writ
349. eveal the next oldest message and so on 2 Many of the screen components can be customised as to colour size etc as described in Hon 463 Customise TRUNCATION OF NUMERIC VALUES If the amount of space on the display page is insufficient to display the full width of the process variable or scale value then the displayed value is rounded down and the number of decimal places reduced If the width is still too restricted the value is displayed in scientific format or if this is still too wide the final visible character of the integer part of the value is replaced by a as depicted in figure 3 4 4b Page Name and batch status Change battery alarm Disk icon FTP activity indicator H H O if option fied Channel alarm n frag space Configuration locked indicator Instrument alarm Time and date Current access level or user name Cal pa Status bar Logged A x 0 q T 28 05 06 N Det Channel descriptor Channel value 73 98V Channel scale ooo 20 00 _ x k 40 00 60 00 rn i An Off channel s Z i Y 3s traces Alarm threshold marker A absolute high Pen icon An animated bar appears Current trace alarm over the date when the Icons recorder is busy Though normally pale Scale Current trace blue the bar is gold Diamond icon coloured when the recorder configuration is 2ejocios being
350. example if Group 1 were to contain channel 1 channel 2 and maths channel 1 where maths channel 1 had the function Group Maximum for Group 1 then the Group Maximum would be come a latching function showing the highest value ever reached by channel 1 channel 2 or maths channel 1 since the group was configured In order to trace the instantaneous highest value channel 1 and channel 2 would have to be contained in e g Group 1 and the group maxi mum channel contained in say Group 2 but with a source of Group 1 Modbus Comms Input Allows Modbus Communications to be selected for reading values from slave instru ments see fection 4 3 15 EtherNet IP Comms Input Allows EtherNet IP to be selected for reading values from a client instrument Stopwatch This causes the value of the maths channel to increment in milliseconds The value can be displayed in milliseconds PV format numeric or in HH MM SS PV format elapsed time The value can be held using a Disable job or set to zero either using a reset job or by the operation of the Reset now button in the maths configuration page See fection 4 7 for a description of jobs The function value is retained during power off Note The scale low and high values are displayed in numeric format for both numeric and elapsed time display formats HA029324 Page 99 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Con
351. example of how these changes would appear on the screen for an imaginary set up for channel 8 New T C type chan 8 is the note entered in the Signa ture page and Kiln8 temp is the channel descriptor 05 06 06 11 53 01 Configuration Revision 486 144 was 486 143 05 06 06 11 52 57 Kiln8 temp Alarm Number 1 Job Number 1 Speed interval B while Unacknowl edged was No action 05 06 06 11 52 57 Kiln8 temp Alarm Number 1 Threshold 530 0 C was 500 05 06 06 11 52 57 Kiln8 temp Alarm Number 1 Type Absolute Low was Absolute High 05 06 06 11 52 57 Kiln8 temp Cold Junction Type Internal was External 05 06 06 11 52 57 Kiln8 temp Scale High 1000 0 C was 900 0 05 06 06 11 52 57 Kiln8 temp Scale Low 450 0 C was 300 0 05 06 06 11 52 57 Kiln8 temp Lin Type Type K was Type J 05 06 06 11 52 57 Config Signed Engineer Authorized Engineer New T C type chan 8 Please see notes below Page 193 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 4 2 MANAGEMENT Cont CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS Cont Notes 1 The Configuration Revision and for changes in the Security menus the Security Revision are incremented every time the recorder configuration security configuration is changed The current values can be viewed in the System About menu ection 4 63 2 All configuration and security changes must be made either at the recorder operator interface or from a host pc using Bridge Full soft
352. ey Bijuoo OIX08L9 ueueA 1ueunjjsu jnoqy esiulojsn uoJees gor doo jeui9u13 sonsouBeiq suuuioS Je se A opejBdgn 9 e20 390 O 6 9 y uon ss jnoqv pyeosiq H Ajddy ynejoq A X ony jesjuoy JEE punoibyoeg AJolsiH _ 2g punoJBeJo4 uiolsiH gg punoi6yoeg pualL RS puno 6 o3 pussy I punosbyoeg seg eni JEE 1x 1 pagesia E 1x01 ov MA eL pox 4d uonoejes gg punos6yoeg Aju eyeg yg dopiseg 8g 9 uon ss 9sIUJO1sn MON U9eSS 9saJd uomnoy gor J si e1o AuoB 1eo gor A Suonoes v uonoeg yIOMION 19 y uonp s eg y 3 n31 995 yJeas qof Aunoes Biuoo e101seu e es PAtuo1v MON do5 Sep qof epnjou A ejep wieje apnjou A S euueyo 9 A O Z 9uueyo z ol Adoo duet soeuiny 1 woiy doo jauueyg ed S51nos 9 9 y uon2 s do Page 206 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 6 SYSTEM Cont Touching the System key calls the pick list Clock Locale Upgrade Input adjust Master Comms Diagnos tics if option fitted Ethernet diagnostics Copy Job search About Figures 4 6a and 4 6b above give an overview ofthe System Menus 4 6 1 Clock Selecting clock causes the recorder s date and time to be displayed To edit the date touch the current date area to call the keyboard and enter the new number
353. figuration page If Overwrite existing slaves is enabled existing slaves are overwritten starting with slave 1 in the list If Overwrite existing slaves is not enabled then new slaves selected from the Auto detect page will be inserted into the free slots in the slave list Note A free slot is either an empty slot or a slot containing a slave which has not yet been enabled Page 147 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 16 MASTER COMMS Cont SHARE SOCKET This advanced configuration feature is used to improve communications performance to take advantage ofthe higher speed of Ethernet links compared with Serial links It is recommended that the default value enabled or disabled according to type be left as despatched from the factory unless there is good reason to change it A socket is the name given to a logical connection between two Ethernet nodes The establishment and maintenance of sockets is controlled by the recorder and the user has no control other than to enable or disable the Share sockets facility The share socket feature is available only for slaves configured as Ethernet devices i e Network Ethernet The upper illustration in figure 4 3 16d shows master 1 communicating with slaves 1 to n via an Ethernet to Serial converter called a Modbus Gateway In such a case it is more efficient to allow all the slaves to communicate over one lin
354. ge should be to echo the request back to the host Transaction Transaction Protocol Protocol Always 00 Number of Recorder Modbus identifier identifier identifier identifier bytes fol Modbus function code code high byte low byte lowing address code hex Pigh byte lowbyte ASCII P ASCII On Hex Hex Figure 8 5 4 Function code 08 loopback test example HA029324 User Guide Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 315 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 5 5 Function code 16 Hex 10 REQUEST This is used to write values to multiple registers The bytes after the 7 byte prefix described in ection 8 5 above are Function code 10 1 byte Register Start address 2 bytes Word count Total number of registers to be written 1 to 100 decimal 1 to 64 hex 2 bytes Byte count B 2 x word count 1 byte Values to be written 2B bytes Thus to write Batch Number as batch field 1 for group 1 start address A57F the following message ex panded in figure 8 5 5a would be transmitted to the recorder 0000000000150110A57F00070E4261746368204E756D6265720000 identifier identifier identifier identifier bytes to fol Modbus function address address High byte Low byte low hex address code hex High byte Low byte ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII B Hex a Hex t Hex c Hex h Hex space Hex N Hex u Hex m Hex
355. gin disabled items do not appear Password functions do not appear for Logged out level of access Note If the Security management option is fitted and Centralised Security is enabled in the Security Management system bec tion 4 4 9 permissions are Read Only e not editable at the recorder In such a case permissions can be changed only by using the Security Management software These fields appear only if the relevant options are fitted y Enabled These fields appear only if the Auditor 21CFR11 option is enabled Action Demand Writes appears only if the Master Comms option is fitted IKIKIKI amp IKIKIXIXIXIKIXIKI amp I amp I amp IK XIKIKIKIXIK XIXIX lt lt J Apply Discard Figure 4 4 1 Access permissions menu HA029324 Page 186 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 4 1 ACCESS LEVELS Cont ACCESS WHEN Allows an access level or an individual user name to be selected from a pick list DOMAIN NAME For units fitted with Security Manager option only this allows a security domain name of up to 60 charac ters to be entered for the user selected in the Access when field If the default blank is not edited then the user can gain access using password setup in the New password field described below If a new domain nam
356. give an unambiguous indication e g a flashing alarm whenever the value is over range or under range 2 Where conductive pollution e g condensation carbon dust is likely adequate air conditioning fil tering sealing etc must be installed in the equipment enclosure 3 The equipment is designed for process monitoring and supervision in an indoor environment If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment might be impaired 4 The battery within the unit must not be short circuited When exhausted the battery must be dis posed of in accordance with local regulations for poly carbonmonofluoride lithium cells 5 When connecting a USB device it must be plugged directly into the instrument The use of exten sion USB leads may compromise the unit s ESD compliance 6 There are no specific insulation requirements for external circuitry 7 In order to comply with CE requirements the Protective conductor terminal must be connected to a protective conductor SYMBOLS USED ON THE EQUIPMENT LABELLING One or more of the symbols below may appear as a part of the unit s labelling Refer to the manual for instructions Ethernet connector Protective conductor USB connector terminal This instrument Serial communications for dc supply only connector Precautions against static electrical discharge should be taken when handling this unit CAUTION W
357. goes blank then press Start to start running the pro gram If a password entry is required ensure that the password required tick box is enabled tick visible Press Start then enter the password as entered in the Security Access Remote User Name Remote password field followed by carriage return to start running the program Clicking Start as Lite allows the user to select the View only version of Bridge This has the advantage of faster operation e Bridge Configuration Host name 149 121 130 232 User name Engineer Password required Startas Lite Channel Alarm Sound Police Siren FT Kal iil ES Figure 6 5a Profile uhv file Filename uhv Figure 6 5b Bridge icon approximation User Guide HA029324 Page 234 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 6 5 RUNNING THE PROGRAM Cont CHANNEL ALARM SOUND If the host PC is fitted with a sound card enabled bridge can cause sounds to be played on point alarm not system alarms The sound is selected on a connection by connection basis via the profile uhv file see fig ure 6 5a This allows each user to choose a sound including none suited to the local environment The sound runs for as long as any point alarm is active and unacknowledged Bridge software supplies a range of sounds as listed below In addition eight bit mono uLaw format AU sound files can be imported to lt install location gt
358. gory No Action Y Select Job category Apply Discard Totaliser Number 1 Totaliser 1 UA SIS Enable W Value 123456 Units totaliser Total of Channel 1 Y W Select channel etc to be totalised Low cut off o ch units Units of channel O being totalised High cut off 099999 chunits Units Units Preset o Units totaliser Preset now Period scaler 1 Unit scaler 1 Descriptor Totaliser 1 A B Switching Scale Low o Units totaliser Scale High 1 Units totaliser N p gt Select None Linear or Log if log Scale Type None Y scales option fitted Zone Low 1 Zone High 100 PV format Numeric Y Select Numeric or Scientific Max Decimal Digits 4 Colour EI Alarm Number 17 Select Alarm number Select Off p Unlatched Enable Off M Latched Job Number 1 y Select Job number Trigger Category No Action Y v Select Job category Apply Discard User Guide Page 340 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B9 MENU STRUCTURE Cont Archive Save Restore contig Security Network System Port Serial 1 Y Select port Figure Figure Fig B9j Figure Figure Link Error Count 0 B9b B9c B9k B9Um Reset Error Count Protocol ASCII input v Instrument Connection Figure Bod EE Baud Rate 19200Y Chan
359. h 0 1 mm _ Ethernet Serial comms Power jJ 137 5 mm 154 5 mm 170 5 mm ET ee Y a o PANEL MOUNTING DETAILS Installed panel angle Vertical panels only Minimum inter unit spacing 50 mm vertical or horizontal Note where multiple units are mounted in close proximity with one another steps must be taken to ensure that the resulting ambient temperature does not exceed the speci fied maximum operating temperature of 50 degrees Celsius Figure 2 1a Mechanical installation details small frame unit HA029324 Page 3 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 2 INSTALLATION Cont 9 6 mm 288 0 mm x se Sal s E E E E JE edt le e Fixing Clip E one each side A SZ lt gt Wi _ S J Protective conductor terminal M4 Serial Ethernet Comms Power a aa Ho 281 4 mm 298 4 mm 314 4 mm Panel cutout 282 mm x 282 mm both 0 1 3mm PANEL MOUNTING DETAILS Installed panel angle Vertical panels only Minimum inter unit spacing 50 mm vertical or horizontal Note where multiple units are mounted in close proximity with one another steps must be taken to ensure that the resulting ambient temperature does not exceed the speci fied maximum operating temperature of 50 d
360. h Blank 44 444 Figure 4 3 8 Message entry configuration page CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS Message Number Select the required message from the picklist Message Enter the message by using the pop up keyboards Replace n with A picklist allowing the user to select data to be embedded in the message Source Descriptor The descriptor of the source which triggers the job message Source Value The instantaneous value of the source at trigger time Source Alarm Data Details see table 4 3 8 of the source alarm at message trigger time Alarm Type Embedded details Absolute Enable Type high or low Threshold Status Deviation Enable Type in or out Reference Deviation Status Rate of change Enable Type rise or fall Amount Change time Status Table 4 3 8 Alarm details versus alarm type Note If any of Source Descriptor Source Value or Source Alarm Data are embedded in a mes sage which is triggered by a job which cannot be associated with a specific source e g event timer then the embedded value is Continued Page 86 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 8 MESSAGES Cont Replace n with Cont Specified Descriptor Specified Value Specified Alarm data Produces a further field n source described below Batch Status Causes the status Active or Inactive of the current batch to be em
361. h Style and cale style described in able 7 3 2 7 4 6 Channel Numeric For a specified channel allows the channel faceplate to be displayed in one of a number of formats as de scribed in Faceplate Style in able 7 3 2 above 7 4 7 Channel data For a specified channel allows one of Current value Descriptor Units Span low or Span high to be selected for display 7 4 8 Dialogue Action This displays a pushbutton which can have one of three actions assigned to it 1 Call the Login page 2 Call the Batch Status page 3 Call the Operator Note dialogue box For Batch and Operator Note use a Group number can be selected 7 4 9 Navigation Action This displays a pushbutton the purpose of which is to call a different display screen A Group and a screen can both be specified so this button provides a shortcut version of the Goto group and Goto View keys of the root menu HA029324 User Guide Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 257 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 4 10 Operator button This displays a user pushbutton The legend on the pushbutton and the task it is to carry out are defined in the button configuration If the text is too long for the width of the button the text is truncated e g Reset Ave Possible tasks are as follows assuming that the relevant options are fitted Edit the threshold setpoint setting for alarms 1 to 4 for point N Reset Maths channel N Edit Maths cons
362. h number to be entered from a picklist of 1 to 12 and Any Hour allows an hour number to be selected from a picklist of 1 to 23 Midnight and Any Minute allows a minutes number to be entered from a picklist of 0 to 59 and Any Seconds allows a seconds value to be entered from a picklist of 0 to 59 and Any Allows the user to enter a count down time period in seconds Allows the user to enter a repeat rate It should be noted that the repeat value in cludes the duration time For example to time down from 50 seconds every minute a Duration value of 50 seconds should be entered with a Repeat after value of 60 seconds not 10 seconds Note If Month Any and Day 31 then the timer will not be triggered in February April June September or November Similarly if Day 30 the timer will not be triggered in Feb ruary and so on Job configuration is as described in SELF START EXAMPLE To preset Totaliser number 1 to zero daily at midnight In totaliser configuration enter 0 as the Preset value for Totaliser 1 In timer configuration select 1 Timer number Timer 1 2 Enable Enabled 3 Self start Enabled 4 Date Any 5 Month Any 6 Hour Midnight 7 Minute 0 8 Second 0 9 Duration 0 125 10 Repeat after 0 11 Job number 1 12 Job category Totaliser 13 Action Preset 14 Totaliser Totaliser 1 15 On Active HA029324 Page 138 Issue 5 Oct 1
363. h the From Node address Modbus Address The lowest Modbus address for the search The search will seek all slaves whose Modbus Address lies between the value entered here and the value entered in the To field below inclusive To The highest Modbus address to be included in the search Abort This key allows the user to quit the search Start Once the search information has been entered operation of the Start key causes the unit to search for any instruments which respond to the search criteria Discard Returns to the Modbus configuration page without saving Apply Saves the details of the detected slaves to the Modbus configuration page The changes to the configuration page are temporary Re scan Allows the user to repeat the scan with the same or edited search criteria HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 146 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 16 MASTER COMMS Cont AUTO DETECT PAGE The Autodetect page displays the progress ofthe search Once the search is complete the results are displayed as shown in figure 4 3 16c below For example the top two lines show that devices with Mod bus addresses 1 and 2 were detected at IP address 149 121 130 211 For instrument types similar to those described in this manual the Instrument Descriptor is displayed in the list For other instruments if the type is recognised then the instrument type ID e g model number appears As can be seen from the
364. hange atinotation inerte terae 30 Square root maths function PORCH EE CIA 100 O EE SS 207 S Elek 322 Marker Start ColOUuf rtr eer ees 254 ANGIE sve Vries 254 altea anun a Rana na ER EDS Permission to set 188 New Table SEEING spa dira 207 Start End characters Synch instrument alarm a 11 Start Stop batch selectien 92 Synchronisation tall inca iaa 11 Timer Synchronisation ONT 202 lee geseet 220 To fill storage device un 79 Permission 188 Zone Status EISE NO 333 TT 9 Selection san 207 COM MS ii 164 Timeout Ethernet EA HERR 174 COMMS rana aaa 141 Stop Dicc 141 TS 57 SE EE 99 Home display sss 74 Eege mE 97 Modbus slave 145 Diagnostic aset ar UR edad 144 Timer Style ttti 172 Configuration maracas 137 Subo EE 168 Menu sas 340 else iii 202 Copy AR EE DIOS UE E SUM IM QD aaa IAS 211 SIII len 99 Disable job 220 Summary Majo 220 Men ie od rh qeatiumoie nme en RR EUR 13 Start Reset Page leet 220 AM u yy Su taa iia 14 Permission sss 188 Batch 16 Timer Active Event Source en 82 Summiertime setup eniin iaiia 207 Timestamp Supply voltage Circular charts E 37 Requ iFemehts incon savas oen een wayqapi 5 Maths FUN rro 101 Wind aia 5 loge M 176 Support tile eode tbe dere br ees 216 Totaliser Suspend EE 47 Configuration A RONDE 100 EE SE Symbols used on Jabel 1 Modbus data Mi M LE C EE 130 Synchronisation by SNTP au aqasha ua
365. hannel 81 pv Channel 81 process va Read only FCCE 64718 Channel 82 pv Channel 82 process va Read only FCD1 64721 Channel 83 pv Channel 63 process va Read only FCD4 64724 Channel 84 pv Channel 64 process va Read only FCD7 64727 Channel 85 pv Channel 65 process va Read only FCDA 64730 Channel 86 pv Channel 66 process va Read only FCDD 64733 Channel 87 pv Channel 67 process va Read only FCEO 64736 Channel 88 pv Channel 68 process va Read only FCE3 64739 Channel 89 pv Channel 69 process va Read only FCE6 64742 Channel 90 pv Channel 70 process va Read only FCE9 64745 Channel 91 pv Channel 71 process value Read only FCEC 64748 Channel 92 pv Channel 72 process value Read only FCEF 64751 Channel 93 pv Channel 73 process value Read only FCF2 64754 Channel 94 pv Channel 74 process value Read only FCF5 64757 Channel 95 pv Channel 75 process value Read only FCF8 64760 Channel 96 pv Channel 76 process value Read only FCFB 64763 Channel 97 pv Channel 77 process value Read only FCFE 64766 Channel 98 pv Channel 78 process va Read only FDO1 64769 Channel 99 pv Channel 79 process va Read only FD04 64772 Channel 100 pv Channel 80 process va Read only FDO7 64775 So Se Table 4 3 21 Parameter addresses for channels 76 to 100 CONFIGURING A PLC The following instructions describe how to configure a PLC to communicate with a Paperless graphic recorder Although a specific PLC was used in generating
366. hannel alarm settings will be set as Enable Off Type Absolute high Threshold 0 0 Dwell 0 0 3 Ifa destination channel was an analogue input AND the source channel is a digital input AND in clude alarm data is not selected the destination channel alarm settings will be set as Enable Off Type Digital Threshold Closed Dwell 0 0 4 Descriptors and Colours are never copied Page 211 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 6 7 Job search With multiple job sources it can sometimes be difficult to discover what the trigger for a particular job is particularly if the recorder has been configured by more than one operator The Job Search facility al lows the user to define a job type and the recorder then produces a list of relevant triggers Figure 4 6 7 shows a typical search page which will produce a list of all triggers for Preset Totaliser jobs Section Job Category Job Action Search Now SEARCH RESULTS Section All Sections Y Job Category Totaliser Y Job Action Preset v Search Now Figure 4 6 7a Job search Allows the user to select a point type for the search For example selecting Maths causes the search to be restricted to Maths channels All Sections causes all enabled point types to be included in the search Allows a job category e g Totaliser to be selected for the search This depends
367. hannels Totalisers and Counters The total number of virtual channels is as specified at time of order The user can select whatever combination of maths channels totalisers and counters is required so long as the total does not exceed the number of virtual channels available If it does a warning is given when the Apply button is operated and the edit is ignored Note If more than 100 maths channels are configured then the Modbus register addresses of totalisers and counters are affected If for example there were 105 maths channels then the value of totaliser 1 would be found at the address normally associated with totaliser 6 and the value of counter 1 would be found at the address normally associated with counter 6 SIMULATION OPTION This option consists of a number of additional jobs described below The Simulation option is not ena bled in Trial Mode TREND FREEZE When this Trend category job ection 4 7 10 is initiated the displays are held at their values at the time of initiation When the recorder is unfrozen the displays switch to their current values and the clock will re start from where it stopped No blue line is drawn across the trace to indicate time discontinuity Time change records Note If SNTP client enable is enabled Network Address area fection 4 5 then the recorder time is synchronised at power up only I E the normal checks of recorder time compared with server time
368. hannels are prefixed by D Totalisers are prefixed by T and Counters are prefixed by C Input channels are not prefixed 2 Alarm threshold for absolute alarms only The current process value for the point An alarm symbol bee Table 3 Alarm symbols flash until acknowledged a w Notes 1 Alarms are always listed in Point Alarm order with input channels first followed by derived channels totalisers and counters if these options are fitted 2 When the alarm source returns to its non alarm state Unlatched alarms are removed from the list whether or not they have been acknowledged latched alarms remain displayed until acknowledged Ses bection di tor a description of alarm types and actions 3 There are no time or history components associated with the Alarm Summary If Alarm mes sages have been enabled in the relevant group s configuration then alarm initia tion acknowledgement times and dates can be found from the trend and trend history displays described in SSES or in Message log described 4 Ifan alarm is active on a channel which is not included in any group then although the channel alarm symbol will flash the alarm will not appear in any of the alarm summary pages b Touch Alarm area f e g channel alarm symbol Instrument Alarm Summary Ack all Alarms A Group 2 Group 1 Remove Media Group 6 Batch Summary r r r 4 Alarm Summary Group 5 Water temp 1b 30
369. he component being configured The number of colours entered must match the number of alarms or threshold values as appropriate Overrides any entry in Background Colour Colours are entered by touching each required selection in turn The semicolon separators are entered auto matically in front of each selection apart from the first Colour channel All channels Allows a channel to be defined to be used in percentile or quartile fill ing or as a source of channel thresholds or channel alarms as selected in Colour style below Table 7 3 2 Advanced edit level parameters sheet 1 of 6 User Guide HA029324 Page 250 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 3 2 ADVANCED PARAMETERS Cont Parameter Pick list content Description Colour foregrounds None Used only if Colour style Channel Alarms or Channel thresholds A semicolon separated list of foreground colours for the component being configured The number of colours entered must match the number of alarms or threshold values as appropriate Overrides any entry in Foreground Colour Colours are entered by touching each required selection in turn The semicolon separators are entered auto matically in front of each selection apart from the first Colour style Channel thresholds Channel Alarms Background quartile Foreground quartile Background decimal Foreground decimal Allow
370. he device is detected this name changes to the detected Instrument s Descriptor if any or a default tag The slave name can be edited in the Descriptor entry field below HA029324 Page 144 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 16 MASTER COMMS Cont CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS Cont Enable Online Descriptor Network IP Address Modbus Address Profile Timeout Retry Max Block size Share Socket Login Required Username Password If this window is not selected none of the following fields appears and the Remote Device cannot be accessed Ifenabled normal communications with the slave are carried out When disabled the connection with the slave is terminated Allows a new name for the slave device to be entered This name is used only within the master it does not overwrite the Instrument Descriptor in the slave itself Select Ethernet or a Serial port All the slaves on the link must have the same com munications parameter values e g Baud Rate as are set for the master See 3 15 for Serial Communications Configuration details Note Serial ports appear in the selection list only if Protocol has been set to Modbus Master in the Serial Comms Configuration section 4 3 15 The relevant port must also be set to Master at the switch described in section 2 2 2 This field appears only if Network Ethernet This must match the IP address or
371. he dryness of the steam 0 no vapour 100 no liquid Notes 1 The units of kg sec and m sec are used above for simplicity In fact any time unit can be used For example if the measured flow is in m hour then the Mass flow will be in kg hour 2 ASME Steam tables 1999 from IAPWEF 1F97 3 See Saturated Steam Mass Flow above for details of pressure unit conversion Page 112 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont SATURATED STEAM HEAT CONSUMED Note The following assumptions are made with regard to this implementation 1 The condensate return is 100 wet saturated water No flash steam component is included 2 The same mass leaves the system as enters it Note The overall accuracy of a flow measurement installation depends on a number of factors outside the control ofthe recorder manufacturer Forthis reason the recorder manufacturer takes no responsibility for the accuracy ofthe results obtained using the mass flow equations imple mented in the maths pack The equations solved is Flow QE Sech Ah 4 hua where OE Heat energy consumed in kJ sec at time t Note 1 Flow Measured flow in m sec Note 1 Vin Volume of liquid per kg of steam m kg at temperature T1 C AV Vyn Vin where V is the volume of vapour per kg of steam at temperature T1 C d Dryness factor between 0 no vapour and 100 no
372. he period filter to Last Day excludes all messages except alarm messages which have occurred within the previous 24 hours For clarity the figure shows both filters open In fact only one can be open at a time Touch Alarm area x e g channel alarm symbol Instrument Alarm Summary Ack all Alarms Alarm Summary Batch Summary Remove Media 09 06 22 05 04 06 Engineer All Messages y Al History y 05 04 06 09 06 18 Alarm s on 1 1 Alarms Last Day 7 05 04 06 09 06 18 Operator s name Ar 05 04 06 09 06 18 Customer FishesR 9 UP rasha Days 05 04 06 09 06 18 Batch number 0202 General Last Week 05 04 06 09 06 18 Config Revision 682 Batches Last Month 05 04 06 09 06 18 Batch start Engineg i 05 04 06 08 50 30 Configuration revisid 9 05 04 06 08 50 28 Batch Name files by Signings alse 05 04 06 08 50 28 Batch On start log 3 Audit Trail 05 04 06 08 50 28 Batch Field 3 Opera latch field 3 05 04 06 08 50 28 Batch Field 2 Custg ePor s ld 2 05 04 06 08 50 28 Batch Field 1 Batch h field 1 05 04 06 08 50 28 Batch Batch fields 3 was 1 05 04 06 08 50 50 Config Signed Engineer Authorized Engineer New batch fields 04 04 06 16 42 11 Alarm s off 2 1 04 04 06 16 32 50 Alarm s off 1 1 04 04 06 16 31 05 Batch stop Engineer 04 04 06 16 31 05 Stop Batch Signed Engineer Authori
373. he trigger source has returned to a non active state Alarm messages are printed if enabled in group configuration Continuous jobs remain active only whilst the alarm trigger source is active LE the job finishes when the alarm clears whether acknowledged or not When triggered all associated jobs are initiated and continuous jobs remain active until the alarm clears There is no alarm indication and no messages are printed This field appears only when the alarm Enable is not selected Off Each alarm can be defined as absolute high absolute low deviation in deviation out rate of change rise or rate of change fall Absolute High Absolute Low Deviation in Deviation out Rate of change As shown in figure 4 3 3d an absolute high alarm becomes active when the channel value exceeds the threshold value The alarm remains active until the channel value falls below Threshold minus hysteresis If a dwell value is defined the alarm does not become effective until this dwell time has been exceeded As shown in figure 4 3 3d an absolute low alarm becomes active when the channel value falls below the threshold value The alarm remains active until the channel value exceeds Threshold hysteresis If a dwell value is defined the alarm does not be come effective until this dwell time has been exceeded As shown in figure 4 3 3e a deviation in alarm becomes active whenever the channel value enters the band Reference Deviation It re
374. hen if the displayed file name is suitable operation of the Save Restore Import or Export key will initiate the action If instead a file name has to be entered this is carried out as follows Touching the filename window causes a pop up menu to appear giving a list of Volumes in the Flash memory or on the memory device if inserted Figure 4 2b shows an imaginary Volume contents list displayed by touching the name user then operating the down arrow or open folder key See E below for more details Once the correct folder is open either select an existing file or enter a new filename by touching the FileName window and entering the name using the pop up keyboard s as de scribed in Bection 3 3 1 above Operation of the Save Restore key initiates the action user KS Hide calN Folder 03 07 06 12 35 08 configN Folder 01 07 06 10 27 13 Filterta Config 05 06 06 10 22 23 4445 lib Folder 05 06 0610 23 14 sdb Folder 11 05 06 14 01 08 user Folder 06 07 06 15 41 30 FileName Filter1b s e encol Figure 4 2b Typical volume contents page HA029324 Page 49 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 2 1 Save Touching this item allows the current configuration to be saved in the recorder s memory Files saved in this way are notin a readable format
375. hen accessing the battery or setting DIP switches etc the operator must be at the same electri A cal potential as the casing ofthe instrument ISS When fitting USB devices both the operator and the device must be at the same electrical poten tial as the casing of the instrument HA029324 Page 1 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 1 INTRODUCTION This document describes the installation operation and configuration of a distributed graphic recorder The recorder comes in two versions which differ only in their physical size and connector layout i e the operation and configuration procedures are the same for both The unit is supplied with RJ45 connectors for Ethernet and Serial communications links These allow the recorder to read from and write to remote IO devices and to connect to a remote host PC The stand ard recorder comes equipped for FTP transfer and is also fitted with Bridge Remote viewing software For data archiving both a Compact Flash card driver and a USB port are fitted to allow local archiving whilst the FTP function allows for remote archiving The USB port also supports peripherals such as a floppy disk computer mouse keyboard bar code reader etc 1 1 UNPACKING THE RECORDER The recorder is despatched in a special pack designed to give adequate protection during transit Should the outer box show signs of damage it should be opened immediately and the reco
376. herwise PV access is Read only HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 User Guide Page 309 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 8 IEEE AREA CHANNEL RUN TIME DATA Cont CHANNEL 7 Parameter name Channel 7 value Channel 7 status Channel 7 Alarms CHANNEL 8 Parameter name Channel 8 value Channel 8 status Description Current process value PV Channel status 0 Good PV 1 Channel off 2 Over range 3 Under range 4 Hardware error Alarm information Bit 0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Bit 1 O No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3 Spare Bit 4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Bit5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7 Spare Bit 8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Bit9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11 Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15 Spare 5 Ranging error 6 Overflow 7 Bad PV 8 No data Description Current process value PV Channel status 0 Good PV 1 Channel off 2 Over range 5 Ranging error 6 Overflow 7 Bad PV Uint16 See note Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write
377. herwise PV access is Read only User Guide Page 290 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 3 CHANNEL RUN TIME DATA Cont CHANNEL 7 Parameter name Ch7 value Ch7 status Ch7 Alarms CHANNEL 8 Parameter name Ch8 value Ch8 status Description Current process value PV Channel status 0 Good PV 1 Channel off 2 Over range 3 Under range 4 Hardware error Alarm information Bit 0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Bit 1 0 No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3 Spare Bit 4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Bit5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7 Spare Bit 8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Bit9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11 Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15 Spare 5 Ranging error 6 Overflow 7 Bad PV 8 No data Description Current process value PV Channel status 0 Good PV 1 Channel off 2 Over range 5 Ranging error 6 Overflow 7 Bad PV Uint16 Scaled Enum See note Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read o
378. hows the configuration menus for the various combinations The 21CFR11 option allows the recorder to be set up so that all changes to configuration with the ex ceptions listed below are added to the history files and also allows certain constraints to be placed on the recorder passwords Once these items of configuration are set up they apply to all groups Figure 4 4 2a below shows the configuration menu Record Logins This field appearsonly if Login Login mesi Minutes timeout is non zero 3 gt with unapplied changes Ignore timeout Y Password Attempts 3times Y Passwords Expire Days Minimum Password Length EN Require Signing This field appears only if E a A Require Signing is enabled Require Authorization Enable Audit Trail Password Change on Expiry Centralised Security Login By User List a IE ISIS S s This item appears only if the Securiy Management option is fitted If enabled all other security fields can be edited only via Security Management software This item appears only if one or more of Security Management Audit trail or 21CFR11 options is SERY fitted een Discard 21CFR11 Security Manager Record Logins v Enable Audit Trail W This item appears only if the Centralised Security Centralised Security 4 Security Management option g IR is fitted Login By user L
379. ifthe Active Directory server is unavailable the next time the user attempts to log in then if the password is in the cache the login will proceed without further authen tication CLEAR PASSWORD CACHE If necessary the password cache can be cleared by using the Clear Password Cache button confirmation required The cache is also cleared whenever a new user is added to the user list section 4 4 3 or ifthe login for an existing user is removed section 4 4 4 4 4 7 Active Directory server setup For users with Security Manager option only It is assumed that the person responsible for operating the Active Directory server is familiar with the ba sics of setting up a suitable server The details given below explain the file structure necessary in order that the Security Manager software may communicate with the server Briefly a User must be a member of a Group which must be part of an Organizational unit figure 4 4 7a Organizational Unit User 2 1 User r 1 User 2 2 User r 2 L User 2 n L User r n Figure 4 4 7a Structure overview HA029324 Page 198 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 4 7 ACTIVE DIRECTORY SERVER SETUP Cont 1 Inthe Domain Controller Active Directory area of the Manage your Server screen click on Man age users and computers in Active Directory Domain Controller Active Directory Domain controllers use Act
380. ify the file If name files by batch is not selected the Batch name is not included and the file will appear as Group Name YYYYMMDD HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH The HHH HHH code contains the following information HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH s uar toos MEE MEN Lowest 3 bytes of the Sequential number May skip one if there instrument MAC address is a configuration change History file format Group number version identifier Group 1 00 Group 2 01 etc OPERATORINITIATION This section describes how the operator initiates a new batch Batches can be initiated from any of the trend bargraph or numeric display modes but the start stop and other messages appear only on the Vertical Trend screen in the trend history display and in Message Log Batch information and status are retained whilst power is off To initiate a batch either Batch 1 Operate the Option key then press Batch in the Option Menu which appears or Note 2 Touch the coloured message area at the top of the screen The batch Status page appears in this example with no batch run Faceplates On Off ning 3 Press New A new display page appears figure 4 3 10b show Chante cyang gu ing all the headings entered in Field 1 to Field 6 during con Enter History figuration If the Batch Fields entry is less than 6 then only the selected number appear in our example 4 Group data appears only if Group 44 S
381. igh 3 Deviation out 5 Rate of change fall Alarm 2 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 2 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 3 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 3 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 4 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 4 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Scaled Scaled Scaled Scaled Enum Uint16 Enum String_5 String_8 String_8 String_20 Uint16 Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Start Addr Hex Dec 062D 1581 062E 1582 062F 1583 0630 1584 0631 1585 0632 1586 0633 1587 0634 1588 0637 1591 0639 1593 063D 1597 0641 1601 0645 1605 0649 1609 0653 1619 065D 1629 065E 1630 065F 1631 069B 1691 069C 1692 069D 1693 069E 1694 06A8 1704 06A9 1705 OGAA 1706 O6AB 1707 06B5 1717 06B6 1718 06B7 1719 06B8 1720 06C2 1730 06C3 1731 06C4 1732 06C5 1733 Register Length P PHH 2 oo Notes 1 For maths totalisers and counters see the relevant option description
382. igure 4 4 7d In the password page ensure that the various tick boxes are enabled disabled as required New Object User x Create in SwValidation com unitl New Object User x Create mn SwValidation com unitl First name ris Initials Last name flest Full name ris last Llser logon name earl Swwvalidation com E User logon name pre windows 2000 Password mnm Confirm password m User must change password at next logon User cannot change password Password never expires Account is disabled SWVALIDATION E Figure 4 4 7d User details screens 4 Once the new user has been created right click anywhere in the screen and select Properties or double click on the user When the Properties page opens click on the Member Of tab figure 4 4 7e 5 Click on the Add key and enter the new group name Click OK 6 Theuseris now part of the group and should be able to log in using the login and password details entered in step 3 Environment Sessions Remote control Terminal Services Profile COM General Address Account Profile Telephones Organization Published Certificates MemberOf Dialin Object Security Member of Active Directory Folder Domain Users S WYalidation com Users testunitl S wValidation com unit1 E Remove Primary group Domain Users Get Primary Group There is no need to change Primary group unless
383. igure 3 4 3a Circular trend New chart mode NORMAL VIEW Normal view is available only for large frame recorders also small frame recorders when viewed via Bridge software As shown in figure 3 4 3b below this provides a view ofthe chart together with scale chart speed message bar and navigation keys The figure shows a view with faceplates selected on 7 Ni 11 05 33 Logged out EK 11 07 06 urnace 1 Temp 13 897 3476 C 1 hr rev SSES A Full Screen 1509 0000 0 0000 0 0900 1500 000 11 07 06 10 10 I Chart Speed 1125 0956 C Scale for right half of chart Scale for left half 06 11 05 of chart 1113 9806 C 11 07 06 10 20 11 07 06 11 00 Furnace 1 Te 1200 9456 C 11 07 06 10 55 ls A Flow 1 i 1365 21l hr 11 07 06 10 50 11 07 06 10 30 1299 65l hr Chart Full scale 3 11 07 06 10 45 11 07 06 10 35 Flow 3 11 07 06 10 40 989 54l hr 11 07 06 11 07 52 Engineer Restarted 11 07 Figure 3 4 3b Circular Trend normal view with faceplates HA029324 Page 35 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 4 3 CIRCULAR TREND Cont NORMAL VIEW FEATURES Scales Chart speed Faceplates Message Bar Two scales are provided one for the left hand side of the chart the other for the right hand side Channel scaling is a part of channel configuration as described in below The scales apply only to values along the h
384. ii acts beer e UR 8 449 Permanent IDitable ci a EAR hae EEN ERREUR 8 5 DATA TRANSMISSION s ege EE AE FUNCTION CODES AND EXCEPTION CODES TEXT STRINGS E et ada aha wA 8 5 2 Function code Dira iaa 3 53 Function code 06 EE EE ache ages EE REQUEST aa E See EE de RESPONSE cuca EE ee pe dated EXCEPTIONIRESPONSES tenia enges RESPONSE traseras cdo add EXCEPTION RESPONSES sania EE e ER Annex A SPECIFICATION INSTALLATION CATEGORY AND POLLUTION DEGREE Installation categoryll iri u bra qun eR EC PUE ERU ua Y Pollution degree Leza dust pr RR ERREICHT A1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Recorder Annex B REFERENCE 2s eb kn p eee a eg B1 DIAGNOSTICS DISPLAY et eet tbe te epe pr ptg B1 1 Main diagnostic display B1 2 SPECIAL MODES cuidara e Meet aes sors B1 4 TOUCH CALIBRATION ERR det ee ns eae UI ACEN B1 4 1 Touchscreen calibration a de dere B1 4 2 Touch screen very B1 4 3 Main Menu oooocooo nent ee B1 5 SYSTEMISUMMARY consorte e ae Qusaqa aed User Guide Page x HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE LIST OF CONTENTS CONT Section B1 6 DIAGSUMMARY o cooocccoc ccc eee s aaa teen a a B1 6 1 IMAC geleet B1 6 2 Software version number ER 3 Senal Senal2 a uyamanta ua RETE B1 6 4 Battery EEN B1 6 5 MOCK ables ico oss es See de B1 6 6 Option boards i
385. ile inactive or while unacknowledged for continuous jobs e g speed interval B or b ongoing active on going inactive or on acknowledgement for one shot jobs e g increment counter Figure 4 3 3g below shows the various actions graphically For While unacknowledged and on ac knowledgement settings two cases are shown one where the alarm goes inactive before acknowledge ment the other where the alarm is acknowledged whilst the alarm is still active The coloured shaded areas show the duration for which continuous jobs run the down arrows show trigger points for one shot jobs See for details on howto acknowledge alarms Active Alarm trigger Inactive While active While inactive _ Acknowledge B I While unacknowledged atchingatarm Jl While unacknowledged I Job goes inactive even if non latching alarm II alarm not yet acknowledged While unacknowledged latching alarm While unacknowledged non latching alarm ALARM MESSAGES Alarm on off and alarm acknowledge messa Group configuration described above See Ackn owledge gt Job goes inactive even if alarm still active Active j Alarm trigger Inactive On going active On going inactive Y On acknowledgement latching alarm Acknowledge B gt i Y On acknowledgement non latching alarm Job triggers even if alarm On acknowledgemen
386. ils y CSV include Column headings CSV Date Time format Text Y CSV use Tab delimiter Show Local settings W Archive to Media None Y Media file format Binaryand CSV Y On Media Full Overwrite Y Media Size 30 4746094 Mb Disk Archive Capacity 33 18 Days Media Full event limit 100 Apply Discard Figure 4 3 5c CSV archive menu items MEDIA FILE FORMAT For Local Settings only this allows Binary CSV or both to be selected for file type when archiving Bi nary is the proprietary format used by the instrument and it requires other software e g Review Soft ware to interpret the data before it can be presented in spreadsheets shown as if on a chart etc Binary files have the extension uhh CSV format is a standard open file format for numeric data A simple ASCII based format it is readable by a wide range of PC applications as well as being suitable for direct import into many commercial data bases CSV files have the extension csv Note CSV is ASCII based and cannot interpret Unicode characters Some characters available to the user will therefore be displayed incorrectly in CSV files Page 80 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 5 ARCHIVE CONFIGURATION Cont MEDIA FILE FORMAT Cont If CSV or Binary and CSV is selected a number of extra check boxes appear Figure 4 3 5c above
387. in 5 The maximum number of Bridge sessions that can be run simultaneously on one recorder is 10 HA029324 User Guide Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 229 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 6 1 1 Minimum PC requirements n pun gt P90 running Windows NT 2000 XP Home XP Pro Server 2003 32MB RAM 50MB free hard disk space Graphics drive capable of displaying gt 256 colours recommended Sound card required for audible alarms feature section 6 5 SUPPORTED PDA CONFIGURATION PDA not supported this issue of software User Guide Page 230 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 6 2 CONNECTION DETAILS The connection to the recorder is terminated at the RJ45 connector located as shown in figures and P 1bp The other end of the cable may be terminated for example at a hub a dial up router or a PC and it is up to the user to obtain a suitable cable normally available from a computer supplier or electronic component distributor Note For direct connection between a PC and the recorder a crossover cable is required For all other connections a straight through connection is required 6 2 1 Direct PC connection The RJ45 connector at the rear of the recorder is connected via a crossover cable to the PC network card connector 6 2 2 PC To remote recorder As shown in figure 6 2 2 one or more recorders Ethernet connector can be connected to
388. inserted CHANNEL ALARM 8 This red bell indicator appears if any channel is in alarm The symbol is illuminated continuously if all alarms are acknowledged or flashes if any active alarm is unacknowledged Refer to ALARM ACKNOWL EDGEMENT below for details of how to acknowledge alarms CHANGE BATTERY This flashing indicator first appears when the battery voltage checked every 15 minutes indicates that the battery is approaching the end of its useful life The indicator continues to flash until the battery is replaced B2 2 in Annex B The indicator does not appear if the battery is not fitted DISK ICON This shows the free space available on whatever mass storage medium is fitted if any and selected for Archive destination note 1 The disk icon appears soon after the device is inserted but see note 2 During archiving the colour of the central area of the disk changes to green see note 3 No other disk activity e g save restore configuration is indicated This area of the icon coloured green during any archive activity ww not necessarily to the device selected in Archive configuration 99 Figure 3 1 3 Archive activity indication Notes 1 The icon appears only when a memory device is present AND when that memory device has been selected in the Archive to media selection in archive configuration ection 4 3 5 For example if a memory stick is inserted in usbfront but Archive to Media
389. ints Enter the number of Thermocouple calibration points that are to be used 25 max T C cal temp n The nth calibration point where n 1 to the T C calibration points value T C cal corr n The correction value for the nth calibration point Other parameters are as described in Channel configuration Eection 4 3 3 Note Each cal temp value must be higher than the previous one HA029324 Page 124 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 MATHS OPTION Cont MODBUS ADDRESSING The following table gives hex addresses for maths channel 1 Generally Maths channel N parameter address maths channel 1 parameter address 162 N 1 decimal For full details of the Modbus TCP Eection implementation see Please see the hoteg at the end of this section 4 3 11 MATHS CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA CHANNEL 1 Parameter name Ch1 Span high Ch1 Span low Ch1 Zone high Ch1 Zone low Ch1 PV type Ch1 Decimal places Ch1 Colour Ch1 Units Spare Ch1 Open string Spare Ch1 Close string Spare Ch1 Descriptor Spare Ch1 No of alarms Ch1 PV format Spare Chi A 1 enable Chi A 1 type arm 1 setpoint arm 2 enable arm 2 type arm 2 setpoint arm 3 enable arm 3 type arm 3 setpoint arm 4 enable arm 4 type arm 4 setpoint Description Upper span value display full scale Lower span value display zero Zone high value two decimal places
390. ion of the chart which the channel occupies to be defined in terms of percent where the left edge of the chart is 0 and the right hand edge is 100 For example setting a low value of 50 and a high value of 100 causes the channel trace to be confined to the right hand half of the chart If A B switching is enabled a second set of zone low and zone high values can be entered A values are used during normal operation B values are switched to by job action as described in PV FORMAT This allows the PV value alarm setpoints hysteresis values etc to be displayed as normal numeric val ues Numeric or in Scientific format Scientific When Scientific is selected values are displayed and entered as a decimal number between 1 and 107 the mantissa followed by a multiplier the exponent E G to enter a value of 1244 5678 the value entered would be 1 2445678E3 where 3 represents the number of places that the decimal point has been shifted to the left in order to convert the value to a number between 1 and 101 To enter a value of 0 0004196 the entry would be 4 196E 4 T Notes 1 Strictly this is a number less than 10 as 10 would be 1 0E1 2 There must be at least one number after the decimal point MAXIMUM DECIMAL DIGITS This defines the number of decimal places in the process value Settable between zero and nine Lead ing and trailing zeros are not displayed Values too long for the available displaying width are t
391. is allows the chart grid to be aligned with the scale of a particular point selected in the from field which appears if From Point is selected as Grid Type Five major divisions A A Linear scale Two minor divisions Nine major divisions Linear scale EE Three minor divisions Three decades Figure 4 3 2c Typical chart grid definitions RECORDING ENABLE This tick box allows the logging of this group s data to the flash memory to be enabled disabled When disabled a The recording speed interval fields are not editable and Trend History duration is set to zero b Display trends are present on the chart but are not preserved when changing Views c It is not possible to enter trace history if Recording Enable is not selected Notes 1 A blue line is drawn across the chart when recording is re enabled to indicate a time change in the trace 2 Ifa Recording enable job amp ection 4 7 9 is set to act on a particular group then the group will be recorded only whilst the job is active and only if Recording is enabled for the group Page 62 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 2 GROUP CONFIGURATION Cont RECORDING SPEED RECORDING INTERVAL If recording is enabled these fields are as for trend speed interval but define the rate
392. isable key is operated Ranges must be complete 1 is not acceptable Each group may contain any or all points but for vertical and horizontal trend modes only the first 36 are displayed and for circular trend mode only the first twelve are traced If a point number is entered which is greater than the number of that point type fitted then the selection is ignored For example if totalisers 1 60 are selected for deletion and only 12 are enabled then the range will be accepted and totalisers 1 to 12 deleted from the group s con tents Alternatively a group s contents can be edited using the tick boxes to include the ticked items in or to exclude non ticked items from the group as required Page 64 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 3 Channel Alarm configuration Figure 4 3 3a below shows a typical configuration menu for an input channel For maths channels see section 4 3 11 The actual fields that appear depend on what input type is selected what linearisation type is selected and so on Channel Number 1 Channel 1 Y Select channel number Value 6 6893 Input Type Off Y Off Slave comms Test Master p yp comms Scaled y Scale Low These fields appear only if Scale High Scaled is selected Units V Offset V A Select None Linear or Log Seale Type Linear Y Log available only if Scaled is ticked Scale Divisio
393. iser 1 is found where Totaliser 6 would normally be This in turn affects counter addressing as counter addresses immediately follow totaliser ad dresses and in the above example Counter 1 value would be found at counter 6 address HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 130 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 12 Cont TOTALISER MODBUS ADDRESSING RUN TIME DATA This table shows addresses for totaliser 1 Generally totaliser N address totaliser 1 address 3 N 1 decimal TOTALISER 1 Start Addr Register Hex Dec Length Value Current process value PV Scaled Read Write A3E6 41958 Status Channel status Enum Read only A3E7 41959 0 Good PV 5 Ranging error 1 Channel off 6 Overflow 2 Over range 7 Bad PV 3 Under range 8 No data 4 Hardware error Alarms Alarm information Uint16 Bit0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Read only Bit1 0 No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit2 1 nowledge alarm 1 Read Write Bit 3 Bit 4 arm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Read only Bit 5 o Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 6 nowledge alarm 2 Read Write Bit 7 Bit 8 arm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Read only Bit 9 o alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 10 nowledge alarm 3 Read Write Bit 11 Bit 12 arm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Read only Bit 13 Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 14 nowledge alarm 4 R
394. ist W Login By user List W Apply Discard y Apply Discard Audit Trail Security Manager Security Manager only Figure 4 4 2a Management menu structure CHANGES NOT RECORDED Changes to configuration made via MODBUS TCP are not recorded It is up to the user to write the iden tity time date reason for change etc as text messages which when sent via MODBUS TCP become part of the relevant history file CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS Notes 1 Unless otherwise indicated the following parameters appear only if the Auditor 21CFR11 op tion is fitted 2 If Centralised Security is enabled none ofthe other parameters in this menu can be edited at the recorder Changes can be made only using Security Management software Page 191 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 4 2 MANAGEMENT Cont CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS Cont Record logins Login Timout with unapplied changes Password Attempts Passwords expire For either Auditor option if this field is enabled then each time a new login occurs a message appears giving the date time and login name E G 12 07 06 15 32 20 Login by Frederick Bloggs Logouts are recorded in a similar way e g 12 07 06 15 49 43 Logout by Frederick Bloggs If the login or logout is via a Bridge session ection d the IP address of that viewer appears in the login logout message e g 12 07 06 15 58 03 Login by 149 121 130 126 E
395. ister Length 4 Hardware error Alarm information Bit 0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Read only Bit 1 O No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Read Write Bit 3 Spare Bit4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Bit5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7 Spare Bit8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Bit9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11 Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15 Spare Channel 10 alarms F8EA 63722 Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Note PV access is Read Write for any point configured with Slave Comms as its Type or Function Otherwise PV access is Read only HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 User Guide Page 311 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 8 IEEE AREA CHANNEL RUN TIME DATA Cont CHANNEL 11 Parameter name Channel 11 value Channel 11 status Channel 11 Alarms CHANNEL 12 Parameter name Channel 12 value Channel 12 status Description Current process value PV Channel status 0 Good PV 1 Channel off 2 Over range 3 Under range 4 Hardware error Alarm information
396. ive Directory to manage network resources such as users computers and applications Manage users and computers in Active Directory Manage domains arjOpens the console for administering and publishing ee in the directory Manage sites and si Q9 Review the next steps for this role Figure 4 4 7b Manage users 2 Rightclick on the relevant Domain name symbol gi and select New then Organizational Unit Enter a name for the Unit and click OK Lo Active Directory Users and Computers lt File Action view Window Help lt 3 Active Directory Users and Computers eurother Sdd5de SwWalidation com 1 Saved Queries E SwYalidation co Delegate Control 5 ADTestUsers H E Builtin Find c Computers Connect to Domain o Lei Domain Cont Connect to Domain Controller Foreiansecu Raise Domain Functional Level E Lost ndFour Operations Masters EES 4 pidas Computer Program Dat GER System All Tasks gt Contact d cl Ve 1 gt os view d Pu der gg Users New Window From Here MSMQ Queue Alias Refresh Export List Printer P User pec Shared Folder Help Figure 4 4 7c Create new Organizational Unit Continued Page 199 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 4 7 ACTIVE DIRECTORY SERVER SETUP Cont 3 Similarly create a new Group then a new User entering the user name and login details f
397. iver Not used for this recorder model HA029324 Page 51 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 CONFIG KEY Touching this key calls the top level configuration pick list nd nstrument ser Linearisation aster Comm utput Channel hs otalisers Emails Di u psc ol llo lt gt 0 D D LU Di ct Q u O Di Q ounters imers EtherNet IP Serve vent Button onnection Options My TT D essage Notes 1 Figure 4 3b gives an overview of the configuration menus 2 Ifan option is not fitted it does not appear in the above list When making changes to the configuration the name of each changed parameter is displayed in red in stead of the normal black until the Apply Discard key has been operated For example in channel con figuration if the Scale High value is edited Scale High appears in red until the Apply key is operated Should an attempt be made to leave configuration with unsaved changes a warning message appears allowing the user to apply the changes to discard the changes or to return to configuration Cancel Data Has Been Modified Apply Discard Cancel Page 52 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 CONFIG KEY Cont 188ys MAIAIOAO nuev uoneinBijuoO qe y 3NG p4eosiq Addy pieosig lddy
398. izontal bargraph displaymode 40 3 4 6 Numeric display mode 42 User Guide HA029324 Page ii Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE LIST OF CONTENTS CONT Section Page 3 5 OPERATOR NOTES netur tee ele roda lea 44 4 SETTING UP THE RECORDER 45 43 ARCHIVE geeiert PEE B Pe PER ERE de 46 4 131 Local Archive i a4 ike re eru ret pex e nem MG Rate Re Ep eh 46 BRINGAARCHIME UP TO DATE deco eher EE VP E S DP RT EP TAE 47 ARCHIVE ALL esee mo oie Rer erp erbe EE Eeer EN 47 4 1 2 Remote archiving FTP transfer 48 4 2 SAVE RESTORE egeret Ra 49 4 2 1 SaVe u iscesseneo eee ete e pao a e pales dd Dd aea pasaq ERR Tte 50 Ep cL 50 EE 50 EE 50 EE 50 4 2 5 Importscreen Ae umasa sas Eed Ee od 50 42 6 EXDOItSCIGOI ege il ride usa 51 4 2 7 Import User Linearisation 51 4 2 8 Export User Lincarisatio exerc e e et goss akay 51 4 2 9 Import printer GEREENT ee E Ae dE e e 51 4 3 CONFIGKEY our paqaq s sede uo EE e 52 4 3 1 Instrument configuration 57 INSTRUMENT NAME u xa oncaeid css bared Geass PTS aa qha OY ala deen 57 NORMAL SAVER DISPLAY rer RICRRRS Oe E repe re ERU 57 SAVE AF TER iniciadas 57 MODBUS ADDRESS vosotras a EE dee edd 8 57 MODBUS SECURITY DISABLED oss ick rai eg aah need u was EE Cd 57 COMMS CHANNEITIMEGOUT nct thure wq awu aqa ga
399. k between master 1 and master 2 than to establish individual links between master 1 and each of the slaves In this example Share sockets should be enabled The lower illustration show a similar situation except that master 2 is not just a gateway but is a meas uring device in its own right In such a case Socket 1 is used for high speed communications between master 1 and master 2 and Socket 2 is used to link master 1 to the slaves individually In this case Share Sockets should be disabled for master 2 and enabled for all other devices IP address 123 123 1 2 Modbus address 10 Master 2 TCP Gateway Ethernet Socket 1 Serial link RS485 Naster 1 cket 1 communicates with IP Address 3 123 1 2 Modbus addresses 1 to n 1P 123 123 1 2 Slave 1 Modbus Address 1 1P 123 123 1 2 Slave n 1 Modbus Addr n 1 1P 123 123 1 2 Slave n Modbus Address n 1P 123 123 1 2 EST Slave 2 Slave 3 Modbus Address 2 Modbus Address 3 IP address 123 123 1 2 Modbus address 10 Socket 1 Master 2 Ethernet Instrument Socket 2 Serial link RS485 Aaster 1 ket 1 Communicates with IP address 123 1 2 Modbus address 10 1P 123 123 1 2 1P 123 123 1 2 IP 123 123 1 2 1P 123 123 1 2 1P 123 123 1 2 Slave 1 Slave 2 Slave 3 Slave n 1 Slave n ket 2 communicates with IP Address Modbus Address 1 Modbus Address 2 Modbus Address 3 Modbus Addr n 1
400. klist contains the following items Greater than Less than Greater than or equal to Less than or equal to Equal to Not equal to The comparison is made between the in stantaneous value of the point selected in Visible Channel and the value entered in Visible Value below For example when using the Greater than operator the component is visible whenever the Visible Channel s value is greater than the Visible Value Visible Value Default For When Visible below is selected as Channel Value Visible Val ue allows a value to be entered to be used in the Visible Operator comparison described above When visible Always Component is always visible Never Component is never visible Channel value Component is visible or not depending on the relationship between the current value of a selected channel and a specified constant value See Visible channel above for details In alarm or error Component is visible if a specified alarm on a specified point is active or if the point is in an Error state See Visible Alarm above for de tails Not in alarm or error Component is visible if a specified alarm on a specified point is not ac tive or the point is not in an Error state See Visible Alarm above for details Table 7 3 2 Advanced edit level parameters sheet 6 of 6 HA029324 User Guide Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 255 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE
401. knowledge alarm 3 Bit 11 Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15 Spare 5 Ranging error 6 Overflow 7 Bad PV 8 No data Description Current process value PV Channel status 0 Good PV 1 Channel off 2 Over range 5 Ranging error 6 Overflow 7 Bad PV Uint16 Scaled Enum See note Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Access See note Read only Start Addr Hex Dec ATDF 41439 ATEO 41440 A1E1 41441 Start Addr Hex Dec A1E2 41442 A1E3 41443 Register Length Register Length 3 Under range 8 No data 4 Hardware error Alarm information Bit0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Read only Bit 1 0 No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Read Write Bit 3 Spare Bit 4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Bit 5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7 Spare Bit 8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Bit 9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11 Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 14 1
402. l 2 5 Channel 5 OK Cancel HA029324 Page 210 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 6 6 COPY Cont CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS Source Type Picklist allows selection of Group Channel Event Message Maths Channel Totaliser Counter Timer Output or Demand Write as the type of source to be copied Copy From Allows the user to select a specific point group etc to be copied Copy To Allows the first destination point to be selected for the source to be copied to Allows the final destination pointto be selected for the source to be copied to Include alarm data This field appears only for source types which support alarms If this box is selected then alarm data is included in the copy process Include job data This field appears only for source types which support jobs If this box is selected then jobs data is included in the copy For source types that support both alarms and jobs it is not possible to include job data without including alarm data as well Once the copy is complete the user should enterthe configuration area ofthe items that have been cop ied and edit apply the changes etc COPY RULES 1 The first channel on any input card may not be a digital input type 2 Ifa destination channel was a digital input AND the source channel is an analogue input AND in clude alarm data is not selected the destination c
403. l was selected is lost SMS Body Only Selecting this protocol allows Body text to be entered but the Subject field is not displayed Any text previously entered as a Subject whilst another protocol was selected is lost Allows the entry of up to 100 characters to appear in the Subject part of the e mail header The field does not appear if SMS Body Only is selected as the Protocol Allows the entry of up to 240 characters to appear as the body of the e mail The field does not appear if SMS Subject Only is selected as the Protocol Also referred to as Body Text If this checkbox in enabled one of the messages in the Message Configuration area can be selected to appear below the body text in the e mail Notes 1 Domain Name Service DNS must be enabled in the recorder network configuration 4 5 2 if a mail server name is to be used 2 A general message is generated if there are any invalid recipients in any list who would not receive e mails Such messages may be viewed in Message Log Eection 3 1 4 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 168 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 19 EMAILS Cont E MAIL DETAILS Figure 4 3 19b depicts an e mail using fictitious entries BS Cold store alarm Message Plain Text File Edit View Insert Format Tools N Instrument s Local Host address i Reply ReplytoAll Forward 3 or IP address if fixed 4Andy136 4 Mailserve
404. le Figure 4 6 9 About display typical INSTRUMENT VARIANT Displays the instrument type CONFIG REVISION Whenever a change to the Configuration of the recorder is applied the Config Revision is incremented For these purposes Configuration is defined as including all items within the menu structures of the Config and Network keys and includes User Screens It does not include those items associated with the Security key Config Revision is printed on the chart at power up and if either Auditor option or if the Batch option is fitted Config Revision is included in the messages associated with these options Notes 1 Contig Revision can be used as an input to one or more maths channels If such a maths chan nel is included in one or more groups the revision number can be determined for any time date when Trend History mode is invoked for the group s in question See fection 4 3 11 for maths function details 2 Config Revision can be embedded in one or more messages as described in kection 4 3 8 LAST UPDATED The time and date at which the configuration was last edited AT VERSION The version number at the time of the last configuration update CREATED ON Shows the type of instrument that the configuration was created on Normally this will be the same as Instrument Variant and will be different only if the configuration has been downloaded from a different instrument model
405. le for this instrument to determine what type of alarm alarm 1 on channel 2 is register 396 would be used and the expected value would be 0 for Absolute low 1 for absolute high 2 for Deviation in 3 for Deviatio Change low n out 4 for Rate of change high or 5 for Rate of Channel Number 1 Read 1 v 4 Reflects descriptor once the 0 0400 Master Commsw Value Input Type Slave Unadjusted Apply key has been operated 1 Furn1 Recorder2v Select required slave Digital Parameter User Defined Y 4 Select required slave parameter Function Code Read holding registers 3 y 4 Select Function Code Register Data Type 396 Ente Ulnteger 16 Bit r required register number decimal Y Select Data Type Scaling Decimal Placesv Select None or Decimal Places Decimal Places 2 Enter No of decimal point shifts Process Value Medium Priority v Select iteration rate for PV Format Numeric v continuous parameters Span Low o Units Span High y Units Zone Low 0 Zone High 100 ecimal dig Apply Discard Figure 4 3 16g Configuration page for user defined parameters Page 153 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 16 MASTER COMMS Cont CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS This section defines those parameters which are uniq
406. le of 360 degrees but arcs cannot be filled If the height and width of the oval are defined in the default percentage units then entering equal values for height and width will result in an oval with the same aspect ratio as that of the screen not a circle as might be expected Because the screen height is approximately 2 3 the width the oval height should be 3 2 its width to produce a circle The actual height width ratio 0 669 7 4 19 Line This causes a straight line of user definable thickness to be drawn between the points X position Y position and X position width Y position height Notes 1 Y increases downwards X increases rightwards 2 Height 2 3 width if measuring in percent X position Y position Widt X position width Y position height Figure 7 4 19a Line definitions EXAMPLE To draw an approximation to a St Andrew s cross saltire Access the component property editor page as described in kection 7 2 3 Select Advanced Edit level then in the component property editor page 1 touch the Add key at the top of the screen In the List of Component types page press Line Add Line Add then Close 2 In main_1 2 set background colour to 6 In line_ 2 3 Set Width to 100 Height to 100 Set Foreground colour to 55 and Line thickness to 35 5 In line_3 4 Set X position to 100 Width to 100 Height to 100 Set Foregr
407. lected as file format see below Note Where very high values are involved e g some totaliser values High compression may cause the value displayed by the recorder and held in the history file to be incorrect This prob lem may be solved by moving the relevant point to a group using Normal compression or by re scaling the totaliser to read for example TeraWatt hours instead of Megawatt hours FLASH SIZE Allows the size of the internal flash memory to be viewed by the user SHORTEST TREND HISTORY DURATION This shows which group has the shortest amount of Flash memory allocated to its history record Provid ing the archive period is less than the value displayed in the Duration window no data will be lost from any group If the archive period is greater than this value then some of the data in one or more groups will have been overwritten and therefore lost If there is more than one group with the same Shortest Trend History Duration the group with the lowest number is displayed E G If groups two and four both have the same duration Group 2 will appear in this window Note Trend history duration depends on many factors as described in Group Configuration ion 43 2 above CSV CHECK BOXES DATE TIME FORMAT These appear only if the Media File Format or FTP file format are set to either CSV or Binary and CSV Refer to ICSV Files at the end of this subsection 4 3 5 SHOW Thi
408. linearisation tables can be imported into all versions of the recorder but not every ver sion has a Lin Type field in Channel configuration allowing such tables to be selected for use User Linearisation 1 UserLin1 y File Name userlin The Import Linearisation feature allows linearisation tables to be imported either from the Compact Flash card USB device or if Bridge Full software is fitted directly from the host PC Touching the User Linearisation field allows the user to select which of UserLin1 to UserLin12 is to con tain the imported file Touching the File Name field calls a popup menu similar to that shown in figure 4 2b This allows the user to selectthe table to be imported The file must be comma separated ASCII as follows n X1 Y1 X2 Y2 X3 Y3 Xn Yn where n is the total number of XY pairs in the table and or each pair X is the input value and Y is the linearised value corresponding to X See section 4 3 9 for full details Note Imported linearisation tables will not become effective until after the next configuration Apply operation 4 2 8 Export User Linearisation Similar to Import user Linearisation above the Export Linearisation feature allows linearisation tables created in the recorder to be exported either via the Compact Flash card or if Bridge Full software is fit ted directly to the host PC See fection 4 3 9 for full details 4 2 9 Import printer dr
409. liquid hin Enthalpy of the liquid in kJ kg at temperature T1 C Ah hyn hi where h is the enthalpy of vapour in kJ kg vapour at temperature T1 C h Enthalpy of the condensate liquid in kJ kg at temperature T2 C LT2 Vin and AV h Ah and Ah are available from published tables note 2 but the recorder user needs only to enter values for measured flow either the temperature or the pressure of the steam and the tem perature of the condensate These values can be constants input channels or maths channels Figure 4 3 11l and accompanying parameter descriptions give full details Figure 4 3 11k is a simplified sketch of a typical installation showing where flow rate pressure and tem perature readings are taken a P lt Steam supply Inlet flow Inlet pressure or temperature Heat exchanger Heat exchanger Process 1 Process 2 Condensate temperature b P Condensate Figure 4 3 11k Measurement transducer typical locations Notes 1 The units of kg sec and m sec are used above for simplicity In fact any time unit can be used For example if the measured flow is in m hour then the Mass flow will be in kg hour 2 ASME Steam tables 1999 from IAPWEF 1F97 HA029324 Page 113 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont SATURATED STEAM HEAT CONSUM
410. list items vary according to slave Point Number Loop Number Process Value type model For recorders allows a point number to be entered This point must be configured as Comms or Slave Comms etc depending on slave type or model at the slave For Controllers allows a loop number to be selected from a picklist Allows the selection of High Medium or Low priority interval as defined in the Master Comms configuration page in section 4 3 16 Descriptor Allows a descriptor of up to 20 characters to be entered for the output channel name Source This allows the user to select the source point to be written to the slave destination point Default This is the value written ifthe source is in Error and the On error Write Default item below has been enabled On Error Write Default If this item is enabled the default value is written instead of the selected Source if the Source is in Error HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 162 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 18 Demand Writes DEMAND WRITE CONFIGURATION Demand writes allow slave values to be written from the master by operator action from the configura tion page by job action or ifthe Screen Builder option is fitted bection 7 by operation of a suitably configured Operator key Figure 4 3 18a shows a typical configuration page Modbus codes 6 and 16 can be selected for this purpose see for code definitions
411. lls the top level page allowing access to the and System areas described in ion 4 below SR Touch Current 7 11 52 59 access level key Loge out 11 07 06 0 0237V 0 0000 0 2000 l 0 4000 L 0 6000 1 0 8000 t 1 0000 11 52 04 11 07 06 Select the required access level and enter the password if required Touch logged out area then touch access level required 11 49 24 11 07 06 Touch the password window when it appears and enter the password The Engineer level password is 100 when the unit is despatched from the factory Passwords can be edited in Security as described in sec tion 4 4 1 The screen reverts to the home page with the new access level dis taeda played in the Current access level key 11 07 06 Close Figure 3 3 1a Access to configuration Notes 1 For units which have the Auditor 21CFR11 Option enabled the default Operator password is 100 Otherwise no password is required for default Operator level access In either case the Operator access level password can be edited in Security configuration ection 4 41 2 The login screen above can also be called by operating the Root menu then Operator then Security then Login In such a case the screen reverts to the Operator page rather than returning to the home page once login has been achieved 3 Figure 3 3 1a
412. lowing configuration entries can be made SCOPE Allows the user to define all configured channels instrument or just those in a particular group for batch control If Group is selected a further picklist appears allowing a specific group to be selected SHOW BATCH ENTRY LIST Enabling this field produces a list of 13 entries which can be used as field entries when starting or storing a batch as described in Operator initiation below The first entry is the MAC address of the recorder and is not editable The remaining 12 entries of up to 60 characters each are f reely editable This is a different list from that entered for Operator notes in Instrument configuration ection 4 3 1 ENABLE Allows the batch function to be switched on or off BATCH MODE Allows batch mode to be selected as Continuous or Start Stop Page 92 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 10 BATCH CONFIGURATION Cont BATCH FIELDS Allows the number of messages to be printed at batch start stop to be selected FIELD 1 This field is the first of up to 10 which can be used as headings for batch information Headings can be up to 20 characters long including spaces In the example shown in Figure 4 3 10a Heading 1 Field 1 has the entry Batch Number When initiating the batch the operator has to enter a value to be associated with this heading see below unless Use Counter is selected in
413. lternative text may be entered using a suitable keyboard connected via the USB port at the rear of the instrument Cursor keys Text string all for password Z X C Tabs show T active keyboard Alphabet Alphabet 2 Numeric Symbols tab positions vary Shift key 1 Backspace 1 Caps Lock Overprint shown active Figure 3 3 1b Alphabet 1 keyboard HA029324 Page 27 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 3 1 ACCESS TO CONFIGURATION Cont TEXT STRING ENTRY Cont Text String ES z n 0 A z T Alphabet Alphabet 2 Numeric Symbols The E key is used to enter exponents m E 3 ES v d i Alphabet Alphabet 2 Numeric Symbols Figure 3 3 1c Alternative keyboards Page 28 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 4 DISPLAY MODES The display modes described below allow the currently displayed group s process values channels total isers etc known collectively as points to be displayed as vertical horizontal or circular chart traces as vertical or horizontal bargraphs or as numeric values The various display modes are cycled through us ing the up down arrow keys or a specific mode or view c
414. lue of 0 0004196 the entry would be 4 196E 4 Time date For timestamp functions displays the timestamp as time or date as selected instead of a number of milliseconds as would be displayed in numeric format T Notes 1 Strictly this is a number less than 10 as 10 would be 1 0E1 2 There must be at least one number after the decimal point REMAINING CONFIGURATION ITEMS The remaining configuration items are identical with the relevant items in Input Channel configuration section 4 3 3 FUNCTION DETAILS POLYNOMIAL FIT A polynomial curve fit of up to eight orders AO A1 X A2 X A300 AA X A5 X A6 X9 A7 X A8 X where X is the value of the source channel and AO to A8 are constants Figure 4 11 3b shows the configuration items for a third order fit with channel 2 used as the source X and AO 1 A1 2 A22 3 and A3 4 Maths Number 1 Math 1Y Value OFF Units Function Polynomial Y Orders 37 Polynomial of Channel 2 Y AR A1 2 A23 A314 Figure 4 3 11b Polynomial configuration fields 3rd order Page 102 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont FVALUE To calculate the equivalent time at Sterilizing Temperature for temperatures below at and above Steriliz ing Temperature both in dry FH and steam Fo sterilizing environments using the following equation ma Target Temp Fval Fval
415. ly Read only Read only Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Start Addr 57211 57213 57215 DF81 57217 DF83 57219 Register Length NNNNNNNN N e HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 126 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 MATHS OPTION Cont IEEE Area Maths Channel run time data The following table gives addresses for the specified 32 bit floating point values for maths channel 1 Generally Parameter address for channel N Parameter address for channel 1 4 N 1 decimal Please see the notes below CHANNEL 1 Start Addr Register Hex Dec Length Channel 1 value Current process value PV Read Write F9EF 63983 Channel 1 status Channel status Read only F9F1 63985 0 Good PV 5 Ranging error 1 Channel off 6 Overflow 2 Over range 7 Bad PV 3 Under range 8 No data 4 Hardware error Channel 1 Alarms Alarm information Bit 0 arm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Read only Bit 1 o alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 2 Acknowledge alarm 1 Read Write Bit 3 Bit 4 arm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Read only Bit 5 o Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 6 cknowledge alarm 2 Read Write Bit 7 Bit 8 arm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Read only Bit 9 o alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 10 cknowledge alarm 3 Read Write Bit 11 Bit 12 arm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Read
416. m 2 type Ch1 Alarm 2 setpoint Spare Ch1 Alarm 3 enable Ch1 Alarm 3 type Ch1 Alarm 3 setpoint Spare Ch1 Alarm 4 enable Ch1 Alarm 4 type Ch1 Alarm 4 setpoint Spare Description Upper span value display full scale Lower span value display zero Zone high value two decimal places Zone low value two decimal places Input type 1 Analogue input 3 Totaliser 2 Maths 4 Counter Number of decimal places 0 to 9 used by all scaled parameters except where stated Channel colour 0 to 55 See Annex B for definitions Units string up to five characters Open Digital Input string up to eight characters Closed Digital Input string up to eight characters Channel descriptor up to 20 characters Number of alarms on this channel 0 Numeric 1 Digital strings Alarm 1 enable 0 Off 1 Unlatched Alarm 1 type 0 Absolute low 2 Deviation in 4 Rate of change rise Trigger setpoint Note 2 2 Latched 3 Trigger 1 Absolute high 3 Deviation out 5 Rate of change fall Alarm 2 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 2 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 3 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 3 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 4 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 4 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Scaled Scaled Scaled Scaled Enum Uint16 Enum String 5 String 8 String 8 String 20
417. m 3 enable Ch8 Alarm 3 type Ch8 Alarm 3 setpoint Spare Ch8 Alarm 4 enable Ch8 Alarm 4 type Ch8 Alarm 4 setpoint Spare Description Upper span value display full scale Lower span value display zero Zone high value two decimal places Zone low value two decimal places Input type 1 Analogue input 3 Totaliser 2 Maths 4 Counter Number of decimal places 0 to 9 used by all scaled parameters except where stated Channel colour 0 to 55 See Annex B for definitions Units string up to five characters Open Digital Input string up to eight characters Closed Digital Input string up to eight characters Channel descriptor up to 20 characters Number of alarms on this channel 0 to 2 0 Numeric 1 Digital strings Alarm 1 enable 0 Off 1 Unlatched Alarm 1 type 0 Absolute low 2 Deviation in 4 Rate of change rise Trigger setpoint Note 2 2 Latched 3 Trigger 1 Absolute high 3 Deviation out 5 Rate of change fall Alarm 2 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 2 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 3 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 3 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 4 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 4 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Scaled Scaled Scaled Scaled Enum Uint16 Enum String_5 String_8 String_8 String_20 Uint16 Enum Scaled Enum
418. m BootP Server v Name appears only when IP address lookup is set to Get from BootP server or to Get from DHCP Server BootP timeout 28 s IP address 192 168 111 222 2555255825510 Default gateway 0 0 0 0 Address Subnet mask SNTP server enable SNTP client enable y SNTP server 149 121 128 179 EuroPRP server enable Active Directory server 123 456 234 1 Active Directory security TLS port 636 V Password Cache expiry 0 Days Discard Local Host Andy136 4 Domain FishesRus co uk y Primary DNS Server 149 121 164 11 Secondary DNS Server 149 121 165 14 Domain Name Service Apply Discard Figure B9k Network key menu structure HA029324 User Guide Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 345 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B9 MENU STRUCTURE Cont Archive Save Restore Config Security Network System B9b E ee MR Section 4 6 i Clock section 4 6 1 Current date DD MM YYYY Clock Current time HH MM SS Locale Apply Discard Upgrade Master Comms Diagnostics Locale section 4 6 2 Language English Y Select language Country United Kingdom W amp Pick list S Appropriate to Select Time Zone GMT MM seen a the selected Ethernet Diagnostics Copy
419. m mam 117 T19 T20 T21 T22 T23 T24 T25 T26 T27 T28 T29 T30 T31 T32 T33 T35 T36 T37 T38 T39 T40 T4 T42 T43 T44 T45 T46 T47 T48 T49 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 C11 C12 C13 C14 C15 Table 8 3 Channels in group interpretation 1 2 3 4 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 User Guide Page 274 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 ADDRESS ALLOCATION This section consists of a number of tables showing how the address space within the memory map is allocat ed For full details of configuration parameters refer to For convenience the word channel is used as an umbrella term for measuring points in general i e input channels maths channels totalisers etc The following types are used in the tables 1 Uinti6 1 6 bit unsigned integer 2 Uint32 32 bit unsigned integer 3 Uint64 64 bit unsigned integer 4 Scaled Double precision floating point value scaled to represent single precision 16 bit integer between 32 767 and 32 767 5 Boolean Represented as a single 16 bit integer 6 Enum Enumeration value represented by a single 16 bit character 7 16 32 and 64 bit 2 s complement signed integers Note When reading a Process Variable PV values as scaled integers the position of the decimal point is set by the Max Decimal Digits parameter in the relevant Channel s Configuration Only if the resulting value can be represented within 16 bit resoluti
420. mains active until the channel value leaves the band Reference Deviation Hysteresis If a dwell value is defined the alarm does not become effective until this dwell time has been exceeded As shown in figure 4 3 3e a deviation out alarm is active whenever the channel value leaves the band Reference Deviation It remains active until the channel value en ters the band Reference Deviation Hysteresis If a dwell value is defined the alarm does not become effective until this dwell time has been exceeded As shown in figure 4 3 3f rate of change alarms become active whenever the signal value changes by more than a specified amount within a specified period If a dwell value is defined the alarm does not become effective until this dwell time has been exceeded An averaging period can be set to remove the effects of sudden but short lived changes such as noise spikes on the signal Note Alarm icons appear at the display as described in SETPOINT SOURCE Allows the user to choose either a fixed user defined value constant or the value of another point input channel maths channel totaliser etc to be chosen as the trigger point In the latter it is possible for example to trigger an alarm when one channel s value rises above falls below etc the value of a second channel Page 70 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 3 CHANNEL ALARM CONFIGURATION Cont P
421. maths channels totalisers etc Apply Discard User Guide Page 338 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B9 MENU STRUCTURE Cont Archive Save Restore Security Network System Figure B9b Figure B9c Figure B9d Figure B9f Figure B9g Figure B9h Figure B9i Figure Y Fig B9j B9k Instrument Figure B9l m Compression Normal Y Groups Channels Views Archive Events Event Buttons Messages User Linearisations Batch Maths Totalisers Counters Timers Connections Master Comms Output Channels Demand Writes Emails Reports EtherNet IP Server Events Section 4 3 6 Remote Flash Size 96 25 Mb Archive Shortest Trend History Group 1 Section 4 3 5 Duration 10 86 Days gt Show Remote settings Y Archive to Remote None v Event Number 1 Event Y Ftp File format Binary M Source 1 Alarm on Group Y Remote path history On Group 1 Group 1 y Primary remote host 0 0 0 0 Source 2 Point Alarm Y Primary login name anonymous On Math 12 Y Primary password Alarm 2 Y Retype password Soues 1 Sense E Secondary remote host 0 0 0 0 Operator And v Secondary login name anonymous Source 2 Sense Not Source 2 Y Secondary password Descriptor Event 1 Job Number Ei Retype passw
422. mber 1 Read 1 y lt Rellects descriptor entry Value 0 4670 Unadjusted Input Type Master Commsw Slave 1 Fum 1 Control y lt Select Required slave Digital Parameter Working Setpoint y 4 Select Required slave Loop Number f Select required loop Parameter Process Value Medium Priorityy 4 Select iteration rate for PV Format Numeric Y peremeier ate Span Low 0 Units Span High 1 Units Zone Low 0 Zone High 100 Max Decimal Digits 4 Colour MM Units Units Descriptor Read 1 Alarm Number a Enable Trigger v Apply Discard Figure 4 3 16f Typical Controller parameter page Page 151 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 16 MASTER COMMS Cont TYPICAL CONTROLLER PARAMETERS Channel Number Slave Digital Parameter Loop number Process Value Allows the user to select the number of the channel to be configured As soon as Modbus Master is selected as input type this changes from Channel 1 for example to Read 1 Once communication with the slave is established this will change to the descriptor of the remote channel unless the controller type does not support this item in which case a suitable descriptor can be entered later in the configuration Allows the user to select from a picklist the slave from which data is to be retrieved The picklist contains all the Remote Devices configured
423. mplement the Short Message Service SMS protocol though it is able to send SMS messages to a mobile phone via an appropriate server or gateway As some servers gateways use the subject as the SMS message and others use the body text these alternatives are provided for in the Protocol pick list in the Configuration page described above Z A new vent source Email fail can be used to trigger a job list should an e mail send failure occur HA029324 Page 170 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 20 Reports configuration This allows the user to configure up to 10 reports for output to the chart as a result of job action Figure 4 3 20a shows atypical configuration page accessed from the CONFIG button Reports item Report 1 Report 1 Y Descriptor Report 1 Number of Fields 6 Y Field 1 Type Date A Time e Style Normal v Field 2 Type Text v Text Style Bold M Field 3 Type Process Value y Point Channel 1 Y Style Emphasisedy Field 4 Type Batch Field 1 Y Style Banner Y Field 5 Type 1 Message M Style Normal y Field 6 Type Line Feed Y Line Feed 1 Y Apply Discard Figure 4 3 20a Reports Configuration REPORT Allows the user to select the required report number for configuration DESCRIPTOR A name for the Report can be entered here NUMBER OF FIELDS Select 0 to 10 for the number of items to be included in the report
424. n 1 above EDIT OUTPUT CHANNEL DEFAULT Appears only if the Master Comms option is fitted When enabled this allows a user with this login to edit the default value of any output channel Normally the defaults are used only when the source channel is In Error Page 189 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 4 1 ACCESS LEVELS Cont ACTION DEMAND WRITES Appears only if the Master Comms option is fitted See kection 4 3 16 and pection 4 3 18 for further details When enabled this allows a user with this login to write values manually over master comms either di rectly by job action or if the option is fitted by using the User Screens Operator key Where Demand Writes are initiated by Job action the job will be carried out whether or not this login has permission to action Demand Writes Note When is enabled only the newly written value appears in the audit trail messages This is because the instrument has no way of determining what the value of the parameter was before the write occurred The messages are of the form 12 07 06 10 14 30 Auto Mode wrote 19 37 12 07 06 10 14 29 Demand write Auto Mode Signed Engineer No Auth Reqd Note where Auto Mode is the descriptor associated with the demand write and 19 37 is the value written FORCE CHANGE OF PASSWORD When this checkbox is enabled for a user it means that that user will have to change password
425. n Group Number select 1 Group 1 8 Title bar is selected on yes as required gr vtrend 6 1 Y Identifier Group 1 9 Enter the X 25 and Y 48 co ordinates hr dnd SS using the same technique as was used for the Group Number 1 Group 1 Y Identifier field in step 6 The default dimen Show Title Bar Yes Y sions 50 x 50 are as required Gronn P ie Y Position 0 Width 50 10 The Draw order is as required Height 50 Background Colour 1 Draw order 30 11 Press Save Component Type Group Vertical Trend gr_vtrend Goto Canvas Save Close More HA029324 User Guide Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 245 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 2 4 SCREEN CREATION EXAMPLE Cont 12 Touch the component picklist field and high Component Property Editor Sereent light the topmost ch hor bar field ada Dei copy ch_hor_bar_2 2 13 In the Identifier field enter the name Bar 1 Identifier Bar 1 using the pop up keyboard To enter numbers Lee sinn touch the Numeric tab under the keyboard ad Ness then touch the required number e SS f j Y Position 0 Y 14 The channel number is as required Width 00 s e 15 Touch the width field and enter a value of 100 Height IO Y 16 Touch the height field and enter 10 Background entem a Foreground Colour 1 Draw Order 20 17 Press Save Component Type
426. n background if there are no point alarms or Active red background if there is one or more active point alarm HA029324 User Guide Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 349 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE C3 2 TRENDS Clicking on the Trends tab displays a screen allowing the user to select a refresh rate and one of Horizontal trend Vertical Trend or Numeric as the display format Both the horizontal and vertical trend modes include the numeric display table Instrument Trends Horizontal Trend Vertical Trend Numeric Display Please st Select viewing mode by clicking on required heading Figure C3 2 Trend mode selection C3 2 1 Horizontal trend Figure C3 2 1 shows a horizontal trend display for an imaginary group Furnace Temps 1 with two channels Stack 1 and Stack2North Time and date of most recent sample update 12 04 06 14 53 09 BleuroTHERM a Return to mode selection page Home Trends Message Logs History About Select required group by clicking on required number Trend Group B Oe Zug d HE ub jo z Descriptor of selected group Furnace Temps Span High OCH TJ em Span Low Descriptor Span Low Process Value Stack 1 0 0000 61 6667 C Stack2North 0 0000 41 1667 C 100 0000 __ Select horizontal scale here Confirm horizontal scale here FL Show me the last minutes of data Figure C3 2
427. n be sent for display etc The instru ment itself cannot receive e mails and so is unable to display for example undeliver able messages itself An entry in this field must be made The same address may be used for any number of instruments The product tries repeatedly until successful to dispatch the e mail until the Retry time has expired If the e mail has not been sent within this period it is deleted and a General message is generated Allows a listto be chosen for entry of recipient e mail addresses Allows a name to be entered for the selected list These fields allow 10 recipients e mail addresses to be entered for the selected list The first valid address appears in the To part of the e mail header subsequent valid addresses appear in the Cc part of the e mail header note 2 Allows an e mail to be selected for configuration Allows a descriptor to be entered for the e mail This appears in the list of e mails when setting up a job and also in the message log Choose one of SMTP Email SMS Subject Only and SMS Body Only Operation below gives some details of the application of the SMS protocol in this instrument SMPT Email Selecting this protocol allows both a Subject and Body text to be entered SMS Subject Only Selecting this protocol allows a subject to be entered but the entry field for the body text is not presented for use Any text previously entered here whilst another protoco
428. n initiating Events which will then run job lists Events can have up to two sources each but can themselves be used as sources allowing a large number ofinputs to be used Input sources can be logically combined and can be inverted if required Source Source D EVENT NUMBER Event Number 1 Event 1 Y Select 1 to 96 On Group 1 Group 1 Y Make source 1 s Job Number 1 Y Category No Action Y P Select Job Category Source 1 Alarm on Group Y gt Select source 1 ub selection if any Source 2 Point Alarm V Select source 2 On Math 12 Y Make source 2 sub selection if any Alarm 2 Y w Make sub sub selection if any 1 Sense Source 1 Y Select source inversion or not Operator And And y gt Ss 2 Sense Not Source 2 Y escriptor Event 1 Select job number ect logic combination Only AND NAND NOR XOR Select source inversion or not Apply Discard Figure 4 3 6 Event configuration menu layout typical Allows the required event 1 to 96 to be selected for configuration SOURCE TYPES Note Event sources associated with options appear only if those options are fitted Off Global alarm Global Unack d alarm Comms channel timeout Timer active Batch Running Batch Start Event Point alarm Unack d point alarm Alarm on Group The event is disabled The event is activ
429. na 66 INPUT TYPES na ett he hp dte o e aeneo ace fos em a le bep e d 66 SCALED Zuma naam eee pereo qaa e Ee 66 OFFSET apa ayu chen dette aspis tud efus nas has 66 SCALE TYPE dudar clica etate ptu hebes ete ee obe e ved 66 DESCRIPTOR xs sess ta tng ec pue eO acota bases 69 AB SWITCHING s etri vd lie A beer pen M e ee 69 SPANNED mM 69 ZONE ua Sa 69 PV FORMAT oca tote ree D ot PT ERR IN PR Sd MR UTR Tasa 69 MAXIMUM DECIMAL DIGITS ccs entra RE Ae Age ds 69 COLOUR 4 sista aqya a 69 ALARM NUMBER uu a arrival in ot 69 HA029324 User Guide Issue 5 Oct 10 Page iii 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE LIST OF CONTENTS CONT Section Page 4 3 3 Channel Alarm configuration cont ENABLE uan ridad 70 Us dE 70 SETPOINT SOURCE ded yaya a EE AE 70 PARAMETERS EE 71 HYSTERESIS EXAMPLES L l u u uuu suds mte ho Ea E PR E ds dada 71 RATE OF CHANGE ALARM EXAMPLE 71 JOBJNUMBER 13 reset bw rege CE ER ET REA uas ea gos 73 CATEGORY u rss Lea ceri ana Kanay paqan IG DR t a REV E pP e 73 WEIEBE ON eicae niere ERU o eI e NUES 73 ALARM MESSAGES uu luu a 73 4 3 4 Views Configuration at d EBL EN EEG aa eae pasasha 74 HOME TIMEOUT e age ed 74 HOME GROUP eege ege e enge EE A 74 ws eebe 74 GROUP aa aa 75 DISPLAY ENABLE 0 a dd 75 HOME PAGE 3 de we dicts n 75 DISPLAY MODE ENABLING
430. nabled in the record er with the exception of the Simulator option and the History Maintenance option The number and distribution of virtual channels reverts to that configured before Trial mode was invoked When disabling Trial mode all configuration for the trial features is lost Should the user decide to purchase a trial feature then it is recommended that the trial configuration be saved see keycodes so that it may be restored once the purchased trial feature is fitted and enabled codes cannot be entered in Trial Mode 3 Trial mode can be enabled only by users with Perform upgrades permission ection 4 4 1 Enabling Trial Mode allows the user to enable temporarily the various software options that are availa ble Once the user has made the required choices the Set Trial Options key at the bottom of the screen must be operated followed by an Autoconfigure procedure Continued Page 183 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 22 OPTIONS Cont TRIAL MODE Cont Initially the trial mode is set to expire 30 days after enabling whether the recorder is powered or not Any change in configuration results in a pop up message stating how much ofthe 30 days period re mains Once Trial mode is disabled by the user the remaining Trial Time Remaining value is retained until Trial Mode is re enabled VIRTUAL CHANNELS Virtual channels are Maths c
431. nce value EE 71 Refresh key Reolster asas ce diet iia cta Relative H rnidity oasis aliada ste 101 117 Remote Modbus Clients tees 209 A Aa eue 79 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 User Guide Page 361 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE Remote Cont S Cont User name password sss 187 Screen Viewer network menu 201 Builder option 238 See also User screens Removable media ENEE Mese eeh sees 322 Capacitan 79 Importing Exporting aa ctra 51 Faltan TR TEN 10 Number s emerserit ere ERR aaa su 249 Instrument alarm ninas 10 SEO 57 184 Remove Sl Tm 264 Media uu teet aevum dr i e 21 Secondary WIS SP M M 197 BINS Servers aiii e eLo 204 Configuration Menu cin aan 344 Korea E 80 Replace ln with ueterem rre e s 86 SE EE 80 FREDO Mistica os al 171 Remote HO Stan ei 80 Configuration 5 iren pene E D PERIERE 171 Second Start End Char 141 Ne riti eii tere iaa 343 Security SO DS M NOE tege Seene ege eer 225 Configuration EP 185 Require Authorization Signing ou ccc 85 192 Key menu unayan kunan edt ce hed ed 344 Reset Levels cupo s m ee 186 Maths charitie luciana gerer pee 218 leng tte u uu UE tee do 266 Permissions sine raite eiit ee 188 Revision eene 25 91 194 216 Timer Select Nolo EMEN THEE TE 220 Display IT OCIeSi tri naue 22 Permission 188 GOUD nss 23 KEE Gave AA arenas E Pe E AEE E 50
432. nction Codes eeproreris eere EE e wer PURA Ip ES DIAGNOSTIC CODES 4 u uyu met RU EFCPTEPDUDQ eres DES EXCEPTION CODES sinit retai Eere i e Eeer Seed e 8 2 2 Data types ua pa ttp ag ER PANRERE dew ERR EEEE DATA ENCODING rer neie Spa aa E EA apaq sa S de 8 2 3 Invalid multiple register writes 0 00000000 0000 8 2 4 Security nie ee een tee eta s Yackle RURRO Sis aay dees dus TO SEND A LOGIN REQUEST x eere pH EIU a tag s GE eege 8 3 ADDRESS MAP ect ias EE CU TR VE EA 8 4 ADDRESS ALLOCATION u cost eene ard ed ES REPRE RE Casi des 8 4 1 Instrument data 8 4 2 Channel configuration data CHANNEL A o cate ced a ne RAD CHANNEE2 tell ed aca dE at GROUP Tinaco tw ead stoma ayaqku dex UC De MIR eec 8 4 5 Feature identification table FIT 846 Indirection tables cor u y Rd eR A HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 User Guide Page ix 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE LIST OF CONTENTS CONT Section 8 4 7 IEEE 32 bit channel configuration data CHANNEL eme tie dee neto CHANNEL2 2272 guabas geb Aere ico dias CHANNELS u ZT esee e Bee EE CHANNEIUS leed e racy adan de Ee CHANNELS ge MEC Uer repr erede rv nde CHANNEL G gege geg eer ERI CURES HE CHANNEL 7 Z ous sassa qam Se e RR DR S RT AE aee CHANNELS smart dit mau Rata CHANNEL 10 5 EENEG CHANNEL TI ot at yaa triada saa buo CHANNEL TZ atascada asia ata is
433. nd Scale high values to be entered for the selected parameter If None is selected the process value is displayed as a propor tion of 64k This item appears for Alarm setpoints and Process Value parameters only Point type allows the relevant point type i e input channel maths channel totaliser etc in the slave to be selected This item appears for Alarm setpoints and Process Value parameters only Point number allows the relevant point number in the slave to be selected This item appears for Parameter Batch Status only Group number allows that group the status of which is to be read to be defined Allows one of three rates to be set for reading the Process Value The three rates Low Medium and High have the values set in the Where the input value is scaled see above this Span setting sets the Zero and Full Scale values for the channel This is different from the situation obtaining in input channels where span and scale have different meanings Remaining items are as described in Channel Configuration in pection 4 3 3 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 150 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 16 MASTER COMMS Cont CONTROLLER PARAMETERS The following parameters may be accessible from a controller depending on type Note Figure 4 3 16f is a typical page and may show more or fewer items than appear on the actual screen for a particular controller Channel Nu
434. nd dragging within the highlighted area allows the component to be moved to any position on the screen Selecting a component and touching the option key Goto Editor key returns the user to the Component Property Editor with the selected component as the current component Using the Goto editor key without first highlighting a component re opens the Compo nent Property Editor with Main as the current component When editing via Bridge double clicking on a component returns to the Component Prop erty Editor with that component as the current component Import This key appears only for users accessing user pages using Bridge software Calls a browser screen allowing the user to select a User Screen for import More Calls next keyset Move Screen Moves the contents of the current screen to another specified screen leaving the current screen empty If the destination screen is already in use confirmation is required before the screen is overwritten New Allows the creation of a new blank screen Current screen components are deleted after confirmation leaving a blank screen Items can be retrieved using the Revert key above prior to the next Save Deploy or Goto canvas Revert Causes all changes made since the last Goto canvas operation to be undone Save Causes the current screen to be saved to flash or for Bridge operation to the PC database HA029324 User Guide Issue 5 Oct 10 Pag
435. nearisation tables Figure 4 3 9a shows the default configuration page Figure 4 3 9b shows a simple table for relating water depth to water volume for a cylindrical tank with a conical bottom User Linearisation 3 UserLin3 Descriptor UserLin3 Format Numen de See Number of Points X1 Ya Figure 4 3 9a User linearisation configuration page CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS User Linearisation Allows a user linearisation table to be selected for configuration Descriptor Allows the user to enter a name of up to 20 characters including spaces for the table Format This allows the point pair values to be entered as normal numeric values Numeric or in Scientific format Scientific When Scientific is selected values are displayed and en tered as a decimal number between 1 and 107 the mantissa followed by a multiplier the exponent E G to enter a value of 1244 5678 the value entered would be 1 2445678E3 where 3 represents the number of places that the decimal point has been shifted to the left in order to convert the value to a number between 1 and 10t To enter a value of 0 0004196 the entry would be 4 196E 4 Figure 4 3 9b below gives further examples t Notes 1 Strictly this is a number less than 10 as 10 would be 1 0E1 2 There must be at least one number after the decimal point HA029324 Page 89 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 9 USER LINEARIS
436. nel 4 alarms F8D2 63698 Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Note PV access is Read Write for any point configured with Slave Comms as its Type or Function Otherwise PV access is Read only User Guide Page 308 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 8 IEEE AREA CHANNEL RUN TIME DATA Cont CHANNEL 5 Parameter name Channel 5 value Channel 5 status Channel 5 Alarms CHANNEL 6 Parameter name Channel 6 value Channel 6 status Description Current process value PV Channel status 0 Good PV 1 Channel off 2 Over range 3 Under range 4 Hardware error Alarm information Bit 0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Bit 1 O No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3 Spare Bit 4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Bit5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7 Spare Bit 8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Bit9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11 Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15 Spare 5 Ranging error 6 Overflow 7 Bad PV 8 No data Description Current process valu
437. nel 9 Alarms CHANNEL 10 Parameter name Channel 10 value Channel 10 status Description Current process value PV Channel status 0 Good PV 1 Channel off 2 Over range 3 Under range 4 Hardware error Alarm information Bit 0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Bit 1 O No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3 Spare Bit 4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Bit5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7 Spare Bit 8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Bit9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11 Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15 Spare 5 Ranging error 6 Overflow 7 Bad PV 8 No data Description Current process value PV Channel status 0 Good PV 1 Channel off 2 Over range 3 Under range 5 Ranging error 6 Overflow 7 Bad PV 8 No data Uint16 See note Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Access See note Read only Start Addr Hex Dec F8E3 63715 F8E5 63717 F8E6 63718 Start Addr Hex Dec F8E7 63719 F8E9 63721 Register Length Reg
438. nel s configuration The default values are representations of an open switch for Open and a closed switch for Closed Fig ure 4 3 16h shows these two states Open String ER Closed String Figure 4 3 16h Default Open Closed depictions STATUS BITS This allows the user to view the value of a bit in a status word such as Instrument Status Channels in Group etc The relevant Register is accessed by entering its decimal number into the Register field which appears when User Defined is selected as Parameter Example Figure 4 3 16i below shows a master channel configuration page which causes a message to be sentto all groups if the memory device inserted in a slave recorder is full Open closed strings are also entered as Disk OK and DiskFull respectively so that if this channel is included in a group then whichever of these legends is appropriate will be displayed in the channel faceplate Note The message string is entered as a part of Message Configuration as described in ection 4 3 9 From the recorder s documentation Instrument Status is held at register number 22 As can be seen from table 4 3 16b disk full status is reported by bit 4 DI Item being tested Status Not used Always zero Not used Always zero Not used Always zero Card Disk O Inserted 1 Missing Card Disk 0 Not full 1 Full Not used Always zero Not used Always zero Channel status 0 No failures 1 Channel failure 0 1 2 3
439. nels Stop Bits 1Y Views Parity None Y Archive Data Bits 87 Timeout 250 ms Events First Start Char 0 Figure B9e Event Buttons Second Start Char 0 First End Char 113 M LS EE Second End Char 10 User Linearisations Group 1 le Batch ASCII input o Raine Section 4 3 15 Group 3 e Group 4 y Figure B9f lt Totalisers Group 5 Counters Group 6 y Timers Apply H Discard Connections Master Comms Figure B9h Output Channels Demand Writes Emails Reports Figure B9i i g EtherNet IP Server Modbus Slave Section 4 3 15 Options Port Serial 1 Y Select port Link Error Count 0 Reset Error Count Protocol Modbus Slave M Connection Baud Rate 19200Y Select required Baud rate Stop Bits 1 Y Select 1 or 2 Parity None V Select None Odd or Even Apply H Discard Modbus Master Section 4 3 15 Port Serial 1 Y Select port Link Error Count o Reset Error Count Protocol Modbus Master M Connection EIA4Xxy Baud Rate 19200 V Select required Baud rate Stop Bits 1 Y Select 1 or 2 Parity None V Select None Odd or Even Timeout 1000 ms Enable error code B Enable Talk Through Apply Y Discard Figure B9g Config menu struct ure sheet 4 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 User Guide Page 341 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B9 MENU STRUCTURE Cont
440. ng final null characters is exactly 60 characters long or a multiple of 60 characters long then the final extension message contains a space followed by 59 nulls Example 2 3 Time and date appear only in the main message not the continuation message s Example 1 Message of less than 60 characters Character no p 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 English message gt gt 0 4 04 02 116 311 05 Balttch stopped because of belt failure ASCII Hex gt 30 34 2F 30 34 2F 30 32 20 31 36 3A 33 31 3A 30 35 20 42 61 74 63 68 20 73 74 6F 70 70 65 64 20 62 65 63 61 75 73 65 20 6F 66 20 62 65 6C 74 20 66 61 69 6C 75 72 65 00 00 00 00 00 Example 2 Message of exactly 60 characters
441. ngineer When set to zero the login remains valid until changed For any other value the user is logged out after the number of minutes entered here has elapsed since the last time the screen was touched This field does not appear if the Login Timeout has been set to zero For non zero time out values this allows the user to choose whether a any unapplied changes are lost when the Login Timeout period has elapsed or b the login timeout is ignored if there are any unapplied configuration chang es For Active Directory users this parameter is configured atthe Active Directory and the value set at the instrument is ignored For other users this allows the user to limit to three the number of attempt that can be made to enter a password The choices are 3 times and unlimited When set to 3 times the user login is disabled after three incorrect attempts to enter the password have been made A System Message appears on the screen and is also sent to the chart 12 07 06 13 20 42 User Frederick Bloggs login disabled invalid password In order to re enable the login a user with Engineer access level must dese lect Login Disabled in the menu described in section 4 4 1 above For Active Directory users this parameter is configured atthe Active Directory and the value set at the instrument is ignored For other users this field allows the user to set an expiry period of up to 999 days which applies to all passwords The
442. nly Read Write Access See note Read only Start Addr Hex Dec ATEB 41451 ATEC 41452 ATED 41453 Start Addr Hex Dec ATEE 41454 ATEF 41455 Register Length Register Length 3 Under range 8 No data 4 Hardware error Alarm information Bit 0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Read only Bit 1 0 No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Read Write Bit 3 Spare Bit4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Bit5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7 Spare Bit8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Bit9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11 Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15 Spare Ch8 Alarms ATFO 41456 Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Note PV access is Read Write for any point configured with Slave Comms as its Type or Function Otherwise PV access is Read only HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 User Guide Page 291 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 3 CHANNEL RUN TIME DATA Cont CHANNEL 9 Parameter name Ch9 value Ch9 status Ch9 Alarms CHANNEL 10 Parameter name Ch10 value
443. nnel 4 378 99 C Channel 5 0 49V j 0 00 1 00 Figure 3 4 5a Horizontal bargraph display single column example Groupname G Channel 1 700 87C Channel 2 487 39C AY E y ne Channel 3 235 68C I Channel 4 378 990 TN lt r a mm w eme Channel 5 0 49V 4 Channel 6 0 85V w s rw Channel 7 689 43C Channel 8 483 72C Yw ww SE Channel 9 255 816 Channel 10 3750fC n 400 007 33 ae Channel 11 0 58V Channel 12 0 9 V Channel 13 235V 1 Channel 14 235V rrr l aspere ees 500 Channel 15 235V Te 320A www Channel 17 316A Channel 18 332A fo 500 Io 500 64 Channel 20 54 P een NU 26 Channel 22 47 B ed o cl Channel 23 56 Ghannel2 8196 100 o Figure 3 4 5b Horizontal bargraph display dual column example HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 41 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 4 6 Numeric display mode Entered from Horizontal bargraph mode by means of the down arrow key or selected using the Root Menu key this display mode shows the Process Variable PV values as digital values The format which is automatically selected is based on the number of channels in the display group Figures 3 4 6a 3 4 6b and 3 4 6c show typical large frame examples of the one two and three column versions of this display mode
444. not supported for channels 76 to 100 Select to include Span High not supported for channels 76 to 100 Select to include Span Low not supported for channels 76 to 100 Select to include the points decimal places values not supported for channels 76 to 100 If ticked default the existing list is deleted and replaced by the Wizard items when configure is operated If not ticked the selected items are appended to the existing table using any empty spaces If there are no spaces the new entries are ignored If there are insufficient spaces the available spaces are filled using lowest channel num bers first and any overflow is lost Enter the number of the first point of the required point range This value must be lower than the To point value Enter the number of the final point of the required point range This value must be higher than the From point value Notes 1 The point range is the same for all parameters selected and the points are contiguous In order to select non contiguous points or to enter different ranges for different point types it is necessary to configure each required range separately and operate the Configure key after each range ensuring that the Start New Table selection is not ticked 2 If any parameter other than Process Value is selected for any channel in the range 76 to 100 the selection will be accepted but the values returned will be meaningless
445. ns Major 10 Scale Divisions Minor Descriptor Channel 1 A B Switching pv Allows Span A high low Span B high low Zone A high low Zone B high low and Colour A B values to be entered for use Spanned y by Trend jobs Span Low V These fields appear only if Span High v Spanned is selected Zone Low 9 5 Zone High h100 96 Pv FormatNumeric Y Select Numeric or Scientific Max Decimal Digits Colour El Alarm Number 1 Select Alarm number Enable Unlatched Y Type Absolute High Y Setpoint Source Constant Threshold V E These fields vary according to Hysteresis V Alarm Type selection Dwellp S Job Number 1 v 9 Select Job number Category Batch Y Gen pieni V These fields vary according Group 1 Group 1 Y to the selected job category On Active v Apply Discard 1 IH J Those fields vary with the type of scale selected Figure 4 3 3a Channel alarm configuration menu typical Notes 1 Numeric values e g input low can be up to 10 characters including decimal point 2 Refer tosection 3 3 1 for numeric and text entry techniques HA029324 Page 65 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 3 CHANNEL ALARM CONFIGURATION Cont CHANNEL NUMBER The current channel and its descriptor are displayed Touching the window area allows another channel to be selected for configuration Alternatively
446. nt 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 2600 2700 2800 2900 Oxygen potential kilocalories milliVolts 0 500 1000 1500 2000 Degrees Celsius Note Colours serve no purpose in the figure above other than to simplify interpretation Change of state Element Melting point Boiling point Sublimation point Transition point Figure 4 3 11t Free energy diagram HA029324 Page 121 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont GROUP MINIMUM The following description assumes a group name of Furnace 1 which contains four channels with de scriptors Temp 1 Temp 2 Temp 3 and Temp Ai The output ofthe Group Minimum function is the current lowest value of any of the points in the source group The required source group is selected by picklist Should a point return a non valid value it is excluded from the calculation and the result of the function is the minimum of the remaining points DESCRIPTORS As a part of the Group Minimum function configuration it is possible to select one of two types of de scriptor User Defined and Minimum Channel Figure 4 3 11u below shows the relevant area of the configuration page aths Number 1 Furnace 1 min temp Y Maths Number 1 Group 1 minimum v Valu
447. nternal flash user required repair EE 10 Page Display mode 75 Interval Binario stats Timeout Ee 74 Interval recording tete Horizontal Invalid item EtherNet IP ANTI CIE S 252 Invalid multiple register WriteS cinc 266 Barrage tet epe rete D et reet 254 Invalid Password Entry ecce 83 Enable nasin 75 Inv lid Selection ooo ass degen 64 O sassa A EE 174 EE SOME EEN 201 Minor Divisions sss 252 LEG OU fo sito adds 201 Wend mode ninia miens 32 Manual em 202 Enable A O E 75 Modbus slave TNCS 145 USE SChECHS uuu heh codec itin eet E 256 Web Set VG ondes e artt 350 J Hysteresis e 71 delere 217 l Ee 224 D EREM 224 dente eege Greg 249 AS s 220 Image EEN EEN 258 A III II II a L L 219 File EM E UE 249 A eee e enel 219 Implicit O messaging 173 210 Demand Write S cesa 223 Import GEES 225 AN IMAGE LLL 258 Even nu tieniti E PE sh a 84 Ethernettable icr entes 174 Input channel 73 Key ASEDIO E DEE URI ERICA PAI 243 Maths I I Ia 218 M 50 239 IO E 218 User linearisation asss 31 OUEDUE eege 223 Include message I OOOI SS Su Sia D SOS 168 Recordin E 221 Increment counter job sss 219 htl jm 225 Indirection tables Modbus sse 300 User Guide HA029324 Page 358 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE Jobs Cont M Cont Mirra 212 Mass flow Configuration menu 347 Be TEE 100
448. nto the area accessed by Read Data and then set Text Length to the length of the new message If the host fails to set Text Length to zero after reading a message no new messages will be read If Text Length is zero no new messages have been generated since the last poll LONG MESSAGES All messages are terminated with a null character Messages of up to 60 characters including the time and date and the terminating null can be read by the master device in a single transaction If the message contains more than 60 characters one or more continuation messages of up to 60 characters each are placed in Read Text as soon as the previous message has been confirmed as read The master can continue to read all these messages until it detects a null character Intelligent masters can then re assemble the characters into a single message Non intelligent masters can treat the continuation messages as separate messages sent at the same time as the first message Notes 1 If any of the messages is of less than 60 characters the unused part of message is filled with null characters example 1 Thus by reading character 60 the master can determine either that this is the last message character 60 null or that there is at least one message to follow character 60 is not null 2 Continuation messages cannot contain only null characters For this reason if the message itself i e excludi
449. number of days remaining to expiry is shown in the login page If set to zero then the expiry period does not apply Note All required passwords MUST be changed within this number of days or all logins will be disabled In this situation the configuration of the recorder will be available only to those with Service Level access and in most cases a call will have to be made to the recorder supplier or serv ice agency But see Password Change on Expiry below Minimum Password Length For Active Directory users this parameter is configured atthe Active Directory Require Signing and the value set at the instrument is ignored For other users this allows a minimum length of password to be entered de fault 0 minimum 3 If an attempt is made to enter a new password with fewer characters than the minimum a warning message appears on the screen Invalid Password Length and the new password is ignored If this field is enabled then changes to the recorder operation configuration or any other item included in the history file can be made only by those users whose Can Sign permission is enabled in the menu described in sec tion 4 4 1 above When Apply is attempted a signature page appears which requires the entry of the correct password for the selected user and of a note which would normally be used to give the reason for the change HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 192 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER US
450. o be displayed with the required precision None leaves the returned value unchanged For some slaves scale zero scale low is returned as value O and full scale scale high as value 65 535 Hex FFFF with intermediate values having proportionate val ues For example the value 15 would be represented as 32 767 7FFF for a chan nel scale 0 to 30 as would a value of 50 for a channel scaled 0 to 100 and a value of 45 for a channel scaled 30 to 60 In order to convert this reading to an understand able value a scaling factor must be entered If the low and high scale entries match the slave channel s scale the master reading will be the same as the slave s reading Selecting High Low allows Scale low and Scale high values to be entered for the selected parameter If None is selected the process value is displayed as a proportion of 65 535 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 154 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 16 MASTER COMMS Cont READING DIGITAL VALUES Digital values can either be the open closed status of a discrete input or it can be a status string show ing for example Instrument Status if User Defined is selected as Parameter Type OPEN CLOSED STRINGS The text strings for the open and closed statuses of a digital input channel can be read by Enabling the Digital checkbox for the relevant slave and Channel number The strings returned will be those entered in the slave chan
451. o which the document relates without the prior written permission of Eurotherm Limited Eurotherm Limited pursues a policy of continuous development and product improvement The specifi cations in this document may therefore be changed without notice The information in this document is given in good faith but is intended for guidance only Eurotherm Limited will accept no responsibility for any losses arising from errors in this document Invensyse EUROTHERMe Restriction of Hazardous Substances RoHS Product group 6100A 6180A 6100XI0 6180XI0 6100E Table listing restricted substances Chinese BR fbl e AR 58 5 IJ ERE 6100A 6180A 6100XIO Product 6100A 6180A 6100XIO Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the limit requirement in SJ T11363 2006 Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above the limit requirement in SJ T11363 2006 Approval Name Pesiton Snte Dae Martin Greenhalgh Quality Manager Mat G ca Lee 01 dug 20 1A029470U670 CN24705 Issue 2 Aug 08 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE LIST OF SECTIONS Section 0 OU QO sN ES m EFFECTIVITY This manual refers to recorders fitted with software version 5 1
452. ocal subnet if this is not already selected 13 Click on the relevant Network Card and Click on OK 14 Minimise the RSLinx window Available Driver Types Close EtherNet IP Driver y Add New m o Help Configured Drivers Name and Description Status AB_DF1 1 DEI Sta 0 COM1 RUNNING Running Configure Configure driver AB_ETHIP 1 EtherNet IP Settings Browse Local Subnet C Browse Remote Subnet Description IP Address Windows Default Realtek RTL8139 Family PCI Fast Ethernet NIC Packet Scheduler Mi 192 168 10 9 Broadcom NetXtreme 5 xx Gigabit Controller Packet Scheduler Miniport 149 121 133 1 Figure 4 3 21k Configure EtherNet IP driver HA029324 Page 180 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 21 ETHERNET IP OPTION Cont CREATING A NETWORK SCANNER 1 Inthe left pane tree view of the RSLogix 5000 window right click on the EtherNet symbol and select New Module from the menu figure 4 3 211 2 Expand the communications list click on the symbol figure 4 3 21m 3 1 0 Configuration ea CompactLogix5323E QB1 System gi 1769 L23E QB1 TEST6000 Wil Select Module 1769 L23E QB1 Ethernet Port LocalENB Module Description Vendor A wem s HH CompactBu g New Module Digital C3 Embed Drives gd oi HMI gd 2 Embedded OB16 Discrete_Outputs Expansion I O Figure 4 3 21l Right click on the EtherNet
453. of alarms on this channel 0 to 2 0 Numeric 1 Digital strings Alarm 1 enable 0 Off 2 Latched 1 Unlatched 3 Trigger Alarm 1 type 0 Absolute low 1 Absolute high 2 Deviation in 3 Deviation out 4 Rate of change rise 5 Rate of change fall Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 2 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 2 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 3 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 3 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 4 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 4 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Scaled Scaled Scaled Scaled Enum Uint16 Enum String_5 String_8 String_8 String_20 Uint16 Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Start Addr Hex Dec O6CF 1743 06D0 1744 06D1 1745 06D2 1746 06D3 1747 06D4 1748 06D5 1749 06D6 1750 06D9 1753 06DB 1755 06DF 1759 06E3 1763 06E7 1767 06EB 1771 06F5 1781 06FF 1791 0700 1792 0701 1793 073D 1853 073E 1854 073F 1855 0740 1856 074A 1866 074B 1867 074C 1868 07
454. oleg eu S9 ze anen 19s eJ0 sun 0 M01 ege Aeau A 103 1 JOqUNN SUEN Buryoyims g v 18 Aqua uojeg mous sesie10 1 10 d149Seq 1 1ayeos mun 1ejeos polled UE uonoes A A dnouo 1 dnog A dnoio adoos OL ey uonoes ms uondo yajeg asero suum o 1eseJq siun shun preosiq Aiddy suun yo 666666 Jo 1n9 yBIH me A sun yo o 440 1n9 MO AH A 1 jeuueuo JO Ie1o 1 LA 4asiye 0 shun 9svez anjena 9 aiqeu preosiq Aiddy du A 9Iqeua lA sasijejo1 L 49qQUINN 19SIJBJO z SIUIO4 jo 49quunN A oueumnw Jeul04 guru sn 401diu9s q Agunasn e uoll siiue u 1 Jon 6 v uono s Suonesueoaur Jes A xuel8 uM 9 Boel uoisined Bijuoo uyM S eoejdeg A A JasIJeJO1 o9Jnos y A enjen payloads uM p soe day A JasiejoL eo4nos E A101duoseg peyioeds uM soe doy le y uollo s uondo Jasijejo A anjen anos UI z soe day SJ9SI 10 101duoseg oinos uM 1 aoe doy Sm 9 v e 9 2 1 40 anjen ay eDessey yoyeg A jo enje aul 1 JequinN SBESSIN pieosiq ddy suonesueeur Jaen 8 e y uono s sabessoy A uonesuouiny elmbay sobessay A Buus onbe 1x81 uo 1x 1 peuo1e m suong 1ue 3 wei yojixaL Ze y uonoes payo d L suolngiu Adg uonng uo1lduSs q A uoma t jequinN uo
455. on 32767 will the value be transmitted ac curately For example a value of 12 3456 needs more than 16 bit resolution and the transmitted value would be the maximum value of 32767 over range Reducing the number of decimal places to three for example 12 345 allows the value to be encoded as a 16 bit value which can be transmitted accu rately 8 4 1 Instrument data Start Addr Register Hex Dec Length Instrument type Instrument type number Uint16 Read only 0001 1 Instrument descriptor Instrument descriptor up to 20 characters String 20 Read only 0002 2 Reserved Not used 000C 12 Instrument status Uint16 Read only 0016 22 Bit 0 Not used value always 0 Read only Bit 1 Not used value always 0 Read only Bit 2 Not used value always 0 Read only Bit 3 0 Compact Flash card inserted 1 Missing Read only Bit 4 0 Compact Flash card not full 1 Full Read only Bit 5 Not used value always 0 Read only Bit6 Not used value always 0 Read only Bit7 Not used value always 0 Read only Bit 8 Not used value always 0 Read only Bit9 O No channel failures 1 channel failure Read only Bits 10 to 15 Not used value always 0 Read only Config counter Counts configuration changes Powers up at zero Uint16 Read only 0017 23 and is reset to zero at brown out Time Current instrument time UTC format Double Read only 0018 24 Date Current instrument date Double Read only 001C 28 Global alarm acknowledge
456. on release off or Latched push once on push again off etc Note Unlatched button action occurs when the button is released Unlatched types have a single text string associated with them Latched types have two text strings one for the On latched state the other for the Off state Figure 4 3 7 shows the configuration menu Event buttons are independent of the Security Management option described infection 4 4 2 This al lows individual buttons to be a entirely open to the user b to require signing or c to require both sign ing and authorization as required Button Number 1 Button 1 y 9 Select 1 to 96 Descriptor Button 1 Type Latched w Select Latched or Unlatched Text Off Text Enter button text Latched Text on Text Enter latched text Require Signing Y appears only if Type latched Require Authorisation le Apply Discard Figure 4 3 7 Event Button option configuration menu Button number Allows selection of the button 1 to 96 which is to be configured Descriptor Allows a button name of up to 20 characters to be entered Type Select Latched or Unlatched as defined above Text For unlatched buttons this allows entry ofthe legend which isto appear on the button when displayed For latched buttons this is the legend which appears when the but ton is in its non active off state Latched Text This field appears only if
457. onfig Channels area Eection 4 3 3 configure the channels as appropriate Those channels which are to receive data from the PLC should have their Input Type set to EtherNet IP Comms Input The System Copy facility section 4 6 4 can be used to speed up the process Maths channels are set up is a similar way ection 4 3 11 4 Set scale units etc to appropriate values Note For the EtherNet IP application the number of decimal places is set to zero by default Editing this value may lead to loss of resolution in the values displayed 5 Configure the EtherNet IP input table as required described earlier in this section 7 Ensure that the PLC is connected to the recorder either directly using a cross over EtherNet cable or via a switch using non cross over cable RUN MODE 1 Setthe PLC into either Remote or Run mode 2 Setthe PLC online STATUS INDICATORS The status indicators at the top left corner of the RSLogix 5000 Page Figure 4 3 21s show the status of the link between the pc and the PLC Status indicators PLC Mode indicator Program DE T Program Mode m Rem Run EH E Run Mode Run m Wi Run Mode DS S Controller OK y nia aha aries s Controller OK Battery OK tt Battery Fault No Edits amp m s a No Edits amp ui po S No Edits Ex erasa aa a H 8 1 0 OK H Figure 4 3 21s Status displays It is possible to check that the PLC is communicating with the recorder using the Tags displ
458. only Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Read Write Bit 15 Spare Parameter name Description Access F9F2 63986 Notes 1 A B Switching B values are not accessible via Modbus For this reason Span Zone Colour etc are all A values 2 If an alarm s Setpoint Source ection 4 3 3 is set to anything other than Constant the value returned will be the previously configured constant value 3 Maths channels 101 onwards are not accessible via Modbus Page 127 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 12 Totalisers INTRODUCTION Each totaliser allows the user to maintain a running total of any input channel or of any maths channel Using the maths functions it is possible to totalise combinations of input channels so the value of two channels added together or the difference between two channels could be totalised if required The totaliser equation is tot to mn where tot totaliser value this sample tot totaliser value last sample ma value oftotalised channel this sample PSF Period Scaling Factor See Period scaler description below USF Units Scaling Factor See Unit scaler description below Note Time between samples Recording interval set in Group configuration See Update information in Annex Alfor details CONFIGURATION
459. only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Start Addr Hex Dec 2FF1 12273 2FF2 12274 2FF3 12275 2FF4 12276 2FF5 12277 2FF6 12278 12279 12280 12283 12301 2311 3021 12321 3022 12322 3023 12323 305F 12383 3060 12384 3061 12385 3062 12386 306C 12396 306D 12397 306E 12398 306F 12399 3079 12409 307A 12410 307B 12411 307C 12412 3086 12422 3087 12423 3088 12424 3089 12425 Register Length ARRBBP HNOO ERE oo Page 125 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 MATHS OPTION Cont MATHS CHANNEL RUN TIME DATA This table show addresses for maths channel 1 run time data Generally channel N address channel 1 address 3 N 1 decimal Please see the hoteg at the end ofthis section 4 3 11 CHANNEL 1 Parameter name Ch1 value Chl status Ch1 Alarms Description Current process value PV Channel status 0 Good PV 1 Channel off 2 Over range 3 Under range 4 Hardware error Alarm information Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 0 No alarm 1 Ack 1 nowledge a Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 o alarm 3 Ack Bit 10 nowledge a Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 nowledge a nowledge a 5 Ranging error 6 Overflow 7 Bad PV 8 No data 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm
460. only if Circular Set Circular Chart Full New Chart Y 44 tings enabled ITA MERERI Grid Type From Point Y Select None Linear Log or From Point Grid Type Linear v Grid Divisions Major 5 Grid Divisions Minor from Channel 3 y Recording Enable ke Recording Speed 1 200 mme l Grid Type Log d Recording Intervali s OT Grid Decades 5 Trend History Duration 314 36 Days Recording Enable Archive to Media Enable is enabled Archive via FTP Enable Alarm Message W Ack Message wi Point Type Totaliser Y Selection 1 3 5 7 9 Enable Y E Disable TurbineTempA TurbineTempB EIC Apply H Discard List of all available points input channels maths channels totalisers etc v Y Figure 4 3 2a Group configuration menu HA029324 Page 59 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 2 GROUP CONFIGURATION Cont GROUP NUMBER Allows a particular group to be selected for configuration TREND UNITS Allows mm hr or inches per hour to be selected for the chart speed Automatically converts the trend speed field below DESCRIPTOR Allows the group name to be edited See for text entry techniques TREND TYPE This allows the selection of Adaptive Recording for vertical and horizontal trend modes The purpose of adaptive recording is to ensure that rapid short
461. onstant then with this permission set the user may edit the constant value s RESET MATHS Allows the user to reset applicable maths functions See section 4 3 11 for further details of maths func tions PRESET TOTALISERS Allows the user to preset totaliser values if the option is fitted See section 4 3 12 for further details of totalisers PRESET COUNTERS Allows the user to preset counter values if the option is fitted Seefection 4 3 13 for further details of Counters START RESET TIMERS Allows the user to start and reset the timer value See for further details of timers SET CLOCK Allows each user with this permission enabled to set the recorder time and date functions under Bystem Section 4 6 1 ARCHIVING CONTROL Allows each user with this permission enabled full access to archive control HA029324 Page 188 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 4 1 ACCESS LEVELS Cont SAVE RESTORE Allows each user with this permission enabled full access to saving and restoring functions as described in above Without this permission the SAVE RESTORE key does not appear PASTE DELETE FILES Allows each user with this permission enabled to Paste and Delete files as described in fection 5 FULL CONFIGURATION Allows each user with this permission enabled full access the recorder configuration FULL SECURITY Allows each user with this permission enabled full access to all r
462. ord Category No Action Y Apply Discard Apply L Discard Sy Archive Event Buttons Section 4 3 7 Button Number 1 Button e Section 4 3 5 Descriptor Button 1 Type Latched w Text Off Text Latched Text jon Text Require Signing Require Authorisation Apply Discard Compression Normal Y Flash Size 96 25 Mb Shortest Trend History Group 1 Duration CSV include Values CSV include Messages CSV include Header details CSV include Column headings CSV Date Time format 10 86 2 XIXIXIXI readsheet numeric Y Days These fields appear only if Media File Format is CSV or Binary and CSV CSV use Tab delimiter Show Local settings Y Options User Linearisations Section 4 3 9 User Linearisation 3 UserLin3 Y Descriptor UserLin3 Format Numeric Y Number of Points X1 Media Archive to Media Media file format mediacard W None y Binary and CSV Y B O A a x2 Y2 1 Apply Discard Messages On Media Full Overwrite y Section 4 3 8 Media Size 30 4746094 Mb Message Number 1 The value of y Removable Media Capacity 33 18 Days Message The value of 1 2 amp 3 4 5 Media Full event limit 100 Replace 1 with Source Descriptor y Ap
463. orizontal line through the centre of the chart Values for other angles times can be most easily found from the selected from the Option key or by touching anywhere in the chart or in the green background area for a few seconds This displays the currently selected speed of revolution ofthe chart This speed is set up as a part of Group configuration fection 23 3 Up to 12 faceplates can be displayed giving point values and alarm indication The message bar at the bottom of the screen displays the latest message If an up ar row appears at the right hand end of the bar there is more than one message Touch ing the message bar calls a View Messages window detailing previous messages See the description infection 3 4 2 for more details FULL SCREEN DISPLAY As shown in figure 3 4 3c below this maximizes the chart diameter leaving only the chart chart speed and faceplates if selected on on display The figure shows a view with faceplates selected off Forthe large frame recorder faceplate on off selection can be made only from one of the other display modes as the navigation keys are not visible in this display mode Normal View UI Group name es 11 07 06 10 10 1 hr rev 11 07 06 11 05 11 07 06 10 15 11 07 06 11 00 11 07 06 10 20 11 07 06 10 55 11 07 06 10 25 11 07 06 10 50 11 07 06 10 30 11 07 06 10 45 11 07 06 10 35 11 07 06 10 40 Figure 3 4 3c Circular Trend tull screen view with fa
464. ost set up as a part of that host s FTP configuration The path name may be up to 103 characters in length HA029324 Page 79 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 5 ARCHIVE CONFIGURATION Cont PRIMARY REMOTE HOST For Remote setting only If a Domain Name Server DNS is specified in the Network key Name page fig 4 5 2 then the Primary Remote Host is the server name If DNS is not selected then the Primary Remote Host is the IP address of the remote host set up in the host s Control Panel Network PRIMARY LOGIN NAME PASSWORD For Remote setting only Login name and password of the remote host account assigned either by the Network administrator or in the Guest account of the remote host s FTP Server or User Manager configuration The password which must be of between eight and 20 characters must be entered twice to ensure integrity SECONDARY REMOTE HOST LOGIN PASSWORD For Remote setting only As for primary versions but for a secondary host The secondary route is used only if the primary route fails CSV FILES This allows archive files to be transferred in comma separated values CSV format to a memory device or via FTP to a remote host computer Compression Normal W Binary format only Flash Size 99 25 Mb Shortest Trend History Group 1 Duration 108 86 Days CSV include Values W CSV include Messages v CSV include Header deta
465. ouching the File key of thel menu and can be used to display the contents of directories stored both in the user area of flash memory and on any bulk storage device inserted or connected The first display page shows the volume or device names associated with the various areas of memory available to the user If one of these volume names is selected touched and the open folder key op erated the contents of the selected volume is displayed This would typically consist of a list of folders Similarly if a folder name is selected and the open folder key is touched the contents of the folder is displayed and so on To return to higher levels the close folder key is used The path name of the current window is shown at the top of the window Note The open folder and close folder key functions are the same as the down arrow and up arrow key functions respectively FILER OPTION MENU KEYS These keys appear in a pop up menu when the option key is pressed This menu appears only when an actual file has been selected i e it does not appear if a directory folder or volume is selected Cut and paste functions are available only to users with the relevant access permissions section 4 4 1 Cut Removes a file from the list ready for pasting to another destination Copy Copies a file from the list ready for pasting to another destination Delete Removes a file from the memory New Allows a new dir
466. ound colour to 55 and Line thickness to 35 6 Press Save then Close Note because of the thickness of the lines takes the corners beyond the display area an error mes sage may appear in the Last error field for the lines position maybe out of bounds This should not prevent the screen being drawn correctly Figure 7 4 19b Example User Guide HA029324 Page 262 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 4 20 Arc This causes a curved line of user definable thickness to be drawn anti clockwise between start angle and start angle arc angle The origin centre of the arc is X position 1 2 Width Y position 1 2 Height Arcs cannot be filled Notes 1 Angle increases anticlockwise 2 Height 2 3 width if measuring in percent 3 Arcs cannot be filled the shading in the figure is included for clarity only X Y Lum AL Arc end point 1 2 Height Arc Start point a a Start angle 1 2 Width B Are angle Figure 7 4 20a Arc dimension definitions EXAMPLE An arc definition of X position 50 Y position 50 Width 50 Height 50 Start angle 0 Arc angle 270 would produce the curve depicted in figure 7 4 20b below z 14 24 31 Engineer 11 07 06 X position 1 y position Width Height Start of arc End of arc M Figure 7 4 20b Sample arc HA029324 User Guide Issue 5 Oct 10 Page
467. ource has been defined see figures below Host Address Name Eil Hide NUsbFront RELEASE FTP Username FTP Password Source Path name to upgrade file Figure 4 6 3b Remote upgrade details FileName upgrade module Open Cancel Figure 4 6 3c Local upgrade detai n CAUTION Power to the recorder must be maintained during the upgrade process or the recorder might not power up If such a situation arises the manufacturer s local service centre should be contacted for advice Notes 1 Recording is suspended and the user interface touchscreen is disabled whilst the upgrade is in progress 2 When upgrading from another instrument using Remote Upgrade the I P address or net work name of the source instrument should be typed into the Host Address Name field and mediacard or usbfront etc as appropriate should be entered in the Source field 3 If Audit trail is enabled see Management Eection 4 4 2 then system messages are gener ated containing date time source and status details of the upgrade 4 Upgrade appears in the System menu only for access levels which have Perform Upgrades enabled in Security Access configuration section 4 4 1 5 Signing Authorizing apply to upgrades if the relevant boxes are ticked in Security M
468. ously available and is thus dependent on the overall configuration of the recorder An instrument alarm is generated if there is insufficient free RAM available see fection 3 1 3 for details HA029324 Page 109 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont SATURATED STEAM MASS FLOW Note The overall accuracy of a flow measurement installation depends on a number of fac tors outside the control of the recorder manufacturer For this reason the recorder manu facturer takes no responsibility for the accuracy of the results obtained using the mass flow equations implemented in the maths pack The equations solved is Flow QM t Vir AV GS where OM Mass flow in kg sec at time t Note 1 Flow Measured flow in m sec at time t Note 1 V Volume of liquid per kg of steam m kg at temperature T C AV V Viq Where V is the volume of vapour per kg of steam at temperature T C d Dryness factor between 0 no vapour and 100 no liquid V and AV are available from published tables note 2 but the recorder user need only enter values for measured flow and either the temperature or the pressure of the steam These values can be constants in put channels or maths channels Figure 4 3 11h and accompanying parameter descriptions give full details Maths Number 1 Math 1 Value 123 4567 Units Function Saturated Ste
469. own in figure 3 4 4b The bars have a set minimum width and if the total number of points in the group cannot be displayed within the width of the screen a horizontal scroll bar appears allowing hidden bars to be viewed Similarly the faceplates reduce in height to a minimum readable height If there are more point faceplates than can be accommodated within the height of the screen a vertical scroll bar appears allowing hidden faceplates to be displayed as required Page 38 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 4 4 VERTICAL BARGRAPH Cont a 11 48 56 Logged out EK 11 07 06 Channel 1 A Channel 2 Y ell M Channel 4 A TEMA A 700 87 C 487 39 C 235 68 C 378 99 C 0 49V 800 00 800 00 400 00 400 00 1 00 Figure 3 4 4a Vertical bargraph display 1 to 6 channels M d 11 49 37 11 07 06 80 80 40 40 1 0 1 0 80 80 40 407 1 0 1 0 1500 500 500 500 500 500 100 100 100 100 100 1 93 2E RTT 700 87 C Channel 2 AY 487 39 C Channel 3 235 68 C Channel 4 378 99 Channel 5 A 0 49v 0 85v d 5 689 43 C Channel 8 483 72 C Channel 9 255 81 C Channel 10 375 01 C Channel 11 la 0 53V Channel 12 he 0 79V Channel 13__ A 2235y Logged out Figure 3 4 4b Vertical bargraph display more than 6 channels
470. ownloads can occur automatically when the Security Man ager detects that a local change has occurred or manually as and when required HA029324 Page 194 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 4 2 MANAGEMENT Cont CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS Cont Centralised security Cont If Centralised Security is enabled the Domain name can be edited only using Security Manager software Login by User List This checkbox appears if either of the Auditor options and or the Security manage Select the required access level and enter the password if required ment option is fitted When enabled the normal login window appears with a pull down list of users Once a user has been selected the correct password for that user must be entered in order to log in When disabled the user must enter a user name and associated password in order to log in Type in your user ID and a password if required User ID Logged out Y User ID Login By User List enabled Login By User List not enabled Page 195 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 4 3 Adduser Figure 4 4 3 shows that the selecting of Add User from the SECURITY picklist allows new user IDs to be entered together with passwords and a chosen set of access permissions which can subsequently be edited under Security Access The ADD key and the APPLY key must bo
471. p b to navigate backwards through a text string when edit ing or c to select the previous channel whilst in configuration Where relevant the function of this key is mimicked by the Left cursor key Used a to select the next group b to navigate forwards through a text string when editing or C to select the next channel whilst in configuration Where relevant the function of this key is mimicked by the Right cursor key Calls a pop up Options menu allowing the user to carry out functions such as entering quitting history turning channel cycling on and off etc according to context Calls the Root Menu as described below To quit the Root menu touch the root key again ROOT MENU KEYS Home Operator File Remove Media Go to View Causes a return to the Home page from any page in the recorder As delivered the Home page is the Group 1 vertical trend display as depicted in figure 3 but this can be edited in to be any ofthe other available groups display modes Horizontal trend Vertical bargraph etc Causes the top level Operator page to appear The appearance of this display is dictated by the security level that the recorder is set to and by the access level of the user As despatched from the factory the recorder is in logged out mode and the Operator page contains only Archive Security and System keys Further details appear in below Allows the file system in that area of Flash memory tha
472. pdate rate in milliseconds Archive to flash rate in milliseconds Group descriptor 20 characters max 16 Registers holding the group contents as follows Register 1 Bit 0 O Point 1 not in group 1 Point 1 is in group Bit 1 O Point 2 not in group 1 Point 2 is in group Bit 2 O Point 3 not in group 1 Point 3 is in group Etc Bit 15 0 Point 16 not in group 1 Point 16 is in group Register 2 as register 1 but for points 17 to 32 Register 3 as register 1 but for points 33 to 48 Register 4 as register 1 but for points 49 to 64 Register 5 as register 1 but for points 65 to 80 Register 6 as register 1 but for points 81 to 96 Register 7 as register 1 but for points 97 to 112 Register 8 as register 1 but for points 113 to 128 Register 9 as register 1 but for points 129 to 144 Register 10 as register 1 but for points 145 to 160 Register 11 as register 1 but for points 161 to 176 Register 12 as register 1 but for points 177 to 192 Register 13 as register 1 but for points 193 to 208 Register 14 as register 1 but for points 209 to 224 Register 15 as register 1 but for points 225 to 240 Register 16 as register 1 but for points 241 to 256 Identifies the length of a text message to be read Time stamp of the text message to be read UTC format Read text string from instrument display Write a text string to instrument display Boolean Flag Value 0001 starts new batch Boolean Flag Value 000
473. picted in figure 6 5a Enter the Local host name e g Andy136 4 found in the recorder Network Name area followed by a dot full stop period followed by the domain name e g FishesRus co uk also in the Network Name area These examples would result in an entry of Andy136 4 FishesRus co uk Notes 1 If frequent use is to be made of this option it is recommended that a short cut be created and placed on the computer desktop To create a new Bridge link right click on the desktop left click New in the pop up menu which appears then left click on the Bridge icon When naming Bridge files the extension uhv must be used 2 If there is no DNS server associated with the system the IP address found in the recorder Net work Address area should be used instead 3 The PC locale setting e g Daylight Saving Time must match that set in the recorder System Lo cale or the displayed time will be incorrect 4 If an attempt is made to start the program whilst another user is configuring the recorder a Fea ture Locked message appears Another client instrument has locked this feature Retrying until successful appears As soon as the other client Saves the new recorder configuration this message disappears and the program continues its startup Enter the user name as entered in the recorder s Security Access Remote user name field Section 6 4 3 If password entry is not required disable the tick box
474. places Zone low value two decimal places nput type 1 Analogue input 3 Totaliser 2 Maths 4 Counter Number of decimal places 0 to 9 used by all scaled parameters except where stated Channel colour 0 to 55 See Fons B ior definitions Units string up to five characters Open Digital Input string up to eight characters Closed Digital Input string up to eight characters Channel descriptor up to 20 characters Number of alarms on this channel 0 Numeric 1 Digital strings Alarm 1 enable 0 Off 1 Unlatched Alarm 1 type 0 Absolute low 2 Deviation in 4 Rate of change rise 2 Latched 3 Trigger 1 Absolute high 3 Deviation out 5 Rate of change fall Scaled Scaled Scaled Scaled Enum Uint16 Enum String 5 String 8 String 8 String 20 Uint16 Enum Note A B Switching B values are not accessible via modbus for this software version Span Zone Colour etc are therefore all setting A Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Start Addr Hex Dec 6F39 28473 6F3A 6F3C 28476 6F3D 28477 6F3E 28478 6F3F 28479 6F40 28480 6F43 28483 6F45 28485 6F49 28489 6F4D 28493 6F51 28497 6F55 28501 6F5F 28511 6F69 28521 6F6A 28522 6F6B 28523 6FA7 28583 6FA8 28584 28
475. plates are included in the real time display Entering Trend History mode by using the Options button or by continuously touching the screen for a few seconds allows all the points to be reviewed but only in vertical trend history mode described in above For large frame recorders two alternative views called Full Screen and Normal View are available and are toggled between by means of a push button key near the top left corner ofthe screen In each case faceplates can be displayed or not as required using the Option key Faceplates On Off selection The diameter of the chart is independent of faceplate on off selection When quitting History Normal view is always returned to Small frame recorders use only full screen view except when viewed via Bridge software when the small frame recorder behaves in the same way asthe large frame recorder Note Alarm icons Section 3 do not appear on circular trend scales TREND MODES The way in which traces are laid down on the chart depends on the action to be taken when the chart is full as set up in group configuration The user can select Rotate or New Chart ROTATE In the following description the word segment is used interchangeably with Major chart division The number of Major chart divisions is a function of the selected chart speed as described in Group Configu ration ection 43 2 With Rotate selected the traces start one major
476. plays are not supported in User screens with this release of software Home Time out o Minutes Home Group 1 Group 1 y Select group for AAA Home display Scope Group Y gt Select Instrument or Group These fields appear Group 1 Group 1 Y E EE only if Scope Group Display Enable i Home Page Circular Trend Y Select Home display mode for instrument or for selected group Vertical Trend Horizontal Trend Circular Trend Vertical Bargraph Horizontal Bargraph PE un Fage Bridge User Screens are accessible only from User Screen 1 a remote PC which has Bridge software User Screen 2 installed and running User Screen 3 Heer Screen 4 User Screen 231 User Screen 24 Bridge User Screens 0 y Enabled ISISISIS BIS Apply Discard Figure 7 1 1 Views configuration menu 7 1 2 Importing Exporting screens The Save Restore screen figure 7 1 2 includes the categories Import screen and Export screen Archive Config Security Network Save Restore See section 4 2 for descriptions of other Save Restore functions Text Import Screen User Screen UserScreen 1 Y Export Screen File Name screen New Import User Linearisation Import Export User Linearisation Import Printer Driver Figure 7 1 2 Save Restore menu
477. ply Discard Replace 2 with Source Value v Replace 3 with Specified Descriptor y 3 source Totaliser 1 v Replace 4 with Specified Value v 4 source Totaliser 1 v Replace 5 with Config Revision y Replace 6 with Blank Y Replace 7 with H v Apply j Discard Figure B9e Config menu structure sheet 2 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 User Guide Page 339 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B9 MENU STRUCTURE Cont Archive Save Restore Security Network System Figure Figure B9b B9c Figure B9d Figure B9e Figure B9g Figure B9h Figure B9i Figure B9f Config menu structure sheet 3 Y Fig B9j Figure Figure Scope Group Y Section 4 3 11 Maths Number 1 Fo1 Y Value 32 65 Mins Reset now Fe rae Y Function fValue Y Fvalue of Channeli V Sterilizing Temp 121 1 3 Temperature interval 10 Low cutoff 75 Units Mins Descriptor Fo 1 A B Switching Scale Low 0 Mins Scale high 60 Scale Type None Y Zone low 0 96 Zone high 100 96 PV Format Numeric Y Max Decimal Digits 2 Colour 26 Alarm Number 1 Y Enable Off Y Maths Job Number e Category No Action Y Totalisers Section 4 3 12 Instrument PAK B9 m Group 1 Group Y
478. ppearance of the display screens to be customised Customise i Details of the hardware and software associated with the recorder to be displayed About Note In all the following descriptions if a change is made to a menu item then the item text changes to red until it is applied HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 45 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 1 ARCHIVE Notes 1 The archiving functions described below can also be initiated by job action see bection 4 7 14 2 Archiving is carried out on a group by group basis with a message being sentto each group when its archive is finished When allthe groups have been archived a pop up appears to inform the user that archiving is complete Because of the sequential nature of this process the time given in this pop up is different from the times which appear in the messages generated for the individual groups 3 For floppy disk drives connected via the USB port it is not recommended that archiving be enabled for more than one group see Group configuration section 4 3 2 4 1 1 Local Archive Caution Removal ofthe memory device whilst archiving is in progress causes irreparable damage to the fil ing structure on the device rendering it unusable For this reason archiving should be suspended before the device is removed It is strongly recommended that the Remove Media facility described in section 3 1 4 Summary menu
479. quired Acknowledge messages appear on the trend display and in PC Review in the form HH MM SS ALARM ACKNOWLEDGE Alarms are acknowledged as described in fection 3 1 4 HA029324 Page 63 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 2 GROUP CONFIGURATION Cont POINT TYPE SELECTION The Point Type box together with the Selection box immediately below offers a quick way of editing the contents of a group as follows 1 Select the type of point Channel Maths Totaliser or Counter to be edited from the Point Type drop down menu Enter the numbers of all the points of the selected type to be added or deleted in the Selection box See notes below for further details Click on Enable to add the selected points to the group contents or on Disable to remove them Repeat for other point types as required Notes T 2 The status of all points not included in the selection box remains unchanged Point numbers are entered individually or as one or more ranges separated by commas if ap plicable For example an entry of 1 3 6 9 11 would cause points 1 2 3 6 9 10 and 11 to be added or removed from the group contents Only numeric characters commas and hyphens minus signs are accepted If any other character including space s is included in the list the edit will fail with a message Invalid Selection appearing when the Enable or D
480. r 180mm recorders 388 33V p 00 L L A L L 1 L 1 1 1000 09 Scale Linear Major divisions 10 Minor divisions 5 Intermediate scale values displayed only if room permits 388 33V p 09 100 00 200 00 800 00 400 00 500 00 609 00 709 00 09 00 909 00 1009 09 5 minor divisions Scale Log Number format Scientific 1 00 x100 to 1 00 x108 388 33V 0080 1 0pE1 s LOPEZ 1 0pE3 LOPES A 1 09E5 L ps Scale Log Number format Numeric 1 00 to 1 000 000 00 388 33V Ze IE s A P PP OBERE Figure 4 3 3b1 Scale type examples large frame HA029324 Page 7 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 3 CHANNEL ALARM CONFIGURATION Cont SCALE TYPE Cont 41 6667V rcm 109000 20 9000 20 4000 ET 50 9000 BE DE BE sooo 100 000 04418 5 05 06 gt 3 voie 4 minute triangle gus Linear Scale Log Grid 5 05 06 04018 5 08 06 41 6667V 000 io qoo0 20 000 30 9000 40 9000 50 9000 0 4000 10006 80 906 sogooo 100 000 10 40 18 25 05 06 104758 4 minute triangle uan Linear Scale Linear Grid 25 05 08 10 45 18 28 05 08 15721 d n 1 56 00 SEN 4 minute triangle Log Scale Log Grid di Channel 47 6 4158V T 100 0000 10 9000 2 18 21 P5 05 08 I 4 minute triangle Log Linear Scale Log Grid
481. r 5 for small frame units SCALE DIVISIONS MINOR Appears for Linear Scale types only With minor divisions set to 1 default the scale major divisions are not divided i e no minor division tick marks appear Setting Minor divisions to 2 means that each major scale division is divided into two and so on See figure 4 3 3b1 for an example showing five minor divisions LOG For some input type selections this appears only if Scaled is ticked Channels with Scale Type Log appear with logarithmic scales These scales have major divisions at each decade boundary and space permitting minor divisions for mantissa values 2 to 9 Examples are shown in figure 4 3 3b1 Because of the nature of logarithms neither negative values nor the value 0 can be used as scale zero Linear inputs are traced as exponental curves figure 4 3 3b2 LOG LINEAR For some input type selections this appears only if Scaled is ticked Channels with Scale Type Log Linear appear with logarithmic scales These scales have major divisions at each decade boundary and space permitting minor divisions for mantissa values 2 to 9 Examples are shown in figure 4 3 3b1 Because of the nature of logarithms neither negative values nor the value 0 can be used as scale zero Linear inputs are traced as straight lines figure 4 3 3b2 Scale Linear Major divisions 10 Minor divisions 1 Standard fo
482. r a particular gas deviates from a perfect gas under any set of temperature and pressure conditions and is give by the equation P 1 Z x T where Z Compressibility factor P Absolute pressure ofthe gas in kPa A T Absolute temperature ofthe gas Kelvins p gas density at pressure P and temperature T from published tables Page 106 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont ROOT MASS FLOW Cont CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS Figure 4 3 11e shows the relevant part of the configuration menu for a maths channel with Root Mass Flow function selected Maths Number 1 Math1 Y Value 123 4567 Units Function Root Mass Flow Y Delta Pressure Channel 1 Y Temperature Channel 2 Y Absolute Pressure Channel 3 Y Scaleop B Main Gas Constant o J kg K Z o Units Units Apply Discard Figure 4 3 11e Root mass flow menu Delta Pressure Allows the input channel measuring the differential pressure output from the orifice plate to be entered Temperature Allows the input channel measuring the fluid temperature Kelvins at the upstream tapping to be entered Absolute Pressure Allows the input channel measuring the absolute gas pressure kPa A to be entered Scale o p Full scale output from the flowmeter in flowmeter units S Ma Full scale input range set for Flow channel in flowmeter units ma Gas
483. r co uk First valid recipient address Sent Fri 29 04 2005 09 29 To Anne other Mailaddress a Header Cc Yet another Mailaddress 4 amp Further valid recipients Subject Cold store alarm Subject entry Cold store temp sensor 1 too HO STrument name Instrument number chan i larmi 11 06 06 09 24 11 Cold store recorWwar e828 Unlatched bsolute High 5 000 active 5 010 C Text entry body text Body Message if Include message checked Figure 4 3 19b E mail appearance The figure above shows that the e mail is in two distinct parts the header grey area and the body white area THE HEADER AREA The header contains details ofthe sender the recipient s the subject and the time and date Note The time and date may be local to the generating instrument or local to the recipient de pending on the recipient s mail host configuration The header is important in the prevention of spamming The instrument adheres to the RFC2822 stand ard with respect to e mail headers Some servers are stricter than others and it is not guaranteed that an e mail generated by the instrument will not be interpreted as a spam message by the receiving server From This contains either the Local Host name as defined in INetwork Name Setup and mailserver address or the IP address if a fixed IP address is selected in Network Addresg settings See for details of the Network key To The first valid recipien
484. r fitted across pins 7 and 8 No terminating resistor across pins 7 and 8 120 Ohm terminating resistor fitted across pins 1 and 2 No terminating resistor across pins 1 and 2 Table 2 2 2b Communications DIP switch settings The green LED illuminates when 5 wire full duplex communications is selected software selection HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 2 3 USB CONNECTOR A Type A USB socket is fitted adjacent to the Compact flash card slot as shown in figure 2 1a and Pid 1b above This port may be used to connect a memory stick computer mouse keyboard floppy disk drive or bar code scanner Maximum source current 500 mA Note Compliance with EMC directives cannot be guaranteed if the USB peripheral is connected using an extension cable 2 4 CARD SLOT The slot for the Compact Flash card is located on the underside of the unit as shown in figure 2 14 or fig lure 2 10 The card is removed by a double operation of the eject button See details in figure 2 4 below Caution Removal ofthe memory device whilst archiving is in progress causes irreparable damage to the fil ing structure on the device rendering it unusable For this reason archiving should be suspended fection 41 wait for the green area of the disk icon bection 3 1 3 to go white before the device is removed It is strongly recommended that the Remove Medial facility
485. r for the display screens including keytops Data Entry Background This is the background colour for drop down menus and text entry areas Selection The colour that keytops and menu items adopt when selected Fixed Text This defines the colour of all fixed text items including key top text menu text scale data title bar legends etc Active Text The colour of all non fixed text such as selectable menu items Disabled Text This allows the userto choose a colour forthe text associated with disabled items For example key top legends on the Goto Group menu for groups that are not display enabled Title Bar background The colour of the title bar block at the top of the display screen Note that the text colour for the title block is that defined in Fixed Text above Trend Foreground The colour of the grid lines timestamps and messages on the real time trend display Trend Background The colour of the chart in the real time trend display History Foreground The colour of the grid lines timestamps and messages on the trend history dis play History Background The colour of the chart in the trend history display Font set Allows the user to select a size for the display font This also affects the size of the containing item i e push button keys etc also change size See FONT SIZE EXAMPLES below Default Allows the user to return to the factory default settings Page 213 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIB
486. r s Output channels feature can copy master input or maths channels to a selected slave as a continu ous process Notes 1 If reading from or writing to more than one instrument it is recommended that some thought be given to instrument and point descriptors as confusion can easily arise This is particularly true if Bridge is connected to a master which has several slaves attached 2 If Link error occurs whilst connected to a Modbus slave the slave s delay parameter if any should be enabled If no such parameter is available the slave s manufacturer should be con tacted for advice An is given later in this section showing how to set up a master unit to read inputs from two slaves and to re write one of these channels to a third slave Page 143 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 16 MASTER COMMS Cont MASTER COMMS CONFIGURATION MENU A typical master comms configuration page is shown in figure 4 3 16a below Note For the sake of completeness the figure below shows all possible fields even though some are actually mutually exclusive e g Login Required does not appear for Profile Third party High Priority interval 0 125 Seconds Medium priority interval 1 Seconds Low priority interval 2 Seconds Store diagnostics Slave 1 Remote 1 v Enable e Online e Descriptor Remote_1 Network Ethernet y Select Ethernet or
487. rder exam ined Ifthere is evidence of damage the instrument should not be operated and the local representative contacted for instructions After the recorder has been removed from its packing the packing should be examined to ensure that all accessories and documentation have been removed The packing should then be stored against future transport requirements 2 INSTALLATION 2 1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION Figures p 14 and P 1b give installation details for the small and large frame cases respectively The unit is inserted through the panel aperture from the front of the panel and a panel clamp inserted into each of the mounting slots one each on the left and right hand sides Whilst ensuring that the seal ing gasket is flat against the front of the panel tighten the screws of the clamps sufficiently to hold the unit firmly in position IMPORTANT Do not use excessive force to tighten the screws It could distort the case and render the instrument inoperative Page2 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 2 INSTALLATION Cont d 144 0 mm ll 87 7 mm l Sealing gasket 144 0 mm e T l 137 0 mm Fixing Clip one each side Y H Protective conductor terminal M4 Su Flash card Panel cutout 138 mm x 138 mm EH m CH bot
488. re Ch9 Close string Spare Ch9 Descriptor Spare Ch9 No of alarms Ch9 PV format Spare Ch9 Alarm 1 enable Ch9 Alarm 1 type Ch9 Alarm 1 setpoint Spare Ch9 Alarm 2 enable Ch9 Alarm 2 type Ch9 Alarm 2 setpoint Spare Ch9 Alarm 3 enable Ch9 Alarm 3 type Ch9 Alarm 3 setpoint Spare Ch9 Alarm 4 enable Ch9 Alarm 4 type Ch9 Alarm 4 setpoint Spare Description Upper span value display full scale Lower span value display zero Zone high value two decimal places Zone low value two decimal places Input type 1 Analogue input 3 Totaliser 2 Maths 4 Counter Number of decimal places 0 to 9 used by all scaled parameters except where stated Channel colour 0 to 55 See Annex B for definitions Units string up to five characters Open Digital Input string up to eight characters Closed Digital Input string up to eight characters Channel descriptor up to 20 characters Number of alarms on this channel 0 to 2 0 Numeric 1 Digital strings Alarm 1 enable 0 Off 1 Unlatched Alarm 1 type 0 Absolute low 2 Deviation in 4 Rate of change rise Trigger setpoint Note 2 2 Latched 3 Trigger 1 Absolute high 3 Deviation out 5 Rate of change fall Alarm 2 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 2 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 3 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 3 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2
489. red not for recorders with either Auditor option fitted Users with Full Security permission can Add and Delete users sections and assign them individual passwords and access permissions Access when Frederic Domain field appears only if the Security Manager option is fitted Domain New Password Le Password functions do not appear Retype Password eee ban rs or Connect from remote W Remote user name Fred Remote user fields appear Remote password only if Connect from Retype remote password Se Login Disabled Edit own Password Change Alarm Setpoints Acknowledge Alarms Edit Maths Constant Reset Maths Preset Totalisers Preset Counters Start Reset Timers Set Clock Archiving Control Save Restore Paste Delete Files Full Configuration Full Security Batch Control Can Sign Can Authorize Perform Upgrades Event Permission 1 Event Permission 2 Event Permission 3 Event Permission 4 Event Permission 5 Edit Output Channel Default Action Demand Writes Force Change of Password Enter Batch Data Allow web server SETTING PERMISSIONS Once logged in at Engineer level operate the Security key and select Access A page similar to that shown in figure 4 4 1 appears allowing the permissions to be set for the various access lev els and for individual users The list of param eters is the same for all access levels except for Logged out for which the password param eters and lo
490. register can use either code but code 6 is more efficient Writing two or more registers requires the use of code 16 A decimal number representing the required parameter s location in the slave s Mod bus Register map This information must be determined from the documentation sup plied with the slave For this instrument contains listings for a number of instrument groups and input channels For details of maths totalisers etc refer to the relevant option description Data Type Select a suitable data type for the selected parameter again from the slave documen tation For this instrument a list of relevant data types is given in Register HA029324 Page 165 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 18 DEMAND WRITES Cont WRITING TO A SPECIFIC REGISTER Cont CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS Cont Scaling Whether Scaling appears or not is Model and Parameter dependent If scaling is required the choice may be Decimal Places or High Low again according to Model Decimal Places allows a dividing factor to be entered An entry of 1 divides the returned value by 10 An entry of 2 divides by 100 etc for successful implementation there must be a sufficient number of decimal places defined in the Max Decimal Digits configuration field for the value to be displayed with the required precision None leaves the returned value unchanged None leaves the returned value
491. requency Archiving Hourly lt q Appears only for Automatic Media file format Binary V Select Binary and or CSV On Media Full Overwrite W J Select Overwrite or Stop Media Size 30 4746094 Mb Removable Media Capacity 33 18 Days Media Full event limit 100 o Apply 7 Discard Figure 4 3 5a Archive configuration menu Local settings Compression Flash Size Shortest Trend History Duration Show Ftp File format Remote path Primary remote host Primary login name Primary password Retype password Secondary remote host Secondary login name Secondary password Retype password Normal W Select Normal or High 99125 Mb Group 1 108 06 Days Remote settings Y Archive to Remote None w a Select archive interval Binary Y gt Select Binary and or CSV recorder Group1 0 0 0 0 anonymous ok ck e e DEER 0 0 0 0 anonymous ok e e x ok e e Apply Discard Figure 4 3 5b Archive configuration menu Remote settings HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 77 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 5 ARCHIVE CONFIGURATION Cont COMPRESSION Select Normal or High compression Normal compresses the data but still provides an exact copy High compresses more but channel values are saved only to 1 part in 10 resolution This field does not appear if CSV is se
492. resistive analogue touch panel Screen specification Smallframe 1 4 VGA Resolution 320 x 240 pixels Large frame XGA Resolution 1024 x 768 pixels Update information Input sample rate 8 Hz Display update 8 Hz Archive sample value Latest value at archive time Trended displayed value Latest value at display update time Ethernet Communications Type 10 100 base T IEEE802 3 Protocols TCP IP FTP DHCP BootP Modbus ICMP Cable Type CATS Maximum length 100 metres Termination RJ45 Isolation IEEE802 3 RJ45 LED indicators Green Indicates a 100MB link Yellow Indicates Ethernet activity Serial communications option Number of ports Two at the rear of the recorder on the underside Protocol ASCII input Modbus master Modbus slave Master slave selected by switch settings as described in Bection 2 2 2 Transmission standards ElA485 3 wire or 5 wire selected by switch settings as described infection 2 2 2 Isolation Functional RJ45 LED indicators Green Indicates 5 wire working Yellow Indicates recorder transmit activity HA029324 User Guide Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 319 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION RECORDER Cont USB ports Number of ports 1 atthe rear ofthe recorder on the underside USB1 1 Transmission speeds 12Mbits sec full speed devices or 1 5Mbits sec low speed devices Maximum current available 500 mA Peripherals supported Flopp
493. respectively Within each version the process variable display areas expand or con tract to fill the screen Trend history mode is not available from this display mode A further operation of the down arrow key returns to Vertical Trend Display mode described in above or if user screens are fitted and enabled to the first user screen section 7 Alternatively any one of the enabled display modes section 4 3 4 can be selected using the Root Menu Goto View key a 54 50 Logged out 7 q 11 07 06 700 87 487 39 235 68 378 99 0 49 Figure 3 4 6a Numeric display mode 1 to 5 channels example hannel 2 hannel 3 hannel 4 hannel 5 Note Figures 3 4 6a b and c apply to the large frame instrument For the small frame instrument the single column display figure 3 4 6a is used for groups with up to four points enabled and the two column display figure 3 4 6b is used with scroll bar if necessary for groups with more than four points The small frame recorder does not employ a three column mode figure 3 4 6c Page 42 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 4 6 NUMERIC DISPLAY MODES Cont 12 02 27 Logged out 11 07 06 700 87 487 39 235 68 378 99 Channel 5 sa 12 04 13 A HT Channel 2 487 39 c 235 68 c Logged out Channel 1 700 87 c 378 99 c 689 43 c 37
494. ription Span high Upper span value display full scale Span low Lower span value display zero Zone high Zone high value two decimal places Zone low Zone low value two decimal places PV type nputtype 1 Analogue input 3 Totaliser 2 Maths 4 Counter Decimal places Number of decimal places 0 to 9 used by all scaled parameters except where stated Colour Channel colour 0 to 55 See m definitions Units Units string up to five characters Spare Open string Open Digital Input string up to eight characters Spare Close string Closed Digital Input string up to eight characters Spare Descriptor Channel descriptor up to 20 characters Spare No of alarms Number of alarms on this channel PV format 0 Numeric 1 Digital strings Spare Alarm 1 enable Alarm 1 enable 0 Off 2 Latched 1 Unlatched 3 Trigger Alarm 1 type Alarm 1 type 0 Absolute low 1 Absolute high 2 Deviation in 3 Deviation out 4 Rate of change rise 5 Rate of change fall Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint see note Spare Alarm 2 enable Alarm 2 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 2 type Alarm 2 type As alarm 1 type above Alarm 2 setpoint Trigger setpoint see note Spare Alarm 3 enable Alarm 3 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 3 type Alarm 3 type As alarm 1 type above Alarm 3 setpoint Trigger setpoint see note Spare Alarm 4 enable Alarm 4 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 4 type Alarm 4 type As alarm 1 t
495. rite Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Start Addr Hex Dec 0447 1095 0448 1096 0449 1097 044A 1098 044B 1099 044C 1100 044D 1101 044E 1102 0451 1105 0453 1107 0457 1111 045B 1115 045F 1119 0463 1123 046D 1133 0477 1143 0478 1144 0479 1145 04B5 1205 04B6 1206 04B7 1207 04B8 1208 04C2 1218 04C3 1219 04C4 1220 DACH 1221 04CF 1231 04D0 1232 04D1 1233 04D2 1234 04DC 1244 04DD 1245 04DE 1246 04DF 1247 Register Length P PHH ech s oo Notes 1 For maths totalisers and counters see the relevant option description 2 If an alarm s Setpoint Source section 4 3 3 is set to anything other than Constant the value re turned will be the previously configured constant value User Guide Page 282 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 2 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA Cont CHANNEL 8 Parameter name Ch8 Span high Ch8 Span low Ch8 Zone high Ch8 Zone low Ch8 PV type Ch8 Decimal places Ch8 Colour Ch8 Units Spare Ch8 Open string Spare Ch8 Close string Spare Ch8 Descriptor Spare Ch8 No of alarms Ch8 PV format Spare Ch8 Alarm 1 enable Ch8 Alarm 1 type Ch8 Alarm 1 setpoint Spare Ch8 Alarm 2 enable Ch8 Alarm 2 type Ch8 Alarm 2 setpoint Spare Ch8 Alar
496. rity section 4 4 2 is enabled this Domain name can be edited only using Security Manager software Note An IP address must not be used as the domain name because to do so will disable the user s ability to log in using Active Directory even if there is a valid account on the server NEW PASSWORD RETYPE PASSWORD For units fitted with the Security Manager option ifthe New Domain Name above is anything other than the default left blank these Password fields do not appear as any user with a domain configured must use the password allocated by the Network administrator For other users these fields allow a password to be entered and confirmed If the password does not com ply with the minimum length requirements in Security Management if fitted section 4 4 2 a warning mes sage Invalid Password appears when the Apply key is operated and password entry must be repeated BASED ON This picklist allows another user or access level to be used as a permissions template to simplify the con figuration if several operators are to have identical permissions HA029324 Page 196 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 4 4 Remove user Selecting Remove User from the SECURITY picklist allows users to be removed from the user list The Remove key and the Apply key must both be used to write the change to the recorder data base Figure 4 4 4 depicts the display page The User Full N
497. ropriate to the process Saturated Steam Heat Flow Calculates the energy flow in kJ s for saturated steam using either the steam temperature Celsius or pressure MPa as appropriate to the process Saturated Steam Heat Consumed Calculates the heat consumed in kJ s for saturated steam using the inlet steam temperature Celsius or pressure MPa as appropriate to the process and the return condensate temperature Calculates Mean Kinetic Temperature of a specified group of channels Page 100 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont Channel Maximum Channel Minimum Channel Average Master comms CUT Timestamp Config Revision Number Takes log of selected input For example Input 2 gives maths function value 7 0 3010 Takes log of selected input For example Input 2 gives maths function value 0 6931 Takes natural antilog of input For example Input 0 6931 gives maths function value 2 This function copies the magnitude ofthe input value withoutthe sign For exam ple the modulus of value 100 100 the modulus of 100 100 Maths function value is the minimum value the input point has reached since last reset When reset the value is reset to the current input value Maths function value is the minimum value the input point has reached since last reset When reset the value is reset to the current input value
498. round colour superimposed on a box of background colour which is the same width of the text string If width and height are defined then the text will fill the defined width and any remaining text is truncated The text appears in the foreground colour default black over a field of background colour default grey Advanced properties allow the text to be set to range left range right or be centred at the top bottom or centre of the field and for the foreground and background colours to be swapped 7 4 14 Round rectangle Similar to a rectangle described in section 7 4 15 but offers the user the opportunity to draw rectangles with curved corners The horizontal and vertical curve angles are specified separately and the aspect ratio of the screen should be taken into account when working in percentage units Note The rounded rectangle will draw incorrectly if either of the arc height width settings is greater than half the rectangle height width settings X Position 1 2 Arc ainsi 1 2 Arc WI height Y Position Height lt Width gt Figure 7 4 14 Round rectangle definitions 7 4 15 Rectangle This draws a rectangle on the display page If the height and width of the rectangle are defined in the default percentage units then entering equal values for height and width will result in a rectangle with the same aspect ratio as that of the screen not a square as might be expected Because the screen height
499. rp6 Batch start Grp6 Batch stop Grp6 Batch running Grp6 Text field 1 Reserved Grp6 Text field 2 Reserved Grp6 Text field 3 Reserved Grp6 Text field 4 Reserved Grp6 Text field 5 Reserved Grp6 Text field 6 Reserved Spare Description Trend enhancements 0 Interpolation enabled 1 Adaptive recording enabled Trend update rate in milliseconds Archive to flash rate in milliseconds Group descriptor 20 characters max 16 Registers holding the group contents as follows Register 1 Bit 0 O Point 1 not in group 1 Point 1 is in group Bit 1 O Point 2 not in group 1 Point 2 is in group Bit 2 O Point 3 not in group 1 Point 3 is in group Etc Bit 15 0 Point 16 not in group 1 Point 16 is in group Register 2 as register 1 but for points 17 to 32 Register 3 as register 1 but for points 33 to 48 Register 4 as register 1 but for points 49 to 64 Register 5 as register 1 but for points 65 to 80 Register 6 as register 1 but for points 81 to 96 Register 7 as register 1 but for points 97 to 112 Register 8 as register 1 but for points 113 to 128 Register 9 as register 1 but for points 129 to 144 Register 10 as register 1 but for points 145 to 160 Register 11 as register 1 but for points 161 to 176 Register 12 as register 1 but for points 177 to 192 Register 13 as register 1 but for points 193 to 208 Register 14 as register 1 but for points 209 to 224 Register 15 as register 1
500. rt at 1200 hrs and re start at 00 00 hrs 1600 2000 2400 0400 0800 hrs etc Day of week at 2 days rev Start Monday 00 00 00 Chart starts Mon 00 00 00 and restarts Weds Fri etc At each power on the system resets to the first week of the period with the most recent Start at day of the Day of week at 00 00 00 week at the top of the chart O N P PT INI PO PO PY INININ Table 4 3 2 Circular chart speed details HA029324 Page 61 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 2 GROUP CONFIGURATION Cont GRID TYPE Grid type allows the chart grid type to be defined for the group being configured This is not necessarily related to channel scale Gection 433 unless From point is selected when the grid matches the scale of the selected point NONE No chart grid is traced LINEAR The chart grid is linear with the major and minor divisions defined by the fields Grid Divisions Major and Mi nor which appear if Linear is selected as grid type Figure 4 3 2c below defines major and minor divisions LOG The chart grid is logarithmic with the number of decades being selected in the Grid Decades field which appears if Log is selected as Grid Type Figure 4 3 2c gives an example Note For the small frame recorder the minor divisions within each decade are shown only for groups with Number of decades lt 5 FROM POINT Th
501. runcated as described in COLOUR Allows the trace colour to be selected from a colour chart Each of the 56 available colours is displayed with a number and it is this number which is entered The background colour to the selection box chang es to the selected colour If A B switching is enabled a second colour selection can be entered Colour A is used during normal operation Colour B is switched to by job action as described in ALARM NUMBER Allows an alarm to be selected for configuration HA029324 Page 69 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 3 CHANNEL ALARM CONFIGURATION Cont ENABLE Allows the alarm to be defined as Off Unlatched Latched or Trigger Off Unlatched Latched Trigger TYPE Alarm is disabled and the remainder of the alarm configuration is hidden Unlatched alarms become active when the trigger source becomes active and remain active until the source returns to a non active state The indicatoris on flashing before acknowledgment steady after acknowledgement until the alarm clears Alarm messages are printed if enabled in group configuration Latched alarms become active when the trigger source becomes active and remain active until the alarm is acknowledged AND the trigger source has returned to a non active state The indicator is on flashing before acknowledgment steady after acknowledgement until the alarm has been acknowledged AND t
502. s Table 8 4 6b Read only indirection example Write values to or read values from this area address hex 200 DOEC Chan 6 Alarm 1 setpoint DOEB DOEA DOE9 Chan 5 Alarm 1 setpoint Enter required data Chan 4 Alarm 1 setpoint addresses here Chan 3 Alarm 1 setpoint DOE8 Chan 2 Alarm 1 setpoint E Ch6 Alarm Sp DOE7 Chan 1 Alarm 1 setpoint DOE6 Number of Read Write entries Table 8 4 6c Read Write indirection example User Guide HA029324 Page 302 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 7 IEEE 32 bit channel configuration data The following tables show the hexadecimal addresses for the specified 32 bit floating point values for channels 1 to 12 Note A B Switching B values are not accessible via modbus for this software version Span Zone Colour etc are therefore all setting A Generally Parameter address for channel N Parameter address for channel 1 36 N 1 decimal The word channel is used as an umbrella term for input channels maths channels totalisers etc CHANNEL 1 Parameter name Ch1 span high Ch1 span low Ch1 Zone high Ch1 Zone low Ch1 Alarm 1 setpoint Ch1 Alarm 2 setpoint Ch1 Alarm 3 setpoint Ch1 Alarm 4 setpoint Spare CHANNEL 2 Parameter name Ch2 span high Ch2 span low Ch2 Zone high Ch2 Zone low Ch2 Alarm 1 setpoint Ch2 Alarm 2 setpoint Ch2 Alarm 3 setpoint Ch2 Alarm 4 setpoint Spare CHANNEL 3 Param
503. s 0 to 9 used by all scaled parameters except where stated Channel colour 0 to 55 See Annex B for definitions Units string up to five characters Open Digital Input string up to eight characters Closed Digital Input string up to eight characters Channel descriptor up to 20 characters Number of alarms on this channel 0 to 2 0 Numeric 1 Digital strings Alarm 1 enable 0 Off 1 Unlatched Alarm 1 type 0 Absolute low 2 Deviation in 4 Rate of change rise Trigger setpoint Note 2 2 Latched 3 Trigger 1 Absolute high 3 Deviation out 5 Rate of change fall Alarm 2 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 2 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 3 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 3 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Alarm 4 enable As alarm 1 enable above Alarm 4 type As alarm 1 type above Trigger setpoint Note 2 Scaled Scaled Scaled Scaled Enum Uint16 Enum String_5 String_8 String_8 String_20 Uint16 Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Enum Enum Scaled Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Start Addr Hex Dec 03A5 93
504. s The date is edited in a similar way The set tings apply as soon as the Apply settings button is touched See also SNTP details in 4 6 2 Locale This allows the setting of the following items Language Choose the required language from the picklist Country Displays a pick list of countries associated with the selected language Time zone Select required time zone from picklist Use Summertime DST Select box if daylight saving is to be used If Use Summertime DST is selected the times and dates for the start and end of summertime can be entered using picklists see figure A Ga Notes 1 Date format DD MM YY or MM DD YY is defined by the language and country selected Time format e g 12 24 hr clock is defined by the country selected 2 When using Bridge software the host PC s locale information and the recorder locale informa tion should match or the displayed time will not be correct Note For more information see B7 Annex B and or http www timeanddate com LONG DATE FORMAT Table 4 6 2 shows some examples of the Standard and Long Format date layouts which are available ac cording to Language and Country selections Country Language i 01 05 06 01 05 2006 1 05 06 1 05 2006 01 05 06 01 05 2006 Canada Eng 01 05 06 1 May 06 Canada Fra 06 05 01 06 05 01 France 01 05 06 1 mai 06 Germany 01 05 06 01 05 2006 Holland 1 5 06 1 mei 06 Italy 01 05 06 1 Mag 06 Portugal 01 05 2006 1 Mai 06 South Africa
505. s 1 to 6in Batch Configuration The Values associated with these headings are entered by the op erator at initiation AUDITOR MESSAGES If either Auditod option is fitted a Config Security Revision message appears immediately after the Batch Start message DD MM YY HH MM SS Config Revision NNNNNN Security Revision SSSSSS DD MM YY HH MM SS Batch start User Full Name BATCH SUMMARY A Batch Summary page can be displayed from the Summary menu described in above HA029324 Page 91 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 10 BATCH OPTION Cont CONFIGURATION Select Scope Group Y gt gt Instrument gt or Group Group 1 Group 1 Y Show Batch Entry List w MAC Address 00 0A 8D 00 20 A0 These fields appear only if Show Batch Entry List is enabled Predefined Entry 1 FishesRus Predefined Entry 12 Enable y Select Batch mode Start Stop Y Start Stop or Continuous Batch Fields 4 Y Field 1 Batch Number e Select Batch field 1 Use Counter Y gt Counter or Text Select Counter Counter Counter 1 Y Appears only if Use Counter selected Field 2 Customer Name Field 3 Operator Name Field 4 Supervisor On start log 4 Y On stop log 1 Y On new clear 1 Y Name files by batch M Apply Discard Figure 4 3 10a Batch configuration menu As depicted in figure 4 3 10a the fol
506. s 2 Log Mediana oido italian boc detest 78 ele e E 62 Archiving file lost un 10 Maths functions inci 101 Archiving too slow nana 10 Slip iaa 67 File Tomat nsn 81 Logged IDCM 25 Falles EE 47 croata tomen asa usan 26 195 344 f l M C M ME 7 Disable 188 Size GE SCT Seeerei 79 Required Modbus slave 145 Medium priority interval DAE dani 144 TIMO E 192 Memory device location na 7 Et 67 Memory S ZE een 78 215 Logout key ierit racc ee Edge 185 Menu structure Long Modbus messages 271 Archive c 336 Lee UMD ERs m 152 164 Config menu 338 to 343 ow Network key menu 345 Priority interval 144 ROOT MVS IU rail 335 BEER 100 Ge 337 Security key E EE 344 M SYSTEM KEY eet eer re tpe itt 346 MESSAGES vist scscstiscacssdscoassassasscvssessapssscvcossosssguscadensasotsctots oasiesnd 86 MAC AQUA eU ALL sr masu Sas 201 324 E EE 73 Mail Servera ebat te codicia re tes Es 168 Auditor Batch usu dad dada 91 Maintenance sueca dada 326 Batch Initiation asar 94 Schedule iecnatisaniremeoeiechatitap einen 326 Colorada et armi e ii ss 253 Major circular chart divisions sse 61 Configuration menu 339 Mana uen rere mex as aer abes 191 rere 211 Configuration menu 344 Enable disable nene 63 Manual archive ue H 86 Localia patada tias dra 46 Example gee dior diia 88 To Kost COMO OTS I ainni a E 48 Inclusi n INE DONS s io mestre pe 171 Norm deene 218 HA0
507. s 4 and 2 had both occurred 1 Component error e g image does not exist 2 Error loading the Property uhr file 4 Error loading the Style uhr file 8 Error loading the usrscrn uhu file User Guide HA029324 Page 264 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 MODBUS TCP SLAVE COMMS 8 1 INSTALLATION The installation of the Modbus link consists of connecting a standard Ethernet cable between the RJ45 connec tor at the rear of the recorder either 1 Directly to a host computer using a crossover cable 2 Toa host computer via a network using a straight through cable 8 2 INTRODUCTION MODBUS TCP allows one or more recorders to act as slave devices to one or more host computers connected via the RJ45 connector at the rear of the recorder Each recorder must have a unique Internet Protocol IP address set up as described in MODBUS TCP Transmission Control Protocol is a variant of the MODBUS family of communications proto cols intended for supervision and control of automated equipment specifically covering the use of MODBUS messaging in an intranet or internet environment using TCP IP protocols Much of the MODBUS detail in this manual is derived from the document openmbus doc available at http www modbus org default htm The above mentioned document also includes implementation guidelines for users 8 2 1 Function Codes MODBUS function codes 3 4 6 8 and 16 defined in table
508. s a number of semicolon separated values to be entered to act as colour change triggers for the component being configured The values are those of the source channel selected in Colour Channel described above The number of threshold values entered must match the number of colour values entered in Colour Foregrounds and Col our Backgrounds Allows a number of semicolon separated values 1 to 4 to be entered to act as colour change triggers for the component being configured These values represent alarms 1 to 4 of the source channel selected in Colour Channel described above The number of alarms entered must match the number of colour values entered in Colour Foregrounds and Colour Backgrounds Point is displayed in the colour of the latest active alarm For example Alarms configured 1 2 Foreground colours configured 3 0 amber and red When alarm 1 goes active the com ponent goes amber When alarm 2 goes active the component goes red When alarm two clears component reverts to Amber and so on Background colour represents the value of the colour channel Colour 0 appears for values below 25 colour 1 for values between 25 and 50 colour 3 for values between 50 and 75 and colour 4 for values above 75 Foreground colour is default 1 As background quartile but for the foreground colour Background colour is default 1 Background colour represents the value of the colour channel Colour 0 appears for values below 10
509. s allows the fields which are to appear below Show to be applicable to the local memory device Lo cal Settings or to the setting up of a remote host path for archiving purposes Remote settings The following descriptions contain all the fields which may appear in either menu MEDIA For Local setting only For standard recorders this allows mediacard or usbfront to be selected as the local archive destina tion The USB port supports floppy disk drives and memory sticks ARCHIVE TO MEDIA For Local setting only None Archive must be initiated by the operator If the recorder has been powered Hourly Archive occurs on the hour every hour down prior to archive time the ar Daily Archive occurs at 00 00 hrs each day chive takes place the next time the Weekly Archive occurs at 00 00 hrs every Monday Quim Monthly Archive occurs at 00 00 hrs on the 1st of each month Automatic The recorder selects the leastfrequent archive period Hourly Daily Weekly Monthly which is guaranteed not to lose data as a result of either the internal Flash or the local memory device running out of space calculated assuming that the memory device is initially empty When Automatic is selected a further non editable menu item ap pears showing which of the archive frequencies has been selected Note Archive times are not adjusted for Daylight Saving hour changes Thus if the archive is set to daily weekly or
510. s nec essary to set up the master input output channels and the slave Comms channel It is assumed that a the master comms configuration has been completed with Remote devices 1 2 and 3 set up as Furn1 Control Fum Record and Furn2 control respectively b all recorders are of the type described in this manual Other types of slave may need more inputs or different inputs to be entered EXAMPLE see figure 4 3 16j to Read Loop1 PV from Controller 1 to Channel 1 of Recorder 1 the master Read Channel 1 from Recorder 2 to Channel 2 of the master Write Channel 2 of the Master to Channel 1 of Recorder 3 Controller 1 Slave 1 Furn1 Control Furn1 PV1 Channel 1 Recorder 2 Recorder 1 Slave 2 Master Furn1 Record Furn1Master Recorder 3 Slave 3 Furn2 Record Furnt Tempi Chamnel 2 Channel 2 Channel 1 Figure 4 3 16j Required setup Page 157 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 16 MASTER COMMS Cont MASTER CHANNEL 1 SETUP Master channel 1 setup to read the Loop PV from Furn1 Control into channel 1 is shown in figure 4 3 16k below Note that for this example that a Span High of 100 and Descriptor Furn1 PV1 have been entered The span zero and span high values should match those of the PV being read Channel Number 1 Fum PV1 M Value 33 2453 Unadjusted Input Type Master Commsy Slave 1 Furn1 Control Y Digital Parameter Process Valu
511. s of the recorder and is not editable The remaining 12 entries of up to 60 characters each are freely editable Any one of these predefined notes can be selected as described in by touching the Opera tor Note area continuously for two seconds then touching the required note from the picklist which ap pears Once selected the predefined note can be edited before use like a normal Operator Note Such editing does not affect the original note entered here in Instrument Configuration Page 58 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 2 Group configuration Note Groups 1 to is a standard recorder feature The supply of groups seven to twelve is an optional extra Group configuration allows the user to define the following Group trend speed interval Group recording speed interval Group descriptor Group content Circular Trend speed and chart full operation 0000 o Chart grid divisions The production of alarm messages and the saving of group data to Flash memory to removable memory device and or to remote computer FTP transfer can also be enabled disabled from this menu Group Number 1 Group 1 Y 3J3 Select Group i Select Trend Units mm hr Y gt mm hr or in hr Descriptor Group 1 Select Trend Type Adaptive y Natal or Adaptive A B Switching Kee Ei Trend Intervali s settings enabled Circular Settings ke Circular Speed 3 weeky Appear
512. s permissions have been set up Section 4 4 1 describes how limited or full access can be permitted by an operator with En gineer level access Engineer Accessed initially by entering 100 as the password Section 3 3 1 below Full access to all recorder functions is available 1 describes how the Engineer level password can be edited and an Operator password can be entered if required The section also describes how access permission to some or all of the recorder functions can be granted or not to individual user names and default security levels except Service Service Full access to all recorder functions and to areas of recorder memory for diagnostic purpos es For use only by Service Engineers Note Forunits with the Auditor 21CFR11 Option enabled the default Engineer and Operator passwords are both 100 HA029324 Page 25 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 3 1 Access to Configuration F GA N As shown in figure 3 3 1a once the recorder has initialised touch the current access level key Touch the Logged out field and then touch Engineer from the resulting picklist Touch the blank Password area to call the keyboard display see figure 3 3 1b Touch lt Numeric gt lt 1 gt lt 0 gt lt 0 gt lt OK gt to enter the password 100 The screen reverts to the Home page Operation of the Rood key followed by a touch on the Operator key ca
513. s the setup required in orderto output the master s channel 2 Furn1 Temp1 to Furn2 Record channel 1 The Descriptor Furn1 Temp1 has been entered as the Output Name This happens to be the same as the channel descriptor but could be any required text string Output Channel Number 1 Furn1 Temp ty Enable ly Output Type Master Commsy Slave 3 Furn2 Record vl Parameter Comms Channelv Point Type Channelv Point Number f Process Value Medium Priorityw Descriptor Furn1 PV1 Source 2 Fum Temptv Default D On Error Write Default y Apply Discard Figure 4 3 16m Master Output 1 setup example SLAVE INPUT CHANNEL 1 SETUP Figure 4 3 16n shows how to set up a slave channel to read an input from a master Note that the scaling of this channel must match the scaling of the source channel Channel Number 1 Furn1 Temp1 M Value 658 3654 Unadjusted Input Type Slave Comms Y Scale Low 0 Deg C Scale High 1000 Deg C Units Deg C Scale Type Linear Y Scale Divisions Major 10 Scale Divisions Minor 1 Descriptor Fum Temp 1 Apply Discard Figure 4 3 16n Slave channel setup HA029324 Page 160 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 16 MASTER COMMS Cont MASTER COMMS DIAGNOSTICS Master Comms Diagnostics appears as an additional item on the System Menu For details of the other Items see
514. sages Force change of password sss 190 Diele e a M 237 Foreground Colo Ucrania 213 248 User screens a 264 TEE deeg did aya dasi 184 222 Emos TO Ema 168 FLO Point dE ii ant E ENE 176 Ethernet FTP el 324 Archiving file estu a rr eterne 10 Diagnostics ui retten tere 209 346 ArehiVing tog Sl OW osuran artes te ete etie 10 LED interpretation trie ts 319 File format remercier 81 Modbus slave siioaeicaein eem ni ttes 145 vm E 12 e rU te 173 Primary Server Fail re eterne 10 Client mr cie s suu a M IUE E 210 Secondary Server Failure sss 10 COMMS Input cro b n e e Fea 99 Full e to the power maths FUNCTION oc a 101 Configuration Berrmissio n u anu 189 EuroPRP server enable sss 203 sel P 36 Event Security permission uuu a carr rient iridis 189 BUON Secadora ib 85 248 Username EE 196 Configuration menu 332 Function Event S OUNCE sass uu uu as daa 83 Codes Size shape etc 258 o eege EES Configuration a 82 339 A umu ES Sus CODY iia iii uni as 211 EE POT MISSI ON E 189 0S aci EE e M ER A usah See Batch ies caves 97 Demand Writes Source SENSE iii iii 83 Maste CO Mims corps anio passes 154 Se 84 SUPPONE DEE 265 Exclamation mark symibol c nere 10 Maths a i UP Deed iens 99 Explicit messaging
515. se address i e the parameter s 1st register 3 Separate indirection table entries are held for each host the recorder automatically switches each host to its own indirection table without user intervention 4 Indirection table addresses CCE5 to D4E7 cannot be entered in the indirection tables Any at tempt to do so will be ignored User Guide HA029324 Page 300 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 6 INDIRECTION TABLES CONT Table 8 4 6a shows the overall arrangement of the indirection table area Figures 8 4 6b and 8 4 6c show simple examples of Read only and Read Write addressing for tables with 6 entries D4E6 D2E7 D2E6 Read Write area DOE7 BEEN DOE6 No of R W entries DOE5 gt lt CEE6 CEE5 Read only area CCE6 CCE5 Table 8 4 6a Indirection table areas HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 User Guide Page 301 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 6 INDIRECTION TABLES CONT CEEB Alarms chan 1 CEEA PV chan 1 jeadvaluss iom hare JU T PV chan 1 address hex 200 CEE8 Archive rate CEE7 Trend rate CEE6 Instrument type CCEB Channel 1 Alarm status CCEA CCE9 CCE8 Channel 1 PV bits 16 to 31 32 bit IEEE channel 1 PV bits O to 1 Enter required data lies SE addresses here Group 1 archive rate CCE7 CCE6 CCE5 Group 1 trend rate Instrument type number Number of Read only entrie
516. seeassassaetanaasaqa 235 Allocation Modus 275 Audit I o 201 Pack option 191 E 201 324 A na 166 193 Map Modbus a 273 AULOGONNGUIG sist aaa 183 Add User IET KEE EE 196 Auto detect PAG nio bien E 147 Configuration menu n 344 Average ias 71 Advanced Editlevel vanilla 244 B Paramete iSe soto e RR Er ia 250 Alarm Background colours 2 enun ees 213 248 Acknowledgement sene 15 Bargraph Message enable disable sss 63 Channel unta irt FO EHE eR NIRE S 257 ee EE 188 Displays EREM 69 IHHortzottal 5 h ham alas inca sS 40 Indication viu 10 Vertical ane alistan sb ayo 38 dee gege ama qu 224 Group Marks ooh iere end T 9 Horizontal eerte 256 COO pee cientes tovto sen sr 250 Vertical caia tem a RI PER ia 256 Message enableidisable sss 63 SEY 250 Messages ci hlnaman inier 73 Based Eeer 196 HA029324 User Guide Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 353 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B Cont Change Cont Basic Advanced selection sss 244 Change Basic edit level niano n emp penes 244 Alarm setpoint permission sss 188 sri ME 91 Battery AS OVEMESOUPCE terere een udis tine ua 97 Indicators 11 Batch Running Event Source wo eee erecta 82 Procedure ance e eee ee reds 327 Batch Start event source 82 Constant Valle saepe a eI HS 188 Batch Stop event source sssssssss see 83 PassWord enel 197 A O C e edet 92 Time
517. sers only Microsoft Internet Explorer displays by default history files only To exit the history folder either uncheck the Tools Internet Options Advanced Browsing Enable folder view for FTP sites option or check the Tools Internet Options Advanced Browsing Use Web based FTP option HA029324 Page 48 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 2 SAVE RESTORE As shown in figure 4 2a touching the Save Restore key calls the picklist Save Restore New Text Import Export Screen Import Export User Linearisation Import Printer Driver Import Export Screen choices appear only ifthe User screens option is fitted Archive Save as 6100AY Archive Save Restore Network Config Security File Name config 4 Save Configuration Data y Restore SS Security Data W Save D s Network Data ke E Screen Data W Text File Name config lt mm Scree Rotors Save As Text Export Screen File name de User Linearisation Export User Linearisation See Screen Builder i description section 7 Import Printer Driver Configuration Data y Security Data Network Data User Linearisation 1 UserLint y Not this recorder model Sercen a NB File Name userlin New Default Import Export Figure 4 2a Save Restore menu Where a file name is required t
518. served basis Some files will be saved twice in such a circumstance the later archive s files overwriting any earlier archive s files which have the same name HA029324 Page 47 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 1 2 Remote archiving FTP transfer This allows archiving of recorder files for all groups with Archive via FTP enabled to a remote computer connected using the single RJ45 telephone type connector on the inderside of the recorder either direct ly or via a network Archive via FTP is enabled disabled as part of Group configuration section 4 3 2 In order to carry out a successful transfer details ofthe remote host must be entered in the Archive sec tion of the Config menu fection 4 3 5 Note An FTP server must be running on the remote host Figure 4 1 2 shows the menu for remote archiving The Archive last hour day etc keys allow the user to determine which files are to be archived Selection of Bring Archive Up To Date causes the recorder to select whichever of the Last Hour Last Day etc categories is appropriate in order to bring the archive up to date The Last Archive window shows the time and date of the previous archive The Archive Transfer window shows archive status as Active or Inactive Save Restore Config Security Network system Last Archive 08 09 2005 12 00 00 Bring Archi
519. set if the recorder fails after two attempts to establish communications with the primary server as defined in Archive Con figuration ection 4 3 5 After the second attempt has failed the Secondary server is tried FTP Secondary Server Failure This error is set if the recorder fails after two attempts to estab lish communications with the secondary server as defined in Archive Configuration section 4 3 5 See also FTP Primary Server Failure above Insufficient non volatile memory There is insufficient memory available for the configuration Can be caused by use of Rolling Average maths functions Internal flash application required repair Error found in the internal file system at power up and corrected Internal flash history required repair Error found in the internal file system at power up and corrected Internal flash screens required repair Error found in the internal file system at power up and corrected Internal flash user required repair Error found in the internal file system at power up and corrected Internal flash user is full Appears if the User partition is full To clear either user screens must be simplified or files must be deleted from User or both Maths Channel failure Appears if for example the divisor of a divide function is zero Media Archiving file lost Archive failed A file which has not been archived has been detected Media Archiving too slow Archive is too infrequent
520. shows Login by user list which is the default method If either Auditor option and or the Security management option is enabled an alternative procedure is possible where each user has to enter a name and associated password i e there is no list of users access levels to choose from See fection 4 4 2 Management for details 4 For active Directory users a password expiry warning message below appears at log in stat ing how many days remain before the password expires configured at the Active Directory server Fred password expires in 2 days Page 26 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 3 1 ACCESS TO CONFIGURATION Cont TROUBLE SHOOTING For Active Directory users if login fails check that the Active Directory Server system alarm is not active section 3 1 3 and that one of the TLS options is enabled section 4 5 1 At the Active Directory check that the password has not expired and that Change Password at next loin has not been enabled TEXT STRING ENTRY The keyboard which appears when the password area is touched is the same as that which appears when any non numeric text string entry is required e g channel descriptor Figures 3 3 1b and 3 3 1c below are an attempt within the limitations of the illustrating process to depict the available keyboards and thus the available character set Actual entry ofthe text string is by touching the relevant keys
521. slaves set up menu The Detect All Slaves key is used to detect any slaves connected to the system within certain search parameters Operation of the button calls a display page figure 4 3 16b which allows the entry of a start IP address a range of IP addresses and a range of Modbus addresses In the above example the search is carried out for all devices with Modbus addresses in the range 1 to 2 inclusive associated with instruments which have IP addresses between 149 121 130 200 and 149 121 130 249 inclusive Network PARAMETERS AND KEYS Allows the user to select a network to search over Overwrite existing slaves The Auto Detect results page see below lists all the instruments found within the search parameters along with a tick box for each one Each instrument whose tick box is enabled is assigned to the Remote Device list in the Master Comms configura tion page If Overwrite existing slaves is enabled then newly found instruments will temporarily over write instruments previously configured there The list becomes per manent when the Modbus configuration page Apply key is operated but any of the slaves can be edited if required prior to this Timeout The search for a slave is aborted if it does not respond within this time and the search moves on to the next slave From Node The start address for the search For nodes The number of contiguous addresses to be searched starting wit
522. sociated with the specified point Acknowledge Alarm Acknowledges specific alarm Disable All Alarms Disables all alarms Disable Alarms on Group Disables all alarms in the specified group Disable Alarms on Point Disables all alarms associated with the specified point Disable Alarm Disables a specific alarm Further selection boxes allow a group or point respectively to be defined Job Number 1 y Category Alarm v Action Acknowledge Alarms on Group Group i Group Y44 Select Required Group or point On Acknowledgement Select Active Inactive or Acknowledgement Select required Acknowledge or Disable function Figure 4 7 13 Alarm job menu layout 4 7 14 Archive category Archive jobs allow a job to be used to trigger an archive to the instrument s mass storage medium orto a host computer using FTP transfer The following jobs are available Archive Last Hour Last Day Last 7 Days or Last 31 days to FTP Bring FTP archive up to date Cancel Archive to FTP Archive Last Hour Last Day Last 7 Days or Last 31 days to Local device Bring Media Archive up to date Suspend Archive to Media Cancel Archive to Media These jobs copy the archiving functions available from the Archive key described in section 4 1 ofthis document For FTP items see Remote archiving for Media see Local Archive Job Number 1 Category Archive Y Action Bring Media Archive Up to Date 4 S
523. sors actuators to complex control devices such as robots and PLCs The producer consumer model allows the exchange of information between a single sending device producer and a large number of receiving devices consumers without having to send data multiple times to multiple destina tions EtherNet IP makes use of the CIP Control amp Information Protocol common network transport and application layers currently implemented by DeviceNet and ControlNet Standard Ethernet and TCP IP technology is used to transport CIP communications packets The result is a common open application layer on top of Ethernet and TCP IP protocols In order to record and trend data that has been written by the client the relevant channel or maths channel must be configured with Input Type setto Ethernet IP Comms Input and the channel must be included in a Recording enabled group See sections 3 2 Group configuration 3 3 Channel con figuration and 3 11 maths configuration as necessary MESSAGING Ethernet IP uses two forms of messaging UNCONNECTED MESSAGING This is used in the connection establishment process and for infrequent low priority messages The unconnected resources in a device are called the Unconnected Message Manager UCMM CONNECTED MESSAGING This uses resources within each node that are dedicated in advance to a particular purpose such as fre quent explicit message transactions or real time I O data transfers
524. ss the chart whenever a recording job is used to disable enable recording 4 Ifthe 21CFR11 option is enabled Erase All History jobs can be triggered but are ignored leaving the recording history unaffected Job Number Category Recording Y Recording Enable y Select required action Group 1 Group 1 E Select required Group if appropriate While Active Y Select Active Inactive or Unacknowledged Figure 4 7 9 Recording job menu layout Page 221 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 7 10 Trend category Trend jobs allow the following actions to occur Span B Switches the point being configured to span B and zone B for as long as the job is active Span B Group Switches all the points in the selected group to their individual spans and zones B for as long as the job is active Colour B Switches the point being configured to colour B for as long as the job is active Colour B Group Switches all the points in the selected group to their individual colours B for as long as the job is active Speed Interval B Switches Trend Speed Interval for the selected group to Speed Interval B for as long as the job is active Note If a B value has not been set the default A value will be used instead If the Simulation option section 4 3 22 is enabled the following additional Trend jobs become available Freeze Freezes pro
525. strument as shown in figures P 1gand big These connectors can be configured by means of a 4 gang DIP switch each as Master or Slave Further sections of the switches allow 120 terminating resistors to be switched in and out of circuit The DIP switches are accessible by removing the access cover at the rear of the unit RJ 45 plug View on underside Table 2 2 2a shows the pinout for master and slave connections Figure 2 2 2 and table 2 2 2b show the switch details for the small frame unit large frame unit similar 5 wire 5 wire 3 Wire Master Slave Master Slave RxB TxB B RxA TxA A Common Common Common NC NC NC NC NC NC Common Common Common TxB RxB NC COIN ON CI i TxA RxA NC Table 2 2 2a Serial communication port pinout BR2330 Cover retaining e screw location Port 1 Port 2 and switches CAUTION The user must be at the same electrical potential as the instrument housing when accessing internal items such as batteries Slave ON left OFF right Master 5 wire 3 wire LED INDICATORS There are two LED indicators associated with the Serial Communications RJ45 connectors Kua al Serial communications Ethernet ports connector Figure 2 2 2b Serial communications hardware configuration Small frame shown large frame similar The yellow LED indicates when the unit is transmitting 120 Ohm terminating resisto
526. symbol Figure 4 3 21m The communications list unexpanded 3 Using the scroll bar as necessary click on the Generic EtherNet Module item figure 4 3 21n and click on OK or double click on the selected item 4 Inthe Parameters page that appears figure 4 3 21p enter a name for the module and set the follow ing values Comm Format Data INT Address Host name The IP address of the recorder from Operator Network Address menu Input 100 size 200 Output 112 size 200 Configuration 1 size O 5 Tick click on the Open Module Properties checkbox if it is not already ticked 6 Click on OK Wii Select Module Description Vendor New Module 1769 L35E Etherne 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Port on CompactLogix5335E Allen Bradley 1788 EN2DN A 1788 Ethernet to DeviceNet Linking Device Allen Bradley 1788 ENBT A 1788 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Bridge Twisted Pair Media Allen Bradley ID ZE bicis 1788 EWEB A 1788 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Bridge w Enhanced Web Serv Allen Bradley Vendor Allen Bradley 1794 AENT A 1794 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Adapter Twisted Pair Media Allen Bradley Parent LocalENB 1794 AENT B 1794 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Adapter Twisted Pair Media Allen Bradley Name ltest6000 Drivelogix5730 Eth 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Port on DriveLogix5730 Allen Bradley EN s i y Size ETHERNET BRIDGE Generic EtherNet IP CIP Bridge Allen Bradley Description EES ETHERNET MODLILE Generic Ethernet Module Bradle Input 100 200 lt
527. t 2 The first line must be HEADER ETHERNET_IP_SERVER 1 3 Subsequent lines may be comments preceded with a character and terminated with a Carriage return or a configuration item in the lt point type gt lt point number gt lt suffix gt as described in Table Entry above WIZARD The wizard offers a quick and easy way of loading the Input Table by touching the required point param eters and then entering start and end values for the range of points to be included For current software the Output table is not editable so any changes made in the Wizard are ignored Point Type Process Value Point Status Span High Span Low Decimal Places Start New Table From point To point Point Type Channel y Process Value I Point Status m Span High a Span Low Decimal Places Tick default to replace current list Start New table V untick to append items to existing list From Point 1 4 Enter point range To point 1 Touch tick items to include them in the Input Table Configure Cancel Figure 4 3 21c Input table wizard Select Channel or Math for configuration The Configure key must be operated before changing from Channel to Math or vice versa as only the configuration for the currently displayed Point Type i e Channel or Math is saved to the Input table Select to include Process Value Select to include Point Status
528. t Copy Polynomial Fvalue Switch Linear Mass Flo Root Mass Flo Rolling Average 10 to the power Group Latched Minimum Group Latched Maximum Sample and Hold Square Root High Select Low Select Copies the value of a selected point to the maths channel being configured Al lows extra alarms to be set up for the copied point Provides a polynomial curve fit for the specified point using up to 8 orders This function calculates equivalent time at sterilizing temperature for tempera tures above and below the sterilizing temperature Fo dry and FH steam steri lizing calculations can be carried out by entering the correct constant The value can be held using a Disable job or set to zero prior to the next run using a reset job SeeBection 4 7 for a description of jobs The function value is retained during power off Allows two channels A and B to be selected as alternative sources for the se lected maths channel to copy The maths channel copies source A unless a Switch to B job is active on the maths channel See for Job descrip tions This function calculates mass flow from linear type transducer outputs This function calculates mass flow from square root type transducer outputs This takes the average value of a single channel over a specified number of read ings taken at a specified interval The function value is retained during power off Mean Kinetic Temperature A single calc
529. t ed e g system messages global alarm FTP clock etc User Guide HA029324 Page 236 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 6 6 4 Error messages A number of error conditions may occur to prevent Bridge from viewing the recorder Such conditions result in the appearance of one of the pop up messages listed below NETWORK CONNECTION HAS TIMED OUT This message appears when no connection can be established between the host pc and the instrument This might be caused by for example cable failure the instrument s not being powered network hardware failure etc UNABLE TO CONNECT TO HOST Similar to the timeout message above but with the additional cause incorrect host address UNABLE TO RESOLVE HOSTNAME Caused by an incorrect host address or network failure FAILED TO AUTHENTICATE THE USER NAME Caused by incorrect user name or password MAXIMUM NUMBER OF BRIDGE SESSIONS ALREADY RUNNING ON An attempt is being made to establish more than the maximum number of Bridge sessions to the specified instrument THERE APPEARS TO BE NO FREE DISK SPACE ON Appears if there is insufficient space on the PC hard disk YOU ARE ALREADY RUNNING A FULL BRIDGE SESSION Appears if the pc is already connected to the recorder and running a Full Bridge session YOU ARE AUTHENTICATING FULL BRIDGE Only Bridge Lite is accessible to users using Anonymous HA02932
530. t latching alarm Acknowledge B Y Y not yet acknowledged i Job triggers even if alarm still active On acknowledgement non latching alarm Y Figure 4 3 3g Graphical representation of job actions ge printing on the chart can be enabled disabled as a part of section 3 1 4 for details on how to acknowledge alarms HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 73 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 4 Views Configuration This part of the recorder s configuration allows groups to be set up either individually or globally to include the various display modes described infection 3 4 above and user screens if fitted When ena bled a display mode is added to the Group s Goto View menu and to the up down arrow scroll list Home Group and Home Page picklists allow a group and display mode to be defined for display when the Home key is pressed in the Roof menu Home Time out o Minutes Home Group 1 Group 1 y Select group for Ze Home display Scope Group W Select Instrument or Group i Select group for These fields appear Group 1 Group 1 Y Jisp ay moe enable only if Scope Group Display Enable y Home Page Circular Trend Y Select Home A P display mode for Vertical Trend y instrument or for CH selected grou Horizontal Trend ind Circular Trend y S Enabled Vertical Bargraph y Horizontal Bargraph y Numeric Page w
531. t Ch9 Alarm 2 setpoint Ch9 Alarm 3 setpoint Ch9 Alarm 4 setpoint Spare Description Upper span value display full scale Lower span value display zero Zone upper value of chart width Zone lower value of chart width Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 Note 2 Description Upper span value display full scale Lower span value display zero Zone upper value of chart width Zone lower value of chart width Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 Note 2 Description Upper span value display full scale Lower span value display zero Zone upper value of chart width Zone lower value of chart width Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 Note 2 Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 Note 2 Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Access Read only Read only Read only Read only Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Start Addr Hex Dec D5BF 54719 D5C1 54721 D5C3 54723 D5C5 54725 D5C7
532. t periods these will override the entry here MESSAGE START END CHARACTERS For ASCII input protocol only the message can be prefixed by 0 1 or 2 specific characters and can be suffixed by 0 1 or 2 specific characters The First and Second Start and End characters are entered as decimal ASCII codes between 0 and 127 as required 0 no character 10 Line Feed 13 Carriage Return See Annex B for a list of ASCII codes If only one start or end character is required the first char acter must be entered and the second character be entered as zero GROUP SELECTION For ASCII input protocol this allows groups to be deselected selected for receipt ofthe messages A checked box indicates thatthe associated group will receive the messages Page 141 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 15 CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS Cont ENABLE ERROR CODE B For Modbus Master only Ifenabled this causes an error code B to be generated in the event of a timeout or a Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC error ENABLE TALK THROUGH For Modbus Master only If disabled this prevents external Ethernet masters from accessing the slaves connected to this instru ment I E only this instrument can act as a master to its slaves MESSAGING INFORMATION Characters are read into a buffer until the end of message characters are received or until the time since last character exceeds the entered Timeout v
533. t Background Paint All Repaint the area of the component including any text in its back ground colour If no background colour has been defined the default silver grey colour is used Repaints the component area in the screen background colour thus rendering the component invisible PV Error Colour Background Default Allows a colour to be selected for background use when the relevant PV is in an error state Overrides other selections PV Error Colour Foreground Default Allows a colour to be selected for foreground use when the relevant PV is in an error state Overrides other selections Reversed colour None Allows text to be displayed in the background colour against a back ground of foreground colour Scale Digits None For Horizontal trend displays Allows the chart area to be maximised by reducing the width of the vertical bar to the right of the chart Scales will be presented in scientific format or in N N format etc depending on the number of digits specified The number of digits is in addition to the decimal point Scale Divisions MajorNone For channel bargraphs allows the number of major scale divisions to be specified for the channel Overwrites the Scale Divisions Major set ting in the Channel s configuration Scale Divisions MinorNone For channel bargraphs allows the number of minor scale divisions to be specified for the channel Overwrites the Scale Divisions
534. t address in the selected list CC The remaining valid addresses in the recipient list Subject Contains the subject text entered during configuration Empty if SMS Body selected as Protocol Page 169 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 19 EMAILS Cont THE BODY AREA This contains the body text along with any appended messages In the example above the message has the embedded values of Instrument name Instrument number channel 1 alarm 1 status as implied by the bodytext OPERATION 1 E mails are generated either by job or by operation of an Event Button from a User screen ifthe Screen builder option is fitted 2 Everytime the sending of an e mail is requested a General note is generated and appears in the message log for all groups The format is Date Time Sent lt e mail descriptor gt to List N where lt e mail descriptor gt represents the descriptor entered in the configuration page for the e mail and List N is the recipient list to whom the e mail was sent 3 Access to e mails is restricted to users with Full Configuration permission Signing Authorizing restrictions can be applied only to e mails generated by Event button opera tion as part of the Event button s configuration Eecton 43 5 The instrument implements the Simple Message Transfer Protocol SMTP incorporating Multipur pose Internet Mail extensions 6 The instrument does not i
535. t is accessible to the user and the file sys tem on any bulk storage device fitted to be viewed See Bection 5 for details This key is provided to help ensure that any local memory storage device is removed only when itis safe to do so Touching the key results in either an OK to remove archive media ora DO NOT REMOVE Archive Media message as appropriate For more details see fection 3 1 4 Allows the user to selectthe display mode for the current group as shown in figure 3 2 1a Display nj a or DERE EBEN o om Aa page section4 3 4 donotappear As analternative displaymodescanbescrolled throughusingtheupand downarrow navigation keys Goto View also offers an alternative means of entry to the described in section 3 1 4 and also allows entry to the current group s Message Log pages described be low Page 22 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 2 1 KEY FUNCTIONS Cont ROOT MENU KEYS Cont Goto Group Allows a group to be selected for display Groups which are not display enabled in the Config Views page section 4 3 4 are greyed An alarm icon appears as shown for groups 1 and 4 in figure 3 2 1b below for any group containing one or more points in alarm The icon flashes if any ofthe group s alarms have not been acknowledged Notes 1 Ifthere is insufficient space on the display screen for all the enabled groups or views More keys appear as necessary
536. t one PC can look at only N recorders where N depends on how much memory is available at the PC For example a minimum specification computer section 6 1 1 run ning Windows NT can look at up to three recorders simultaneously 3 Asingle PC connected via a telephone line to a remote recorder This manual does not describe network setup in detail as each network is different In most cases the help of the network administrator or supervisor will be required for example in the allocation of valid addresses and passwords Notes 1 When logging in via Bridge only users with Connect from Remote enabled appear in the user list See for details 2 Full Bridge requires some small amount of space on the PC disk The message There appears to be no free disk space on the client Create some space and run again appears if there is insufficient space 3 If an attempt is made to establish more than one Full Bridge connection between a PC and an in strument the message You are already running a Full Bridge session with this instrument The new session will run as Bridge Lite appears 4 If an attempt is made to establish a Full Bridge connection using the anonymous user name the following message appears You are authenticating Full Bridge using the anonymous user name This provides guest read only access To establish Full Bridge connection you must use a different user name Please change and try aga
537. ta ibyte encryptedData ibyte encryptedData ibyte 1 Now add all the bytes together to get a 16 bit value result for ibyte 0 ibyte lt dataLen ibyte byteResult encryptedData ibyte Return the encrypted string as a 16 bit value return byteResult Notes 1 If login is accepted a standard response is sent to the master 2 If three invalid logins are sent by the master then an illegal address exception code 2 is sent to the master User Guide HA029324 Page 268 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 2 4 SECURITY Cont TO SEND A LOGIN REQUEST Request Figure 8 2 4a shows data transmission sequence for sending a login request to a recorder with Modbus address 1 using the Ethernet network connection Figure 8 2 4b is the same message for use with serial communica tions Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8 Byte 9 Byte 10 Byte 11 00 00 00 00 00 13 01 10 CC 30 00 06 Transaction Transaction Protocol Protocol Always 00 Number of Recorder Modbus Start Start No of regis No of reg identifier identifier identifier identifier bytes fol Modbus function address address low ters high isters low lowing hex address code hex high Byte 12 Byte 13 Byte 14 Byte 15 Byte 16 Byte 17 Byte 18 Byte 19 Byte 20 Byte 21 Byte 22 Byte 23 DC 45 6E 67 69 6E 65 65 72 00 HH HH Byte
538. table 7 3 2 The number of columns can also be defined by the user according to the over all size of the display minimum width number of channels etc The recorder attempts to fit as many channels as possible into the height of the display according to the specified minimum height default 12mm If there are more channels than can be fitted into the display a scroll bar appears at the right edge to allow bidden channels to be accessed User Guide Page 256 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 4 4 Group numeric display This produces a display of a selected group s numeric values in one of a number of formats as described in Faceplate Style in above The number of columns can also be defined by the user according to the overall size of the display number of channels etc The default value of zero means that the recorder will display what it believes to be the most ergonomic number of columns The recorder attempts to fit as many channels as possible into the height of the display according to the specified minimum height default 12mm If there are more channels than can be fitted into the display a scroll bar appears at the right edge to allow hidden channels to be accessed 7 4 5 Channel vertical horizontal bargraph For a specified channel this produces a dynamic horizontal or vertical bargraph display of channel value in a format defined by Bargrap
539. tant N Preset Totaliser N Preset Counter N Start Stop Timer N _ Figure 7 4 10 si Typical operator button Initiate Demand Write N 8 Setoutput channel N to default values N On mn P QQ N In all the above N represents any number between 1 and the maximum number available for the relevant type of point Point is an umbrella term for input channel a maths channel a totaliser etc When the button is operated a confirmation page appears allowing for example the value of a constant to be edited before the Apply button is operated Notes 1 If the point being accessed is not suitably configured the confirmation page is blank For exam ple if the Operator button is configured to change say the threshold SP of Alarm 2 on Channel 6 and either Channel 6 is Configured Off or alarm 2 is Off then the Confirmation page will not have a configurable area allowing the user to enter the required new value 2 Any signing or authorizing that normally applies to the item being edited also applies when changes are being made by means of the Operator button 7 4 11 Event Button This displays a pushbutton to be used as a source for an event The button name its action latching or unlatching and whether or not the operation of the button needs signing or authorizing are set up in Event Button configuration described in The actions taken when the button is operated are set up in Event configuration
540. tant the relevant gas constant in J kg K Z The compressibility factor described above HA029324 Page 105 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont ROOT MASS FLOW Note The overall accuracy of a flow measurement installation depends on a number of fac tors outside the control of the recorder manufacturer For this reason the recorder manu facturer takes no responsibility for the accuracy of the results obtained using the mass flow equations implemented in the maths pack The equation solved is QM K2 DeltaP x AbsP RgxZ Temp where OM Mass flow in kg sec at time t K Scaling factor see below Rg Specific gas constant in J kg K see below Z Compressibility factor see below DeltaP Measured value across the orifice plate at time t AbsP Absolute pressure of the fluid at the up stream tapping at time t in kPa A Temp Temperature of the fluid at the up stream tapping in Kelvins SCALING FACTOR This is determined from an assumed value of Om at a known DeltaP AbsP and Temp The value is chosen to give an output within the range low scale to high scale SPECIFIC GAS CONSTANT The specific gas constant for any gas is available from published tables For convenience the value for a number of common gases is given in able 4 3 11a above COMPRESSIBILITY FACTOR Z FACTOR Compressibility factor is a density related measure of how fa
541. te 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte7 Bytes 8 onwards Transaction Transaction Protocol Protocol Number of Recorder Modbus Data identifier identifier identifier identifier Always 00 bytes fol Modbus function Depends on usually 00 usually 00 00 00 lowing address code hex function code Figure 8 5 MODBUS package Notes 1 The transaction identifier has no active function the recorder just copies the bytes from the re quest message to the response message 2 The protocol identifier bytes are always zero FUNCTION CODES AND EXCEPTION CODES Refer to fection 8 2 1 for lists of function codes and exception codes supported TEXT STRINGS When sending text strings such as Batch fields the final character must be followed by one or two Null char acters The number of bytes in the text string including the null must be even even if this means adding two nulls at the end of the message instead of one For example the text string Batch Number should be sent as Ba tc hSpace Nu mb er NullNull or Ba tc hSpace Nu mb er SpaceNull where each pair of characters occupies on 16 bit word Similarly the text string Batch Number would be sent as Ba tc hSpace Nu mb er null but only one Null character is required to provide an even number of bytes HA029324 User Guide Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 313 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 5 1 Function code 03 REQUES
542. ted for configuration Enable Allows the user to start stop counting by enabling disabling the counter Value Shows the current dynamic value of the counter Units Allows a text string of up to 5 characters to be entered as a units description Preset Allows a counter value to be entered for manual or job action preset Scale low high The values to appear atthe scale end points If A B switching is enabled a second set of scale low and scale high values can be entered A values are us ed during normal operation B values are switched to by job action as described in The remaining configuration items are as described for input channels in Bection 4 3 3 except that Log Linear scale type is not available Note An absolute high alarm for example with a threshold of 10 will not be triggered until the value exceeds 10 i e counter value 11 In order to trip the alarm at 10 a threshold lower than 10 must be entered e g threshold 9 5 A similar situation exists for absolute low and deviation alarms Page 133 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 13 COUNTERS Cont COUNTER MODBUS ADDRESSING The table below gives addresses for counter 1 configuration data Generally Counter N parameter ad dress counter 1 parameter address 162 N 1 decimal For full details ofthe Modbus implementa tion see COUNTER CONFIGURATION DATA COUNTER 1 Parameter name Desc
543. tem Upgrade Key Code area section 4 6 3 and operating the Apply button CAUTION The option should be used with discretion as once the history has been erased it can never be regained B8 1 KEYCODE EXTRACTION Notes 1 This operation can be carried out only from the recorder s operator interface It is not possible to extract the keycode or to erase history from a remote pc 2 To be able to carry out the procedure below users must have Paste Delete Files permission enabled in the Security menu section 4 4 1 3 The keycode displayed in the System Upgrade menu returns to its previous value after a history erase operation 4 This option is not enabled during Trial Mode ection 4 3 22 1 Recorders fitted with this option come complete with a file called HMT TXT in the use area of the filing system accessed as described in section 5 2 Highlight this file and copy it using the Filer Options menu Copy key eel Roses 3 With a memory device e g Memory stick inserted use the Filer Options menu Paste key to save the file into the removable media area Cut Copy 4 Move the storage device from the recorder to a pc and open the file in an ap propriate program e g Notebook to reveal a key code Paste Refresh 5 This keycode can be keptin a secure area for re use in subsequent erase op Figure B8 1 erations for this recorder Filer option menu B8 2
544. tet detis 223 Contigua u s suu a mi inde pa ease 50 Output tO RE 174 Dota akteu etit imet ott rnt er 196 Output chanel Sendas deis 162 User Guide HA029324 Page 360 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE O Cont E 262 er 27 Oxygen Concentration cau tacet aei ere ait aoe 118 Correction TET TET 101 116 Potential 120 P Page O 249 Up down keys 2 coe tette ten 22 Paint Aleron ERE 253 EE TE E 253 Panel mounting dimensions a s 318 Parameter Demand writes esses 164 Master comms Controller inicie 152 Recorder aiis na r E a 150 N E ATE E Password Authentication Cache Expiry Change Change on expiry Editing zie HS 192 Eet 190 Paste delete file permiesion sse 189 Paste koala PUES 226 242 Perform upgrade permission sse 189 Period scale rosarios 129 dp M 209 Pixels Absolute relative 240 dej C S s 172 PA E es MEE DIET 82 Mile degt 150 SUCI T 176 PO sanan RU 64 150 164 176 Pollo made ONE Susini ct tete awa ees 317 A AS 261 RI noia ein rtr ee peine dr HE 260 Polynomial TELE 100 102 Port Email me 168 NUM DIS ceu ien Se OE DO awas hun aha 331 Positioning CT duu tenance 244 UNI E 244 Power E Un 5 Power Up Event SOUC Eseese nease AEE EEE E ERR 83 MeSSage in
545. th be used to write the change to the recorder data base The user must have Full Security access in order to add a new user If either Auditor option is fitted the new user s access permission list is printed on the chart Adding a new user clears the recorder s password Cache as described in below New User ID New Full User Name New Domain Name New Password Retype Password Based On Operator Y Add Apply Discard Figure 4 4 3 Add User display page NEW USER ID This field allows a User ID of up to 20 characters to be entered for a new user This ID is used when log ging in using ID password entry technique that is when Login by user list is disabled as described in section 4 4 2 above NEW FULL USER NAME This field allows a User name of up to 25 characters to be entered This name appears in the current ac cess level pushbutton at the top left corner of the display screen in operator notes and so on NEW DOMAIN NAME For units fitted with Security Manager only this allows the entry of a Security Domain name up to 60 characters in length If such an entry is made the Password fields described below do not appear and the user must use a network login assigned by the IT department or by the network administrator The domain name appears in the Access menu and can be edited there if required once the Add User pro cedure is complete If Centralised Secu
546. the following Batch Number field BATCH NUMBER This allows the Value entered for Field 1 s heading to be selected as Use Text or Use Counter USE TEXT When Text is selected the value for field 1 is entered by the operator on initiation of the batch USE COUNTER When Counter is selected a further field appears counter allowing a specific counter to be selected from a picklist The selected counter initiates a new batch whenever it changes value and the counter value is appended to the text associated with Field 1 but see note 2 See section 4 3 13 for details of counters Notes 1 Start batch is initiated on any change in counter value not just increment 2 it is recommended that when Use Counter is selected only Counter 1 be used as the batch initiator Other counters may be selected but operation is not guaranteed FIELDS 2 TO 10 Fields 2 to 10 are also used as headings for batch information Values for these headings must be en tered by the operator prior to Batch initiation See also On new clear below Headings can be up to 20 characters long including spaces ON START LOG This defines how many of the selected Fields are to be printed at batch start An entry of 1 means that only Field 1 will be printed An entry of 2 means that Fields 1 and 2 will be used and so on An entry of 0 means that only the Batch Start message will be printed It is not possible to print
547. these instructions the detail should be general enough to allow any other PLC to be used Page 177 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 21 ETHERNET IP OPTION Cont INSTALLATION 1 4 Install the PLC software according to the instructions supplied with the PLC For this particular PLC once installation is complete the RSLinx Classic and RSLogix 5000 software items AMONGST OTHERS must be present RSLinx classic is used to provide a link between the PLC network and Windows and RSLogix 5000 is configuration and programming software for the PLC Use a cross over type serial cable to connect one ofthe pc ports to the serial port typically a 9 way D Type connector of the PLC Connect an Ethernet cable between the Ethernet port on the PLC typically an RJ45 socket and the recorder If a direct connection is used the cable must be a cross over type if connecting via a switch then non cross over cable must be used Power up the PLC and the Recorder Switch the PLC to Programmer mode SETTING UP THE LINK BETWEEN WINDOWS AND THE PLC NETWORK 1 Click on Start All Programs Rockwell soft Se all ware RSLinx RSLinx Classic The RSLinx Classic window opens Configure Drivers Available Driver Types 2 Click on Communications and select E bi i 2 i dee for pus devices Configure Drivers When the Configure Gelee Drivers windo
548. tive 1 Alarm 3 active Bit9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 10 1 Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11 Spare Bit 12 0 Alarm 4 inactive 1 Alarm 4 active Bit 13 0 No Alarm 4 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 14 1 Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15 Spare Ch2 Alarms Uint16 Read only Read only Read Write AIDE 41438 Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Read only Read only Read Write Note PV access is Read Write for any point configured with Slave Comms as its Type or Function Otherwise PV access is Read only User Guide Page 288 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 8 4 3 CHANNEL RUN TIME DATA Cont CHANNEL 3 Parameter name Ch3 value Ch3 status Ch3 Alarms CHANNEL 4 Parameter name Ch4 value Ch4 status Description Current process value PV Channel status 0 Good PV 1 Channel off 2 Over range 3 Under range 4 Hardware error Alarm information Bit 0 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Bit 1 O No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 2 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3 Spare Bit 4 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Bit5 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 6 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7 Spare Bit 8 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Bit 9 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Bit 10 1 Ac
549. to allow further items to be displayed for selection 2 In normal operating e g trend displays the right arrow key can be used to scroll through groups in ascending group number order The left arrow key can be used to scroll through groups in descending group number order EE Alarm Summary Message Log Vertical Trend Horizontal Tre uw A display mode appears only if it is enabled for the current group Circular Trend Vertical Bargraj aha User screen keys appear only if a User Screens Horizontal Bargraph option is fitted and the relevant screen is enabled J for the current group See Views configuration section 4 3 4 for enable disable details User Screen 3 Figure 3 2 1a Root menu with Goto View sub menu Operator File Remove Media Goto View Groups which are not display enabled in Views configuration section 4 3 4 are greyed Figure 3 2 1b Root menu with Goto Group sub menu HA029324 Page 23 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 2 1 KEY FUNCTIONS Cont ALARM SUMMARY The Root menu Goto View Alarm summary key calls the Alarm summary page for the current group to the screen Alternatively Alarm summary can be selected from the Alarm Message and Media menu but in this case the user must select an alarm summary group from a pop up Goto Group menu See for more details ofthe alarm summary page MESSAGE LOG
550. to store as nearly as possible the same amount of history for all groups regardless of how many points there are in the groups For empty groups or if Recording is not enabled for a group the Trend History Duration is displayed as 0 Days ARCHIVE TO MEDIA ENABLE ARCHIVE VIA FTP ENABLE If recording is enabled these tick boxes allow the archiving of this group s data to removable mass stor age media and or to a remote host FTP to be enabled or disabled If recording is disabled these fields cannot be edited Note When recording to floppy disk drives via the USB port it is recommended that only one group be set up with Archive to media enabled This is because history files are typically 400kB in size and this limits the number of files which can be saved to a 1 4MB floppy disk to three If more than one group is setup to archive and if Overwrite strategy is selected then it is likely that all the data for one or more of the groups will be lost No warning is given ALARM MESSAGE This box allows the printing of alarm on and off messages on the chart to be enabled or disabled as re quired Alarm messages appear on the trend display and in PC Review in the form HH MM SS Alarm ON n m and HH MM SS Alarm OFF n m where n is the relevant channel number and m is the alarm number 1 or 2 ACK MESSAGE This tick box allows the printing of alarm acknowledgement messages on the chart to be enabled or disabled as re
551. tore Paste Delete Files Full Configuration Full Security Batch Control Can Sign Can Authorize Perform Upgrades Event Permission 1 Event Permission 2 Event Permission 3 Event Permission 4 Event Permission 5 Edit Output Channel Default Action Demand Writes Force Change of Password Enter Batch Data Allow web server Login section 3 3 1 Select the required access level and enter the O password if required User Engineer W Password expires in 30 Days Frederick Bloggs Y Logout cii To change access level a password may be required according to configuration Engineer password is 100 when dispatched but can be edited from Engineer level in Access y Fred Service is for use by service engineers only Operator default password is blank i e none required unless Auditor pack option is fitted in IKIKIKIXIKIKININIXIK KI KIKI amp IKIKINI amp I amp I amp IXIK I amp X X lt lt J Apply H Discard which case it is also 100 User Guide Page 344 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B9 MENU STRUCTURE Cont Archive Save Restore Config Security System Figure Figure B9c Figures Figure Figure B9b B9d Boj B9Um to B9i 240 08 00 48 80 00 FO Instrument number MAC address Network Section 4 5 IP address lookup Get fro
552. tra PORE EXER EORR I ERR S 25 Preset Clock Job MOI ME iincico tds Group Ee DEE 188 Preset Cont A Jobim Permission Pressure unit Convereion nene 111 Preventive Maintenance iaa 326 Primary EK KE EE 204 Login Name E 80 Remote OS tatuada Oi re hagi Peer 80 Printed keys arista AER 22 Process Value tere ete tee 171 Update rate ceo Free etd 150 152 Process Value eI REP GEDIGUEEN 176 Profile Modbus slave t u u un sua nn qalawasa 145 Properties page User screens 242 EE 141 168 PV Error Colo UR su suyla n aida 253 Format u IN 69 102 Q Question marks in message sss 86 Quick entry to user screen ect 244 R Rate of change ZA ans a ere uei ERE 70 Maths TURCEIOT trente 101 115 Reptl to ReptlO ucc trt tr e ite epa 168 Reading Digialsya lues cian Tutto lolita 155 User defined registers 153 Recall pn E E 184 Recipient List eee teet ee e nee an 168 Recorder Configuration See Section 4 3 Bil EI E 3 Panel installati Milicia 2 3 SpecificatiON EE 318 Synchronisation SNP eite tene neers 202 UnpackilOu arrima ee Eet 2 Recording Enable iiic lla 29 Enable disable ese 62 221 Failed instrument alarm 10 nter ga tu A Ee PE 63 EE 221 ON 63 Speed B job E 220 Recording failed internal overflow 63 194 Record odie aaa 191 E UE 259 Red line across theChat sneinen 30 Refere
553. trument name Instrument number chan 1Alarm1 Include Message y Message 3 1 2 3 4 V 44 Select Message Number Apply Discard Figure 4 3 19a E mail configuration SMTP Protocol Page 167 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 19 EMAILS Cont CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS This subsection contains details of the parameters that appear in the E mail configuration page figure 4 3 19a above Figure 4 3 19b below may also be referred to for further explanation Mail Server Port Number Sender Errors To Retry time Recipient List Descriptor Rcpt1 to Rept10 Email Number Descriptor Protocol Subject Text Include message Enter the name note 1 of the mail server or IP address here This is the destination to which e mails are sent for subsequent delivery This is the port number used for SMTP by the servers Most servers use port 25 for this function and this value should be changed from the default only by experienced personnel For DNS operation this is a combination ofthe Local Host and Domain entries set up in the Network Name area of configuration described in If Fixed I P Address is selected the I P Address appears instead The unit accesses the Sender information automatically and it cannot be edited here The Sender is placed in the From part of the e mail header An e mail address to which any error messages ca
554. tual signal are largely filtered out by Normal Tracing but is displayed by the Adaptive Trace Figure 4 3 2b is for illustrative purposes only as traces such as these could never appear on the chart together Actual input signal Normal trace Figure 4 3 2b Adaptive recording compared with Normal tracing Page 60 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 2 GROUP CONFIGURATION Cont A B SWITCHING Ifenabled this function allows alternative values for Trend speed interval and Recording speed interval to be entered A values are used during normal operation B values are switched to by job action as described in TREND SPEED TREND INTERVAL Allows the chart speed to be selected either as mm per hour or in per hour or as an interval Enter ing a value in one field automatically converts the value in the other field A trend interval of N seconds is equivalent to 1200 N mm hr chart speed a chart speed of P mm hr is equivalent to a trend interval of 1200 P seconds If A B switching is enabled a second Trend Speed Interval value can be entered Trend Speed Interval A is used during normal operation Trend Speed Interval B is switched to by job action as described infection 4 4 Note Trend speed interval are not editable fields if Circular Settings is enabled C
555. tween true and reflected data with the result that the true data is corrupted In order to avoid this a termination resistor is fitted across the line at the final instrument For this instrument a terminating resistor can be switched into or out of circuit as shown infection 2 2 2 Section 2 2 2 also gives a pinout for the RJ45 connectors Page 139 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 15 CONNECTIONS Cont CONFIGURATION The default ASCII Serial comms configuration menu is as shown in figure 4 3 15a below Figures 4 3 15b and 4 3 15c show the alternative menus for Modbus slave and Modbus master selections respectively Notes 1 The serial communications hardware is limited to one start bit 2 The master slave selections made here must match the switch settings described in bection 2 2 2 Port Serial 1 Y Select port Link Error Count p Reset Error Count Protocol ASCII input v Connection E Baud Rate 19200Y Select required Baud rate Stop Bits 1Y Select 1 or 2 Parity None Y Select None Odd or Even Data Bits gy Select 7 or 8 Timeout 250 ms Enter required Timeout value First Start Char o Second Start Char o Enter decimal ASCII value between 0 A and 127 0 no character First End Char 13 See User Guide section B6 for list Second End Char 10 Group 1 y Group 2 y Groug Y Select Gro
556. type diVisIOls osse tentes tercie 62 Baud Ratones aa br 141 Chartispeed Circular recette t tenes 61 Best Fit tunas 250 Circular Chart Blue line across the chart sess 30 Chart FulloperatioDs nere tret 61 BootP timeo t nere etre be ie egeta 201 SI rm PEE 61 Bridge S POO 61 Alarm acknowledgement sss 236 Statt acci eer ep PERRO REGES 61 Configuration I oL P 34 ACCESS menlis cac rer ia aa 233 CIS SING 326 OPTIONS mend ves 2 rir ete eite terere ine 232 Clear eer eot tet etii ede 184 222 Connection details u u uuu u Ru ua 231 Password Cachi racial liada 185 198 Minimum PC requirements a 230 Clock Operation ierra IR enean 236 ACCURACY ys u HR 319 Running the program nre 234 Clock failure instrument alarm sees 10 Software installation sss 232 Preset Statt as MiS ainda 234 Hours and minutes selectlon eee 58 BirighthessiCOmtrol tances testes cera theres Acts ns edat rome 57 Joint 219 Bring archive up to date rsisi 47 SE 207 BSP Cisse M 27 Closes ee u einen een ED Re ERE 243 Button ac e 248 Colour Ala mp metet teu pu tiet ans 250 C Background ete eee 213 i m Backgrounds cscmeaea adimi ee rh 250 Calibration coefficients 320 e A EENS 69 250 Can Authorize O deg 189 Colour B select job
557. uct hr ERGO REFER DER 248 7 3 1 Basic parameter EE 248 7 3 2 Advanced paramiet Scrierea nieee ae E EEEE AEE qatapas Ea 250 7 4 COMPONENT DEFINITIONS rem e hebes eere eem es 256 7 4 1 Group Vertical Horizontal Trend 256 7 4 2 Group vertical bargraph ANEN erre ee 256 7 4 3 Groupbhorizontalbaroraph e 256 7 4 4 Group numeric display 257 7 4 5 Channel vertical horizontal bargraph 257 7 4 6 Channel Numeric sehe RR Rhee ee bee E EC 257 74 7 Channel data csi cs 257 FAB Dialogue AcM aee e se c mp eoe ihe 257 TAD Navigation Action 225 sisse y bre ni diraa Heed RR Ka ecce d 257 7 4 40 Operator button vox 52 cost cep eed Bee eee eben dde 258 PAA Event B ttOn dic eet seb Pa iia 258 TAA IMAGE EE EE 258 E dE 259 4444 Round rectangle serere dd qaku qusaq waq 259 LAND Rectangle nero rat e 259 7 4 16 Polyline series of points 260 TAAL Polygon closed areas rara rr mas tran NEEN 261 4448 Oyal porra id ti 262 PRA LING De 262 EXAMPLE 20030 Erratas 262 TA 20 AEG y n us kwan ua ER 263 EXAMPLE Su yaa A dao o ias 263 User Guide HA029324 Page viii Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE LIST OF CONTENTS CONT Section 7 5 MEASURING UNIT COMPARISONS iiasssasasas nesia TON XGA SCN EE 7 3 2 ONGASCE6N EE TEEN 8 MODBUS TCP SLAVE COMMS ST INSTALLATION x cias 8 2 INTRODUCTION eR ESHPOR UE et id 8 21 Fu
558. ue to user defined registers Value Function Code Register Data Type Scaling Shows the value returned from the selected register as modified by the scaling factor if any Allows Modbus function code 03 or 04 to be selected In some implementations the func tions of the two codes are identical In others the codes have different functions See the documentation supplied with the slave for a list of supported Modbus codes For this instru ment see fection 8 2 1 A decimal number representing the required parameter s location in the slave s Modbus Register map This information must be determined from the documentation supplied with the slave For this instrument contains listings for a number of instrument groups and input channels For details of maths totalisers etc refer to the relevant option description Select a suitable data type for the selected parameter again from the slave documentation For this instrument a list of relevant data types is given in Whether Scaling appears or not is Model and Parameter dependent If scaling is required the choice may be Decimal Places or High Low again according to Model Decimal Places allows a dividing factor to be entered An entry of 1 divides the returned value by 10 An entry of 2 divides by 100 etc for successful implementation there must be a sufficient number of decimal places defined in the Max Decimal Digits configuration field for the value t
559. ues 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 User Guide Page 241 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 2 3 The properties page 1 Ensure that one or more user screens is enabled in views Configuration section 7 1 1 If necessary call the required User screen to the display using the Root menu Goto View menu Press the Option key to call the Option Menu Press Edit Screen to call the Component Property Editor page to the display This display contains the basic properties of the Main background screen onto which the required components are to be overlaid Note This may take some seconds according to the complexity of the configuration A further press of the Option key calls the user screen Options display page Use the Option key again to return to the Component Properties display Batch Note Edit Screen muy Component picklist field Identifier main 1 1 Component Add Delete etc Last Error Page Title X Position 0 Y Component properties Y Position 0 v Fields vary according to Width 100 Y component type oo om Background Colour 1 Draw Order 1 Component Type Main Dimension picklist Select absolute pixels or relative pixels Goto Canvas Save Close More
560. uide Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 351 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE C3 4 HISTORY This produces a list of all the uhh files held in the instrument archive The files can be saved to a user speci fied location for use in Review or Quickchart applications Figure C3 4 shows part of a typical page Instrument Click here to select all files for saving to a user specified location Download All Data Files Note This data is in archived TAR format and cannot be opened directly by Review without first having been unzipped File Name Size Last Modified Group 1 20060501 00204B26000001C4 uhh Click on individual files to save to a 391 Kb 01 05 06 16 20 10 user specified location Group 1 20060501 00204B26000001C5 uhh 391 Kb 01 05 06 20 20 10 C3 4 History file display 3 5 ABOUT Clicking on this tab displays a subset of the information which appears in the recorder s About screen de scribed in The items which appear are Instrument variant Serial number Product software version Boot ROM version Board version SRAM and DRAM capacities User Guide HA029324 Page 352 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE INDEX Symbols Alarm Cont SIE E 250 On Group EventsourCO o c ertet au da 82 10 to the power maths function 100 SOUS aree eet edere eed 235 PLL ru cite m I pd e PERDERE 86 87 Summary Paguera donas 14 O SOU CO
561. ulation to simulate non isothermal ef fects of variations in storage temperature Output 10 raised to the power of the selected input value Outputs the minimum value reached by any of the points in a selected source group since last reset The function ignores points that are not producing valid PV A disable job stops the function reading its input A reset job sets the func tion to the current minimum value within the group Note that for proper opera tion the maths function must be in a group which is not the source group If this is notthe case it will always see itself as the lowest valued point in the group and Reset operations will have no useful effect As for Group Latched Minimum above but outputs the maximum value of the source group This function is initiated by a trigger job Attriggertime the selected point value is sampled and its value at trigger time is output continuously by this function On reset the PV becomes No data Outputs the square root of the value of the selected point Allows two points to be selected as inputs The output of the function is the value of that input point which currently has the higher value Allows two points to be selected as inputs The output of the function is the value of that input point which currently has the lower value Saturated Steam Mass Flow Calculates mass flow in kg s for saturated steam using either the steam tempera ture Celsius or pressure MPa as app
562. umber is then used as the Measured oxygen value Maths Number 1 Math 1 Y Value 0 0000 Units Function O2 Correction v Measured O2 Channel 1 Y Measured Gas Channel 2 Y Specified O2 o Units Units Apply 1 Discard Figure 4 3 11p Oxygen correction configuration menu Page 116 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont RELATIVE HUMIDITY This determines the percentage relative humidity from wet and drytemperature and atmospheric pres sure inputs Standard temperature and pressure at sea level are defined as 1 01325 Bar and 15 C Pressure varies with height as indicated in table 4 3 11c The standard psychrometric constant is 0 000666 6 66 x 10 The equation solved is _ Ay WA WA w A w A wA px AbsP d w A dA A d A d A d A RH Where RH Percentage relative humidity A 6 17204663 x 10 Geometric height Pressure 0 metres Bar A 4 28096024 x 10 250 1 04365 A 1 53342964 x 10 0 1 01325 A 2 40833685 x 107 250 0 983576 A 3 04249240 x 10 Ze ends A 2 65867713 x 10 1000 0 898762 1500 0 845596 2000 0 795014 Table 4 3 11 c Height versus atmospheric pressure p Psychrometric constant 0 000666 AbsP Pressure in Bar absolute not gauge Dry bulb temperature in degrees Celsius w Wet bulb temperature in degrees Celsius
563. unchanged For some slaves scale zero scale low is returned as value O and full scale scale high as value 65 535 Hex FFFF with intermediate values having proportionate val ues For example the value 15 would be represented as 32 767 7FFF for a chan nel scale 0 to 30 as would a value of 50 for a channel scaled 0 to 100 and a value of 45 for a channel scaled 30 to 60 In order to convert this reading to an understand able value a scaling factor must be entered If the low and high scale entries match the slave channel s scale the master reading will be the same as the slave s reading Selecting High Low allows Scale low and Scale high values to be entered for the selected parameter If None is selected the process value is displayed as a proportion of 65 535 DEMAND WRITES WITH AUDIT TRAIL Normal Audit Trail messages include both the new value and the previous value for example 12 07 06 11 27 58 1 Templ Alarm Number 1 Enab P amp Latched was Off With Demand Writes the recorder has no way of determining what the value of the parameter being written to was prior to the Write For this reason no was value is included in the message A typical Demand Write audit trail message would be 12 07 06 11 35 10 Write 1 wrote 255 75 Please see for more details of Audit Trail HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 166 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 19 E mails E mails can be sent by the
564. uoride lithium construction and should be disposed of according to local regulations covering this type of battery 1 Remove the screw securing the access cover to the rear of the instrument and carefully remove the cover BR2330 2 The battery can now be replaced Battery Cover retaining screw location Access cover D gure B2 2 1b Battery location small frame unit Access cover removed Figure B2 2 1a Access cover location large frame unit Ds Notes 1 Battery type is BR2330 Poly carbonmonofluoride lithium Available from the recorder manu facturer under part number PA261095 2 Dispose of exhausted batteries in accordance with local regulations regarding this battery type HA029324 User Guide Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 327 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B3 OPTION ENABLING See Upgrade in fection 4 6 3 B4 COLOUR SELECTION The following table gives RGB values and decimal and hex numbers for the available channel colours Normally this table is necessary only when communicating over the Modbus link Note Colour representation varies from screen to screen For this reason it is unlikely that the colour on a PC will match those on these pages or those on the recorder display User Guide HA029324 Page 328 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE B4 COLOUR SELECTION Cont
565. uously zero For this reason a minimum sample period of 1 second is recommended Maths Number 1 Math 1 Y Value 0 0000 Units Reset now Function Rate of change v Rate of change of 1 Channel 1 Y Sample period 0 125 S Rate Scalar 0 125 Units Units Figure 4 3 11n Rate of change configuration menu HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 115 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 11 FUNCTION Cont OXYGEN O2 CORRECTION This function carries out O correction of gas measurements for use in Continuous Emissions Monitoring applications The equation calculated is 20 9 Specified O Correction x Measured Gas 20 9 Measured O where Specified O specified oxygen entered as a constant 5 digit value prescribed for the particular process Measured O measured oxygen entered as a channel number gas analyser input See application note below Measured Gas the measured gas entered as a channel number gas analyser input APPLICATION NOTE Some Authorities allow Oxygen correction to be made ONLY if the Measured Oxygen value is above a limit specified by such Authorities For the oxygen correction function to conform with this requirement it is necessary to Filter the Meas ured Oxygen value using a High Select function with Measured Oxygen and the Specified Limit con stant as its inputs The output from this function derived channel n
566. up s to receive messages Group 4 w lV Receive Group 5 Group 6lw Apply Discard Figure 4 3 15a Serial Communications configuration menu ASCII input Port Serial 1 Y Select port Link Error Count Reset Error Count Port Serial 1 V Select port Link Error Count 0 Reset Error Count Protocol Modbus Slave M Connection Baud Rate 19200Y Select required Baud rate Stop Bits 1 V Select 1 or 2 Parity None Y Select None Odd or Even Protocol Modbus Master v Connection Baud Rate 19200Y Select required Baud rate Stop Bits 1 Y Select 1 or 2 Parity None Y Select None Odd or Even Timeout 1000 ms Enable error code B Enable Talk Through Apply 4 Discard Apply 4 Discard Figure 4 3 15b Figure 4 3 15c Serial Communications configuration menu Modbus slave Serial Communications configuration menu Modbus master HA029324 Page 140 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 15 CONNECTIONS Cont CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS SERIAL PORT Allows the user to select Serial 1 or Serial 2 port for configuration See figure 2 2 2b for port locations LINK ERROR COUNT A Link error count is provided for every slave The count is incremented every time there is a framing error a parity error or a Cyclic redundancy check CRC error The R
567. updated remotely via Bridge software 8 05 06 11 51 33 Alarms s off iN Channel 3 alarm 1 time and date 11 49 24 28 05 06 11 48 04 Time date stamp 28 05 06 8 05 06 11 47 51 Alarms s on Channel 3 alarm 1 time and date 11 46 44 28 05 06 11 45 24 28 05 06 A V 4 E uu Navigation keys Figure 3 Trend display definitions large frame unit Page 8 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 PROCESS VARIABLE DISPLAY Cont CURRENT TRACE ALARM ICONS In each ofthe different types of PV display each channel s faceplate gives the status of the channel s alarms The status of each alarm is shown by one of the icons depicted in table 3 either flashing if it is active and unacknowledged or on continuously if it is active and acknowledged See Eection 3 14 below for a description of how to acknowledge alarms Absolute alarm threshold icons and deviation alarm bars appear in any display which includes a scale except circular charts For deviation alarms the bar stretches from Reference Deviation to Reference Deviation Note Trigger alarms do not display threshold marks or bars or faceplate symbols Absolute High Absolute Low Absolute Absolute Deviation Rate of Deviation in low high In Out
568. upies totaliser 1 address and so on Totaliser 1 value is to be found atthe first address after the final maths channel Thus if there are for example 105 maths channels then Totaliser 1 is found where Totaliser 6 would normally be This in turn affects counter addressing as counter addresses immediately follow totaliser ad dresses and in the above example Counter 1 value would be found at counter 6 address HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 134 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 13 COUNTERS Cont RUN TIME DATA This table shows addresses for counter 1 Generally Counter N address counter 1 address 3 N 1 decimal COUNTER 1 Start Addr Register Hex Dec Length Value Current process value PV Scaled Read Write A47C 42108 1 Status Channel status Enum Read only A47D 42109 1 0 Good PV 5 Ranging error 1 Channel off 6 Overflow 2 Over range 7 Bad PV 3 Under range 8 No data 4 Hardware error Alarm information Uint16 Bi 0 Alarm 1 inactive 1 Alarm 1 active Read only Bi 0 No alarm 1 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bi 1 Acknowledge alarm 1 Read Write Bi Spare Bi 0 Alarm 2 inactive 1 Alarm 2 active Read only Bi 0 No Alarm 2 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bi 1 Acknowledge alarm 2 Read Write Bi Spare Bi 0 Alarm 3 inactive 1 Alarm 3 active Read only Bi 0 No alarm 3 Ack required 1 Ack required Read only Bit 10 1 Acknowl
569. ure 4 3 21e Configure RS 232 DF1 Devices menu The Who Active window opens HA029324 Page 178 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 21 ETHERNET IP OPTION Cont UPDATING FIRMWARE CAUTION Power must be maintained during the Update process which may take some tens of minutes Loss of power during update may render the PLC inoperative T M s S aa EDT ment figure 4 3 21f an click on Update Firmware 5m Cool E Workstation UK1225 In the Choose Firmware dr Linx Gateways Ethernet C PUT MENT da AB_DF1 1 DF1 Upload Revisio n wi nd ow se ect E 3 01 1769 L23E QB1 CompactLogix Processor 1769 L23E QB1 LOGIX5323E QB1 the latest versio n Cl ick on E Backplane CompactLogix L23E QB1 System j j 00 1769 L23E QB1 CompactLogix Processor gt U pdate S I9 01 1769 L23E QB1 Ethernet Port 1769 L23E QB1 Ethernet Port Update Firmware i e gy A Ethernet SE 2 Cl ick on Yes or OK as J 03 Local 1769 Bus Adapter VA1769 A appropriate to accept all nl int pprop p J 00 Local 1769 Bus Adapter VA1769 A KK i 01 Embedded IQ16F 16pt High Speed 24vdc Input the warmngs and notes J 02 Embedded OB16 16pt 24Ydc Source Output and wait for the process to complete and to be vali d ated 1 AB_DF1 141 3 When the update process is complete close the Who Active window Figure 4 3 21f Who active window COMPLETIN
570. us online I O Table Inputs V Server gt Client Input 1 Chanmelipy Input 2 Channel 2 pv Input 3 Channel 3 pv Input 4 Channel 4 pv Input 5 Channel5 pv Input 6 ls 99 pv put 200 Math 100 pv Apply Discard Wizard Default Table Show Errors Figure 4 3 21a Ethernet IP option configuration large frame unit Touching this field opens the file window allowing the user to select a uht file for im port This file may be a file previously exported using the Export table field in which case it will be found in the user folder or it may be located on a USB stick or other memory device in which case it will appear in a separate folder This allows the user to export the current table to the instrument s flash memory or to a memory stick or other memory device Exported tables may be imported into other suitable instruments or into a pc to be used as a template for creating other tables Initialising Initial status at start up Switches to Online when the Ethernet IP con figuration has been read successfully and the server has completed its configuration Online All cyclic inputs and outputs are updated continuously Offline The server ignores all transactions and tables are not updated Select Inputs Server gt Client or Outputs Client Server for the displayed ta ble Shows the first selected input output parameter which is to be
571. ve Up To Date Section 4 1 1 Archive Last Hour Archive Last Day Archive Last 7 Days Archive Last 31 days Archive All Cancel Archive Archive Transfer Inactive Figure 4 1 2 Remote archive strategy configuration Additionally a user on a remote PC has full viewing capabilities can extract recorder files at any time and can access those items of recorder configuration that are associated with the user s login For successful connection Connect from Remote must be enabled and the Remote user name and Remote pass word must be defined in one of the accounts all in the Security access menu section 4 4 1 Notes 1 In order to view history files when accessing the instrument remotely the recorder s address the Remote user name and the Remote password must be supplied to an FTP client such as PC Review or Microsoft Internet Explorer 2 When accessing files using Microsoft Internet Explorer the address URL field can be in one of two forms a ftp lt instrument IP address gt This allows the user to log in as the anonymous user if the in strument has any account with Remote user name set to Anonymous and a blank password b ftp lt user name gt lt password gt lt instrument IP address gt to log in as a specific user 3 For lE5 u
572. vent button to the User Screen Button to be displayed For Channel data only allows the type of data to be displayed e g Current value to be selected from a pick list If set to Yes this causes a solid object to be filled with the background colour If set to No the inside of the object is transparent If draw edge is also set to No the object is invisible The line colour of solid objects The bar colour of bargraphs default normal point colour The colour of Text and of numeric values Where applicable this overrides channel colour Table 7 3 1 Basic level parameters sheet 1 of 2 User Guide Page 248 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 7 3 1 BASIC PARAMETERS Cont Parameter Description Group number Height Identifier Image File Last error N Value Page Title Screen Number Show Title Bar Allows a group to be selected for group trend bargraph and numeric displays and for Dialogue action buttons Select specific group or 0 to follow current display group Height of a component measured downwards from the component s Y position Negative val ues measure upwards Component name Initially as in the Add Component list but editable by the user Allows a file name to be entered when importing GIF or JPG images A text message describing the last error to occur for this component The component must
573. ving is taking place can lead to permanent irreparable damage to the device rendering it unusable OK to remove archive media Will advise when OK to remove Cancel Figure 3 1 4i Remove archive media messages HA029324 Page 21 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 2 NAVIGATION KEYS Below the display area is a removable membrane with six printed keys as shown below which allow the user to perform various context related tasks such as to change the display mode ection 3 4 to access the to to select groups etc In addition to this left and right arrow keys or open close folder keys appear when relevant E WX E Page up Page down Left Right Option Root E E d gt Close Open Left Right folder folder cursor cursor Figure 3 2 Navigation keys 3 2 1 Key functions Page up Page down Left arrow Right arrow Option Root Used as appropriate to recall the previous higher level display page to call the previous dis play mode and to scroll through previous text entries Where relevant the function of this key is mimicked by the Close folder key Used where appropriate to call a further lower level display page to call the next display mode and to scroll through previous text entries Where relevant the function ofthis key is mimicked by the Open folder key Used a to select the previous grou
574. w opens select RS232 DEI EE Sus E e olling Master Driver devices in the Available Drive Types pull VG Carats dc down menu figure 4 3 21d DFI Slave Diver DH485 UIC devices Virtual Backplane SoftLogix58xx USB iaia Winasqa 770 KFD SDNPT drivers 3 Click on Add New and enter a suitable SLE 50 DHE Emulator diver Driver Name in the pop up window that Remote Devices via Linx Gateway then appears Click on OK The Config ure RS 232 DF1 devices window opens figure 4 3 21e For Help press F1 NUM 03 25 09 09 45 AM Figure 4 3 21d Configure drivers 4 Inthe Device field pull down menu select the rel evant device name Select the PC COM port and the relevant Baud Rate Parity etc nor Configure RS 232 DF1 Devices mally the defaults are acceptable Click on e e d Device Name AB_DF1 1 Auto Configure Comm Port COM1 Device PLC CHO i 1770 KF3 1 747 KE 5 When the Auto Configure process is com SE ee SEN i Baud Rate 19200 KFC 1 5 plete click on OK to close the Configure Deor pure Drivers window and then minimise the e EIE TER RSLinx Classic window Stop Bits 1 Protocol Full Duplex 6 Startthe RSLogix 5000 program from Start OS All programs RSLogix 5000 When the Quick Start window opens close it Use Modem Dialer 7 Atthetop of the RSLogix 5000 window click gru Bae on the Who active icon ZS or click on Who ete In the Communications drop down Fig
575. ware Use of the configuration editor is not permitted if traceability is to be maintained 3 If fitted Event buttons ection 4 3 7 are not included in the Require Signing Require Authori zation regime described above Instead each individual button can be configured to require signing or to require both signing and authorization 4 If a large number of configuration changes are made with Audit trail enabled then the number of messages produced may result in the total amount of data generated exceeding the amount that can be written to the internal FLASH memory in the time available particularly if there are a large number of points configured The recorder responds by reducing the recording speed anda message Recording failed internal overflow Slowing recording in terval of fastest group s appears to draw the user s attention to the situation Password Change on Expiry If this check box is enabled then the first time a user tries to login after his or her pass word has expired a dialogue box appears asking the user to enter a new password Only when this new password has been entered and confirmed will the user be able to access the recorder configuration Security Management Option The new password is not written to the Security Man ager until the next deploy after which the expiry period configured for the user with in Security Management is restored The interim expiry period is set to 24 hours and the
576. wo N su JUNO 10113 J9S9Y 0 1uno9 0113 yU A 8198 HOd indu IIOSV LCE uono s uodo suono uuoo A 19ISB A SNAPON 090104 ene s SNAPON pieosiq H Add ybnoJy 1 yle 1 lqeua g poo 10418 lqeu3 au 9001 jnoowiy A 9UON ed Al sug dois ao0z6L y pneg Azezvig uonoeuuoo junoo 10113 Jose 0 juno9 10113 xur1 A LIeues uod Ja se snqpolN pieosiq H Add S ABIS IV 199190 pieosiq Addy xxx PIOMSSE Y A 9UON ed eujeuJesf sueujasn AL sue dois 100261 eyed pneg azeevia uonoeuuo A ag snqpow 0901014 JUNO 10413 19S9Y 0 uno9 10113 AUN A LIeues uod A peuinbeg ulbo7 Z 1ex90g ays JeisiBou GU 9ZIS x9o g XEN Anen su OG MOSWwIL A Yed piy elJoJd BARS SIUL 38A sseuppe snapo DOE lel 6tL sselppy dl A SUSUR AJOMION Tajoway Joiduoseq SWUOD 1 1SEW 91 y uolo s Suono uuoo uondo SWILUOD J9ISEIN m Saul el y uollo S uondo si junoo sjajuno9 wajs s X10M9N yunoas Syuoo esorsay anes SA ydy A SUnuO A 91qeuy AL ajoway SMIS sonsouBeip 91018 Z emau Ajuoud moq T nt Ayoud uiip W 0 Spuooes Spuooes SpuoosS GZL temau uoud YBIH Page 55 HA029324 Issue 5
577. y disk drive Keyboard Bar code reader Mouse memory stick Note The recorder meets the industrial EMC requirements of BS EN61326 Typically USB pe ripherals are tested to domestic information technology standards BS EN55022 with category C performance Some USB peripherals designed for use in domestic or office environments can be susceptible to lock up in environments containing high electromagnetic field strengths In order to recover from such lock up situations the peripheral must be disconnected and then recon nected Recorder operation is not affected Other items Virus susceptibility The 6000 series VxWorks operating system is immune to viruses targeted at Windows based operating systems As at July 2006 there are no known viruses that target VxWorks Calibration coefficients Instrument configuration is held in FLASH memory and has no effect on calibration coefficients User Guide HA029324 Page 320 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE ANNEX B REFERENCE B1 DIAGNOSTICS DISPLAY B1 1 MAIN DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY At power up continuously hold a finger in contact with the screen until the main diagnostic display ap pears as shown in figure B1 1 Special Modes Display Test Touch Calibration System Summary Diag Summary Quit Figure B1 1b Top level diagnostic display HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 User Guide Page 321 100 180 MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECOR
578. yng wajs s 340M9N puinoas Puuoo sxoiseusanes SMUYIIY HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 Page 54 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 4 3 CONFIG KEY Cont pieosiq fj Ajddy A uonoy on 10891e5 A 1 Jequinn gor spuos9g ojjeye1eedeu spuoo s 09 uoneing Akuy puoses peed A Kuy lnu 8A si Wes js y uo 4 jA 1IUBIUPIN INOW 1eedde spjay eseu T yuon AKuy leq A HEIS Jas seu ioldiu9s q MOU eS pajesado u q seu iddy jeye Aug 1eedde suoyng s yL MOU Joo 00 00 00 u yeedey 00 00 00 Bulurewoy A lqeua A eu L 1equinu saw pieosiq H Add A uonoy on 10Beje5 Ai 16quinN gor 0 eiqeu43 AL Jequiny uue v Bolo a suon ed ejeos 001 yBIH euoz o M01 auoz u6iH ejeos M07 a e9s Bulyoims g v sajuno9 1o1diu9s q shun shun ele MOU 8S8Jd spun o 19sald suun spun spun 3do en eA A 8Iqeua3 Ti 1ajuno9 i jequinu Jajunoo vl e py uollo s SJOWIL SYS MIIAJBAO NUSW uoneinBijuoo dev e1nBiJ pueosiq Addy 9 dnog S dnog y dnoiy g dnog z dnog dnog Jey9 pug puo5o s Jeu pug 18 14 1642 Hes puooeg 182 HIS 1SJI4 jnoeuij ae sug ea ASUON led Al sug dois 00261 eyed pneg laxxevia uono uuoo A ndu OSY 10901014 l gt D gt o e o
579. ype above Alarm 4 setpoint Trigger setpoint see note Spare Scaled Scaled Scaled Scaled Enum Uint16 Enum String 5 String 8 String 8 String 20 Uint16 Enum Note A B Switching B values are not accessible via modbus for this software version Span Zone Colour etc are therefore all setting A Start Addr Register Hex Dec Length Read only DD 36573 Read only DE 36574 Read only DF 36575 Read only EO 36576 Read only E1 36577 Access Read only 8EE2 36578 Read only 8E Read only 8E 8b Read only 8EE 8EED 36589 Read only 8EF1 36593 8EF5 36597 Read only 8EF9 36601 8F03 36611 Read only 8FOD 36621 Read only 8FOE 36622 SP P N GQ OS oo 8FOF 36623 Read only 8F4B 36683 Read only 8F4C 36684 Read Write 8F4D 36685 8F4E 36686 Read only 8F58 36696 Read only 8F59 36697 Read Write 8F5A 36698 8F5B 36699 Read only 8F65 36709 Read only 8F66 36710 Read Write 8F67 36711 8F68 36712 Read only 8F72 36722 Read only 8F73 36723 Read Write 8F74 36724 8F75 36725 Notes 1 If an alarm s Setpoint Source ection 4 3 3 is set to anything other than Constant the value returned will be the previously configured constant value 2 If more than 100 Maths channels are configured in Virtual channels then the extra channels occupy totaliser address space such that maths channel 101 occ
580. zed Engineer Belt Failure 04 04 06 16 29 33 Alarm s Ackd 1 1 2 1 04 04 06 16 28 05 Ack all alarms Signed Engineer Authorized Engineer Belt Failure 04 04 06 16 27 13 Alarm s on1 1 04 04 06 16 27 13 Alarm s on2 1 04 04 06 14 06 22 Config Revision 682759 Security Revision 746261 v Lo 4104100 44 02 00 Datak atar LE zit Figure 3 1 49 Message log page showing message type picklist Page 18 HA029324 Issue 5 Oct 10 100 180MM DISTRIBUTED GRAPHIC RECORDER USER GUIDE 3 1 4 SUMMARY MENU Cont MESSAGE LOG Cont MESSAGE TYPE FILTER All Messages All messages are displayed System Alarms Power Up General Batches Logins Signings Audit trail Reports Only System messages and instrument alarms are listed Only alarm on off and acknowledgement messages appear Displays power up messages only including Config Revision and Security revision See About section 4 6 9 for more details Displays e mails messages sent via Modbus operator notes custom messages etc ifthey do not have to be signed Auditor option 21CFR11 only see fection 4 4 for more details If the notes etc are signed they appear in the Signings message type list Displays only batch messages including Config and Security Revisions if either Auditor option is enabled Lists only changes in login This list contains only notes messages etc that have been signed and authorize

User Guide - The Online Instrumentation Company

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents